T300 Eng

Online help
ToPs 300
Use the functions of Acrobat Readers to look for a word.
Instructions for Acrobat Reader
The "Find" function" corresponds to the binocular in der icon

bar.
"Find next" can be activated with the F3 key.
Online help
You can find the "Find" function under Edit in the 4.0 version of
Acrobat Reader.
You can use the cursor keys in the icon bar alongside the
bookmark for the navigation of the document.
Ordering information
Please state the title of the document, the language required

and the date of issue.
TRUMPF GmbH + Co.

D-71254 Ditzingen
Johann-Maus-Strae 2
Telephone (07156)303-0
Fax (07156)303-309, Telex 7245201
Internet: http://www.trumpf.com
E-mail: help@trumpf.com
This document was drawn up in the Technical Documentation of TRUMPF GmbH + Co.
All rights to this documentation, especially the rights of reproduction and distribution
as well as that of translation are retained by TRUMPF GmbH + Co., even in the case
of notifications of protective privilege. Without previous written consent of TRUMPF
GmbH + Co., no part of the documentation, no matter in which form, may be
reproduced or processed, copied or distributed using electronic systems. We reserve
the right to make technical alterations and accept no liability for errors.
TRUMPF GmbH + Co.
TRUMPF GmbH + Co. accepts no liability for any errors arising in this
documentation. Liability for direct and indirect damage or injury, resulting from the
delivery or use of this documentation is excluded, in so far as this is legally
admissible.
Before reading any further ...

ToPs 300
ToPs 300 is a programming system which has been conceived for

punching and combined machines. These machines can punch,
nibble, and form as well as carry out combined punching and laser
processing.
ToPs:
Manual
Contents
Technologyorientated
Programming
system
The manual should explain operation of the ToPs 300 programming system and also serve as a reference work.
Chapters 1 and 2: Overview of the whole system and its operation.

Chapters 3 to 7 describe the functions of the individual modules.
One module will be explained per chapter. In particular:
Chapter 3: DRAWING module
Chapter 4: NEST module
Chapter 5: TECHNOLOGY module
Chapter 6: DATA module
Chapter 7: INFO module
Chapter 8 describes the automation components and their configuration for the DATA and TECHNOLOGY modules.
Complementary
Documentation
Further information can be found in the documentation which you

received with your machine:
Conventions
S354E0.DOC
Operators manual
Programming manual
Data collection
Certain formats and terms are used throughout this manuals text.
Familiarize yourself with the "Explanation of format" and the
"Explanations on terminology" (see following pages) in order to
avoid misunderstandings.
Before reading any further...
0-5
Explanation of format
Buttons
Button symbols are represented as capitals and are always in

pointed brackets.
Example <SHIFT>
Screen menus
Functions from the screen menus are highlighted by capitalisation.

Example: Select the function LINE, PARALLEL from the CREATE
control function menu.
Main menu bar
Functions from the main menu bar are written in bold capitals.
Example Select the function FILE, LOAD.
Function buttons
System requirements
Files
Directories
Variables
Terms in masks
0-6
Contents
Function buttons are highlighted by capitalisation.

Example Select OK.
System requirements and entries which the system expects are

indicated by a different font.
Example Zoom factor? 0.5
Files and directories are written in single quotes.

Example c:\trumpf\users\gtest
Variable descriptions and values are shown in brackets.

Example (name to be input).geo
Reference to input fields and mask titles are indicated by double

inverted commas.
Example Enter "Part name".
S354E0.DOC
1.
The concept
ToPs 300 a Technology orientated Programming System, for

complete punch machining as well as for complete combined
machining.
With ToPs, TRUMPF gives you the complete sheet processing
know-how. ToPs is modular and thus comprehensible in construction. ToPs takes the specific possibilities of your machine into
account in every phase of programming and guarantees the
process-safe creation of a finished NC program and its data
transfer.
ToPs is an open system which ensures a close connection to the
design work.
Closed process chain, sheet
ToPs is the connecting element between the construction and

manufacturing areas.
Programming is technology orientated and via a unified data

base (laser tables, processing rules, machine data, tool data,
material data, NC components), which ToPs accesses.
1-2
Construction takes manufacturing interests into account.
The entire machine technology is used in manufacturing.
Introduction to ToPs 300
S354E11.DOC
Construction
2D/3D-CADSystems
IGES 2D
+3D,
STEP, STL
IGES, MI,
DXF
Programming
ToPs 300
Punching and
combined
machining
NC program
SolidDesigner/
SheetAdvisor
3D-CAD-System
for sheet
processing
MI,
Developed view
Developed view
2D
GEO
ToPs 600
bending
technology
NC program
Production
TC 260L
TC 600L
TC 500R
TC 2000R
Platform
S354E11.DOC
TrumaBend
ToPs 300 can run on a PC with a Windows 95 or Windows NT

system.
1-3
Machines and components supported

Machine
Control system
Automated
Explanations
(Machine software)
TC 120R
Bosch CC 220
TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1000 all automation components
TC 160R
Bosch CC 220
TC 190R
Bosch CC 220
TC 200R
Bosch CC 220
TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 200
all automation components
TC 180 K/W
Bosch M5TC
only Bosch M5TC, without: laser, thread,

Multitool, Swift
TC 180.2 K/W
Bosch M5TC
only Bosch M5TC, without: laser, thread,

Multitool, Swift
TC180 K/W
Fanuc 6MB
only rotation, without: Laser, thread,

Multitool
TC180 K/W
Sinumerik 8N
only non-rotation, working
TC 235
Bosch CC 200
TC 235
Sinumerik 3 N
TC 240
Bosch CC 200 (T19)
TC 240
Bosch CC 200 (>= T21)
TC 240L
Bosch CC 200 (< T23)
TC 240L
Bosch CC 200 (>= T23)
TC 240R
Bosch CC 300
TC 260
TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 no lifts B, E, C

+ TRUMALIFT SC, SE, SB
TC 260
Bosch CC 300 (>= T23)

TC 260L

TC 260L
Bosch CC 300 (>= T23)

TC 500R
Bosch CC 220
TRUMALIFT SheetMaster
1000, 1250, 1300, 1600
TC 600L
Sinumerik 840 D
1306, 1606
TC 2000 R
Bosch Type 3
Machines with plasma devices are not supported by ToPs 300.
1-4
S354E11.DOC
2.
Modular Construction
Brief description of the modules
ToPs has a modular design: The various functional groups of ToPs

have been allotted to different software modules. The modules are
reflected in the initial screen which appears when ToPs is started.
Initial screen
Fig. 18331
DRAWING module
In the DRAWING module you create the drawing of a single part,
i.e. you draw the geometrical shape of the single part. The drawing
of a single part is the basis for all subsequent work such as the
positioning of the sheet, definition of the processing or creation of
the NC program. These procedures are carried out in the
TECHNOLOGY module.
S354E11.DOC
1-5
NEST module
In the NEST module, the tasks are determined and the parts nested
as single parts or mini nests. Two nesting processors are available
for this. Choose the appropriate nest processor according to the
part geometry: The extended rectangle nest processor and the free
geometry nest processor.
TECHNOLOGY module
The TECHNOLOGY module is the core of the programming
system. Here the sheet layout is determined, processing defined
and the NC program generated. The basis for these work steps is
the single part drawing. You create the drawing of a single part in
the DRAWING module.
ToPs automatically generates the NC program. To do this, it refers
to NC components stored in the data base. You can simulate
processing of a sheet on the screen.
ToPs also creates a processing plan containing all information
relevant to machining.
The NC program, the processing plan and the screen display of the
sheet can be printed out if your PC is connected to a printer or a
plotter.
1-6
S354E11.DOC
DATA module
In this module, data from TRUMPF is made available to you in
the form of a database which the system uses in the various
programming phases.
The database contains various data depending upon the machine:
Machine data, material data, tool data, laser data, NC modules,
machining rules, system data and other data.
You can view and manage some data in this module using masks.
INFO module
The four index cards enable you to
interrogate the software and

data base version,
change the language setting and
delete files
Ending ToPs
Selecting this button opens the door to leave the ToPs 300
programming system.
S354E11.DOC
1-7
3.
DATA
module
Overview of programming sequence
Precondition:
In the DATA module, the machine data must be set correctly
according to your machine and possible options should be
activated. Check the available settings.
Also check whether the tool sets used on the machine are defined
in the ToPs database. If there are deviations, then input the correct
tool data and save the changes.
In the DATA and TECHNOLOGY modules, masks support these
actions.
see: TECHNOLOGY module, tool management
see: DATA module description.
As a rule, configuration of your machine has to be carried out only
once.
Afterwards you will mainly use only the DRAWING, NEST and
TECHNOLOGY modules.
With ToPs 300, there are only a few steps from drawing the
component part up to creation of the NC program.
Procedure:
DRAWING
Module
NEST
module
1-8
In the DRAWING module:

1. Create drawings of single parts or read in a drawing from
another source and process it.
In the NEST module:

2. Define job
3. Nest parts and mini nests of a defined job.
S354E11.DOC
TECHNOLOGY
module
In the TECHNOLOGY module, several procedures are possible.

The following three varieties describe possible examples.
Select that variant suitable to your job or define your own
procedure.
Variant 1
Variant 2
Variant 3:
Load part or sheet without

processing
Load part or sheet with

processing
Load part or sheet with or

without processing
4. Load single parts without

processing or nested
sheets without processing.
4. Load single parts with

processing or nested
sheets with processing.
4. Load single parts or

nested sheets with or
without processing.
5. Create processing of
single parts or of nested
sheets.
5. Change processing of
single parts or of nested
sheets.
5. Create or change processing of single parts or

of the nested sheet.
6. If single parts are loaded:

Specify the sheet layout as
simple or specific
versatility.
6. Change the sheet layout as

simple or sectional multcopy machining.
6. Specify or change the

sheet layout as simple or
specific versatility.
7. Optimize sheet processing.
7. Optimize sheet processing.
8. Simulate sheet processing

and check it.

and check it.
9. Generate NC program.
7. Optimizing sheet
processing.
and check it.
Result:
S354E11.DOC
The created NC program can now be made ready for part

production, e.g. copied or transferred to the appropriate directory
via FILE, TRANSFER.
1-9
1.
Operating ToPs with a mouse and

keyboard
You are provided with a keyboard with a mouse pointer (cursor) to

select functions and enter data. The calculator is displayed for
entering numerical values and coordinates if you double click on
the entry field.
1.1
Appearances
Mouse pointer (cursor)
The appearance of the mouse pointer on the screen varies.

Arrow: Select menu functions and function buttons.
Position the mouse pointer on the desired function.

Press the left mouse button briefly.
The selected function is executed.
Cross: The mouse pointer is displayed as a cross in the drawing

window.To select geometric elements or any random point, first
position the cursor and click the left mouse button.
Clock: This symbol means: "Please wait". The system is carrying
out computations during this time. Activation of functions or
selection of geometry elements using the mouse is not possible at
the moment.
Text cursor: Within a mask, the mouse pointer is depicted as a text
cursor. To enter data:
Left mouse button
2-2
Operating ToPs 300
Click the entry field. The text cursor appears.

Move the cursor to the exact position where the entries will be
made.
Press the left mouse button.
Enter the data using the keyboard.
The left mouse button can only be used for selecting and clicking
on a position or function.
S354E21.DOC
Right mouse button:

Preview window for drawing
geometry
A preview window is integrated into the file selection masks. The

drawing for the selected file is displayed by clicking the file with the
right mouse button or by activating the "Preview" check button (and
clicking the file with the left mouse button). The parts size will
appear underneath the drawing. The current coordinates will be
displayed when you move the mouse pointer inside the preview
window.
Right mouse button:
Preview window for tool and part geometry for nesting.

You have a tool list activated. Right click on the tool data block.
The system shows you the tool geometry for the selected tool.
Right click in the order list in NEST mode. The part geometry will
be displayed.
Zooming in the graphics

screen using the right
mouse button
Clicking on a point in the graphics screen will enlarge the screen

section around the point three times. Select the TOTAL option to
display the contents of the drawing window in the original size
again.
1.2
Keyboard
Enter text and numerals using the keyboard.

Entering numerical values
Numerical values are entered in the input line or in masks.

Example:
Decimal entries:
30.5
Coordinate entries:
10,20.5
Text entries in masks
The text cursor (vertical line) must be positioned in the entry field
(click with the mouse) before any characters can be entered in the
mask. The character entered appears to the left of the text cursor.
The text cursor is moved to the next entry field by pressing the
<RETURN> button. Display fields (which are those without text
lines) are automatically skipped.
S354E21.DOC
Operating ToPs 300
2-3
Entering commands and

actions
Commands and actions are entered using function and special

keys:
Key
<RETURN>
Confirm entry and jump to the next entry field.
<TAB>
In masks: Jump to the next entry field.
<BACKSPACE>
To delete the character preceding the cursor
<Direction keys>
In masks: Select data block.
<ESC>
Using F-keys as hotkeys
Function
In masks: Delete characters in the entry field.
Menus and functions can also be called up using the keyboard.

The following keys are used:
Key
<F key>
<CNTR>+<F key>
<Direction keys>
<RETURN>
Repeating entries and

functions
Function
Select function (hotkey)
Select function (hotkey)
Select
Confirm selection
You need not always repeat the same inputs and functions again
and again. Use the keyboard buffer instead. Functions executed in
the background or inputs in the command line while working with
the graphic screen are saved.
Procedure
2-4
Operating ToPs 300
Click on the command line with the mouse pointer if it is not

positioned there. Then scroll through the keyboard buffer using
the cursor keys (<cursor down>, <cursor up>) until the desired
command or entry appears.
Press <RETURN> to confirm.
The command or entry will be repeated.
S354E21.DOC
1.3
The calculator
The calculator is displayed for entering numerical values and

coordinates.
By using the calculator, you can carry out calculations and
simultaneously enter the result as a number.
Entry field
You can select the calculator by double clicking in any entry field
for numbers.
Simply enter the value in the entry field or calculate a value.
Entry field Selecting the calculator
Command line
Fig. 20085
Click on the command line several times for entries of numbers or

coordinates which you must enter in the command line.
Command line Selecting the calculator
Fig. 20086
Here, the calculator is displayed with an expanded entry area for

coordinates. Enter the values for the X and Y coordinates at the
top of the entry field. When the function button X or Y is
pressed, the value is adopted as a coordinate in the appropriate
field.
S354E21.DOC
Operating ToPs 300
2-5
Configuring the calculator
You can select whether you wish to work with the calculator or
whether it should not be displayed during operation of ToPs.
Procedure:
Select the INI file for ToPS 300.

Change the values for the following variables from 1 to 0:
Value 1= calculator can be selected with the mouse
Value 0= calculator can not be selected with the mouse.
Excerpt from the Tops300.ini file:
;; -----------------------------------;;activates number entry using the mouse
ST_NumInputWithMouse = 1
2-6
Operating ToPs 300
S354E21.DOC
2.
User interface
2.1
Initial screen
The modular design of ToPs 300 is reflected in the initial screen.

This is the centre from which each module can be called up.
Initial screen: central position in ToPs 300
Initial screen in ToPs
Fig. 18331
Select the function button whose module you wish to open. The
modules user interface is set-up. You can now select the
corresponding functions: Depending upon the selected module, a
graphic screen or a mask screen is offered to you as the user
interface.
Closing the module
You should first quit the selected module via the FILE, CLOSE
function in order to move to the initial screen. You can now call up
a different module.
Changing between the individual modules is possible only
via the initial screen. Direct switching is not possible.
S354E21.DOC
Operating ToPs 300
2-7
2.2
Graphic display
The screen appears as a graphic screen when graphic

representations are necessary. This is the case for example in the
DRAWING module when creating a single part drawing. The
assigned sheets with machining are represented as a drawing also
for the machining definition and simulation.
Mask header
Screen menu
with
Main menu bar

Information and
selection bar
Control field
Working area
of the graphics
screen
Menu field
Maskenfu
fixed functions
Example Graphics screen in the TECHNOLOGY module
Mask header
All general information, e.g. the product name on the left and some
WINDOWS functions to the right, can be found in the mask header.
TRUMPF logo
with functions
To move ToPs to the

Windows start-bar
Product name
Operating ToPs 300
Quit ToPs
No function is assigned
to this button
Mask header
2-8
Fig. 19831
Fig. 19337
S354E21.DOC
Main menu bar, info

and selection bar
Main menu bar

The main functions of the active module are displayed in the main
menu bar. The subfunctions to these main functions appear as
pull-down menus. Select the main function with the mouse so that
the subfunctions become visible.
Call up online
documentation
Main menu bar
Pull-down
menus with
information and
selection
possibilities
Active
machine
Active
material
Active
tool
Activate
used tool
TRUMPF
logo
Fig. 19338
TRUMPF logo
Information regarding the software version appears by clicking on
the logo.
Information and selection bar

Three display fields represented by windows are located below the
main menu bar and are opened as pull-down menus. A selection
box or a selection window is opened if you select an arrow
(symbol), or if you click directly in the display field. The selected
data appears in the display fields and remains as active
information during a ToPs session.
The contents of the three fields depend upon the current module
and the current settings. The "previous file", "drawing color" (line
color) and "solid" (line type) information are displayed in the
DRAWING module.
S354E21.DOC
Operating ToPs 300
2-9
Two different symbol switch surfaces which are independent from

each other are located in the right area of the mask header:
Question mark: This function is not yet supported in this version of
ToPs.
In the future, the online help will be activated by clicking this button.
The punching tool operating surface: an icon for rapid activation of
a tool that is already being used.
Working area
Mask footer
The information in the graphics mask Working area is represented

as a drawing: single piece and sheet drawing, processing in the
form of tool geometry. In addition, the machines environment i.e.
working area and overrun area, as well as transverse rails with
positions for tool and clamps are also displayed.
The mask footer is subdivided into four lines:
Status line with icon bar

Command line
Entry line
Message line
Variable
icon buttons
Status line
Command line
Input line
Message line
Fixed icon buttons
Example Mask footer in the DRAWING module
Fig. 19339
Status line with icon bar

Status line The current cursor position (coordinates) is displayed.
Divided icon bar: The left part of the icon bar can take different
forms: The number and content of the displayed icons depends
upon the selected module. The right section of the icon bar always
contains the same symbols (= fixed icons), regardless of which
module is open.
2-10
Operating ToPs 300
S354E21.DOC
What is hidden behind the symbol switch surfaces (icons)?

Icons with text labels
Move the mouse (arrow) to one of the icons without clicking with
the mouse. An icons caption appears. Have you found the function
TOTAL?
The following functions are covered by the fixed icon buttons:
Symbol
Function
TOTAL function.
Displays entire drawing in the masks working
area.
DETAIL function.
Displays a detailed view of the drawing in the
mask working area. You should frame the area
you wish to view in detail, in a box. The marking
box is a rectangle.
Click on the first point of the rectangle.
Click on the second opposite point.
OFFSET function.
Moves the drawing in the working area of the
mask. Click on the reference point and the
target point.
ZOOM function
Changing the display in the working area:
Enlarging or reducing the drawing.
Procedure: Input a factor and confirm your input
with <RETURN>. Examples:
To reduce the display by half: Input 0.5.
To enlarge the display by a factor of 2: Enter 2.
PREVIOUS ZOOM function.
Restores previous representation size of the
drawing.
DRAW function
The drawing window is restored.
S354E21.DOC
Operating ToPs 300
2-11
In addition, further variable icon surfaces appear in the footer and

vary with the selected module.
DRAWING module
Symbol
Function
OPEN CONTOUR POINTS function.
Makes all open points within a drawing appear
or disappear.
DISPLAY POINTS function.
Makes contour points appear or disappear.
A drawing contains various contour points
which are represented in different colors when
this function is selected:
Cross, red: Start and end point of a contour.
Green square: Contour linking points.
Cyan cross: Centre point of circles or partial
circles.
TECHNOLOGY module
Symbol
Function
DISPLAY POINTS function.
Makes contour points appear or disappear.
A drawing contains various contour points
which are represented in different colors when
this function is selected:
Red cross:Start and end point of a contour.
Green square: Contour linking points.
Cyan cross: Centre point of circles or partial
circles.
GEOMETRY function.
To make geometry of single parts/initial blank
appear or disappear.
OPERATIONS function.
To make all operations in the current display
appear or disappear.
2-12
Operating ToPs 300
S354E21.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module (continuation)

Symbol
Function
SYMBOL function.
To select or deselect symbolic display of the
single parts.
Single parts are represented symbolically on
the sheet as a circumscribed rectangle.
POSITIONING.
To make only positioning motions in the current
display appear or disappear.
ACTIVE TOOL ONLY function.

To make only active tool appear / disappear in
the display.
Command line
You should keep this line in view: The system issues instructions in
this line which explain procedures to you.
Input line
Data which you input via the keyboard appears in the input line.
Message line
The ToPs working method is transparent. The system information
appears in the message line. This information is as follows:
Information on current operations in ToPs.
Information about the successful or unsuccessful completion
of an arithmetical operation.
S354E21.DOC
Operating ToPs 300
2-13
Screen menu:
6FUHHQ PHQX GLYLVLRQ

DUHDV
The screen menu in the graphic screen can be subdivided into:

Control field
Menu field
Fixed functions
'HVFULSWLRQ RI LQGLYLGXDO
VFUHHQ PHQX DUHDV
Control field
with
control functions
Select your procedure with pull-down

menus and control functions. It depends
upon the control function as to which
functions you receive in the menu field.
Menu field
with variable
menu functions
Content and number of functions is

variable. According to which module you
are in and which control function you
have selected.
Fixed functions
You always find these four functions at

this location
Example Screen menu in the TECHNOLOGY menu
2-14
Operating ToPs 300
Fig. 19340
S354E21.DOC
Graphics screen: Operation sequence

The design of the user interface allows quick, convenient
programming: Functions which can be selected are readable, and
inactive functions have a gray background. They cannot be
selected. This type of display is self explanatory and follows you
wherever you go in the programming system.
The general recommendation: Work within the module in the main

menu bar from left to right and within the screen menu from top to
bottom. The function buttons marked in green and the standard
settings help you to achieve secure programming results.
Example: Graphics screen in the TECHNOLOGY module
Select file
Nesting
the sheet
Process individual
part or sheet
Optimize
processing
Generate
NC-program
Select
technology:
Punch or laser
processing
How to define?
automatic or
manual
Start action:
Select control
function;
Check settings,
select menu
functions
Procedure during operation
S354E21.DOC
Fig. 18616
Operating ToPs 300
2-15
2.3
Mask display
A mask screen is displayed when data or settings can be selected.
Heading
Working range in
the mask screen
Mask footer
Example Mask screen
Fig. 18337
Heading
Working area
As a rule, the working range consists of index cards which you

select by clicking on the index card heading.
Mask footer
2-16
The heading always indicates where you are within the programming system.
In general, the mask footer contains the OK and CANCEL function

buttons. You will always find these buttons in the same place.
Operating ToPs 300
S354E21.DOC
2.4
Operating devices
General rule:
ToPs 300 can usually be operated both with the mouse and with
the keyboard. Exceptions prove the rule: check boxes, buttons with
color identification or data blocks in selection fields can only be
selected with the mouse.
All fields and buttons which can be read are applicable for the
active mask. Functions which cannot be selected have a gray
background or are shown hatched.
Pull-down menu
You will find pull-down menus in places where e.g. several

functions can be selected: within the mask and in the screen menu.
Radio button
Buttons with color identification, also called "Radio buttons", enable

you to select an individual possibility. Each radio button excludes
the others.
Example of button with colour identification
Check button
Check boxes are also called "check buttons". You can select
several of the possibilities on offer with these buttons. The field
which you click on is provided with a cross. The option is thus
selected.
Example of a check button
S354E21.DOC
Fig. 18589
Fig. 18588
Operating ToPs 300
2-17
Selection window
As before, many data records are available for selection in the form
of selection windows with the possibility of scrolling.
Example
Selection window: Select punching tools
Index cards
Fig. 19553
When the system offers various possibilities to start certain actions,

e.g. to carry out the optimization process, then the possibilities are
not offered as function buttons but as index cards. A mask within
which you can determine the frame requirements, or select data
from selection window formats, is opened by selecting an index
card.
Index card principle:
Fig. 19343
There are several selection possibilities in the form of index cards
2-18
Operating ToPs 300
S354E21.DOC
2.5
Standard masks
Standard masks are masks which occur at different points in the

programming system, but which are principally set up in the same
way. ToPs 300 recognises the following types of standard masks:
Data manager (file selection mask) and part manager in the

form of index cards which can be selected.
The confirmation and message masks as sub-masks which

can be displayed.
Data manager: Load files

Files are always loaded in the same manner. ToPs helps you to
carry out these procedures via a mask: Enter the path (directory)
and name of the file which is to be loaded. The easier procedure is
to select the desired file in the selection window. This will save you
having to type everything in.
The file name which was last input or selected is always displayed
with the accompanying path specifications.
File selection mask
Fig. 19344
Path specification
"Search in:" In which directory the system should look for files.
Input the complete path or select a path. All "Previous directories"
which you have already selected once are shown by pressing the
"" (arrow) button.
Select the function button with the symbol "*" (asteriks) to jump
back a directory level.
S354E21.DOC
Operating ToPs 300
2-19
File formats
The radio buttons (buttons with color identification) show you which
file formats can be selected. You can also control the display in the
left of the selection window via the file format. Example: "*.GEO"
button activated. All files with the extension GEO available in the
current directory will be shown in the selection window. With the
function button * (symbol: asterisk), you can change the directory.
You return to a previous directory level.
The switches which have a gray background cannot currently be
selected.
Preview window
Select the "Preview" check box.
The drawings for the affiliated file are displayed in the preview
window. In this way you can check whether you have also selected
the desired drawing.
The dimensions of the part are displayed below. The coordinate
details change as soon as you move the mouse within the preview
window.
If you wish to view the geometry of a file only occasionally, then
deactivate the "Preview" control field and click directly on the file
names in the selection window with the right mouse button. The
geometry is displayed in the preview window only for this particular
occasion.
File name with path specification

The name of the selected file is automatically input and displayed
below the selection window as soon as you have clicked on the
file.
Using the function buttons

OK
Cancel
Confirms input.
Cancels selection procedure.
Symbols in the selection window

In the selection window, directory names are indicated with "*"
(symbol: asterisk) and file names are indicated with "-" (symbol:
dash). Example:
- 6378.GEO file name
* USER_JO2 Directory
Limit values
A maximum of 200 data records can be displayed in the selection box.
2-20
Operating ToPs 300
S354E21.DOC
Changing directories
In order to change to another directory in the selection window,
select the * (asterisk) symbol above the window scrolling bar.
Wildcards
Wildcards serve as place holders in a file name, standing for a
certain number of characters or a string of characters.
Please note: It is important to have selected the appropriate radio
button for the desired file format. Example: If you wish to use the
*.GEO file format with wild cards, but the radio button for the *.TMT
file format is selected, you will always be shown files with the TMT
extension.
Application:
Use wildcards to reduce the number of files in the selection box.
Proceed as follows:
Enter the file name, with wildcards, in input field "File name" in
the initial mask.
Select OK. The files are offered in the file selection mask
window. The selection criterion, incl. path name, also appears
in the first line of the mask.
The following wildcards may be used:

?
Question mark: Replaces any character. Example:
*test?.geo
replaces e.g.
test1.geo
test2.geo
testa.geo
Asterisk: Replaces any string of characters. Example:
*.geo
replaces e.g.
test1.geo
test2.geo
tresta.geo
Wildcards can be combined. Example:

*test?.geo
replaces e.g.
1test1.geo
P1testx.geo
S354E21.DOC
Operating ToPs 300
2-21
Part management
File
Load
The "Part management" index card allows you to mange your

files in the database; i.e. to load or delete files.
You are shown the masks in each module whenever you select the
function FILE, LOAD. "Part management" is offered as a second
index card in addition to the standard mask "Data manager".
The following masks help you in part management:
Part management in ToPs
Import files
Fig. 19917
Precondition:
You must first import the files to the database to be able to manage
files in the database.
Procedure:
IMPORT function
Start import procedure.
Select the IMPORT function.

The file selection mask is opened. Select which files you wish to
import using the file extensions. Click on the appropriate file.
Confirm your choice with OK.
In the subsequent mask, you will be asked whether you wish to
import all files with this extension.
YES: All of the files in the selection window are added to
the database.
NO: Only the selected file is added to the database.
The imported files are displayed in the selection window.
2-22
Operating ToPs 300
S354E21.DOC
File display
Note: Only those files which have the extension of the activated
radio button are displayed.
Proceed in the same way for all file types which you wish to import
to the database.
Part management tasks
Sort or search for files
After files have been imported, you can carry out the following
activities:
Sort or search for files.
View file information.
Carry out file management.
Procedure:
Specify criteria for file selection by clicking the appropriate check
buttons. The corresponding entry field is activated. Enter the
search criterion or select a property with the > (arrow) icon:
"File name"
"Drawing number"
"Drawing name"
"Processed by"
"Customer name"
"Machine"
"Material"
These criteria can already be stored as properties as part of
drawing creation.
Drawing number as search criterion
S354E21.DOC
Fig. 19918
Operating ToPs 300
2-23
Input rules
The percent sign (%) is interpreted as a placeholder. The number

and date specification is the default setting for the maximum entry
possibility.
Year specification: Year (four digit), month (two digit), day
(two digit). Example: December 9th, 1998 is entered as follows
19981209.
UPDATE function
Update the display in the selection window of the index card

"Part management".
The display is updated according to the criteria after they have
been entered. Only those files which fulfill the criteria are
displayed.
Call up information on part

FULL INFO function
View complete information on part.
Procedure
First select the file in the selection window whose information

you would like to view.
Click on the FULL INFO function.
The following mask appears:
Display of the complete part information
Fig. 19919E
In addition to the information which you already know about from

part management mask, this mask contains further information on:
2-24
Operating ToPs 300
"Table": Laser table number

"Rule group": Number of the rule group
S354E21.DOC
"Creation date from to:": Entry of the time period when the file
was created.
"Last change from to:": Entry of the time period when a
change was made. "Order": Order in which the part was used.
"Area": Area of the part.
"Length": Length of the part.
"Width": Width of the part.
"File name": Name of the file.
At the right of the mask, you can find information on:
S354E21.DOC
"Mini-nest": Does a mini nest exist for this individual part

drawing?
"Rotatable": Can this individual part be rotated during sheet
nesting?
"Rolling direction" means that the rolling direction of the sheet
must be taken into account during sheet nesting.
"Dimension system": In which dimension system was the
drawing created?
OK function: You leave the mask and return to the previous
mask.
Operating ToPs 300
2-25
Managing parts
PART MANAGEMENT
function
Part management means deleting files from the database and the
hard disk using a mask.
The following masks help you in this activity:
"Part management" mask
Fig. 19920
You specify whence you would like to delete the file from in the
"Mode" area:
2-26
Operating ToPs 300
"Delete files from DB only": The files are deleted from the
database but not from the directory on the hard disk.
"Delete files which no longer exist from the database":
You delete files, e.g. parts, from the corresponding directory
on the hard disk using the Explorer. If you have managed
these files in the database, however, they still exist in the
database. You can delete any of these files by using this radio
button.
"Delete files from database and hard disk!":
Here it is important to note which deletion mode you have
activated in the following area "Deletion mode for files on the
hard disk".
"Use recycle bin (if possible)": The files are not deleted
from the hard drive but are placed in a "recycle bin".
The data can be retrieved at any time.
"Only delete to the recycle bin".
S354E21.DOC
Quit part management
Function button OK
"Delete files completely (free up hard disk space)"

In part management, the entire path for each file is
managed along with it (in the display field "File path" in the
mask).
This combination of radio buttons deletes the files both from
the database and from the directory on the hard disk. These
files are lost if you have not made a backup copy of them.
Recommendation: Ensure that you are deleting the correct
files before you delete them.
"Update file information": If you activate this check button, the

data is read in again from the files.
You confirm the settings in the mask with OK. The deletion
procedure is carried out.
The deletion procedure is aborted with CANCEL. You return to
the previous mask.
You quit the "Part management" index card with the two function
buttons at the bottom right of the mask.
The file you activated is loaded and displayed on the screen.
Result You have loaded a file using part management.
Function button CANCEL
S354E21.DOC
The procedure is aborted. You return to the screen display from

which you selected part management.
Operating ToPs 300
2-27
Confirmation and message masks

Informative system messages appear in the confirmation or
message masks. Message masks must be confirmed by clicking
on OK. The system expects you to make a decision in confirmation
masks: If you select YES, you accept the entry in the mask, and
with NO you do not confirm it.
Example of a confirmation mask
2-28
Operating ToPs 300
Fig. 20087
S354E21.DOC
3.
File name structure
Files in ToPs
The full file name consists of two parts:

(name to be entered) . (extension)
Example: TEST1.GEO
Extension
Various types of files are generated during ToPs programming.

They can be differentiated by the extension in the file name. The
extension is either assigned automatically by ToPs at each storage
procedure, or you enter a file name.
Rules:
The following may be used as characters: a string of numerals,
a string of letters or a combination of both.
Special symbols, spaces and full stops may not be used.
Recommendation: Think up a rational system for assigning
file names. Two examples are given in the description of file
names.
The individual file types which can be created in ToPs are
described in the following.
Module
DRAWING
Single part drawing
Example:
test.GEO
P4711.GEO
Example:
arc.WZG
Example:
polygon.VLG
(file name).GEO
Enter the file name. The extension is
assigned automatically.
Drawing of a tool geometry

(file name).WZG
Drawing of a macro template

(File name).VLG
S354E21.DOC
Operating ToPs 300
2-29
Module
NEST
Mini-nest
(single part name).MTL
Example: test.MTL
P4711.MTL
The file name and extension are

Nesting order in database

(File name)
Example: test company

P4711
Enter the file name: The order is

stored in the database.
Nesting order in file

(file name).DAT
Store order in a file.
assigned automatically by the system.
Sheet name
(file name_consecutive
number).TAF
Enter the file name. The consecutive
number (number of sheets created)
and the extension are assigned
automatically by ToPs.
Nesting result
(sheet name) ERG
Example: test
company.DAT
P4711.DAT
Example: test
company_1.TAF
test
company_2.TAF
etc.
P4711_1.TAF
P4711_2.TAF
etc.

Example: test
company.ERG
P4711.ERG
2-30
Operating ToPs 300
S354E21.DOC
Module
TECHNOLOGY
Example:
test.gmt
P4711.gmt
Example:
test.tmt
P4711.tmt
Example:
test.Ist
P4711.lst
Example:
test.EIN
P4711.EIN
Example:
Single part with processing:
WZG.TAB
(file name.GMT)
Storing selected screen contents: Enter
the file name; the extension is assigned
automatically.
Machined sheet
(file name).TMT
Store complete screen contents (sheet
and external area): Enter the file name;
the extension is assigned automatically.
NC program
(Sheet name).LST
Generate NC program. Enter the
program number; the extension is
Files which are processed on the
machine control system must have the
following format:
P(program number)
The letter P is automatically placed in
front of the program number when the
program is transferred from the PC to
the machine control system.
Example 4711 becomes P4711.
General rule: The program number can
have a maximum of 9 digits. The
number range from 999 990 000 to
999 999 999 is reserved for TRUMPF.
Machining plan
(single part/sheet name).ON
Tool master data

(file name).TAB
The tool master data administered in
the database are stored in the form of a
table (purpose: table comparison).
The file name is entered or you accept
the default file name. The extension is
generated automatically.
S354E21.DOC
Operating ToPs 300
2-31
Laser technology table
Example:
LTT.TAB
(file name).TAB
The laser technology tables
administered in the database are stored
in the form of a table (purpose: table
comparison).
The file name is entered or you accept
the default file name. The extension is
generated automatically.
Deleting files
2-32
Operating ToPs 300
You have the following options for deleting files:

The "Part management" index card which you can select in
each module when loading a file ( see: the explanation
"Standard masks: Part management".
The "File management" index card in the INFO module
( see: explanation of "INFO module").
S354E21.DOC
1.
Working in the DRAWING module
All the functions required for the creation of drawings of single parts
are collected in the DRAWING module.
The drawing of a single part is the basis for all further working
steps. You can create drawings in ToPs itself or load them from
another system.
A multitude of functions are offered for creating a drawing: Different
types of geometric elements can be generated and modified. Help
functions facilitate construction.
If you wish to import drawings instead of creating them directly,
ToPs offers four standard interfaces to CAD systems:
Files in
DXF:
IGES:
MI and
GRA
format can be loaded (optional). It goes without saying that these
drawings can be edited or supplemented with the drawing functions
in ToPs.
3-4
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
1.1
Select DRAWING module
The basics - creating a drawing
The user interface is displayed after the DRAWING module has

been selected.
User interface in DRAWING module with zero point display
Fig. 18332
Starting single part drawing
The zero point is displayed in the DRAWING module initial mask for
your orientation. It is shown as the intersection point of two vertical
construct lines one on top of the other (Construct line: red colored,
dashed line type).
Interrogation cycle
An interrogation cycle is initiated when you call up a function. This

system supports you at every step with questions and instructions
in the command line.
To cancel a cycle
To end a cycle
Activate menu function CANCEL to cancel execution of a function.

The cycle restarts from the beginning until you terminate it with END.
Application of functions
General rule: Draw as neatly and as correctly as possible. Example

Make extensive use of the drawing functions. To draw a horizontal
line, you should select the function CREATE LINE, HORIZONTAL
to make sure that the line will actually be drawn horizontally and not
only appear horizontal on the screen.
Drawing contours
Drawing elements may have a maximum of one connection

element at the element start point and the element end point regardless of the selected colour of the drawn elements.
S354E31.DOC
DRAWING module
3-5
Defining geometric
elements and modifications
Geometric elements and modifications are defined by determining

points, lengths, angles and radii.
Point
Click on the point with the mouse cursor
or
Use the keyboard to key in the coordinates.
Example: 20,20.5
Length, angle, radius
The values for length, angle and radius are normally entered via the
keyboard.
Keyboard
Input via the keyboard, e.g.:
Point: 20, 20.2
Length: 20.2
Input via the keyboard must be terminated with <RETURN>.
3-6
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
1.2
Overview of functions
Select the DRAWING module. The graphic display user interface

will appear with the main menu bar, screen menu and work area.
DRAWING module
User interface in DRAWING module
Fig. 18332
Main menu bar functions

The main menu bar has a single function available: FILE. A pulldown menu opens by selecting this function. The subfunctions can
be seen and can be activated.
Function scope:
FILE, LOAD: Load drawings of various formats.
FILE, STORE: Store drawings.
FILE, STORE AS...: drawings under details of file name,

directory etc.
FILE, WORKFILE: Store workfile.
FILE, PRINT: Print drawing.
FILE, PROPERTIES: Specify file information.
FILE, TRANSFER: Data transfer
S354E31.DOC
FILE, NEW: Create a new drawing.
FILE, BACK: Exit DRAWING module.
DRAWING module
3-7
Screen menu functions

The screen menu fields are collected together in different screen
menus.
Select the DRAWING module to obtain an overview of the functions
in the individual screen menus. Then click on the control functions:
The individual screen menus will appear depending upon the
selected control function:
Following is an overview of the DRAWING module control
functions:
control function MODIFY, modify drawings, e.g. move, rotate,

mirror or stretch geometries or geometric elements or create
copies.
Control function MODIFY 2: change curves, elements, line

colour or line type.
MACROS control function: Create macros.
TEXT control function: insert text in a drawing.
DRAWING module
CREATE 2 control function: creates notches, bezels and

curves.
3-8
CREATE control function: creates lines, circles or arcs.
DRAWING TOOLS control function Create help geometries

and use measurement functions.
S354E31.DOC
Loading and importing a drawing
Loading a drawing
File
Load
Fig. 18332
With the function FILE, LOAD, different drawing formats can be

loaded or imported. The procedure is always the same:
Select the LOAD subfunction.

Select the drawing file with the file selection mask.
The drawing is loaded (note messages in the message line).
If the drawing is not displayed immediately, activate the

TOTAL symbol at the foot of the mask. The screen is set up
a new.
S354E31.DOC
DRAWING module
3-9
File selection mask/file

manager
In the file selection mask are defined:

Path specification
"Search in:" In which directory the system should look for files.
Input the complete path or select a path. Via the symbol " >" (arrow),
the "previous directories" are presented from which files have
already been loaded.
File formats
The radio buttons (buttons with color identification) show you which
file formats can be selected. You can also control the display in the
left of the selection window via the file format. Example: "*.GEO"
button activated. All files with the ending GEO which are available
in the current directory will be shown in the selection window. The *
(star) switch changes the directory.
The switches which have a gray background cannot currently be
activated.
Preview window
Select the "Preview" control field.
In the preview window, the drawings of the particular file will be
displayed as soon as a file is selected in the selection window with
the left mouse button.
In this way you can check whether you have also selected the
desired drawing.
The dimensions of the part are displayed below.
If you wish to view the geometry of a file only occasionally, then
deactivate the "Preview" control field and click directly on the file
names in the selection window with the right mouse button. The
geometry is displayed in the preview window only for this particular
occasion.
The name of the selected file is automatically input and displayed
below the selection window as soon as you have clicked on the file.
Using the function buttons
Ok
Cancel
3-10
DRAWING module
Confirms input.
Cancels selection procedure.
S354E31.DOC
Symbols in the selection window

In the selection window, directory names are identified with the "*"
(star) symbol and file names with the "" (dash) symbol. Example:
- 6378.GEO file name
* USER_JO2 Directory
Changing directories
In order to change to another directory in the selection window,
select the * (asterisk) symbol above the selection window scrolling
bar.
Wildcards
Wildcards serve as place holders in a file name, standing for a
certain number of characters or a string of characters.
Application:
Use wildcards to reduce the number of files in the selection box.
Proceed as follows:
Enter the file name, with wildcards, in input field "File name" in
the initial mask.
Select OK or <RETURN>. The files are offered in the file
selection mask window. The selection criterion, incl. path name,
also appears in the first line of the mask.
The following wildcards may be used:
? Question mark: Replaces any one character. Example:
*test?.geo
replaces e.g.
test1.geo
test2.geo
testa.geo
Asterisk: Replaces any string of characters. Example:

*.geo
replaces e.g.
test1.geo
test2.geo
testa.geo
S354E31.DOC
DRAWING module
3-11
Wildcards can be combined. Example

*test?.geo
replaces e.g.
1test1.geo
P1testx.geo
2.1
File
Loading a drawing as a workfile
Precondition: With FILE, STORE WORKFILE, a file with the name

workfile_300.geo must have been created.
The file is stored in the directory which is entered in the file
Tops300.ini under "ToPs-working directory (Start directory)" and
which refers to the file TOPS_PWD.
The directory \trumpf\teile\user1 is entered as standard.
Changing the name of the work file: The file name of the work file
can be changed by altering the variable ST_WORKFILE in the file
Tops300.ini without however entering the file extension.
Example: ST_WORKFILE=testworkfile. In this case, the work file is
always stored as testworkfile.geo and then loaded by you.
The work file is displayed in the file selection mask with the
extension GEO:workfile_300.geo.
Load
Select this data block. The current screen contents are erased and
the work file is displayed on the screen.
The workfile is overwritten by another workfile the next time a
storage procedure is carried out.
2.2
GEO format
Loading a file as GEO format
GEO is the file format which ToPs generates itself when you save a
drawing.
All drawings created with ToPs, or those that were stored in GEO
format must be loaded with this function.
3-12
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
2.3
Importing external formats (Option)
Other formats, such as IGES, MI, DXF and GRA are generated by
other CAD systems. The import and export functions for these
formats are an option and have to be bought as extras.
All drawings loaded or imported from external systems can
be further processed with the ToPs drawing functions.
General conditions
Drawings formatted in IGES, DXF, MI and GRA can be imported

into ToPs from CAD systems if the following basic conditions are
met:
Only 2D drawings (uniform Z coordinate) can be imported into
ToPs. 3D drawings must be projected into a two-dimensional
plane and saved as 2D drawings. Difficulties may also arise
when importing 3D drawings saved in 2D mode.
IGES: The IGES standard stipulates a fixed format of 80 characters per line. Only drawings complying with this norm can be
imported.
MI: ToPs can only import the non-compressed MI format.
There is no CAD system integrated into ToPs even if the
majority of functions are similar. For this reason, it is advisable
to make complicated drawings in a CAD system. To process the
drawing further in ToPs, it must be put into a form suitable for
production.
Drawings suitable for production have the following characteristics:
One part per drawing.
Part structures must be in exploded view.
The drawing must only contain processable contours, i.e. no
drawing borders and headers, no drawing tools; bend lines
are only interpreted by ToPS 600 and otherwise ignored.
Only geometric elements recognized by ToPs may be
transferred. This means for example, that: No Splines can be
transfered to ToPS. Consequently, avoid such geometric
elements in your drawing. Usually, for example, Splines can
be replaced very well by arcs.
Contours must be closed. ToPs checks this when saving and
generates a corresponding message.
S354E31.DOC
DRAWING module
3-13
Loading a drawing with IGES format

IGES-Format
This interface which allows drawings to be imported from other

CAD systems is optional and has to be acquired in addition to the
ToPs software. For this reason the function is protected by a
password.
Various CAD systems generate the IGES format. Select this option
when you want to import drawings created on an external drawing
system.
Use the file selection masks for this.
Loading a drawing with MI format

MI-Format
Load drawing: MI
This interface which allows drawings to be imported from other
CAD systems is optional and has to be acquired in addition to the
ToPs software. For this reason the function is protected by a
password.
The MI format is generated for example by CAD system ME 10.
The drawings must be stored in MI format if you wish to load CAD
drawings from ME 10.
Make sure that the drawings which you want to import have actually
been saved in MI format. There are other possibilities with ME.
Using the file selection masks select the drawing you wish to load.
Compressed MI files can not be loaded by ToPs 300.
3-14
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
Loading a drawing with DXF format

DXF-Format
This interface which allows drawings to be imported from other CAD

systems is optional and has to be acquired in addition to the ToPs
software. For this reason the function is protected by a password.
Various CAD systems generate the DXF format (e.g. AutoCAD).
Choose this option if you want to import drawings created on these
systems. Use the file selection masks for this.
Load block section
All geometry elements which were defined as a block when the

drawing was created are taken into account if the "Use BlockSection" is selected.
Loading layers
For importing DXF files it is possible to specify exact layers.

1
Example: Thanks to the layer technique, geometry can be read in
selectively from a specific layer. If e.g. the geometry to be edited is
on one layer and all other geometries are on other layers, the
geometry can be imported specifically. Re-editing (e.g. deleting
dimensions) of the imported drawing is then not required.
Procedure
"DXF Options": Specify the conditions for loading the drawing:
"Use Block-Section "? If yes, activate the control field.

All geometry elements which were defined as a block when the
drawing was created are only taken into account if the control
field is activated.
1
2
in most CAD systems part drawings can be created in layers. These are then placed on top of each other like film sheets to
give the complete part structure).
BLOCK section refers to a particular area in the DXF format.
S354E31.DOC
DRAWING module
3-15
"Use Layer-Selection": Should particular layers be transferred?

If yes, which?
Select the desired layers in the selection window.
"Contour preparation" with "Tolerance": Up to what distance

should open contours be closed automatically?
"Use Text-Section": Transfer texts. Specify font.
For a detailed description see: "Automatic component for converting CAD files" in this chapter.
Loading a drawing in GRA format
GRA-Format
Drawings in GRA format are created by the TC-CAPT programming

system.
The single parts saved in TC-CAPT contain the geometry and
processing as a drawing. When the file is loaded in GRA format
1
only the information from the TOP part is transferred. Usually it is a
matter of single part geometry.
With "TOP part, level 0 is designated in the ME10 and TC-CAPT programming systems. As a rule part geometries are
assigned to this level.
3-16
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
2.4
Automatic module for converting

CAD files
A program for converting files is supplied with ToPs: VTC

CONVERT. This enables CAD files to be converted directly. CAD
drawings do not have to be loaded singly and stored in the desired
format.
Precondition: The optional IGES/DXF/MI-Interpreter is present.

Application: Automatic data conversion (e.g. overnight).
Use: Saves time, especially if several files have to be converted.
Perfect link to CAD systems.
Principle
This program enables conversion of CAD files.
GEO
IGES
GEO
tc_conv.exe
DXF:
MI
DXF:
ME10
GEO1.02
tc_conv.exe
Start the VTC CONVERT

program
The VTC CONVERT program

During installation of ToPs another TRUMPF logo (in addition to
that for ToPs) will be set up for you in the TRUMPF group with the
VTC CONVERT signature. You use this icon (by double clicking
with the left-hand mouse button) to start a program with which you
can convert the drawing files into different formats.
Starting the program

manually
S354E31.DOC
The conversion program can also be started from the operating

system. The file tc_conv.exe is available for this.
DRAWING module
3-17
Converting drawings with VTC CONVERT

Start the program VTC CONVERT by clicking on the icon "VTC
Convert" with the left mouse button.
A mask appears in which you can set the defaults for the
conversion process. The CONVERT function is used to start the
process.
Masks for WINDOWS NT and WINDOWS 95 operating systems
Fig. 19564
The following description explains the setting options in the masks.

Specify:
3-18
DRAWING module
"Input-format": which format does the file which you wish to

convert have?
"Output-format": which format should the converted file have?
"Contour preparation": should the conversion include preparation of the contour?
"Logfile Name": The logfile name is displayed.
"Display-Logfile": Display logfile itself.
"Overwrite": If the file is already present, should the file be
overwritten?
S354E31.DOC
"Contour preparation": Carry out contour preparation at the

given "tolerance"? The tolerance value indicates how far apart
the start and end points of two elements may lie for them still to
be grouped together; values in [mm] or [Inch]. This setting has
no effect if the "Contour preparation" option is deactivated.
"Progress": Optical progress display for a 0procedure
"DXF-OPTIONS": options for the conversion of DXF files.

"Use Block-Section": interpret Block-Section.
"Use Layer-Selection": Read in the layer areas selected in
the right of the selection window.
Select one or more layers or enter the description of the
layer to be transferred here.
"Use Text-Section": Interpret text-section. If this DXF option
is selected, the text font must be set in the selection field
beneath.
SELECT FILES function key: Select files which are to be

converted. Several files can be selected in the subsequent mask
using <STRG> + the left mouse button or <SHIFT> + the left
mouse button. To select all files, use the <STRG>+<A> key
combination.
CONVERT function button: Starts the conversion process.
END function button: Exits the mask and ends the program.
In WINDOWS NT and WINDOWS 95 the version can be
displayed: Click with the left-hand mouse button on the small
TRUMPF logo in the top left corner of the mask after you
have called up the program.
S354E31.DOC
DRAWING module
3-19
Converting drawings with tc_conv.exe

Directory
tc_conv.exe is normally located in the ToPs directory

c:\trumpf\macros\tc_conv.exe) and must be started from there.
The converted files are stored in the same directory as the original
files.
Command format
Procedure
tc_conv <options> [file_list@response_file]
1. Change to .the operating system level. The operating system

prompt appears.
2. Create a response file. (This step is only necessary if you want
to convert several files.)
Create a file (e.g. in an editor) listing the files you wish to
convert, with their path names. Any number of files can be
given here. Save this file under your chosen name.
Example for such a Response File:
c:\trumpf\users\1.dxf
3. Change to the directory which contains the file tc_conv.exe.

4. Enter the command:
tc_conv <options> [file_list@response_file]
Example:
tc_conv
3-20
DRAWING module
-idxf -ogeo
\trumpf\users\1.dxf
(Command)
(Options)
(Files)
S354E31.DOC
Options
With which command options should the conversion be carried out?

You must specify:
Which format will be converted? Indicate the input format (max.

1 format):
for GEO
-igeo
for DXF
-idxf
for IGES
-iiges
for MI
-imi
Format to which the file will be converted. Indicate the target

format (several formats are possible):
for GEO
-ogeo
for DXF
-odxf
for ME10
-ome10
(macro language)
for GEO (V1.02) -ogeo_102
Other options for command tc_conv.exe:
Files
Report mode on:

Report mode off:
Output messages to a file:
Overwrite mode on:
No geometry preparation:
Tolerance value for contour closure:
Read in Block-Section:
Convert single layer:
Load no texts:
Specify text font:
-mon
-moff
-e(file name)
-force
-l
-t
-b
-c(Layer name)
-d
-n(Fontname)
Which files are to be converted? There are two methods of

indicating which files you want converted:
Individually: Enter the file names with paths one after the other,
separated by spaces.
Response file: Enter the symbol @ and the name of the response
file (no spaces).
5. <Return>. Conversion begins.
S354E31.DOC
DRAWING module
3-21
Examples for the tc_conv.exe command
1. Example
You wish to convert files File1.dxf and File2.dxf in

directory \trumpf\users to GEO and ME10 formats.
Input format
Target format
Geometry preparation
File specification
Messages
DXF
GEO, ME10
yes
individually
yes, on the screen
Input*:
tc_conv -idxf -ogeo -ome10 -mon \trumpf\users\Datei1 \trumpf\users\Datei2
Result As a result of conversion, files
Datei1.geo
Datei2.geo
Datei1.m10
Datei2.m10
are created in the trumpf\users directory.
Example 2:
The files listed in file trumpf\users\DXF_FILE.RSP are to be

converted into GEO format.
Input format
Target format
File specification
Messages
DXF
GEO
yes
via response file (Format: *.RSP)
yes, in a file
Input*:
tc_conv -idxf -ogeo -mon -ek1.log @\trumpf\users\DXF_FILE.RSP
Result:
During conversion, the GEO files are written to the files listed in the
DXF_FILE.RSP file. The converted files are stored in the same
directory as the source files.
The file containing the messages K1.LOG is created in the
current directory.
The path needs to be specified only if the files entered are not located in the current directory.
3-22
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
Background information: Optionen for

command tc_conv.exe
Formats to be converted.
Input format: -igeo,
-iges, -idxf, -imi
GEO: this is the file format generated by ToPs itself. Extension:

.geo.
MI: is created by the ME 10 CAD system.
DXF: is generated by various CAD systems (e.g. AUTOCAD). It

is possible in automatic conversion to read in single layers.
IGES: standard interface for CAD systems.

An input format must be specified. Only one input format may
be selected for each program run.
Target format: -ogeo,

-ogeo_102, -odxf,
-ome10
Formats to be converted to.

GEO is the file format which ToPs generates itself.
GEO 1.02 is an old ToPs file format for drawings of version 1.02.
DXF is generated by various CAD systems, e.g. AutoCAD.
ME10 (macro language) can be read by CAD system ME 10
(INPUT). Note the difference: Input format MI, but target format
ME10!
At least one target format must be specified. You can also
select several target formats: The input file is then converted
to each of the specified file formats.
Report mode: -mon, -moff
Report mode on (-mon) or off (-moff): Display messages about the

progress of conversion on the screen.
Error messages will only be written to a file if the files are specified
with the option -e(file name).
Output messages to a file:

-e(file name)
With the option -e the messages can be output to a file. The file
name must observe all conventions valid for the operating system.
The program is aborted if the file cannot be created. The file is
stored in the same directory as the tc_conv.exe program.
S354E31.DOC
DRAWING module
3-23
Overwrite mode:
-force
Before creating the output file, the system checks whether a file of
the same name already exists. If such a file does exist, it is not
overwritten. -force deactivates this verification. Existing files of the
same name are then overwritten.
No geometry preparation: -l
When the file is saved, the geometry is automatically prepared to

avoid inaccuracies.
Option -l deactivates geometry preparation.
Recommendation: Run the geometry preparation.
Tolerance for open contour

closure: -t
Read in Block-Section : -b
With the option -t, the extent can be specified to which points of
open contours will be closed.
Only for DXF- format: Block-Section are read in.
Convert single layer:

-c(Layer name)
Only for DXF- format: To read in only specific layers, enter the layer
names in round brackets.
Example -c(BLACK RED YELLOW)
Load no texts: -d
For DXF-, IGES- and MI- formats: As standard, texts are read in.
To prevent this, the reading in of texts can be suppressed with the
option -d.
Specify text font:

-n [Fontname]
Only for DXF-, IGES- and MI- formats: When the text is read in the
textfont to be used can be specified. The textfont iso.fnt is offered
as standard.
Example -n[ISOPROP.FNT]
The following fonts are available:
ISO.FNT
ISOPROP.FNT
BOLD.FNT
or
user defined fonts created and stored in ToPs (see: the
description "User defined textfont" in this chapter).
3-24
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
3.
Storing drawings
Storing a drawing
File
Save as
Save
workfile
File name
S354E31.DOC
In the DRAWING module you can save single part drawings in

various ways:
Save
Fig. 18332
as a file without drawing data and under the available file name
in the current directory.
File name (Drawing name).GEO
as a file without drawing data under a certain file name or in a
certain directory.
File name (Drawing name).GEO
as a work file (in the directory specified by the variable
TOPS_PWD in the ToPs INI file).
File name WORKFILE_300.GEO
In the DRAWING module, files with the extension 'GEO' are

generated when single part drawings are stored. As default, a
workfile is stored under the file name 'WORKFILE_300.GEO'.
Just enter the string preceding .GEO as the file name.
Example: test1
The .GEO extension is assigned automatically.
Example: test1.GEO
DRAWING module
3-25
When the file is saved, the geometry is automatically prepared to

avoid inaccuracies. All geometric elements are analysed and - if
necessary - prepared: Inner and outer contours are determined,
doubly drawn lines removed and inaccurately drawn contour
transitions are corrected.
Construct lines
When a drawing is saved as a file with the .GEO or .DXF

extension, existing construct lines and construct circles are not
saved.
The construct geometry is saved when a drawing is stored as a
workfile.
3.1
Functions
File
Save workfile
Storing a drawing in a workfile
Procedure:
Store file as a workfile.
Application: For quickly saving your current work in the drawing.
Recommendation: Use this function frequently during the drawing

phase, especially before extensive changes and deletions.
In contrast to the normal storage procedure, no geometry
preparation takes place.
The work file is saved under the filename WORKFILE_300.GEO
in the directory given by the variable TOPS_PWD in the "ToPsworkdirectory (Start directory)" area. This variable is stored in the
Tops300.ini file.
The directory \trumpf\parts\user1 is entered as standard.
Changing the name of the work file The file name of the work file
can be changed by altering or re-entering the variable
ST_WORKFILE in the file Tops300.ini without however giving the
file extension GEO.
Example: ST_WORKFILE=testworkfile. In this case, the work file is
always stored as testworkfile.geo and then loaded under this
file name by the user.
3-26
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
3.2
Functions
File
Save
Save as
Procedure:
You can store drawings as follows:
The drawing is saved in the previously selected directory under

the current name.
The selection masks are not opened. The drawing is stored
under the file name with which you called up the drawing.
File format: (file name).GEO
Example: test12345.GEO
The file selection mask is opened. You can specify the following:
Input or select path name.
Specify file name.
Confirm input with OK.
File format: (file name).GEO
Example: test1998.GEO
S354E31.DOC
Store drawing
DRAWING module
3-27
3.3
Functions
File
Properties
Storing a drawing with drawing data
Procedure:
To store drawing data to a drawing.
Precondition: You have loaded a drawing.

The drawing data is supplementary information which is retrieved
e.g. for nesting and processing the piece. All data is gathered in an
automatically opened mask.
Enter the following data:
Drawing number and drawing name.

Who edited the drawing?
For which customer is the drawing intended?
On which machine should the part be produced?
Which laser table is to be used in processing the part?
Enter name (=number) of the process rule containing
technological instructions for machining this particular part.
Recommendation: Only enter the rules number here if this
part is to be processed using a specific rule. This assignment
option is meant for parts which exhibit special technological
machining.
Which material and sheet thickness are to be used for
producing this part?
Unit factor: Factor for scale conversion.
Using the two YES/NO switches you can input information for the
nesting of the part:
Does a mini nest exist for this drawing?

Can the part be rotated during nesting? and
Must the direction of rolling be taken into account?
Once the entries have been completed, confirm your inputs with OK.
File
Save
Save as
3-28
DRAWING module
After the drawing properties have been defined, these properties

must be saved together with the drawing.
Save the drawing in the previously selected directory under

the current name.
Enter the file name and specify the path in the file manager.
S354E31.DOC
4.
Functions
DRAWING
module
File
New
Control functions:
CREATE
CREATE 2
etc.
File
Properties
Save as
S354E31.DOC
Creating a new single part drawing
Procedure:
1. Start module DRAWING.
2. Open a new file. To do this, select the FILE, NEW functions.

The existing sceen contents (drawing) are deleted
automatically.
For purposes of orientation, the graphic screen appears with
the zero point (a red crosshair). The zero point is shown as the
intersection point of two vertical construct lines one on top of
the other (Construct line: red colored, dashed line type).
3. Using the screen menu functions, create the new drawing.
4. Store the drawing with or without drawing data.
Save file information if desired.
Input file name and specify path.
DRAWING module
3-29
5.
Functions
DRAWING
module
File
Process an existing drawing
Procedure:
1. Start module DRAWING.
2. Load a drawing created in ToPs or read in an external

drawing.
An existing drawing is automatically deleted when a new
drawing is loaded.
Note that imported drawings must be saved in ToPs even if they
are not edited further.
In the file selection window you define:
Load
Control functions:
CREATE
CREATE 2
etc.
File
Properties
Save as
3-30
DRAWING module
"Search in:" In which directory is the file located?

Select the file extension. All files which have the selected
extension appear in the selection window. Drawings you have
created in ToPs have the suffix GEO. External drawings to be
imported can have the extensions IGES, DXF, MI for example.
Select the desired file in the selection window.
confirm your choice with OK.
3. Using the screen menu functions, create the new drawing.
4. Store the drawing with or without drawing data.
Save file information if desired.
Input file name and specify path.
S354E31.DOC
6.
Drawing geometry elements
Functions
The functions for drawing geometry elements are stored in the

screen menus of the control functions CREATE and CREATE 2.
Setting the colour and line

type of geometry elements
Geometry elements are normally displayed as white lines of line

type solid on the screen. Using the functions from the control
function CHANGE 2 menu or simply by clicking in the right hand
selection window of the information and selection bar, these
standard settings can be altered.
Procedure Drawing
geometry elements
Select the functions in the menus and follow the system prompts in
the command line.
6.1
Drawing a point
CREATE function: POINT
Click on a point or enter the coordinates.
Processing point: Points to be center marked must be drawn in

cyan blue. This rule does not apply to ToPs 300.
S354E31.DOC
DRAWING module
3-31
6.2
Drawing a line with 2 points
Drawing a line
CREATE function: LINE, 2 POINTS
P2
P1
Fig. 4701
Procedure:
Drawing a parallel line
Click on starting point (P1) or enter the coordinates.

Click on end point (P2) or enter the coordinates.
CREATE function: LINE, PARALLEL
P2
P1
Fig. 4702
Procedure:
Click on primary line (P1).

Click on a point (P2) to determine on which side the parallel line
will lie.
or
Enter the distance and determine on which side the parallel line
will lie by clicking on a point.
To input several distances at the same time: enter the values
one after the other. They have to be separated by a space.
Do not use commas!
Example: 10 20 30.
3-32
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
Drawing horizontal lines
CREATE function: LINE, HORIZONTAL
P1
P2
Fig. 4703
Procedure:
Drawing a vertical line

or
Input the length.
CREATE function: LINE, VERTICAL

P1
P2
Fig. 15165
Procedure:
Drawing a line with a

tangent to an arc element
and a point

or
Input the length.
CREATE function: LINE, TAN PT
P2
P1
Fig. 4704
Procedure:
S354E31.DOC
Click on approximately the tangent point (P1) on the arc.

DRAWING module
3-33
Drawing perpendicular lines
CREATE function: LINE, PERPENDICULAR
P3
P1
P2
Fig. 4705
Procedure:
Drawing a construct line

with a point, angle of
inclination and length
Click on base element (P1) (1st point).

Click on second point (P2) or enter the coordinates.
If the 2nd point is on the base element, this point will serve as
the starting point of the perpendicular line.
If the 2nd point is not on the base, the perpendicular line will be
drawn from the 2nd point.
Click on 3rd point (P3) or enter the coordinates.
or
Input the length.
CREATE function: LINE, ANGLE X
P3
P2
a
P1
Fig. 4706
Procedure:
3-34
DRAWING module
<F1>Click on starting point (P1) or enter the coordinates.

Input angle to X axis (a) or click on the point (P2) or enter the
coordinates.
Click on the point (P3) or enter the coordinates.
or
Input length of line.
S354E31.DOC
Drawing line with tangent to

2 arc elements
CREATE function: LINE, TAN 2
P2
P1
Fig. 4707
Procedure:
Drawing a polygon
Pick 1st approximate tangent point (P1).

Pick 2nd approximate tangent point (P2).
CREATE function: LINE, POLYGON

P2
P4
P3
P6
P1=P7
P5
Fig. 4708
Procedure:
Drawing a rectangle

Click on other points (P2 to P6) or enter the coordinates.
Close polygon: Click on endpoint=starting point (P7=P1) or
enter the coordinates.
CREATE function: LINE; RECTANGLE

P2
P1
Fig. 4913
Procedure:
S354E31.DOC
Pick first corner point (P1) or enter the coordinates.

Pick diagonally opposite corner point (P2) or enter the
coordinates.
DRAWING module
3-35
6.3
Drawing a circle with
three points
Drawing a circle
CREATE function: CIRCLE, 3 PTS
P1
P3
P2
Fig. 4914
Procedure:
Drawing a circle with a

center and radius
Click on first point on circle (P1) or enter the coordinates.

Click on second circle point (P2) or enter the coordinates.
Click on third point on circle (P3) or enter the coordinates.
or
Input radius.
CREATE function: CIRCLE, CENTER RAD
P2
P1
Fig. 4709
Procedure:
3-36
DRAWING module
Mark center-point (P1) or specify coordinates.

Pick point (P2) on arc or enter the coordinates.
or
Input radius.
S354E31.DOC
Drawing a circle with

diameter
CREATE function: CIRCLE, DIAMETER
P1
P2
Fig. 4915
Procedure:
Drawing a circle with center

and diameter
Pick first point on circle (P1) or enter the coordinates.

Pick second point on circle (P2) or enter the coordinates.
CREATE function: CIRCLE, CENTER D
P2
P1
Fig. 4709
Procedure:
S354E31.DOC
Click on center-point (P1) or specify coordinates.

or
Input diameter.
DRAWING module
3-37
Drawing a circle tangential

to 2 elements
CREATE function: CIRCLE, TAN 2
P3
P2
P1
Fig. 4711
Procedure:
Drawing a concentric circle
Click on (P1) on 1st element or enter the coordinates.

Click on point (P2) on 2nd element or enter the coordinates.
Click on point (P3) on arc or enter the coordinates
or
Input radius.
CREATE function: CIRCLE, CONCENTRIC
P2
P1
Fig. 4710
Procedure:
3-38
DRAWING module
Click on primary circle (P1).

Click on point (P2) on arc or enter the coordinates.
or
enter distance: + for outside the basic circle, - for inside the
basic circle.
S354E31.DOC
6.4
Drawing an arc with 3 points
Drawing an arc
CREATE function: ARC, 3 PTS
P3
P1
P2
Fig. 4712
Procedure:
Drawing an arc with a

center, starting and end
point

CREATE function: ARC, CENTER END
P3
P1
P2
Fig. 4713
Procedure:
S354E31.DOC
Click on center-point (P1) or enter coordinates.

Click on end point (P3) - in counterclockwise direction - or enter
the coordinates.
DRAWING module
3-39
Drawing an arc with

diameter
CREATE function: ARC, DIAM
P2
P1
Fig. 4917
Procedure:
CREATE function: ARC, CONCENTR

...................................................................................
Drawing a concentric arc

Pick end point (P2) - in counterclockwise direction - or enter the
coordinates.
P2
P1
...................................................................................
Fig. 4714
Procedure:
3-40
DRAWING module
Pick point on arc (P1).

Pick point (P2) on new arc or enter the coordinates.
or
enter distance:
S354E31.DOC
Drawing an arc with center

point, radius, starting and
end angle
CREATE function: ARC, CEN R ANG
P3
P4
P1
a b
P2
Fig. 4715
Procedure:
Drawing a contour curve

or
Input radius.
Input start angle (a)
or
Input end angle (b)
or
CREATE function: ARC, MULTICURVE CONT
P2
P1
P3
Fig. 4918
Procedure:
Contour curve = several connected arcs.
Click on the end point (P1) of an existing element (arc or line)
or enter the coordinates. This point is the arc starting point.
Pick end point (P2) of arc or enter the coordinates. This end
point is also the starting point of the next arc.
Click on next arc point (P3) etc.
The multicurve contour will not be made if there is a construct arc
under the arc.
S354E31.DOC
DRAWING module
3-41
6.5
Drawing notches
Notches can be defined as corner notches or as element notches.

They can be generated on line, arc and circle elements.
Precondition: The contour on which the notch is to be defined must

be present.
Corner notches:
Fig. 19685
Element notches:
Fig. 18686
3-42
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
Creating a corner notch with

differing distances
Function CREATE 2: NOTCHES, DIST DIST

2. Line
(a)
1. Line
(d)
(b)
Fig. 19687
Procedure:
Creating a corner notch with

equal distances
Select the function.

Input distance (a) to 1st line
Input distance (b) to 2nd line
Click on the 1st line or input the diameter (d). If a diameter is
defined, a partial circle is generated at the notch intersection
point.
Click on 2nd line.
Function CREATE 2: NOTCHES, CORNER POINT
Fig. 19688
Procedure:
Input vertex notch distance (a)
Pick the vertex (V) or input the diameter (d). If you define a
diameter before clicking on the vertex, then a partial circle is
generated at the notch intersection.
Inputting 0 generates notches without a partial circle once
again.
S354E31.DOC
DRAWING module
3-43
Creating acute angular

element notches
Function CREATE 2: NOTCHES, ACUTE ANGLE
P1
(M)
( )
(h)
(d)
P1
(M)
Fig. 19689
Procedure:
Input the notch height (h).
Input the acute angle ().
Input the notch midpoint (M) or diameter punched (d).
Click on element (P1) at the desired position where the notch is
to be generated.
If you input a diameter before clicking the element, then a
partial circle is created for corner punching. Inputting 0
generates notches without a partial circle once again.
Creating rectangular
element notches
Function CREATE 2: NOTCHES, RECTANGLE
(w)
P1
(M)
(h)
(d)
(M)
P1
Fig. 19690
Procedure:
Input the notch height (h).
Input the notch width (w).
Input the notch midpoint (M) or diameter punched (d).
3-44
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
Click on element (P1) at the desired position where the notch is

to be generated.
If you input a diameter before clicking the element, then a
partial circle is created for corner punching. Inputting 0 generates notches without a partial circle once again.
6.6
Drawing a bevel with
distance to the vertex
Drawing a bevel
Function CREATE 2: BEVEL, DIST DIST
a
S
P1
b
P2
Fig. 4717
Procedure:
Drawing a bevel over a

corner point
Input first distance (a) to vertex (S).

Input second distance (b) to vertex.
Click on first element (P1):
Click on second element (P2).
Function CREATE 2: BEVEL, CORNER POINT
a
P
Fig. 4923
Procedure:
S354E31.DOC
Input distance (a) to corner point (P).

Click on corner point (P) or enter the coordinates.
To recreate the corner: remove bevel using DELETE.
DRAWING module
3-45
6.7
Drawing a rounding with
radius
Drawing rounding
CREATE 2: ROUNDING, RADIUS
P1
Fig. 4716
Procedure:
3-46
DRAWING module
Input the rounding radius.

Click on corner point (P1) or enter the coordinates.
or
Click on approximate tangent point on first and second
elements.
S354E31.DOC
7.
Function scope
Modifying geometry
The functions for modifying existing geometry elements are

contained in the MODIFY and MODIFY 2 control function menu.
The MODIFY control function encompasses functions with

which you can move, rotate, reflect and stretch or duplicate.
Furthermore they can change the scale of a geometrical shape.
The MODIFY 2 control function contains menu functions with

which you can modify roundings and elements. In addition, the
colour and line type of the geometry can be altered here.
7.1
Specify modify mode
Modifying or copying original

geometry
There are two ways of modifying geometry elements:

Modifying the original elements.
Copying elements (duplication).
Precondition
Any existing parts structure must be cancelled before geometry can

be edited. Compare also "Prepare drawings".
Outline of procedure
This procedure for defining modifications is a suggestion. It can be

varied to suit your needs. Remember to follow the system prompts
S354E31.DOC
DRAWING module
3-47
MODIFY function: MODE, ORIGINAL or COPY

Determine selection: You must define what is to be modified before
selecting the modify option.
1. Definition: do you want to modify the original or create a copy?
ORIGINAL: the original will be modified.
COPY: the original will be preserved. One or more copies
will be created. You can determine how many copies are to
be created by entering a repetition factor. Enter the
"number" of copies in the mask.
3. Definition: Select the MOVE, ROTATE, MIRROR or SCALE
modification option.
4. Definition: What shall the modification affect?
Click the elements you want to modify individually or select
several elements by putting a box around them.
4. Each modification option is terminated with END.

Please observe the requests in the command line when
carrying out the functions.
3-48
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
7.2
Moving geometry via
2 points
Moving geometry
MODIFY function: MOVE, 2 POINTS
P1
P3
P2
Fig. 4954
Procedure:
Moving geometry
horizontally
Determine selection: ORIGINAL or COPY.

Select modify option MOVE, 2 POINTS.
Click on reference point (P1) or enter the coordinates.
Pick destination point (P2) or enter the coordinates.
Click on any geometry element in the original or mark complete
geometry with a box (P3).
MODIFY function: MOVE, HORIZONTAL
P1
P2
P3
Fig. 4955
Procedure:
S354E31.DOC

Input repetition factor. Example 1.
Specify type of modification: MOVE, HORIZONTAL.
or
enter distance:
Click on any geometry element in the original or mark geometry
with a box (P3).
DRAWING module
3-49
Moving geometry vertically
MODIFY function: MOVE, VERTICAL
P1
P3
P2
Fig. 15167
Procedure:
3-50
DRAWING module

Input repetition factor. Example 1
Specify type of modification: MOVE, VERTICAL.
or
enter distance.
Click on any geometry element in the original or mark with a
box (P3).
S354E31.DOC
7.3
Rotating geometry about
two points
Rotating geometry
MODIFY function: ROTATE, 2 POINTS
P1
-90
P2
P3
Fig. 4958
Rotation about two points is equivalent to rotating and moving the

element at the same time.
Procedure:
Rotating geometry about a

center point

Select modification option: ROTATE, 2 POINTS.
Input angle of rotation, for example, -90.
Click on any geometry element or mark with a box (P3).
MODIFY function: ROTATE, CENTER
P2
P1
-90
Fig. 4957
Procedure:
S354E31.DOC

Select modification option: ROTATE, CENTER.
Click on center point of rotation (P1) or enter the coordinates.
Input angle of rotation, for example -90.
box (P2).
DRAWING module
3-51
7.4
Changing geometry scale
using 2 points
Modifying geometry scale
MODIFY function: SCALE, 2 POINTS
P2
P1
P3
Fig. 4963
Procedure:
Changing geometry scale

about a center point

Select modification option: SCALE, 2 POINTS.
Input factor.
box (P2).
MODIFY function: SCALE, CENTER
P1
P2
Fig. 4962
Procedure:
3-52
DRAWING module

Select modification option: SCALE, CENTER.
Input factor.
box (P2).
S354E31.DOC
7.5
Mirroring geometry about
any axis
Mirroring geometry
MODIFY function: MIRROR, 2 POINTS
P2
P3
P1
Fig. 4960
Procedure:
Mirroring geometry about a

center point

Select modification option: MIRROR, 2 POINTS.
Click on first point (P1) on mirror axis or enter the coordinates.
Click on second point (P2) on mirror axis or enter the
coordinates.
box (P3).
MODIFY function: MIRROR, CENTER
P2
P1
Fig. 4961
Procedure:
S354E31.DOC

Select modification option: MIRROR, CENTER.
box (P2).
DRAWING module
3-53
Mirroring geometry
horizontally
MODIFY function: MIRROR, HORIZONTAL
P2
P1
Fig. 4959
Procedure:
Mirroring geometry
vertically

Select modification option: MIRROR, HORIZONTAL.
Click on point (P1) on mirror line or enter the coordinates.
box (P2).
MODIFY function: MIRROR, VERTICAL
P2
P1
Fig. 15168
Procedure:
3-54
DRAWING module

Select modification option: MIRROR, VERTICAL.
Click on point (P1) on mirror line or enter the coordinates.
box (P2).
S354E31.DOC
7.6
Stretching geometry using
2 points
Stretch geometry
MODIFY function: STRETCH, 2 POINTS
P1,P3
P2
Fig. 4754
Procedure:
Select function:STRETCH, 2 POINTS.

Click on reference point (P1) for stretching or enter the coordinates.
Click on point (P3) where stretching is to be applied or enter the
coordinates.
To stretch several elements: mark elements with a box.
Elements intersected by the "rubber band" of the box will be
stretched. Elements lying entirely within the box marking will
be moved.
Stretching geometry
horizontally
MODIFY function: STRETCH, HORIZONTAL
P1,P3
P2
Fig. 4756
Procedure:
S354E31.DOC
Select the function. STRETCH HORIZONTAL.

or
enter distance:
DRAWING module
3-55
Click on destination point (P2) or enter the coordinates.

coordinates.
be moved.
Stretching geometry
vertically
MODIFY function: STRETCH, VERTICAL
P1,P3
P2
Fig. 4755
Procedure:
Select the function. STRETCH, VERTICAL.

or
enter distance:
coordinates.

be moved.
3-56
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
7.7
Modifying roundings
Modifying roundings
MODIFY 2: ROUNDING, MODIFY

P1
Fig. 4716
Procedure:
Input new rounding radius.
Click on rounding(s).
To recreate the corner: Input radius 0 (zero) in the command line
and pick rounding to be changed.
7.8
Splitting or connecting elements
The functions for splitting and connecting geometry elements are

combined, in a meaningful way, with the possibility of displaying
points (icon in the footer bar) so that the result can be checked.
Starting and end point are marked with red squares. If the end
points are simultaneously element connecting points, the squares
will be green.
Always select TOTAL after implementation of ELEMENTS, SPLIT,
or change the window setting so that the window can set up anew.
S354E31.DOC
DRAWING module
3-57
Splitting elements at an
intersection point
MODIFY 2: ELEMENTS, SPLIT INTERS. PT
P1
P2
Fig. 4718
Procedure:
Click on first element (P1): The element appears in yellow, in

dotted line type.
Click on second element (P2). The element appears in yellow,
in dotted line type.
Determine which element to split at the intersection points:
Enter the number of the element.
or
Enter any other number to split both elements.
Application: To delete a section of an element.
Splitting elements
MODIFY 2 function: ELEMENTS, SPLIT
P1
P2
Fig. 4719
Procedure:
Click on the element (P1): The element appears in yellow, in

dotted line type.
Click on point (P2) where splitting is to be applied or enter the
coordinates.
Application: To delete a section of an element.
3-58
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
Merging elements
MODIFY 2: ELEMENTS, MERGE
P2
P1
Fig. 4720
Two straight lines having the same direction or angular position can
be merged into one straight line. Requirement: The end points of
the partial lines must meet.
Straight line/arc, arc/arc or straight/straight combinations with different angular positions are not possible.
Procedure
Click on first element (P1): The element appears in yellow, in

dotted line type.
Click on second element (P2). The element appears in yellow,
in dotted line type.
7.9
Preparing a drawing
Drawings from CAD systems to be edited using ToPS must not

display inner structuring in different partial areas. ToPs offers a
function for cancelling partial structures.
Clearing partial structure of

a drawing
MODIFY 2 function: ELEMENTS, CLEAR STRUCT.

All parts of the drawing are combined to form one part. If the
drawing is in GRA, MI, IGES or DXF format, the parts structure of
the drawing will be cancelled.
S354E31.DOC
DRAWING module
3-59
7.10 Modifying line attributes

Line color and type
The line attributes enable you to change the color or line type over
the whole drawing. Thus, you can e.g. convert all blue lines to red
and can change all dashed lines to dotted lines. This is particularly
useful if you have to prepare drawings from other parties in which
the line characteristics possibly have other meanings.
These functions also enable you to adapt your drawings
individually.
Modifying the line colour

Modifying line color by
selection
MODIFY 2 function: COLOR, SELECTION
Procedure:
Select the MODIFY 2 control function.

Click on menu function COLOR, SELECTION or on the
"Drawing color" selection window in the information bar with the
mouse.
A mask opens with the familiar color palette:
blue
cyan
magenta
red
black
green
yellow
white
COLOR, SELECTION menu

function
Selecting the color
3-60
DRAWING module
Fig. 19565
S354E31.DOC
Completely changing the

line color
Select the desired color in the mask.

Identify the elements in the drawing which are to appear in the
selected color. You can select all elements at once by enlarging
the box.
The color is accepted in the scrolling window and the geometry
lines are displayed in the selected color.
MODIFY 2 function: COLOR, ALL
Procedure:
Select the COLOR, ALL menu function.
Changing the line color
Fig. 19566
These masks contain the color palette twice:
Selecting the original color: identify the original colours of the

lines with the upper colour buttons; i.e. specify the lines which
have this color and to which a new color is to be assigned.
Selecting the new color: select the new color for the lines with
the lower color buttons.
The selected color button remains pressed and consequently
active.
S354E31.DOC
Confirm the modifications with OK. All lines of the selected

original color are assigned with the newly defined color.
DRAWING module
3-61
You can choose only one original color and one new color.
The black colored function button in the lower color palette
cannot be selected. You cannot assign black to any
elements.
Modifying the line type

Modifying the line type by
selection
MODIFY 2 function: TYPE, SELECTION

Just as with the line color, you can also modify the line type.
Procedure:

Select the TYPE, SELECTION menu function or click on the
"Line type" selection window in the information line using the
mouse.
The available line types are represented as function buttons in a

mask:
solid line
Solid
dashed
-----------dotted
..............
dashed-dotted
-.-.-.-.-.-.-
3-62
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
TYPE, SELECTION menu

function
Select the line type
Completely modifying the

line type
Fig. 19567
Select the line elements which are to be modified or mark them

with the box.
The selected line type is displayed at the top of the scrolling
window.
MODIFY 2 function: TYPE, ALL
Procedure:
Select the TYPE, ALL menu function.
Modifying the line type
S354E31.DOC
Fig. 19568
DRAWING module
3-63
Select the original line type: Select the original line type in the
left of the mask, i.e. the line type to be replaced.
Select the new line type. In the right area of the window, select
the function button which represents the new line type.
The selected function buttons remain pressed and consequently active.
Confirm your choice with OK. All lines which have the selected
original line type are represented in the new line type.
You can choose only one original type and one new line type
respectively.
7.11 Deleting line attributes

You can select functions for deleting a line type or a line color in the
screen menu for the MODIFY 2 control function. The following options can be selected there:
MODIFY 2 function:
DELETE, SELECTION
Function DELETE, SELECTION.
The DELETE, SELECTION function is located in the screen menu

of the DRAWING module mask.
Deleting line type and line color
Fig. 19569
The following, in the index card system format, can be selected:
LINE COLOR: delete the line using a line color

LINETYPE: delete the line using a line type
OTHERS: you can make a SELECTION here which you wish to
delete: delete ALL or HILFSGEO.
Only the active index card is valid. Therefore you cannot
combine deletion of a specified line type and line color via
menu.
3-64
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
Application:
Delete targeted construct lines or
delete targeted, particular lines in imported drawings (DXF,

IGES etc.) after reading in.
Delete line color

Delete line color
MODIFY 2 function: DELETE, SELECTION
Procedure:

Select the desired colors in the LINE color index card. To do
this, click in the affiliated control field. You can also select
several colors.
Deleting line colors
S354E31.DOC
Fig. 18622
All lines which have the selected line colors are deleted by
operating the DELETE function button.
DRAWING module
3-65
Deleting the line type

Deleting the line type
MODIFY 2 function: DELETE, SELECTION
Procedure:
Call up the LINE TYPE index card.

Select the desired line types. To do this, click in the affiliated
control field. You can also select several line types.
Index card: Deleting the line type
3-66
DRAWING module
Fig. 19570
All lines which have the selected line types are deleted by
operating the DELETE function button.
S354E31.DOC
8.
Drawing single hole, row of holes,

bolt circle
Macros with which you can create complex geometries easily are
stored in the MACROS screen menu. The individual functions are
combined under the MACROS heading.
Single holes, bolt circles and rows of holes are created with these
functions. Bolt circles and rows of holes consist of a basic element
which is multiplied. A basic element can comprise a circle/ellipse, a
rectangle/square, an oblong hole, a template or a tool drawing.
A fixed procedure must be followed when creating single holes, bolt

circles and rows of holes:
Determine the basic element and its parameter. Select the

function MACROS, PARAMETER from the MACROS control
function menu.
Then specify what you wish to create: SINGLE HOLE, ROW

OF HOLES or BOLT CIRCLE.
8.1
Defining basic element and parameter

for macro
The individual functions are displayed in the screen menu after you
have selected the MACRO control function.
You can define the following as basic geometry:
S354E31.DOC
Standard geometries such as circle/ellipse, rectangle or oblong

hole
"Circle/Ellipse" index card: to use a circle or an ellipse.
"Rectangle" index card: To use a rectangle or square.
"Oblong hole" index card: to use an oblong hole as a basic
element.
Select a particular geometry model.
Select "Model" index card. Select the user defined geometry
model which you created in the DRAWING module and have
saved with the extension VLG.
Using tool geometry.
"Tool" index card: select a tool geometry as a basic element.
DRAWING module
3-67
Determining parameters for

circle/ellipse
Function MACROS: MACROS, PARAMETER
Procedure:
Select the "Circle/ellipse" index card.

Decide whether you wish to define a circle or an ellipse by
selecting the corresponding radio button.
Index card for ELLIPSE with geometry data
Fig. 18626
Determine the following as geometry data for an ellipse:
determine radius 1 (a/2) and radius 2 (b/2) of the ellipse:
The axes of an ellipse:
(a)
(b)
Fig. 19721
"Angle of inclination": angle (), by which the ellipse should

be inclined. Example: 45 angle.
()
Example: Angle of inclination 45
3-68
DRAWING module
Fig. 19722
S354E31.DOC
Then click on the "Rotate geometry" control field if the

geometry is also to be rotated.
Example:
The ellipse is rotated
The ellipse is not rotated
Fig. 19723, 19724
Specifying parameters for

the rectangle
Confirm settings with OK.

Carry out macro definition as single hole, row of holes or bolt
circle.
Procedure:
Select the "Rectangle" index card.
Specify the parameters:

Angle of inclination: Angle (), through which the rectangle
should be rotated. Example: 45 angle.
()
Example: Angle of inclination 45
S354E31.DOC
Fig. 19725

DRAWING module
3-69
The rectangle is rotated
The rectangle is not rotated
Fig. 19726, 19727
Parameter for oblong hole

circle.
Procedure:
Select the "Oblong hole" index card.

Angle of inclination: Angle (), through which the oblong
should be rotated. Example 45 angle.
()
Angle of inclination, example 45
3-70
DRAWING module
Fig. 19728
S354E31.DOC

The oblong hole is rotated
The oblong hole is not rotated
Fig. 19729, 19730
Using a geometry model

circle.
Application: This type of geometry is particularly suited to special

geometries which you continuously use and use for various parts.
Precondition: Geometry models should be created in the
DRAWING module as a drawing and should be stored with the
extension *.VLG.
Procedure:
S354E31.DOC
Select "Model" index card.

A user defined geometry model (=drawing) for creating single
holes, rows of holes or bolt circles
DRAWING module
3-71
Using user defined geometries as models
Fig. 18627
Specifying data for model geometry:
SELECTION function button: select new model. A mask

appears in which you can select a geometry model. Only
files with the VLG ending are displayed in this mask. File
preview within the selection mask is not possible. The
geometry is displayed only in the index card in the righthand area.
"Model": The file name of the model appears in the window.
Arrow: A window opens displaying the last 5 selected

models (standard settings).
"Drawing name", "Drawing number", "Programmer", "Customer": additional information to the drawing is displayed in
this field, a requirement is that this information is defined
when the drawing is stored.
"Angle of inclination": Input the angle [degrees] through

which the geometry should be rotated (formerly: Offset
angle).
"Rotate model": Should the geometry be rotated when

creating rows of holes or bolt circles? If yes, click on the
control field.
3-72
DRAWING module

circle.
S354E31.DOC
Using tool geometry

The selected tools tool drawing is used when creating single holes,
rows of holes or bolt circles.
Precondition: the corresponding drawing must be assigned to each

tool.
Procedure:
Select TOOLS index card.
All tools managed in the data base are available in the scroll
window. The selected tools data is input at the top of the output
field.
In the lower right area of the mask you can

specify the angle of inclination.
Angle of inclination: angle (), by which the tool drawing
should be inclined.
Activate the "Rotate tool" control field.
Then click on the control field if the geometry is also to be
rotated.

circle.
In addition, construct lines and text are transferred when
using a tool geometry drawing.
Angle of inclination:
What is the "angle of inclination" of the basic element?

The angle of inclination of the basic element gives the positioning of
the basic element in relation to the X axis. Example
1
a
X
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Basic element with angle of

inclination 0.
Basic element with angle of

inclination a=30
Fig. 4759
S354E31.DOC
DRAWING module
3-73
8.2
Drawing a single hole with a macro
Function MACROS: MACROS, SINGLE HOLE
Precondition: The basic element has been defined with MACROS

PARAMETER.
Click on any point or enter the coordinates in the command

line. The center of the basic element will be set to this point.
8.3
Drawing a bolt circle with a macro
Function MACROS: MACROS, BOLT CIRCLE

Create a number of identical holes at equal pitch along an arc.
A full circle or arc can be created.
Full circle
Fig. 4757
P2
P1
Arc
Fig. 4753
Precondition: The basic element has been defined with MACRO

PARAMETER.
3-74
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
Procedure:
Decide whether to rotate the basic element.

Input number of holes.
Input start angle (a) or define angle through two points.
Input end angle (b) or define angle through two points.
Input radius or define radius through one point (P1).
Defining an arc
You need to input a starting angle and end angle in order to create
an arc.
To define a full circle
The starting and end angle should be set to zero for creating a full
circle.
When the basic element is rotated, the geometry of the single
element will be matched to the circle line.
1. Example:
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Basic element, rotated.
Basic element not rotated.

Fig. 4760
2. Example:
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Basic element with angle of inclination
Basic element with angle of inclination
(90), rotated.
(30), not rotated.

Fig. 4758
S354E31.DOC
DRAWING module
3-75
8.4
Drawing a row of holes with a macro
Function MACROS: ROW OF HOLES function

Create several identical holes at equal pitch along a straight line.
Precondition: Basic element was defined with MACRO GEOMETRY.

1
a
P2
2
P1
Fig. 4752
Procedure:
Decide whether to rotate the basic element.

Input start point (P1) or enter the coordinates.
Input end point (P2) or coordinates or the length (1) and
number of holes.
or
Input the number of holes and pitch between holes (2).
Input angle of inclination (a) or define it through points or enter
the coordinates.
Rotation of the basic element: The geometry of the single
element can be adapted to the contour of the straight line.
Example:
Fig. 1
Fig. 2
Basic element, rotated.
Basic element not rotated.

Fig. 4767
3-76
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
9.
Inputting or modifying text in a

drawing
Insert text in various fonts and font sizes into the drawing.
Select the TEXT control function to integrate text images into the
drawing. Texts are defined in two steps.
1. Specifying information about the text presentation format. The
PARAMETER function is available for this.
2. Creating text
Specifying text parameter
Function TEXT: PARAMETER

S354E31.DOC
Text height? (Standard value: 10 mm)

Ratio of width and height? (Standard value: 1)
Line spacing? (Standard value: 3 mm)
"Angle of inclination": (Standard value: 0)
0 corresponds to vertical characters, positive values effect an
inclination of the text to the right.
Angle of rotation?
0 corresponds to horizontal lines, positive values effect a
counterclockwise rotation of the text.
Reference point position?
This determines the cursor position at the text box.
Text direction?
Downwards: the characters are arranged downwards. Right:
the characters are arranged side by side.
Select function button FONT. select font.
Three fonts are available: BOLD.FNT, ISO.FNT and
ISOPROP.FNT
Select the appropriate font in which the text is to appear in the
drawing. Only fonts can be selected which have a font file (*.fnt)
available in the directory '/trumpf/data'.
User defined fonts can also be stored in this directory and used
at this stage. For a description (see "User defined textfont" in
this chapter).
Confirm your inputs with OK. The mask will close.
DRAWING module
3-77
Creating text
Function TEXT: CREATE
Select the TEXT CREATE function.

A mask appears in which you can input the desired text.
Example:
TEXT
If the text covers several lines, the end of each line must be marked
with \n. Example:
Line 1: TEXT \n Line 2: TEXT \n Line 3: TEXT
The input appears as follows in the input mask:
TEXT\nTEXT\nTEXT
Representation on the screen:

Line 1:
Line 2:
Line 3:
Modifying text
TEXT
TEXT
TEXT
Conclude text input by pressing <RETURN>.

A rectangle framing the text will appear on the screen. The
input text is invisible. Position the rectangle. The text is drawn
in the position you select by clicking.
Function TEXT: MODIFY
Precondition: The drawing contains text.

Procedure:
1. Select the TEXT, MODIFY function
2. Mark the text you wish to edit.
3. A mask containing the text parameters is opened. Modify the
text parameters and close the mask with OK.
3-78
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
Creating your own font

ToPs offers the following three fonts:
BOLD.FNT
ISO.FNT
ISOPROP.FNT
Other fonts must first be created before they can be used. The
procedure is described below:
Create a font file for each font. This must have a specific format.
Create a reference file.
The reference file and alll font files must be saved in the
\trumpf\data\ directory.
Reference file
General information
The reference file contains all font files in a specific format. Here,
the appropriate numerical value is assigned to the individual fonts.
This numerical value must be integer and should be >1000.
The values 1,2 and 3 are already assiged to the standard fonts:
ISO (1), ISOPROP(2), BOLD (3).
Thes integer values cannot be altered even via the reference file!
Format
The file extension of the reference file is: *.REF

Example: The example file has the filename Font.ref and the
detailed contents appear as follows:
1001
Schrift1.FNT
1002
Schrift2.FNT
1003
Schrift.FNT
Explanation: 1001 corresponds to the integer value assigned.

Schrift1.FNT is the filename of the font.
S354E31.DOC
DRAWING module
3-79
When creating or modifying the reference file, the sequence of

integer values need not be consecutive.
Important
The structure of the file must be preserved: An integer value must

always alternate with the filename in the following line.
Textfont file: Description of the file format

Construction
All the characters belonging to a font are defined in a font file.

The font file consists of three areas:
File header
Description blocks with groups
End of file
File header
The file includes a first area, the file header, containing general
information about the font. The contents and sequence of the file
header can be taken from the following example. Please note:
The sequence and the number of the data is not variable!
Information in the file header:
The file header begins with "#~HEADER".

The filename follows for the users information.
Then the characteristics of the cell are defined: Cellwidth,
Cellhight, Cap (area between the zero point of the cell and the
upper end of the character), base (output height of the
character)
see: Display of a character with group description.
The header information concludes with the number of character

description blocks and the ratio of cell width to cell height.
This block is concluded with the identification code "##~~".
Description blocks with

groups
The individual characters are defined in the individual description

blocks.
Each block is is subdivided into groups which describe parts of the
character. At least one group must be present per character.
In detail:
3-80
DRAWING module
Beginning of the block with "#~2" and

Specification of the ASCII code for the activation of the
character in ToPs.
There follow the groups, the group descriptions and
the end-of-block code with "##~~".
S354E31.DOC
Group description:
A group description defines a part of a character. For example, an

exclamation mark consists of two parts: ! a line and a point.
Characters consisting of a single polygonal contour are defined as
one part.
Group description begins with the identification code "#~2.1"

There follow instructions with the following contents:
"Mxy": "move the stylus to (x,y) without drawing"
"Mxy": "move the stylus to (x,y), drawing"
"C": "close the polygonal contour when the exit point (of the
first draw to) of the current group description is drawn to".
This instruction, C) must only stand at the end of a group
description.
A group description is ended with "|~".
The coordinates defined (x,y) are all with reference to the lower left
corner of the cell constructed. The base is the line on which
characters without descenders stand, for example, the character "A"
(the character "g" has a descender, for example!). By means of this
base line, the text is positioned in ToPs.
Represetation of the capital "A" in ISO.FNT
(16,96)
(84,96)
(8,64)
(56,64)
Base
(8,32)
Cellheight
(56,88)
Cap
(8,88)
(56,32)
(0,0)
Cellwidth
Cellwidth: Cell width
Cap:
Cellheight: Cell height
Base: Start line of the character

without descenders
(8,32): Coordinate values x,y
Cell area zero point - top of the

character
Example character "A" from font ISO.FNT
End of file:
S354E31.DOC
Fig. 20076
The end of the file is identified with the character sequence

"###~~~EOF".
DRAWING module
3-81
Example
Extract from font file ISO.FNT
File header
#~HEADER
Beginning of first block
iso.fnt
Filename
64
Cellwidth
120
Cellheight
96
Cap
32
Base
101
Number of characters following
0.533
Ratio of width to height
##~~
End of a block
...
Character description blocks

with group
...
#~2
Beginning of character description block
ASCII code (see: Representation of character "A"
Number of groups
#~2.1
Beginning of group
Number of following points
M 8 32
Move to (8,32)
D 8 88
Draw to (8,88)
D 16 96
Draw to (16/96)
D 48 96
Draw to (48/96)
D 56 88
etc.
D 56 32
M 56 64
D 8 64
|~
End of the group description
##~~
End of the character description block
#~2
Beginning of character description block for

next character
etc.
1
#~2.1
13
M 16 32
D 16 96
...
|~
End of the group description
##~~
End of the character description block
...
End of file
...
##~~
###~~~EOF
3-82
DRAWING module
End of font file
S354E31.DOC
10.
Function scope
Creating construction geometry
The functions for creating and deleting construction geometry are

stored in the screeen menu for the DRAWING TOOLS control
function.
Construction geometry refers to geometry elements which help you
construct drawings.
As construction geometries, you can create:
Construction lines and
construction circles
The following are also available:
Functions for measuring coordinates, lengths, radii and angles.
Geometry representation
Construction lines are always represented as infinite, construction

circles always as full circles.
Line type and colour
Construction geometry is displayed on the screen in red and line

type dotted.
10.1 Drawing construction lines

Function DRAWING TOOLS,
CONSTRUCTION LINE
The functions for creating costruction lines are:
S354E31.DOC
Function 2 POINTS: Drawing construction lines with 2 points

Function PARALLEL: Drawing parallel construction lines
Function HORIZONTAL and function VERTICAL: Drawing horizontal and vertical construct lines
Function TAN PT: Drawing tangents as construct lines on arc and
point
Function PERPENDICULAR: Drawing perpendicular construction
lines
Function ANGLE X: Drawing a construct line with a point and angle
of inclination
Function TAN2: Drawing tangents to 2 arc elements as construction lines.
Function ANGLE/LINE: Drawing a construct line with a point and
an angle to the base line
Function DIVISION: Dividing element using construction line
DRAWING module
3-83
Drawing construction lines

with 2 points
Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION LINE, 2 POINTS

P2
P1
Fig. 4725
Procedure:
Drawing parallel
construction lines
Click on first point (P1) or enter the coordinates.

Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION LINE, PARALLEL

P2
P1
Fig. 4726
Procedure:
Click on base line (P1).
Click on a point (P2) to determine on which side the parallel line
will lie.
or
If a distance was not entered, it will be established when you
define the point.
To input several distances at the same time: enter the values
one after the other. The numbers must be separated by
spaces. Do not use commas!
Example: 10 20 30.
3-84
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
Drawing horizontal and

vertical construct lines
Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION LINE, HORIZONTAL

Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION LINE, VERTICAL
P1
P1
Fig. 4727
Procedure:
Drawing tangents to an arc

element and point as a
construction line
Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION LINE, TAN PT

P2
P1
Fig. 4728
Procedure:
Click on approximately the tangent point (P1) on the arc.
Pick point (P2) on tangent or enter the coordinates
or
Input angle.
Drawing perpendicular
construction lines
Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION LINE,

PERPENDICULAR
P2
P1
Fig. 4729
Procedure:
Click on base element (P1).
Click on point (P2) on element or enter the coordinates.
S354E31.DOC
DRAWING module
3-85

with a point and angle of
inclination
Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION LINE, ANGLE X
P2
P1
Fig. 4730
Procedure:
Drawing a construct line as

a tangent to 2 arcs

or
Input angle (a) relative to X-axis.
Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION LINE, TAN 2
P2
P1
Fig. 4731
Procedure:

with a point and an angle to
the base line
Click on approximately the 1st tangent point (P1).

Click on 2nd approximate tangent point (P2).
Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION LINE,

ANGLE/ LINE
a
P1
P2
Fig. 4732
3-86
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
Procedure:
Dividing element using

construction line
Input angle (a) to basic line.

Click on base line (P1).
Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION LINE, DIVISION
P2
P1
Fig. 4733
Procedure:
Divide element between any two points (P1) and (P2) with a vertical
construction line.
or
Input bisecting factor (range: 0 - 1) and click on the first point or
enter the coordinates.
Examples: Bisecting factor 0.5 means that the construction line will
be positioned at the center of the basic element, while a factor of
0.2 means that the line will be located at a fifth of the basic element.
S354E31.DOC
DRAWING module
3-87
10.2 Drawing construction circles

CONSTRUCTION CIRCLE
The functions for creating costruction circles are:
Drawing a construct circle

with three points
Function 3 POINTS: Drawing a construct circle with three points

Function CENTER/RADIUS: Drawing a construction circle with a
center and radius
Function DIAMETER: Drawing a construction circle with diameter
Function CENTER/DIA: Drawing construction circle using center
point and diameter
Function CONCENTRIC: Drawing concentric construction circle
Function TAN2 PT: Drawing a construction circle tangential to
2 elements
Function TAN 2PTS: Drawing a construction circle tangential to an
element and two points
Function TAN 3: Drawing a construction circle tangential to
3 elements.
Function TAN CENTER: Drawing a construction circle tangential to
one element and center point
Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION CIRCLE, 3 POINTS

P1
P3
P2
Fig. 4734
Procedure:
Click on second circle point (P2) or enter the coordinates.
Click on third point on circle (P3) or enter the coordinates.
or
Input radius.
3-88
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
Drawing a construction
circle with a center and
radius
Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION CIRCLE, CENTER

P2
P1
Fig. 4735
Procedure:
or
Input radius.
circle with diameter
Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION CIRCLE,

DIAMETER
P2
P1
Fig. 4736
Procedure:
Click on second point on circle (P2) or enter the coordinates.
Drawing construction circle

using center point and
diameter

CENTER/DIA
P2
P1
Fig. 4709
S354E31.DOC
DRAWING module
3-89
Procedure:
Drawing concentric
construction circle

Pick point on circle (P2) or enter the coordinates.
or
Input diameter.

CONCENTRIC
P2
P1
Fig. 4737
Procedure:
Click on basic circle (P1).
or
enter distance: + (plus symbol) for outside of the basic circle,
- (minus symbol) for inside of the basic circle.
circle tangential to
2 elements
Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION CIRCLE, TAN2 PT
P3
P2
P1
Fig. 4738
Procedure:
Click on point (P1) on 1st element or enter the coordinates.
Click on point (P2) on 2nd element or enter the coordinates.
or
Input radius.
3-90
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
circle tangential to an
element and two points

TAN 2PTS
P2
P3
P1
Fig. 4739
Procedure
Click on approximate tangent point (P1).
or
Input radius.
circle tangential to
three elements
Function DRAWING TOOLS: CONSTRUCTION CIRCLE, TAN 3
P3
P2
P1
Fig. 4740
Procedure
Click on 2nd approximate tangent point (P2).
Click on 3rd approximate tangent point (P3).
S354E31.DOC
DRAWING module
3-91
circle tangential to one
element and center point

TAN CENTER
P1
P2
Fig. 4741
Procedure:
Click on center point (P2) or enter the coordinates.
10.3 Deleting construction geometry

DRAWING TOOLS: DELETE CONSTRUCTION GEO
This function can be used to delete existing construction geometry
partially or completely.
Procedure:
Delete construction geometry completely: Click on ALL.
Delete construction geometry partially: Click on the elements
individually.
Select the TOTAL function (foot bar) after executing this

function or change the window setting in order to reset the
screen.
3-92
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
11.
DRAWING TOOLS control
function
Measuring functions
The functions for measuring are stored in the menu for the
DRAWING TOOLS control function under the heading measuring.
The construction functions for measuring are:
Displaying the result
Measuring the distance

between 2 points
Measuring
Function 2 POINTS: Measuring the distance between 2 points.

Function POINT: Measuring the coordinates of a point
Function HORIZONTAL: Measuring the horizontal distance between two points.
Function VERTICAL: Measuring the vertical distance between
two points.
Function CIRCLE: Measuring the center point coordinates and
the radius of a circle.
Function ANGLE: Measure angle.
The dimensions are always displayed as a message.
Function DRAWING TOOLS: MEASURING, 2 POINTS

P1
P2
Fig. 4721
Procedure:
Click on first point (P1).
Click on second point (P2).
S354E31.DOC
DRAWING module
3-93
Measuring the coordinates

of a point
Measuring the horizontal

distance between two points
Function DRAWING TOOLS: MEASURING, POINT
Click on the point.
Function DRAWING TOOLS: MEASURING, HORIZONTAL
P1
P2
Fig. 4722
Procedure:
Measuring the vertical

distance between two points
Function DRAWING TOOLS: MEASURING, VERTICAL
P1
P2
Fig. 15166
Procedure:
3-94
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
Measuring the center point

coordinates and the radius
of a circle
Function DRAWING TOOLS: MEASURING, CIRCLE

P1
P1
Fig. 4723
Procedure:
Click on any point on circle (P1) or on the arc.
Measuring angle
Function DRAWING TOOLS: MEASURING, ANGLE

P2
P1
Fig. 4725
Procedure:
Click on first line (P1).
Click on second line (P2).
The angle (a) is measured.
S354E31.DOC
DRAWING module
3-95
12.
Function scope:
Printing drawings
The functions for printing drawings and screen shots are selected
in the FILE main menu. In the Pull-down-Men the functions
PRINT, FILE and PRINT, SCREEN are available.
Procedure:
File
Printing screen contents:
Screen
Select function FILE, PRINT, SCREEN.
Print
The windows printing mask appears. Select the corresponding

printer or plotter.
Start the print procedure using OK. The part of the drawing
visible in the graphics window will be printed.
or
Procedure:
File
Print
File
Select function FILE, PRINT, FILE.
Select the file whose contents are to be printed in the file

selection mask (file manager).
After the selection of a file, the contents are displayed in a

window.
Start the print procedure using PRINT. The windows printing
mask appears. Select the corresponding printer or plotter.
OK: The print procedure is aborted.
Configuring the printer and

plotter
Output to a printer or plotter is controlled by the operating system.

You can configure the printer, plotter and interface in Windows
using the program "Printer". You will find this program in the
"Control Panel" program group.
Plotter: If you are using a serial plotter, you will have to make sure
that the dip switch configuration on the plotter is compatible with the
Windows configuration for the serial interface.
For further information, refer to the documentation for your
operating system.
3-96
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
13.
File
Transfer
Transfer of NC data
The TRANSFER function is contained in the main menu under

FILE.
After selecting the function, a mask for copying or moving NC data
with the extension .LST appears.
PC-TRANSFER is a TRUMPF software product which enables data
1)
transfer to the machine control system via a data line. For detailed
information, refer to the documentation for PC-TRANSFER. This
should contain a basic explanation of data transfer.
Operating mode
The NC programs created with ToPs are copied in a special format

into a directory which the PC-TRANSFER software accesses.
Example:
The following directory structure is provided as standard:
c:\trumpf\users\masch01 (all programs for a machine, for
example, for TC 200R) or
example for TC 500R)
File format
Files are created in ToPs which have the LST format.

gearwheel.LST
4711.LST
For BOSCH-control systems:

Only such programs from the transfer directory whose names
correspond to the format can be called up by the machine.
P(4711)
The maximum possible program number is specified in your

machine file.
1)
For BOSCH TRUMAGRAPH, SIN8N and TASK500 control systems

Not required for open control systems Sinumerik SIN840 and BOSCH-control system Type 3
S354E31.DOC
DRAWING module
3-97
Copying files
The original file remains when a file is copied. A copy is created in

the target directory.
Procedure:
Moving files
Activate the COPY radio button.

The NC program file name is determined during the copy
procedure. A check is implemented to see whether the file
name is already available in the TRANSFER directory. If a file
with the same name already exists, a warning message
appears.
"Source filename": Input a file name with the ending LST or
select via file selection mask. To do this, open the selection
window via the "Arrow" symbol.
"Target directory": Select the directory into which the NC
program should be copied. \users\masch01\ is offered as
standard (i.e. the directory which has been specified for the
machine in the DATA module. For example, all files for a
machine can be copied into this directory.
Confirm your selection with OK or break off the procedure with
CANCEL.
The original file is stored in the target directory when a file is

moved. No copy is created. The file is deleted from the source
directory.
Procedure:
Activate the MOVE radio button.

The NC program file name is determined during the moving
appears.
"Source filename": Input a file name with the ending LST or
program should be moved. \users\mach01\ is offered as
machine in the DATA module). For example, all files for a
machine can be moved into this directory.
CANCEL.
Example:
c:\trumpf\teile\user1\gearwheel.LST
becomes
\users\mach01\P4711.LST
3-98
DRAWING module
S354E31.DOC
1.
The nesting processors
The nesting processors
Two nesting processors are integrated into ToPS, which nest the
part drawings (single part drawings or mini nests) on the sheet
according to various criteria.
The "extended rectangle" nesting processor first orientates

itself by the part boundaries as an encompassing rectangle.
The "free geometry" nesting processor observes the actual

geometry of the single or multiple part drawing.
Which parts are nested?

Defining a nesting job
The nesting job determines which parts are to be nested. During

nesting, all parts and their possible combinations are taken into
account which lie between the minimum and maximum part
numbers. This job can be configured with ToPs or read in from a
higher-level system (ASCII file).
Depending on the nesting job, one of two nesting results are
decided upon.
The same part is laid many times on the sheet
Simple multi-copy machining
S354E41.DOC
Fig. 19814
NEST module
4-3
Various parts are laid on the sheet
Nesting
Fig. 19813
The procedure is the same for both processes: The job data must
be communicated to the system, and ToPS will calculate the
optimal use of the sheet.
Defining nesting options
Various "nesting options" are available. Select the optimal strategy

according to the geometry of the various parts to be nested. The
basis for nesting is the part geometry or the horizontal and vertical
part boundaries. Decide yourself which method should be used for
nesting.
Displaying nesting result
The sheet and nesting result are displayed graphically on screen.

In the nesting result (file) itself, you can read how many parts were
nested in total, how many sheets were produced and much more.
The nesting logfile states why individual parts were not nested.
Nesting remainder sheets
If remainder sheets are left over after processing, these can also
be used in nesting.
Enter the remainder sheet size and number. The system will then
prioritize these sheets for laying out.
Manually influencing sheet

layout
The sheets produced by ToPs can be modified in any way. Delete

individual parts, add parts or change the position of individual
parts.
4-4
NEST module
S354E41.DOC
2.
Overview of main functions
The NEST module provides all the functions required to lay out a
sheet with identical or different parts.
Select the NEST module. The user interface will be displayed.
User Interface in the NEST Module
Fig. 19812
The FILE function in the main menu bar opens a Pull-down-Menu

offering the following sub-functions:
LOAD: Load part, mini-nest or job.
SAVE: Save the file in the current directory under the current
name.
SAVE AS: Save the file in a specific directory under a specific

name.
PRINT: Print screen contents as a graphic or print the file.
TRANSFER: Copy or move the NC program to a transfer

directory.
JOB IMPORT: Import job to the ToPs data base.
S354E41.DOC
NEW: Create mini-nest, determine sheet data or define job.
JOB EXPORT: Export job from the ToPs database to a file

(format: *.DAT).
NEST module
4-5
BACK-UP COPY: Create back-up copy of a sheet or job.
RETURN: Exit the NEST module. The ToPs initial screen is

now displayed.
3.
What is a mini-nest?
Creating and modifying mini-nests
A mini-nest is implemented in ToPS as a two-part nest. A two-part

nest is a single part which is itself nested.
All single parts are suitable whose exterior geometries can be fitted
together, e.g. L-shaped geometries. Mini-nesting is not appropriate
for rectangular parts.
Example:
TRUMPF
Ditzingen
TRUMPF
Ditzingen
Mini-nest
Application
Fig. 8234
This type of nesting is used to improve the surface usage of the part.
The nesting procedure is based on the part drawing. The part
drawing can be either a single part or a two-part nest. The nesting
processor can calculate a better sheet usage with parts sensibly
combined into two-part nests.
4-6
NEST module
S354E41.DOC
3.1
Creating a mini-nest
Mini-nests are always created automatically according to the

procedure described below.
Procedure
Functions
NEST module
Working steps:
1. Starting the NEST module.
Precondition: The part geometry is suitable for a two-part nest.
File
New
Mini nest
2. Create a new mini-nest: Select functions FILE, NEW, MINI NEST.

3. Select a single part drawing from the file selection mask
(format: GEO) from which the mini-nest is to be created.
4. Specify the frame conditions for the mini nest.
What should the minimum distance between the exterior
contours of the single parts be?
If this distance is entered, nesting cannot be carried out at
the parting cut width for processing with common parting
cuts. Use the function MODIFY, DISTANCE from the MINI
NEST menu for this.
Function button OK
5. Confirm the data with OK.

The two-part nest of the single part is carried out and saved
automatically: (single part name).MTL
The mini nest created is displayed in the drawing window of
the mask. The mini nest consists of the original (magenta) and
a copy (white).
S354E41.DOC
NEST module
4-7
3.2. Modifying mini-nests

Functions
NEST
module
Working steps:
Precondition: A mini nest is available

A newly created mini nest can be modified or an available mini
nest loaded and modified.
For modifying a new mini nest, omit working steps 2 and 3.
File
Load
Mini nest
MINI NEST menu
Save
2. Load mini-nest to be modified: Select functions FILE, LOAD,

MINI NEST.
3. Select the mini nest drawing to be modified from the file
selection mask (format: MTL).
4. The MINI NEST menu is displayed. Modify the mini nest with
the available functions.
5. Save the drawing of the modified mini nest.
or
Save as
4-8
NEST module
S354E41.DOC
The following functions are available for the modification of a
defined mini nest:
Manually modifying mini nest
Fig. 19810
MINI NEST menu
The MINI NEST menu is displayed as soon as a mini nest is

created or an available mini nest loaded.
Automatic
mini nest creation
Function AUTOMATIC, CREATE, START

This function gives the option of a completely new suggestion
generated automatically by the system. If modifications have been
made to the mini nest, these will be cancelled.
Manually modifying
mini nest
Function MANUAL, MODIFY

Mini nests can be modified like individual geometry elements. The
following options are available:
Function MOVE: Moving single parts of the mini nest.
Function ROTATE: Rotating a single part of the mini nest.
Function DISTANCE: Change distance between the two single
parts.
Drawing functions
Function MANUAL, DRAWING TOOLS

The MINI NEST menu contains additional functions for
measurement and functions for creating construction lines. These
functions should support you in defining modifications.
S354E41.DOC
NEST module
4-9
Move and rotate mini nest

Procedure
Precondition: Only mini nests stored as files can be modified
(format: MTL).
Modifications to mini nests are defined as follows:
Specify the type of modification: Move or Rotate.
Define the modification procedure: Enter reference point for
movement or angle for rotation.
Click on the copy (white part) or mark part with a box.
The mini nest consists of the original and a copy of the
single part. Modifications are always made to the copy. If
you click on the original part, an error message will be
displayed: "Original may not be altered.".
Moving geometry
via 2 points
P1
P3
P2
Fig. 4954
Procedure:
4-10
NEST module
Select modify option MOVE, 2 POINTS

Click on any geometry element in the original or mark complete
S354E41.DOC
Moving geometry
horizontally
MODIFY function: MOVE, HORIZONTAL
P1
P2
P3
Fig. 4955
Procedure:
Moving geometry vertically

or
enter distance:
Click on any geometry element in the original or mark
P1
P3
P2
Fig. 15167
Procedure:
S354E41.DOC

or
enter distance:
box (P3).
NEST module
4-11
Rotating geometry about

two points
P1
-90
P2
P3
Fig. 4958
Rotation about two points is equivalent to rotating and moving the

element at the same time.
Procedure:
Rotating geometry about a

centre point
Select modification option: ROTATE, 2 POINTS

Input angle of rotation, for example, -90.
Click on any geometry element or mark with a box (P3).
MODIFY function: ROTATE, CENTRE
P2
P1
-90
Fig. 4957
Procedure:
4-12
NEST module
Select modification option: ROTATE, CENTRE

Click on centre point of rotation (P1) or enter the coordinates.
Input angle of rotation, for example -90.
box (P2).
S354E41.DOC
Placing parts at a defined distance

These functions must be used to place parts which should
be processed with common parting cuts at a defined
distance (parting cut width).
Modifying part distance via

2 points
MODIFY function: DISTANCE, 2 POINTS
Fig. 5990
This function is employed to arrange parts at a defined distance to

each other simply.
Procedure:
Enter distance: Example 0.1500
Modifying part distance by

rotating part
MODIFY function: DISTANCE, ROTATE
Fig. 5800
This function is employed to arrange parts at a defined distance to

each other simply and rotate them at the same time.
Procedure:
Click on first geometric element (1).
Click on second geometric element (2).
Enter distance: Example 0.1500
S354E41.DOC
NEST module
4-13
3.3
Using construction geometry
The functions in the MINI NEST, DRAWING TOOLS menu

correspond to the functions in the DRAWING, DRAWING TOOLS.
For a detailed description see: DRAWING module: "Creating
construction geometry".
Use the construction geometries in order to define modifications
exactly.
Function scope
Construction geometries are geometry elements which help you

modify mini nests.
The measurement functions are used to check the position of the
mini nest.
The functions for deleting construction geometry are also stored in
the screen menu for the DRAWING TOOLS control function.


type dotted.
4-14
NEST module
S354E41.DOC
4.
Define job
Defining and modifying nesting job
To carry out a sheet layout the system must be told which parts
and how many of them are to be nested and which conditions
should apply. A nesting job is created for this. The system then
calculates the optimal sheet layout using the nesting processors.
4.1. Defining nesting job

Functions
NEST
module
File
New
Job
Working steps:
Precondition: The geometry data of the single part drawings and
the min nests must be stored in the system.
2. Define nesting job.
Make the following selections: FILE, NEW, JOB. The "Job
management" mask is displayed.
3. Specify the job data in the frame of the job management.
Enter the job name.
Select a part to be nested.
1. Option: Click on the "Part name" arrow. The file
selection mask is opened.
2. Option: Select a part from a presorted parts pool:
select function button SELECT. Define search criteria.
Decide for this part whether a mini nest (if available)
should be used, whether the part can be rotated and
much more.
Function button
ENTRY
Function button
OK
S354E41.DOC
3. Add part to nesting job. The data block is selected in the lower
display window.
The nesting job now consists of one part.
Select further parts and enter them one by one in the nesting
job.
4. As soon as all parts have been added to the nesting job,
confirm the defined job with OK.
NEST module
4-15
Specifying job data

File
New
To configure a new nesting job, select the functions: FILE, NEW,

JOB.
The definition of job data is supported by the "job management"
mask.
Job
"Job management" mask
Fig. 19802E
Define the parameter for a job:
"Job": Enter job name or select an existing job via the ">"
(arrow) symbol.
The file name may have up to 35 characters. The job name
may comprise numbers, letters or a combination of both. Full
stops, spaces, blanks and special characters such as . ^. are
not permitted.
4-16
NEST module
DELETE: Delete a single job or all jobs stored in the data

base. Select the corresponding radio button in the submask.
COPY: Copies a complete job. Enter the new job name in
the sub-mask. Confirm with OK.
Application: Use existing job data to create new jobs. In the
copied job you can modify data or simply expand the job.
S354E41.DOC
"Part name" Enter the part name with extension or select the
"arrow" symbol. Select the desired file from the file selection
mask.
Parts without processing (format: GEO) but also processed
parts (format: GMT) can be loaded.
A part with processing is loaded as a circumscribed rectangle,
the outside contour processing lying in the circumscribed
rectangle. Note this when defining web widths and edges.
SELECT: Define search criteria for parts.

If the single part drawing has been saved with particular
"characteristics", then files can be searched for specifically
using these criteria.
The search criteria are:
"Job name". "machine", "drawing number", "customer
name", "material ident. number" with "material thickness",
"search path", "file selection" or details of the "part number"
(min., max).
The search process is started via SEARCH and aborted
via CANCEL.
"Part path": The file name with path details is entered in the
display window.
"numbers of parts", "min." - "max.": Enter minimum and

maximum number of parts which are to be manufactured. The
number of parts can be specified as a four-figure value.
"Customer": Enter customer name.
"Entry from Geo file": Should the information be read from the
GEO file? (see: Storing drawings with drawing data.
Active check button: the information is read.
Non-active check button: the information is ignored. The
functions "mini nest" and "rotate" are activated.
"Mini-nest": Does a mini-nest exist for this part?
Active check button: Mini-nest is taken into consideration
during nesting. If there is no mini-nest, the part is laid out
on the sheet as a single part.
Non-active check button: Mini-nest is not taken into
consideration during nesting.
The "mini nest" check button cannot be activated when
entering a GMT file.
S354E41.DOC
"Rotate": should the part be rotated?

"At will": Parts are rotated according to the angle
increments selected.
Rolling direction: Part is laid out on the sheet according to
the rolling direction selected.
NEST module
4-17
Note: If a rolling direction has been selected for a part, this

part will only be laid on a remainder sheet without rolling
direction if the standard sheet was also defined without
rolling direction.
"Suitable for CPC": Should the part be processed with common

parting cuts?
Active check button: The part is suitable for processing with
common parting cuts.
This part can now be laid out on the sheet in groups or in a
specific number in the X and Y directions.
"Group/number of parts": in X and Y direction. This

function is used to define that parts are laid out in a
versatile area during sheet layout, with specification of the
number of rows (X) and columns (Y).
Example: Sheet layout with parts groups
Fig. 15454
Example: Sheet layout without parts groups
Fig. 15455
4-18
NEST module
S354E41.DOC
Input field "only for "Free geometry nester"":

These specifications apply only for nesting with the FREE
GEOMETRY function.
"Priority": Each part can be assigned a place within a

sequence of priority. The lower the place value within the
priority sequence, the sooner the part will be selected by
the system for sheet layout.
The place value is defined via a number: the larger the
number, the lower the priority of the part.
Example: 1 = top priority, 5 = lowest priority. A part with a
priority of 3 will be placed after a part with a priority of 1 for
sheet layout, but before a priority 5 part.
If parts have the same priority they are sorted according to
their area.
"Angle" (only for FREE GEOMETRY): Enter the angle

increment through which the part may be rotated during
nesting.
The smaller the angle increment selected, the longer the
system will require for sheet layout.
For angle increments which cannot be divided by 90, the
angular positions 90, 180 and 270 are created in
addition.
Example: Sheet layout with angle increment of 30 for all
parts
Fig. 15456
S354E41.DOC
NEST module
4-19
Example: Sheet layout with angle increment 90 for all parts
Fig. 15457
Note:
A part will not be rotated even though you have defined an
angle increment if you have
set the "Rotate" function to NO
or
defined a rolling direction (see: Save the settings in the
"Job management" mask or the drawing with drawing data
mask: Function FILE, CHARACTERISTICS)
A sheet result will generally not be improved if a large part is
rotated with a small angle increment during sheet layout.
Active machine and active

material
In the DRAWING module, it is possible to save each drawing with

characteristics. If the drawing has been assigned to a particular
machine and a particular material, the "Machine" and "Material"
entries will be displayed here. Otherwise, the display fields remain
empty.
Selection window
In the selection window, the parts of a nesting job are displayed.

All information defined for each part is also displayed.
4-20
NEST module
S354E41.DOC
Using the preview window
As for the file selection mask, you can also view the geometry of
the part with part size here. You can thus check which parts are
defined in the nesting job.
Precondition: A nesting job has been defined or an existing nesting
job has been loaded. The filenames of single parts with details are
displayed in the selection window.
Procedure:
Move the mouse cursor to the mask scroll window.
With the right mouse button, click on a data block.
A preview window is opened: The part geometry and part size
are displayed. As soon as the mouse is moved within the
preview window, the current coordinates are displayed.
The functions in the mask footer

Function button
ENTRY
When you have defined all the data for a part, this function is used
to enter the data for the part in the job list. The data block is
transferred to the lower window.
Function button
DELETE
Deletes a data block for a part from the job list.
Function button
IMPORT
Import data block or job. The job is written to the database.
Function button
EXPORT
Export data block or job. The job is read from the database and
written to a file.
Select the data block in the selection window in the lower mask
area.
File name (jobname).dat.
File name (jobname).dat.

Function button
OK
Function button
CANCEL
S354E41.DOC
End nesting job.
Cancel procedure.
NEST module
4-21
4.2
Functions
NEST
module
Modify nesting job
Working steps:
Precondition: The geometry data of the single part drawings and

the mini nests must be stored in the system.
File
2. Load nest job to be modified:

Make the following selections: FILE, LOAD, JOB.
Load
3. Select the desired job in the mask.

An overview of all the laid-out sheets belonging to the job will
be displayed.
Job
JOB Menu:
Function MANAGEMENT,
MODIFY
4. Modifying nesting job data. Select the functions:

MANAGEMENT, MODIFY in the JOB menu.
The "Job management" mask is displayed. Data for the
selected nesting job are displayed in the scroll window.
Select data block for the desired part.
Modify entries and settings.
or
delete part from the job (function button DELETE).
or
Add a new part.
For a description of the "Job management" mask, see:
Specifying job data
Function button OK
4-22
NEST module
5. Confirmation of the modified job data saves the nesting job at

the same time.
Important: If the job is to be saved under a different name, the
job must be copied. Select the COPY function button in the
"Job management" mask. Enter the job name in the "New job
name" entry field. Otherwise the job will be overwritten.
S354E41.DOC
4.3
Calling up nesting job information
The INFORMATION control function is to be found in the JOB

screen menu. The single functions belonging to it enable you to
call up information on single parts and the nesting job.
INFORMATION control
function
JOB screen menu
Fig. 19805
Overview of functions:
Function SINGLE PART hide: Mask out single part.

Only active if all sheets of the job are displayed (sheet
overview).
Function DISPLAY FILENAME: Display the file name of a part

or sheet.
Function DISPLAY DRAWING. Only active with single sheet

view.
Function DISPLAY RESULT: Display nesting result. Only

active if the sheet overview is displayed.
Function DISPLAY LOGFILE: Displaying the nesting logfile
Function DISPLAY WASTE: Display waste from sheet.
S354E41.DOC
Function SINGLE PART DISPLAY: Display single part with

geometry.
Function DELETE PART: Delete part. Only active if a single

sheet is displayed (single sheet).
NEST module
4-23
Information on the single part

Display single part
INFORMATION function: SINGLE PART, DISPLAY

The functions are available with the sheet overview as well as
single sheet view.
These functions enable the display of parts.
Display single part: Click on part with the mouse cursor.

Display several parts: Surround the parts with a box with the
mouse cursor.
The display varies:
Hide single part
For sheet overview: Identified single parts represented in

various colors as encompassed rectangles are displayed with
their geometry.
For single sheet view. All parts of the identified part type are
displayed in color.
INFORMATION function: SINGLE PART, HIDE
Precondition: This function is only active in the sheet overview.

Click on single parts to be masked out. The identified parts are no
longer displayed on the sheet.
Note: The parts are not deleted from the sheet!
4-24
NEST module
S354E41.DOC
Nesting job information

Display file name
INFORMATION function: DISPLAY, FILENAME
Precondition: A sheet overview or single sheet display is present.

Display the file name of a part or sheet.
Display part name: Click on part.
Display sheet name: Click on sheet border.
Display drawing name
Function INFORMATION: DISPLAY, DRAWING

Select the name of the drawing.
This function is only active if the single sheet view is selected.
Display and print nesting

result
Function INFORMATION: DISPLAY, RESULT

The nesting result for the selected nesting job is displayed.
In the sub-mask, the nesting result can be read and printed.
see: Description of "Nesting result and Nest logfile".
Display and print nesting

log file
Function INFORMATION: DISPLAY, LOGFILE

The nesting logfile for the selected nesting job is displayed.
In the sub-mask, the nesting logfile can be read and printed.
Sheet waste display
Function INFORMATION: DISPLAY, WASTE

Display waste from sheet.
Click on the sheet border or enter the sheet name. The waste will
be displayed as a message.
S354E41.DOC
NEST module
4-25
5.
Creating and modifying sheet layout
The NEST module enables you to nest parts and lay them out on
one or more sheets or modify the layout of one or more sheets.
Sheet
layout options
The following options for doing this are available:

1. Option: Define a new nesting job (see: "Defining nesting job")
or load an available nesting job and create a sheet layout (see:
"Overview of procedure" on the following page).
2. Option: Load an available nesting job, modify job data (see:
"Modify nesting job") and a get the system to calculate a
completely new sheet layout.
3. Option: Load an available, laid-out sheet and manually modify
the sheet layout (see: "Manually modify sheet layout").
Nest parts: The nesting

processors
The programming system has two nesting processors.
NEST module
As standard: Control function ENLARGED RECT.RECTANGLE (in full: ENLARGED RECTANGLE)

The standard nesting processor integrated in ToPs orientates
itself according to the part borders during part nesting.
4-26
Option: Control function FREE GEOMETRY

This processor can orientate itself to any contour geometry
("Free nesting processor")
S354E41.DOC
Overview of procedure
Functions
Working steps:
NEST
module
Precondition: The nesting job must be defined.

2. Load a job via FILE, LOAD, JOB or accept the current job.
The current job name is displayed in the left display field of
the information and selection bar.
Incidentally: Click on the left display field with the mouse
cursor. This is another means of selecting a job.
The JOB screen menu appears.
File
Load
Job
Menu JOB:
Function ENLARGED RECT.
3. Select nesting processor according to how the parts are to be

nested.
or
Function FREE GEOMETRY
Function PARAMETER
4. Specify nesting parameters

Sheet data,
Options (e.g. fill last sheet, nest inner and outer surfaces
equally etc.),
Parameter for Common Cuts,
Parameter for Remaining sheets
Function START
5. Starting the NEST process

ToPs automatically calculates the optimal sheet layout.
The nesting result is displayed. Once the nesting result is
confirmed, an overview of the laid-out sheets is displayed.
Each part type is displayed in a particular color and the
geometry as an encompassing rectangle.
Click on a sheet. The single sheet with the exact geometries
of the single parts can be viewed.
S354E41.DOC
NEST module
4-27
5.1
Nesting parts as "Enlarged rectangles"

Menu JOB: ENLARGED
RECT.
Select th ENLARGED RECT. control function from the JOB menu.

Two functions are available in the variable function area:
Function PARAMETER
Function START: The nesting process is started directly with

the set parameters.
Function PARAMETER: Specify nesting parameters (sheet
data, options, parameters for Common parting Cuts or
parameters for remainder sheets).
Specify the parameters by which the system should nest the parts.
The nesting parameters are presented in four index cards:
Index card "Sheet data": Specifying sheet data.

Index card "Options": specify further options, e.g. should the
last sheet be filled or should the outer and inner areas be taken
into account during nesting etc.
Index card "CPC" (Common parting Cuts): Details for the
nesting of parts for sheet processing with Common parting Cuts.
Index card "Remainder sheets": Use remainder sheets for
nesting.
For a description of the index cards, see: "Specifying parameters".
Function START
Starting the nesting process.

The system calculates a suggested sheet layout using the specified
parameters and displays an overview of the laid-out sheet on the
screen.
All parts are represented on the sheets as circumscribed
rectangles. Pick out a sheet: The sheet is displayed with the
detailed geometries.
The system creates a nesting result including a nest log file.
The nest result contains information such as how many sheets and
how many parts were nested, how high the cuts per sheet is and a
nesting log detailing why a part was not nested (see: "Nesting
result and Nesting log").
4-28
NEST module
S354E41.DOC
5.2
Nest parts freely by contour geometry

JOB menu: FREE
GEOMETRY
Select the FREE GEOMETRY control function from the JOB menu.
Two functions are available in the variable function area:
Function PARAMETER
Function START: The nesting process is started directly with

the set parameters.
Function PARAMETER: Specify nesting parameters (sheet
data, options, parameters for Common parting Cuts or
parameters for remainder sheets).
Specify the parameters by which the system should nest the parts.
The nesting parameters are presented in four index cards:
Index card "Sheet data": specify sheet data.

Index card "Options": specify further options, e.g. should the
last sheet be filled or should the outer and inner areas be taken
into account during nesting etc.
Index card "CPC" (Common parting Cuts): Details for the nesting
of parts for sheet processing with Common parting Cuts.
Index card "Remainder sheets": Use remainder sheets for
nesting.
For a description of the index cards, see: "Specifying parameters".
Function START
Starting the nesting process.

The system calculates a suggested sheet layout using the specified
parameters and displays an overview of the laid-out sheets on the
screen.
All parts are represented on the sheets as circumscribed rectangles.
Pick out a sheet: The sheet is displayed with the detailed geometries.
The system creates a nesting result including a nest log file.
The nesting result contains information such as how many sheets
and how many parts were nested, how high the cuts per sheet is
and a nesting log detailing why a part was not nested (see:
"Nesting result and Nesting log").
S354E41.DOC
NEST module
4-29
5.3
Determining parameters
Determining sheet data

Index card "Sheet data"
Determining sheet data
Fig. 19804
The following definitions are required:
NEST module
"Sheet path": In which directory should the sheet be saved?

The sheet path can be entered or selected via the selection
window ("arrow" symbol).
4-30
"Sheet name": Enter the sheet name. The job name is

suggested for the sheet name as a default.
The sheet name may have up to 35 characters. The sheet
name may comprise numbers, letters or a combination of both.
Full stops, spaces, umlauts and special characters such as . ^.
not permitted.
"Material" Determining material data.

"Identification": Select the "arrow" symbol. A selection
window is displayed. Select the material desired. The data
are transferred to the display fields.
If worked parts (format: GMT) are nested, the first entered
GMT file determines the material for the nesting job.
S354E41.DOC
"Edges": Define sheet edges. If the edges selected are smaller

than the web width, the system will automatically employ the
web width.
top
left
right
bottom
Sheet edges on the example of TC 500R, working range X 2500 mm
Fig. 9450
"Spacing": Determine the spacing width in the X and Y

direction. Spacing is the distance between the part drawings in
the X and Y- directions.
Direction of rolling
Control field "Note" active: The rolling direction of the sheet
is taken into consideration during sheet layout.
Radio button "X direction" or Radio button "Y direction"
active: The sheet may have a rolling direction in the X or Y
direction. Select the corresponding switch.
Rolling direction X: Part is rotated by 180 or not at all.
Rolling direction Y: Part is rotated by 90 or 270.
Start corner: at which corner of the sheet should sheet layout

begin? Front left or back left, front right or back right. As seen
from: behind the machine.
Functions in the mask foot

Function button
OK
Function button
CANCEL
S354E41.DOC
Press OK to confirm the general conditions defined. The data are

stored. You return to the previous screen.
The procedure is aborted.
NEST module
4-31
Defining options
Index card "Options"
Defining options
Fig. 19815
As standard in ToPS, different nesting options can be chosen.

These must be defined at the start of nesting. Select the strategy
suitable for your part spectrum to be nested.
Variants:
Fill the last sheet.

Should last sheet be filled with the parts defined in the job or
not?
This situation arises only if the Min. parts quantity is smaller
than the Max. parts quantity defined. The maximum number of
parts is not exceeded.
"Internal surface": Should the area within the parts be filled

with other parts?
Radio button active: Freeing of inner area of part. The inner
area of a part is designated free to be laid-out with parts.
Select this strategy for parts with large inner areas.
1 Inner area
4-32
NEST module
Fig. 4776
S354E41.DOC
The inner areas are designated free in several planes. Example:

Laying several rings in recurrently available inner areas.
Deep nesting
Fig. 9121
"External areas": Specify:

"Do not use": No outer areas will be used.
"Use by part": The outer areas of parts are designated free
to be laid-out with parts. Select this strategy for parts with
large outer areas.
1 Outer area of a part
Fig. 4778
"Use by sheet": A remainder area beyond the part

boundaries is allocated for laying out with parts. Select this
strategy if a mixture of large parts and many small parts is
to be nested.
1 Outer sheet area
S354E41.DOC
Fig. 12297
NEST module
4-33
"Calculate start part by":

The nesting processor always begins nesting with the part
defined as the start part. You determine the criterion for the
selection of the start part:
Combinations
"Area": Part with the largest area

Extension in the X direction: part with the largest extension
in the X direction
Extension in the Y direction: part with the largest extension
in the Y direction
Part with the largest extension in the X or Y direction: part
with the largest edge lengths.
Combination of the strategies is possible.

Examples:
Nest sheetwise using inner and outer areas.

The inner areas of parts and the outer areas of the sheet are
allocated for laying out with parts during nesting.
Nest partwise using inner and outer areas.

The inner areas of parts and the outer areas of parts are
allocated for laying out with parts during nesting.
The more strategies are selected, the greater will be the

processing time.

Function button
OK
Function button
CANCEL
4-34

NEST module
S354E41.DOC
Defining parameters for Common parting Cuts

"CPC" index card
Parameters for Common parting Cuts
Fig. 19816E
Specify:
"Activate common parting cuts": Activate check button if parts

are to be laid out on common parting cuts.
"X distance" and "Y distance": Enter the tool width here or via
SELECT choose the tool for processing two neighboring
contours simultaneously.
"Minimum edge length": what is the shortest edge length a part

must have in order that the part is subjected to common
parting cuts?

Function button
OK
Function button
CANCEL
S354E41.DOC

NEST module
4-35
Nesting parts on remainder sheets

Index card "Remainder
sheets"
Nesting remainder sheets
Fig. 19817E
You can define the following data in this mask:
"Use remainder sheets": First define whether remainder sheets

should be used for nesting.
Then determine the other parameters.
"Material identification" and sheet dimensions: This is where

you define the length and width of the remainder sheet. Type
and thickness of material are set according to the standard
sheet.
Selecting any particular sheet geometry via the "Filename"
display window will automatically trigger determination of the
sheet length and width. The system enters the values in the
fields for X and Y.
"Random sheet geometry": If the function ELONGATEDRECTANGLE is selected, this parameter is not activated.
The Free Geometry nesting processor can nest parts with
random geometries. Random sheet geometries must be
created and saved in the DRAWING module. When drawing
sheet geometries it must be ensured that inner and outer
contours are closed.
4-36
NEST module
Non-active check button: The remainder sheet has no

random geometry. You use the specifications in the
"Material Identification" fields (sheet length, width and
thickness) to define a rectangular remainder sheet.
S354E41.DOC
Active check button: the sheet has a random geometry

(and is saved as a drawing). Select the drawing of the
sheet via the "arrow" symbol. The path and file name will
be displayed in the "file name" field. The sheet dimensions
are taken on in the "Material identification" and "X, Y, Z
dimensions" fields.
Nesting of remainder sheets with random sheet geometry
(format: GEO) is only supported with the FREE GEOMETRY
function. When nesting is with the ELONGATED
RECTANGLE function, these remainder sheets are not
nested. The nesting log shows these sheets as non-nested
sheets.
Sheets with random geometry are displayed as
circumscribing rectangles in the NEST module in the overall
view of the nested sheets and when loading in the
TECHNOLOGY module.
"File name": The sheet drawing can be loaded for remainder

sheets with random geometry. The file name is displayed with
the path details.
"Observe rolling direction": Should the rolling direction of the

sheet be taken into account during sheet nesting or not?
Once the check button has been activated, select the
direction:
"X direction" or "Y direction": The sheet may have a rolling
direction in the X or Y direction. Select the corresponding
radio button (switch with colour identification)
Rolling direction in X direction: Part is rotated by 180 or
not at all.
Rolling direction in Y direction: Part is rotated by 90 or
270.
This is only the case if rolling direction observation is
selected for the sheet and for the part. If the functions
"Rotate" and "Random" are selected together, then the
rolling direction is unimportant.
Screen display of rolling direction on the sheet:
S354E41.DOC
No rolling direction selected: (*)

Rolling direction in X direction: (-), horizontal line
Rolling direction in Y direction: (|), vertical line
NEST module
4-37
The lower area of the mask is split into two areas, each with a
scroll window:
On the left the remainder sheets are managed, and on the right the
remainder sheets are assigned to a job.
Sheets can be moved between the two windows by using the
"arrow to the right" () and "arrow to the left" () switches.
Left-hand mask area
Definition of remainder sheets.
"Location": Where are the remainder sheets stored?

"Number": How many sheets of this type are available?
Confirm the entries with the ENTER function button in the mask
footer. The data is entered in the left-hand scroll window.
Data in the scroll window:
"Location": Storage location of the sheets
"Number": Number of remainder sheets which are managed at
this storage location.
"Length": Length (X dimension) of the sheets
"Width": Width (Y dimension) of the sheets
As soon as a data block in the left display field is selected, the
other function buttons in the mask footer are activated.
INCREASE: The number of remainder sheets can be
increased.
DELETE: The data block you have selected will be deleted.
Right-hand mask area
Prepare remainder sheets for job.

"Priority": Define sequential order of remainder sheets for
sheet layout. If remainder sheets have the same priority, they
will be assigned on a random basis.
Priority is only evaluated where the free geometry nesting
processor is used. The Rectangle nesting processor lays out
remainder sheets according to the sequence in which the parts
were entered.
"Number": How many remainder sheets are to be used for this
job?
Data in the scroll window:
"Location": Storage location of the sheets
"Number": Number of remainder sheets which are managed at
this storage location.
"Priority": Sequential order of the remainder sheets
"Length": Length (X dimension) of the sheets
"Width": Width (Y dimension) of the sheets
4-38
NEST module
S354E41.DOC
The following functional buttons are available for the right-hand

mask area:
MODIFY: Save data altered in the selected data block.
INCREASE: Increase number of remainder sheets which are to
be used.
DEDUCT: Deduct entered number of remainder sheets nested
from the total number of remainder sheets.
Functions in the mask footer

Function button
OK
Function button
CANCEL
S354E41.DOC

NEST module
4-39
5.4
Functions
NEST
module
Manual sheet layout
Working steps:
1. Start the NEST module.
Precondition: The parts to be nested must be available.
File
2. Load a new sheet via FILE, NEW, SHEET.
New
Note: The current screen content is deleted. The rectangle of a

new, empty sheet is displayed.
Sheet
File
Load
Load another
part.
3. Load another part.

A single part (format: GEO), a mini nest (format: MTL) or a
worked single part (format: GMT) can be loaded as a part.
Select a part from the file selection mask.
The part hangs automatically with the part zero point at the
mouse cursor.
The current screen contents, e.g. the loaded sheet, are
retained.
Place the part
4. Place the part on the sheet:

Enter target position or angle, or place with the mouse.
Menu SHEET
5. With the aid of the functions in the SHEET menu, control

function MODIFY, the part can be laid on the sheet many times.
If a sheet layout with different parts is required, working steps 3
to 5 must be repeated.
Control function MODIFY
File
6. Save laid out sheet
Save as
4-40
NEST module
S354E41.DOC
5.5
Modifying sheet layout
Functions
NEST
module
Working steps:
Precondition: Sheets with nested parts or mini nests have been

produced.
File
Load
Sheet
Menu SHEET:
Control function MODIFY 2
2. Load laid out part: Select functions FILE, LOAD, SHEET.

The file selection mask (file manager) will then appear.
All files with the format TAF available in the current directory
will be displayed.
If the required sheet is in another directory, you can change
directories using the symbol *.
3. Modify sheet layout.
Several functions are available in this menu with which you
can modify e.g. the part position, number of parts or distance
between parts of available parts.
For a detailed description see: Functions: Modify sheet
layout.
If a new part is to be added, select:
Function FILE, LOAD, ADD PART to load a single part without
processing (format: GEO) or a worked single part
(format: GMT) or a mini nest (format: MTL).
Select the desired file format (radio button) from the file
selection mask. The files available in the current directory are
displayed. Select the part and confirm your selection with OK.
Place the part hanging from the mouse cursor on the sheet.
Save
4. Save the drawing of the modified sheet layout.
or
Save as
Calculating the nesting log
S354E41.DOC
5. The nesting result is automatically recalculated by the system.
NEST module
4-41
Modification of sheet layouts is via functions available in the two
menus of control function MODIFY and control function MODIFY 2.
Functions of control function MODIFY
Fig. 19818
Menu functions:
4-42
NEST module
MOVE PART: for modifying the position of the parts and

copying parts
NUMBER OF PARTS, PART DISTANCE: arrange a defined
number of parts by row and column (multi-copy processing) or
lay out parts at a defined distance or rotate through a defined
angle.
REFERENCE POINT: for changing the position marked with
the mouse within the part.
CPC DISTANCE: for placing the parts at a defined distance for
common parting cuts.
DELETE PART: Deleting parts
UNDO: Undoes the current last action.
S354E41.DOC
Control function MODIFY 2
Functions of control function MODIFY 2
Fig. 19819
Menu functions:
S354E41.DOC
CUT: Cut out a part to be moved.

PASTE: Reinsert part.
NEST module
4-43
Modifying part position, part number and

part distance
Overview of procedure:
Select the modifying option
1. Step: Select the modifying option: Do you wish to modify the

original or create a copy?
Select modification function
2. Step: Select the modification function by how the part is to be

modified: whether you want the part to be moved, placed
according to the quantity, placed in a defined area, placed at a
defined distance, or rotated through a defined angle when
placed.
Laying out the sheet
3. Step: The nested parts are placed on the sheet. Terminate

action by pressing END.
The next few pages describe these steps in detail.
The descriptions refer for simplicitys sake to "a part". You
can, of course, in practice mark more than one part for
copying, moving etc.
How are parts marked?
There are several methods of marking a part or parts:
NEST module
Double click on the left-hand mouse button: the part will be

moved directly with the mouse.
4-44
A simple click with the left-hand mouse button: the part will be
displayed in magenta.
Group several parts in a box: parts are marked simultaneously.
S354E41.DOC
Step 1: Select the modifying option.

Move original or create copy
Select from the selection window whether to modify the original

or create a copy of the part: Select the symbol "" (arrow) or
click in the display field "Copy/Original".
General rule:
Function ORIGINAL: The identified part hangs directly on
the cursor and can be moved. No copies are created.
With an original part, you can define neither an area nor a
quantity nor a part distance in X and Y directions: The
functional buttons are shown as hatched.
Function COPY: A copy of the identified part is moved
directly with the cursor or nested. You can create copies
without the original being modified. When the part has
been saved, it remains attached to the cursor.
Identify part, define angle
Follow the instructions in the command line.
or
Move part, define distance
and repeat factor
Identify a part by clicking with the mouse or via the box.

The part will be displayed in magenta. Confirm your choice
with OK. If identified via a double click on the mouse, the
part is moved immediately by the mouse.
Define angle which is to be taken into consideration for the
subsequent actions, and then
select modification function.
If you want to move a part, activate one of the MOVE PART

functions immediately after selecting ORIGINAL or COPY:
(see: Step 2: "Select modification function".
enter distance:
The defined distance refers not to the distance between
the parts but to the distance the part is moved.
In combination with functions HORIZONTAL or VERTICAL:
Distance with a + sign means that the part is moved to the
right or upwards, whereas a - sign means that the part is
moved to the left or downwards.
A distance can always be defined with the 2 POINTS
function.
If parts are to be laid out beside one another at a particular
distance, the distance between the parts must be added to
the X or Y dimension of the part.
S354E41.DOC
Defining repetition factor.
NEST module
4-45
Step 2: select modification function.

Moving part
Select functions for MOVE PART.
2 POINTS: Moving part using 2 defined points (reference point

and reference target position). The part does not hang from the
mouse cursor.
AT WILL: part can be moved at will in X or Y direction. The part
hangs from the mouse cursor.
HORIZONTAL: Part can only be moved in X direction.
VERTICAL: part can only be moved in Y direction.
Please observe the instructions in the command line when using

these functions.
Define number of parts
Menu SHEET, MODIFY:Select the functions for NUMBER OF

PARTS: AREA or QUANTITY.
AREA function: The number of parts can be determined by

defining an area on the sheet (drawing a box).
Define the parameters in the mask:
Absolute part distance: You can define the part distance in

X and Y direction as an absolute value. Inputs are made in
[mm], without + or - sign. Absolute part distance means
that the reference point is the starting point.
Example: Part distance is 10 mm.

Absolute part distance: 15 mm. New part distance: 15 mm.
"Lay out area": Parts can be arranged in different ways in

laying out an area.
Left-hand window: Parts are arranged in a way that does
not fill the area. The part distance is maintained exactly.
This results in a variety of edge widths.
Right-hand window: the part distances are enlarged if
required so that the parts fill out the entire area regularly.
Click on one of the two representations. The one you
select will then have a blue background to indicate that it is
active.
Settings for function AREA
4-46
NEST module
Fig. 19820
S354E41.DOC
QUANTITY function: Direct setting of the number of parts.

In the auxiliary mask you define:
number of parts in X and Y direction and

the absolute part distance in X and Y direction; enter in [mm].
Settings for the QUANTITY function
Fig. 19821
Functional buttons -X, +X, -Y, +Y

You can alter the number of parts or the number of rows and
columns within the defined area by using the buttons -X, +X in
X direction and -Y, +Y in Y direction. The modifications are
carried out according to the set parameters in the masks.
The function buttons -X, +X, -Y, +Y can be selected with the
mouse or with the key combination <Ctrl>+<F1> to <F4>.
Move the mouse briefly to update the parts display.
The current modifications are shown directly at the cursor. As soon

as parts are laid out, you can reverse modifications you have just
made (UNDO functional button) or make further modifications
using the functions in the menu.
S354E41.DOC
NEST module
4-47
Modify part location
Precondition: There must be at least two parts hanging on the

cursor in order to change a part distance.
PART DISTANCE, PARAMETERS function: Define parameters for modifying the part distance and the part angle. The
following mask is opened:
Settings for PART DISTANCE and ROTATE
Fig. 18922
PART DISTANCE function, functional buttons -X, +X, -Y, +Y:

These functional buttons are used to modify the current
distance between the parts. The process takes into account
the part distance in the mask for PART DISTANCE,
PARAMETERS. The distance is set incrementally.
"Incremental part distance" means that the value is added

to the current distance. Values are entered in [mm].
Example: Part distance is 10 mm.

Incremental part distance: 15 mm. New part distance:
25 mm.
The function buttons -X, +X, -Y, +Y can be selected with
the mouse or with the key combination <Shift>+<F1> to
<F4>. Move the mouse briefly to update the parts display.
ROTATE+ and ROTATE- functions. For modifying part angles

and rotating parts.
The current angle of the part is modified by the angle specified
in the mask for PART DISTANCE, PARAMETERS.
"Angle incremental" means that the value is added to the

current angle.
Example: Angle is 90.

Angle incremental: 15. New part angle: 105.
The ROTATE + and ROTATE - buttons are activated either by
a mouse or a button combination between <Shift>+<> and
<Shift>+<>. Move the mouse briefly to update the parts
display.
The modifications to the part distance and the angle are
displayed directly on the screen.
4-48
NEST module
S354E41.DOC
The number of parts, part distance, angle etc. can be

modified directly only if the parts are guided directly at the
cursor. Once the parts have been placed on the sheet (click
on sheet), it is then no longer possible to modify the part
location within that part group. To do this, you will have to
start at step 1: Select COPY or ORIGINAL, identify parts on
the sheet etc.
Step 3: Finish modifications.

Once you have carried out the modifications, place the parts on the
sheet. To do this, click on a position on the sheet.
End the function by clicking on END in the fixed menu.
Change reference point of cursor

What is a reference point?
Function REFERENCE
POINT
When identifying the part with the help of the cursor you click on
the part. The part hangs on the cursor at exactly this point. This
point is called the reference point.
REFERENCE POINT: You can use the REFERENCE POINT

functions to modify the position of the cursor within the part.
This may be necessary if you wish to position the part more
accurately on the sheet with the mouse. The position of the
reference point can be changed:
AT WILL: Positional shift of the cursor in any direction.
HORIZONTAL: Horizontal shift of the cursor position.
VERTICAL: Vertical shift of the cursor position.
Precondition: Part hangs on cursor

Procedure:
Activate the desired REFERENCE POINT function.
Click on any position on the screen. The part is fixed and
highlighted in yellow. The cursor hangs on the "rubber
band".
Click on new position. The cursor is placed at the new
position. The part is then taken up again at this new
reference point.
S354E41.DOC
NEST module
4-49
Common parting cut: Placing parts at a

defined distance
You can use the CPC DISTANCE functions to place parts at a
precise distance (equivalent to the width of the cutting slit), so as to
allow the parts to be processed with common parting cuts.
The 2 PTS and ROTATE functions are employed to arrange parts
at a defined distance to each other. The parts can also be rotated if
so desired.
Modifying part distance

via 2 points
Menu MODIFY: Function CPC DISTANCE, 2 PTS
Fig. 5990
Procedure:
Modifying part distance

by rotation

Enter distance: Example 5
Menu MODIFY: CPC DISTANCE, ROTATE
Fig. 5800
Procedure:
4-50
NEST module
Click on first geometric element (1).

Click on second geometric element (2).
Enter distance: Example 5
S354E41.DOC
Delete part
Deleting parts
Menu MODIFY: Function PART, DELETE

Modified parts can be deleted with the function button DELETE.
Delete single part: click on the part with the mouse or mark
with the box.
Delete several parts (part groups): group the parts in a box.
Undoing the current modifications

Undoing modifications
during definition
Menu MODIFY: Function PART, UNDO

You can undo the last modification using the UNDO function.
Cutting and pasting part

Menu MODIFY 2: BEYOND PART
Procedure:
S354E41.DOC
Select sheet to which part is to be added.
Important
Function CUT: Click on part to be moved.
Function PASTE: Reinsert part. The part hangs automatically

at the mouse cursor. Place the part at the desired position by
moving the mouse.
Save sheets to which modifications have been made.
NEST module
4-51
5.6
Displaying sheets of a job
The laid out sheets of a nesting job are shown in overview at first
after the nesting procedure.
Individual sheets can be viewed by "paging" within the sheet
sequence. The system displays functions in the main menu for this.
If the sheets are shown in overview, the function SINGLE
SHEET is offered.
As soon as a single sheet is displayed, the following functions are
shown in the main menu bar:
Function PREVIOUS SHEET
Function NEXT SHEET
Function DISPLAY ALL SHEETS
Functions in detail
Display single sheet
Function SINGLE SHEET
Precondition: All sheets of a job are displayed.

The single parts are displayed as encompassing rectangles and
each part type in a different color.
After selecting the function button SINGLE SHEET from the
main menu bar, click on one of the sheets. The sheet is displayed
with the single parts and the exact geometry. The screen menu
SHEET with control functions is also displayed.
"Paging" through the sheet
sequence
Display previous or next sheet.

To view the other sheets, simply "page" through the sheet
sequence using the function buttons in the main menu bar:
Function PREVIOUS SHEET: The previous sheet to the

current sheet is displayed.
Function NEXT SHEET: The next sheet to the current sheet
is displayed.
The screen menu SHEET with control functions is displayed with
both functions.
Display all sheets
To view all the sheets produced in a job at a glance.
4-52
NEST module
Function DISPLAY ALL SHEETS: The complete sheet

overview is shown again.
The screen menu JOB with control functions is displayed.
S354E41.DOC
5.7
Calling up sheet information
The INFORMATION control function is to be found in the SHEET

screen menu. The single functions belonging to it enable you to
call up Information on single parts and the available sheet.
Menu SHEET:
INFORMATION control
function
SHEET screen menu
Fig. 19823
Overview of functions:
Function SINGLE PART HIDE: Mask out single part.

Only active if all sheets of the job are displayed (sheet
overview).
Function DISPLAY FILENAME: Display the file name of a part

or sheet.
Function DISPLAY DRAWING: Display drawing name
Function DISPLAY RESULT: Display nesting result. Not active

with single sheet view.
Function DISPLAY LOGFILE: Displaying the nesting log. Not

active with single sheet view.
Function DISPLAY WASTE: Display waste from sheet.
S354E41.DOC
Function SINGLE PART DISPLAY: Display single part with

geometry.
Function DELETE PART: Delete part. Only active if a single

sheet is displayed (single sheet).
NEST module
4-53
Information on the single part

Display single part
INFORMATION function: SINGLE PART, DISPLAY

The functions are available with the sheet overview as well as
single sheet view.
These functions enable the display of parts.
Display single part: Click on part with the mouse cursor.

Display several parts: Surround the parts with a box with the
mouse cursor.
The display varies:
Hide single part
For sheet overview: Identified single parts represented in

various colors as encompassed rectangles are displayed with
their geometry.
For single sheet view: All parts of the identified part type are
displayed.
INFORMATION function: SINGLE PART, HIDE
Precondition: This function is only active in the sheet overview.

Click on single parts to be masked out. The identified parts are no
longer displayed on the sheet.
Note: The parts are not deleted from the sheet!
4-54
NEST module
S354E41.DOC
Nesting job information

Display file name
INFORMATION function: DISPLAY, FILENAME
Precondition: A sheet overview or single sheet display is present.

Display the file name of a part or sheet.
Display part name: Click on part.
Display sheet name: Click on sheet border.
Display drawing name
INFORMATION function: DISPLAY, DRAWING

Select the name of the drawing.
The single part name will be displayed as a message. Precondition: The single part was saved with characteristics (see:
DRAWING module).
Display and print

nesting result
INFORMATION function: DISPLAY, RESULT

This function is not active in the single sheet display.
The nesting result including the nest log for the selected nesting
job is displayed.
In the sub-mask, the nesting result can be read and printed.
Display and print

nesting log
INFORMATION function: DISPLAY, LOGFILE

This function is not active in the single sheet display.
Only the nesting logfile for the selected nesting job is displayed.
In the sub-mask, the nesting logfile can be read and printed.
Sheet waste display
INFORMATION function: DISPLAY, WASTE

Display waste from sheet.
Click on the sheet border or enter the sheet name. The waste will
be displayed as a message.
S354E41.DOC
NEST module
4-55
Description of "Nesting result and Nest logfile"

The nest result is displayed after the sheet layout has been produced.
Nesting result
The nesting result comprises

General information: such as job name, sheet identifications,
sheet path, material, sheet thickness, production date, sheet
dimensions.
Information on single parts: Number. File name, customer job,
rotation, area.
Information on sheets: Sheet size, number of sheets with
identical part layout, sheet waste. All waste areas are
contained in the sheet waste: not merely the waste grid but
also all waste parts separated.
Overall result
The overall result comprises:

Details of the total sheet number produced overall,
Details of the actual part number (actual value) and minimum
and maximum part numbers,
Details of part names,
Details of sheet dimensions and number.
Nest log
The nest log contains information on parts which were not nested:
Name of nesting job
Parts which were not nested because, e.g. a part or mini nest
was not found.
Example: "6378.mtl: Mini nest not found in current directory".
Example of a file:
************************************************************************
*
N e s t - R e s u l t
*
************************************************************************
Job name
Sheet identification
Sheet path
Material
Sheet thickness
Date
Sheet dimensions [mm]
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
test1
test1
C:\TRUMPF\PARTS\USERS\USER_JO2
St37-20
2.000000
25.04.1997 09:46:51
2000.00 x 1000.00 x 2.00000 *
************************************************************************
*
P A R T - I N F O
*
************************************************************************
No.
File name
Customer job
Rotation
Area
1
C:\TRUMPF\PARTS\USERS\USER_JO2\6378.GEO
test
rotate part at will
77743.359375
No.
File name
Customer job
Rotation
Area
No.
Filename
Drawing name
Customer job
Rotation
Area
4-56
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
3
C:\TRUMPF\PARTS\USERS\USER_JO2\L-FORM2T.GEO
test
do not rotate part
9680.419922
2
C:\TRUMPF\PARTS\USERS\USER_JO2\SZ52.GEO
C-Axes-part
test
rotate part at will
48070.433594
NEST module
S354E41.DOC
Sheet number: 1 2000 x 1000 2 Sheet(s)

Waste 23.25%
=========================================================================
No. | File name
|Actual| Draw. name
----|-----------------------------------------|------|-----------1
| C:\TRUMPF\PARTS\USERS\USER_JO2\6378.GEO
| 18 |
3
| C:\TRUMPF\PARTS\USERS\USE...L-FORM2T.GEO | 14 |
Sheet number: 3 2000 x 1000 Sheet(s)
Waste 29.66%
=========================================================================
No. | File name
|Actual| Draw. name
----|------------------------------------------------|------|-----------1
| C:\TRUMPF\PARTS\USERS\USER_JO2\6378.GEO
| 14 |
3
| C:\TRUMPF\PARTS\USERS\USE...L-FORM2T.GEO | 18 |
2
| C:\TRUMPF\PARTS\USERS\USER_JO2\SZ52.GEO
| 3
| C-Axes-part
Sheet number: 4 2000 x 1000 Sheet(s)
Waste 45.17%
=========================================================================
No. | File name
|Actual| Draw. name
----|------------------------------------------------|------|-----------3
| C:\TRUMPF\PARTS\USERS\USE...L-FORM2T.GEO | 9
|
2
| 21 | C-Axes-part
Waste 49.53%
=========================================================================
No. | File name
|Actual| Draw. name
----|------------------------------------------------|------|-----------2
| 21 | C-Axes-part
Waste 49.53%
=========================================================================
No. | File name
|Actual| Draw. name
----|------------------------------------------------|------|-----------2
| 21 | C-Axes-part
************************************************************************
Overall result
************************************************************************
Overall result: 6 Sheets(s) Waste 39.43 %
========================================================================
NO. | File name
|Actual| Min | Max | Drawing name
----|--------------------------------|------|-----|-----|---------------1
| C:\TRUMPF\PARTS_JO2\6378.GEO
| 50
| 20 | 50 |
3
| C:\TRUMPF\PARTS...L-FORM2T.GEO | 55
| 40 | 55 |
2
| C:\TRUMPF\PARTS...JO2\SZ52.GEO | 66
| 50 | 80 | C-Axes-part
************************************************************************
Sheet(s)
| No. | Actual| Max | Rolling direction |
---------------------|-----|-------|-----|--------------------|* 2000.00 x 1000.00 | 1
| 6
| -1 | *
|
************************************************************************
*
N e s t - L o g
*
************************************************************************
Job name
: test1
The following parts were not nested:
-------------------------------------------------------------------------- No entries ---
S354E41.DOC
NEST module
4-57
5.8
Display sheet view with machine

environment
The control function DISPLAY in the screen menu SHEET enables

the accurate positioning of a sheet on the machine.
Menu SHEET: Control
function DISPLAY
Functions for display of sheet with machine environment
Fig. 19824
Precondition: A sheet is loaded.

Procedure:
Select the DISPLAY control function. The menu functions are

displayed.
Menu function SELECT: Select machine drawing. All available

machine drawings are displayed in the file selection mask
(format: MCH).
After confirmation of the machine choice with OK, the machine

environment is only displayed once one of the check buttons is
activated.
"Machine": Only machine drawings with sheets are
displayed.
"Spacing": Only spacings on the machine are displayed.
If both check buttons are selected, the sheet is displayed with
the entire machine environment.
4-58
NEST module
S354E41.DOC
5.9
Menu SHEET DRAWING:
TOOLS control function
Using construction geometry
The functions in the SHEET, DRAWING TOOLS control function

menu correspond to the functions in the DRAWING, DRAWING
TOOLS.
For a detailed description see: DRAWING module: "Creating
Use construction geometries to carry out modifications e.g. to part
positions or to position parts exactly.
Function scope
Construction geometries are geometry elements which make

programming easier.
The measurement functions are used to check the position of a
part or the distances between two parts.
The functions for deleting construction geometry are also stored in
the screen menu for the DRAWING TOOLS control function.


type dotted.
S354E41.DOC
NEST module
4-59
6.
Function scope
Printing a file
in the FILE main menu. In the pull-down menu the functions
Procedure:
File

Print
Screen
The windows printing mask appears. Select the corresponding

printer or plotter.
or
Procedure:
Print screen contents.
Select function FILE, PRINT, FILE.
Print

File

window.
Start the print procedure using PRINT. The Windows printing
File

plotter

using the program "Printer. You will find this program in the
that the dip switch configuration on the plotter is compatible with
the Windows configuration for the serial interface.
operating system.
4-60
NEST module
S354E41.DOC
7.
File
Transfer
Transfer of NC data
The TRANSFER function is contained in the main menu under FILE.

PC-TRANSFER is a TRUMPF software product which enables
1)
data transfer to the machine control system via a data line. For
detailed information, refer to the documentation for PCTRANSFER. This should contain a basic explanation of data
transfer.
Operating mode

Example
c:\trumpf\users\mach02 (all programs for a machine, for
File format

gearwheel.LST
4711.LST
For BOSCH-control systems:

Only such programs from the transfer directory whose names
correspond to the
P(4711)

machine file.
1)

Not required for open control systems Sinumerik SIN840 and BOSCH-control system Type 3
S354E41.DOC
NEST module
4-61
Copying files

Procedure:
Moving files

appears.
"Source file name": Input a file name with the ending LST or
program should be copied. \users\mach01\ is offered as
CANCEL.

directory.
Procedure:

appears.
"Source file name": Input a file name with the ending LST or
CANCEL.
Example:
c:\trumpf\parts\user1\gearwheel.LST
becomes
\users\mach01\P4711.LST
4-62
NEST module
S354E41.DOC
8.
Job export and import
Each nesting job created in the NEST module is written to the data
base. This cannot be controlled from the Windows file manager.
From the NEST module, jobs stored in the database can only be
deleted in the frame of the job management with the function
button DELETE.
Function FILE,
JOB EXPORT
To store job data which is not required daily, for example, in

another directory or even to save them in another storage medium,
the job must be written to a file. This is done by means of the
function JOB EXPORT. A file is produced with the format DAT.
Function FILE,
JOB IMPORT
If job data is required again, the files can simply be imported

(format: DAT) back into the NEST module. The data are written to
the database and are thus available for further programming.
Exporting a job
The defined nesting job can be saved in a file. The file will receive
the extension .DAT. This file can then be managed from the
Windows file manager like any other file.
Procedure
Functions
NEST
module
File
Job Export
Working steps:
2. Exporting a job. Select function FILE, JOB EXPORT.

The "Job selection" mask is displayed. All jobs present in the
database are displayed.
3. Select the job desired.
Specify the directory to which the job should be exported in
the file selection mask. Specify a file name for the nesting job
under "Filename" or accept the suggestion.
4. Confirm the specification with OK. The job is exported to the
specified directory. (jobname).dat.
S354E41.DOC
NEST module
4-63
Importing a job
Each exported job i.e. those with the extension DAT can be read
into ToPS again. The function FILE, JOB IMPORT is provided for
this.
Procedure
Functions
Module
NEST
File
Job Import
Working steps:
2. Importing a job. Select function FILE, JOB IMPORT.

The file manager of ToPs is displayed. Change to the
directory in which you manage exported jobs (format: DAT).
3. Select the job desired.
Confirm your selection with OK. The "Load job in database"
mask is displayed.
If a job with the same job name already exists in the
database, you must decide:
select the radio button "Overwrite" if the existing job is to
be overwritten
or
select the radio button "complete" if the existing job is to
be completed. The number of parts is added on to the
number of parts already stored in the database.
4. Confirm your choice with OK. The data are written to the
database.
4-64
NEST module
S354E41.DOC
Format description of a DAT file

File format
Files to be read in must be constructed according to a specific

format:*)
Higher-level format conventions remain effective:
The following apply:

The file is divided into blocks.
The following blocks are allocated:
Block
Designation
Explanation
Block 1
#~11
General information
Block 2
#~25
Job data
Block 3
#~40
Sheet data and remainder

sheet data
Block 4
#~35
Part identification
*)
Start of block: #~n (n = Block designation)

End of block: #~END
End of file: #~EOF
The file must always begin with #~11 (Block 1).
The contents of block 1 are not evaluated.
No empty lines are permitted within individual blocks.
Files created with previous versions can still be read in.
S354E41.DOC
NEST module
4-65
Detail of file structure: Example with explanations

Example
#~11
PCNN
C:\TRUMPF
#~END
#~25
Part1
Part1
St37-20
2000.000000
1000.000000
10.000000
10.000000
20.000000
20.000000
20.000000
20.000000
1
1
1
5.000000
5.000000
1
1
1
0
2
1
1
1
2.000000
3
1
1
0
1
2
52
65.000000
5.000000
70.000000
0.000000
0.000000
PCNN
#~END
#~40
St37-20
2
500
500
taf1.geo
C:\TRUMPF...USER_JO2
2
2
3
1
5
rest1
1
1
4-66
NEST module
Start of block 1
Computer name
Root directory
End of block 1
Start of block 2
Job name
Sheet name
Material ID no.
Sheet length
Sheet width
Web in X
Web in Y
Top edge
Bottom edge
Left edge
Right edge
Inner area (1/0=Y/N)
Outer surfaces (0=no, 1=part, 2=sheet)
Start corner (1=LB, 2=LT, 3=RB, 4=RT)
CPC distance X
CPC distance Y
CPC number of parts in block in X
CPC number of parts in block in Y
Lay out remainder sheets (1/0=Y/N)
CPC layout (1/0=Y/N)
Resolution (1=small, 2=medium, 3=large)
Sort criterion (1=area, 2=perimeter)
Fill last sheet (1/0=Y/N)
Start part (1=area, 2=X, 3=Y, 4=X/Y)
Sheet thickness
Sheet geometry name
Sheet path name
Rolling direction (1=X, 2=Y, 3=unknown)
Positioning direction (1=X, 2=Y)
MasterPlate (1/0=Y/N)
Exact distance (1/0=Y/N)
Sheet is not rectangular (1/0=Y/N)
Number of MasterPlate (1=one, 2=several)
Clean last sheet (52/2=Y/N)
Min. % nesting MasterPlate
Min. % improvement mini-nests
Max. % limit recalculation last sheet
Min. element length for common parting cuts
Min. distances for securing corners with CPC
Computer name for sheets
End of block 2
Start of block 3
Material of the remainder sheets
Sheet thickness (Z)
Sheet length (X)
Sheet width (Y)
Sheet name
Sheet path
Number of remainder sheets
Remaining number of remainder sheets
Priority of sheet
Name of remainder sheet
S354E41.DOC
Part 1
20.000000
20.000000
20.000000
20.000000
PCNN
|~
:
:
|~
#~END
#~35
C:\TRUMP...USER_JO2\GEO_
MTL\SZ600PLA.GEO
30
100
1
4
0
C:\TRUMPF\PARTS\USER_JO2\
GEO_MTL\SZ600PLA.GEO
5
90.000000
3
2
0
MiniNest
0
1
1
PCNN
none
|~
#~END
#~EOF
S354E41.DOC
Job name of remainder sheet

Top edge
Bottom edge
Left edge
Right edge
End of block 3
Start of block 4
Part name with path details
Minimum quantity
Maximum quantity
Rotate(1/0=Y/N)
Mini nest (0=No, 1= Horizontal, 2=Vertical,
3=Auto, 4=MTL)
GTS-compatible (1/0=Y/N)
Part path name
Priority
Rotation angle increment
Positioning method (1=FirstFit, 2=centre of
gravity)
Part in mini nest (1/0=Y/N)
Name of MiniNest
Place part in coil
Number of rows in coil
Number of columns in coil
Computer name for parts
Customer of the part
End of block 4
End of file
NEST module
4-67
9.
Creating back-up copies
The main function FILE, BACK-UP COPY enables the copying of

the entire file to a sheet or to a job in any directory or to a preset
drive, e.g. to diskette.
Application: A back-up copy can thus be made of a nested sheet

or of a job.
This allows sheet data or job data which is stored in different
directories to be stored safely in one directory on one computer or,
for example, on an external storage medium.
Creating copies of sheet data

Procedure
Functions
Module
NEST
File
Back-up copy
Sheet
Working steps:
2. Select the main function FILE, BACK-UP COPY from the

NEST module.
Select the SHEET function in the pull-down menu.
3. In the auxiliary mask "Saving sheet data including
GEO-/MTL", specify:
"Sheet file": Enter sheet name or select via the "arrow"
symbol.
You are presented with the file selection mask.
Select here the desired sheet which you intend to copy.
The file name will be displayed with the complete path.
"Target directory": In the lower mask area you define the
directory where the data is to be copied to.
4. Confirm the details with OK.
All data which belong to the selected sheet is copied to the
back-up copy: Sheet file, all single part drawings (format:
GEO), mini nests (format: MTL) and worked single parts
(format: GMT). Recommendation: Check if you have
several copies of certain data. Superfluous data can be
deleted.
4-68
NEST module
S354E41.DOC
Creating back-up copies of job data

Procedure
Functions
Module
NEST
File
Back-up copy
Job
Working steps:
2. Select the main function FILE, BACK-UP COPY from the

NEST module.
3. Select the JOB function in the pull-down menu.
In the following mask, "Save complete job", specify:
"Job": Enter job name or select via the "arrow" symbol.
You are presented with the file selection mask.
Select here the desired job which you intend to copy.
The file name will be displayed with the complete path.
"Target directory": In the lower mask area you define the
directory where the data is to be copied to.
4. Confirm the details with OK.
All data which belong to the selected job is copied to the
back-up copy: Job file (format: DAT), all single part
drawings (format: GEO), mini nests (format: MTL), Sheet
file (format: TAF) and worked single parts (format: GMT).
Recommendation: Check if you have several copies of
certain data. Superfluous data can be deleted.
S354E41.DOC
NEST module
4-69
1.
Flexible processing definition and

NC program generation
The processing operation is defined and the NC program is

generated in the TECHNOLOGY module. ToPs automatically
generates the NC program. To do this, it refers to NC components
stored in the data base. The processing of the sheets or of a single
part can be simulated on the screen.
ToPs also creates a processing plan containing all information
relevant to processing. The NC program, the setting plan and the
screen display can be printed out at any time.
Flexible programming
sequence
The programming sequence is variable. Decide yourself how you

would like to proceed.
It is always possible to switch between single part processing and
sheet processing. The same functions are available for defining the
processing operation, regardless of whether you define the
processing operation for single part or sheet. This distinguishes
ToPs 300 from other systems. In other systems, the procedure is
usually determined by the programming sequence: i.e. single part
programming or sheet layout. In ToPs 300, it is always possible to
switch between single part programming and sheet programming.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-7
Processing strategies
A sheet processing method is referred to as a processing strategy.
The possibilities are:
Multi-copy processing: simple or sectional multi-copy processing
processing of nested sheets which were created in the NEST
module
Initial blank processing: single part size corresponds to sheet
size
Overview of processing strategies:
Processing of
nested
Multi-copy
processing
Initial blanc
processing
Simple
multi-copy processing
Sectional
Common
parting cut
Fabrication
from grid
Processing strategies
5-8
TECHNOLOGY module
Fig. 19903
S354E51.DOC
Sheet processing as
Multi-copy processing means that one single piece in an area is

placed on the sheet multiple times. A distinction must be made between simple and sectional multi-copy processing.
There are two different parting methods in multi-copy processing:
Fabrication from grid and common parting cut. Nested sheets are
usually processed using fabrication from grid.
Fabrication from grid
Fabrication from grid: The parts are separated from the sheet. A
scrap skeleton (waste grid) arises.
Sectional multi-copy processing: Fabrication from grid
Common parting cut
Fig. 5884
The sheet is laid out as with fabrication from grid. In contrast to

fabrication from grid however, no scrap skeleton is created.
Parts which are positioned next to each other in such a way that
the parting cut width corresponds to the tool width can be separated with common parting cuts.
Result: The contours of different parts are cut simultaneously.
Sheet with common parting cuts
S354E51.DOC
Fig. 5751
TECHNOLOGY module
5-9
Sheet processing as
cut-to-size processing
Cut-to-size processing is usually defined as follows:
Cut-to-size processing: sheet with one single part
Fig. 4773
It is always cut-to-size production if one single piece is made from

a sheet. The sheet dimension correspond to the dimension of the
corresponding rectangle (single part dimensions = dimensions of
the raw sheet). The outer contour of the single part is not processed continuously. The contour of the sheet corresponds in
sections to the outer contour to be produced.
5-10
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Overview of work sequences

Flexible programming
sequence
One of the essential features of ToPs 300 is the flexibility in

programming sequence. Two possibilities are mentioned now as
examples.
Two possibilities:
1st possibility
Drawing of 1st single part
2nd possibility
Drawing of 2nd single part
1st single part (processed) Drawing of 2nd single part
Definition of single part

processing
Definition of sheet layout
Definition of sheet layout
Definition of single part

processing
Flexible programming sequence
S354E51.DOC
Fig. 7297E
TECHNOLOGY module
5-11
1st possibility
The programming sequence described in the following is an
example. There are many different ways to proceed.
DRAWING
module
TECHNOLOGY
module
Loading and processing first

single part
Create drawings of the first and second single piece after each
other and store them.
Define processing and sheet layout.

1. Select machine.
2. Load first single part

Select the function FILE, LOAD in the main menu. Enter
the file name or select from the selection window.
The radio button for the GEO format must be activated.
Specify sheet data.
The single part is hanging on the handle. Position the part
outside the displayed sheet.
3. Process a single part.
Select the SINGLE PART function in the main menu.
The PUNCH PROCESSING menu appears.
Define the processing operation with punching tools
and/or with laser automatically or manually using the
functions in the menus.
Do not forget to specify the disposal method for the part.
4. Transfer single part processing to the sheet.
Select the TRANSFER SINGLE PART TO SHEET function
button. A mask will appear automatically, allowing you to
define the general conditions for the transmission to the sheet.
Accept the standard settings and do not make any changes.
5. Store a single part with processing.
Select FILE, SAVE SELECTION in the main menu.
Specify the file name (format: GMT).
Identify the part to be stored.
Load the second single part

and process
6. Load the second single part and position the part outside of
the displayed sheet.
7. Repeat steps 3-5.
5-12
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Lay out the sheet
8. Lay out the sheet.

Select the function LAYOUT in the main menu.
Select the function CREATE, AREA BASED in the
SHEET LAYOUT menu.
Specify the "Multi-copy processing parameters" in the
following mask.
Place the first part onto the sheet: Click on the part and
confirm your selection with OK. Define an area on the
sheet with a box. Remember to observe the system
messages in the command line.
Then place the second part onto the sheet: Click on the
part and define a sheet area.
Result: Both single parts are now in separately defined sheet
areas with the specified processing operation and disposal
method (sectional multi-copy processing).
Optimize the sheet
Generate NC program
Data transfer
S354E51.DOC
9. Sheet optimization means: sorting the processing sequence so

as to optimize processing (tool and time-optimized).
Select the function OPTIMIZE in the main menu.
The SHEET OPTIMIZATION menu opens. Click on the
function AUTOMATIC, START. The sheet optimization is
carried out automatically by the system.
You can also interactively define a sheet optimization at any
time: function MANUAL, INTERACTIVE.
10. Select the NC PROGRAM function in the main menu. The NC

PROGRAM menu appears.
To generate the NC program, activate the functions
GENERATE, START. Specify the parameters in the index
cards.
11. Copy and move file in transfer directory.

Select the function FILE, TRANSFER in the main menu and
enter a source file name and a target directory.
Also decide whether you wish to copy or move the
NC program.
TECHNOLOGY module
5-13
2nd possibility
The programming sequence described in the following is an
example. There are many different ways to proceed.
Requirements
The first single part with processing must be stored (format: GMT).
The second single part must be available as a drawing without
processing (format: GEO).
TECHNOLOGY
module
Lay out sheet with single parts and process second single part:
1. Specify sheet data. Main menu FILE, NEW. Specify sheet
data.
Load first part
Load second part
3. Load second single part.

Select the function FILE, LOAD in the main menu.
Activate the GEO radio button. Enter or select file name.
outside the displayed sheet.
Lay out the sheet
5-14
2. Then load the first single part with processing:

Select FILE, LOAD in the main menu.
Activate the GMT radio button. Enter or select file name.
outside the displayed sheet. Tip: if the part is not visible,
select the TOTAL function so that the screen is built up
again!
4. Lay out the sheet.

Select the function CREATE, SECTIONAL in the SHEET
LAYOUT menu.
Specify the "Multi-copy processing parameters" in the
following mask.
Place the first part (with processing) on the sheet: Click on
the part and confirm your selection with OK. Define an
area on the sheet with a box. Remember to observe the
system messages in the command line.
Then place the second part (without processing) onto the
sheet: Click on the part and define a sheet area.
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Result
Defining the processing for

the second single part
The first single part (with processing) and the second part (without
processing) are now in separately defined sheet areas with the
specified processing operation and disposal method (sectional
multi-copy processing).
5. Process a single part.
Select the SINGLE PART function in the main menu.
The PUNCH PROCESSING menu appears.
Define the processing operation with punching tools
and/or with laser automatically or manually using the
functions in the menus.
Do not forget to specify the disposal method for the part.
6. Transfer single part processing to the sheet.
Select the TRANSFER SINGLE PART TO SHEET
function button. A mask will appear automatically, allowing
you to define the general conditions for the transmission
to the sheet. Accept the standard settings and do not
make any changes.
7. Store a single part with processing.
Select the function FILE STORE SELECTION in the main
menu.
Identify the part to be stored.
Optimize the sheet
Generate NC program
Data transfer
S354E51.DOC
8. Sheet optimization means: sorting the processing sequence

so as to optimize processing (tool and time optimized).
Select the function OPTIMIZE in the main menu. The
SHEET OPTIMIZATION menu opens. Click on the
function AUTOMATIC, START. The sheet optimization is
carried out automatically by the system.
You can also interactively define a sheet optimization at
any time: function MANUAL, INTERACTIVE.
9. Select the NC PROGRAM function in the main menu. The NC
PROGRAM menu appears.
To generate the NC program, activate the functions
GENERATE, START. Specify the parameters in the index
cards.
10. Copy and move files in the transfer directory.
Select the function FILE, TRANSFER in the main menu
and enter a source file name and a target directory.
Also decide whether you wish to copy or move the
NC program.
TECHNOLOGY module
5-15
2.
The TECHNOLOGY module provides all the functions required to

define processing and generate an NC program.
Select the TECHNOLOGY module. The user interface is displayed
after you have selected your machine.
TECHNOLOGY
module
User interface in the TECHNOLOGY module
5-16
TECHNOLOGY module
Fig. 19829E
S354E51.DOC

The main functions are presented next to each other at the top of
the screen. The corresponding subfunctions become visible and
can be activated after the main function has been selected.
Function scope:
File
New
Load
The main function FILE contains the subfunctions:

Load new sheet (sheet data).
Load files.
Save all
LOAD single part drawing: GEO format.

Load mini-nest drawing: MTL format. A mini-nest is generated
in the nest module.
Load sheet drawing: TAF format. The sheet drawing is
generated during nesting in the NEST module.
Load selected screen contents, e.g. single part with
processing: GMT format.
Load selected screen contents, e.g. single part with
processing: TMT format.
Store the entire screen contents.

Format: TMT
Store selection
Storing contents of a selected screen.

Format: GMT
Print...
Transfer...
Setup sheet
Table
comparison
Back
S354E51.DOC

Transfer of NC data: Move or copy NC data from source directory
to target directory.
The functions:
Translate clamps.
Change loading position.
Modify sheet dimensions.
Write tool and laser technology tables in files in order to carry out
a comparison of the data with the data of the machine.
Quit the TECHNOLOGY module. The initial screen of ToPs is
displayed.
TECHNOLOGY module
5-17
Layout
Single part
Define sheet layout.
Generate single part processing.

The following functions are offered in the main menu bar:
Processing
Optimize
NC program
Tool
TRANSFER SINGLE PART TO SHEET: Transfer processing

operations which were defined in the single part to the parts of
the sheet.
CONTOUR: Single part processing observing contour.
Generate sheet processing.
Optimize processing.
Generate the NC program.
Select tools for punch processing and combined processing.

Select laser technology tables and rules.
Tool management.
5-18
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
3.
On-screen display: Meaning of the

colors and symbols
The following list gives an overview of the default settings for the
display in the TECHNOLOGY module.
Color
Symbol
Line type
Meaning
Yellow
Coordinate cross
with X and Y axes
Zero point of the machine
Red
Circle
Index pin
Red
Asterisk
Punching head position during loading
Magenta
Line type: dotted
Working area of the machine
Red
Line type: dotted
Travel area of the machine
Yellow
Rectangle
Clamp dead range for standard clamps:

Small rectangle for standard tools, large rectangle for Multitool tools
Yellow
Cross
Positions on the traverse rail for tools and clamps
Yellow
Trapeze
Clamping surface for pull-back or swing-back clamps
White
Line type: solid
Sheet, geometry and surrounding rectangle with symbolic part representation
Magenta
Line type: solid
Selected objects
Cyan
Line type: solid
Punch processing
Green
Line type: solid
Laser processing
Cyan
Cross
Start and end point for punch processing
Yellow
Line type: solid
Unprocessed geometries, contours
Blue
Line type: solid
Positioning distance between neighboring parts
Magenta
Triangle (arrow)
in association with positioning motions: Direction of the positioning motion,

start point of the next processing
Green:
Line type: dotted
Approach flag for laser processing
Yellow
Cross
Start point of processing with presser foot (M27)
Green
Cross
Start point of a processing with delayed single stroke (M26)
Yellow
Circle
Collision point with processing definition
Red
Square
Disposal with ejection subprogram
Green
Square
Disposal with flap with punch processing
Red
Triangle
Disposal with machine stop, manual removal with punch processing
Red
Square
Disposal with chute with punch processing
Yellow
Cross
Disposal with flap with laser processing
Yellow
Cross
Disposal with machine stop, manual removal with laser processing
Green
Line type: dotted
First part of a processing sequence (compulsory sequence)
Green
Line type: solid
All other parts of a processing sequence, positioning distance between the

parts of a processing sequence
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-19
4.
Selecting machine
When ToPs 300 is installed, all data on the machine types which
ToPs supports is stored in the included database.
Basic machines
A basic machine is the basis for different machine types which

differ in their equipment.
If the machine is equipped with a different control system, a basic
machine is defined for each control system.
Example: Basic machine TC 235 with Bosch CC 200 control system
and basic machine TC 235 with Sinumerik 3N control system.
Machine types
Machine types are variants of the basic machine. The basic

machine is divided into machine types when ToPs is installed.
After installation, you therefore have the following available, for
example:
2 machine types for the TC 600L,
3 machine types for the TC 260L,
2 machine types for the TC 235 with Bosch CC 200 control
system
and
2 machine types for the TC 235 with Sinumerik 3N control
system.
Machine types are selected in ToPs 300. A machine type usually

corresponds to its machine configuration. You can however define
your own machine type after you have installed ToPs for a basic
machine.
The machine types differ in the size of the working memory and the
design of the clamps.
5-20
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Machines and components supported

Machines (basic machines) which are supported in ToPs 300 are
listed in the following. You can also find information on the
machine control system and the automation components which are
possible for the machine.
Machine
(basic
machine)
Control system
(Machine software)
Automated
Explanations
TC 120R
Bosch CC 220
TC 160R
Bosch CC 220
TC 190R
Bosch CC 220
TC 200R
Bosch CC 220
TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 200
TC 180 K/W
Bosch M5TC
only Bosch M5TC, without: laser, tapping,

Multitool, swift
TC 180.2 K/W
Bosch M5TC
only Bosch M5TC, without: laser, taping,

Multitool, swift
TC180 K/W
Fanuc 6MB
only rotation, without: laser, thread,

Multitool
TC180 K/W
Sinumerik 8N
only non-rotation, working
TC 235
Bosch CC 200
TC 235
Sinumerik 3 N
TC 240
Bosch CC 200 (T19)
TC 240
Bosch CC 200 (>= T21)
TC 240L
TC 240L
Bosch CC 200 (> T23)
TC 240R
Bosch CC 300
TC 260

TC 260
Bosch CC 300 (> T23)

TC 260L

TC 260L
Bosch CC 300 (>= T23)

TC 500R
Bosch CC 220
1000, 1250, 1300, 1600
TC 600L
Sinumerik 840 D
1306, 1606
TC 2000 R
Bosch type 3
Machines with plasma devices are not supported by ToPs 300.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-21
Automation Components
All data for the automation components is included with the

database of ToPs 300. By default, the machine types in ToPs 300
are configured without these components. See: the chapter
"Automation components, defining machine configuration".
A database which contains data on the machine types listed above
and the automation components TRUMALIFT SheetMaster,
TRUMASORT, TRUMAGRIP and TRUMALIFT SC, SE, SB is
included with ToPs 300.
If your machine is equipped with automation components or has
been configured ex works for a subsequent attachment of
TRUMALIFT SheetMaster, then you must define your machine
configuration in the DATA module after ToPs is installed. See:
the chapter "Automation components, defining machine configuration - Which data must be activated where?"
Procedure
Beginning in the
TECHNOLOGY module
The machine must be selected the first time you select the
TECHNOLOGY module. The machine selection remains
unchanged.
Selecting machine
Fig. 19830
The machine name and the control system name are displayed in
the machine selection mask.
The mask also contains the following information:
"Name", "Type" and "Control system" of the machine
Type of machine: The machine type specifies whether the
machine is a standard type or a variant.
"X format" and "Y format": The amount of working memory is
displayed here.
"Note": The note is for further description of the machine; e.g.
specifications on the working area and the design of the
clamps.
5-22
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Selecting other machines

Information and selection
bar in the mask header
In the TECHNOLOGY module, you can select another machine at

any time.
Click on the left selection window in the mask header where

you see the active machine displayed.
or
click on the "" (arrow) icon.
When changing machines with a sheet loaded, e.g. in the
TECHNOLOGY module, a message with a warning is given
because processing or removal must be transferred to the new
machine.
The "Machine selection" mask is displayed. Select the desired

machine. The existing machine environment is deleted and the
environment of the new machine is displayed. Existing parts or
sheets are kept.
5.
File
New
Select the function FILE, NEW whenever you wish to start a new
sheet.
Define data for the new sheet in the following mask "Specify sheet
data".
S354E51.DOC
Specifying new sheet data
"Material ID": Enter or select the ID number of the material.

Example: St37-20 means structural steel with a material
thickness of 2 mm.
"Dimensions": Enter or select sheet dimensions. The sheet
dimensions are automatically displayed when the material
identity number is selected.
TECHNOLOGY module
5-23
PARAMETER
function button
In the mask of the PARAMETER function button, specify:
Click on indicator window

for material ID
Function button
OK
Whether you want a non-scratch processing operation or not.

Non-scratch processing means: The stripper is positioned
approx. 1 mm higher during processing.
What sheet type does the sheet you are creating have:
"Normal sheet"
"Formed sheet"
"Uneven sheet"
Depending on the sheet type, the punching head moves to
different punching head positions (see: description in the
programming manual for your Maschine).
For the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster: Change parameters.
Do you wish to use the sheet detector?
Should the sheet be stripped?
Output type: direct or time-optimized?
Change speed.
Change acceleration.
Select the material from the indicator window with the symbol ""
(arrow) or just click in the indicator window. This will save you
having to type everything in. The dimensions from the database are
entered in all other entry fields.
Confirm the indications with OK.

Existing screen displays are deleted and the new sheet is displayed
in the specified size. The punching head position is shown as a red
star (symbol) inside the sheet.
(For machines with automation components, the red star means the
loading position at pin no. 0; a red cross is shown at pin no. 1).
This symbol is important for defining the processing operation when
dealing with resetting motions (see: Activating repositioning area.
The sheet is loaded centered by default. The loading position and
the sheet size can be changed later (see: the function FILE,
SETUP SHEET... ).
5-24
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
6.
Loading and storing a file
All loading and storing procedures are done using the data
manager in ToPs (also called file selection mask).
Data manager: Loading and storing files
Fig. 19344
You can load and store the following formats as files:

File format
Function
Meaning
GEO
FILE, LOAD
Load Geometry, i.e. load single part drawing without processing.
MTL
FILE, LOAD
Load drawing of the mini-nest, i.e. load two single part drawings
nested in each other without processing.
TAF
FILE, LOAD
Load drawing of the sheet with nested parts.
GMT
FILE, LOAD
Geometry with technology; i.e. load selected screen contents

(e.g. one or more processed single parts).
FILE, SAVE
SELECTION
Store selected screen contents (e.g. one or more processed

single parts).
FILE, LOAD
Load complete screen contents (sheet with technology; i.e. with

processing).
FILE, SAVE ALL
Store complete screen contents (sheet with processing)
TMT
To be able to select the files with the desired extension, first

activate the appropriate radio button (switch with colour identification). Switch to the directory in which the files were stored.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-25
6.1
Loading files
Files of single parts, mini-nests or nested sheets with and without

processing are displayed with geometry during loading. The cursor
is located at the zero point of the geometry which is loaded.
You can rotate a part by any angle before you place it.
Loading and placing parts
Sheet size,
material
5-26
Fig. 19895E
A mask for entering the sheet size and material opens automatically before files are loaded if you have not already entered this
data. Procedure: see: "Specifying new sheet data", function
FILE, NEW.
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Loading single part without processing

File
Single parts without processing are single part drawings which

you have created and stored in the DRAWING module.
The data manager is displayed.
Load
"GEO" radio button
All files with the extension GEO available in the current directory
will be displayed.
You can change the directory by clicking on the * function button
(star symbol) located above the window scroll.
Procedure:
Enter or click on the desired file name.

The file name will be entered into the "File name" indicator
window.
The drawing which was stored under this file name is carried
on the mouse pointer at the zero point of the drawing.
Place the drawing on the screen.
Loading mini-nest without processing

File
Load
"MTL" radio button
A mini nest is a single part nested with itself. A mini nest drawing
is created and stored in the NESTING module.
All files with the MTL extension available in the current directory
will be displayed.
Procedure:
S354E51.DOC

window.
The drawing which was stored under this file name is carried
on the mouse pointer at the zero point of the drawing.
TECHNOLOGY module
5-27
Loading sheets with nested parts

File
Load a sheet with nested parts which you created and stored in
the NESTING module.
Load
"TAF" radio button
All files with the extension TAF available in the current directory will
be displayed.
Procedure:

window.
A new sheet with the dimensions of the sheet drawing is
created and the nested parts are displayed.
Loading part with processing

File
Load
"GMT" radio button
You can load selected contents of a screen (a single part or

several single parts or mini-nest with processing) if it was stored in
the TECHNOLOGY module and is available in the GMT format.
All files with the extension GMT available in the current directory will
be displayed.
Procedure:

window.
The drawing which was stored under this file name is carried on
the mouse pointer at the zero point of the drawing.
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
5-28
Loading entire sheets with processing

File
Load
"TMT" radio button
You can load the complete contents of a screen (sheet with

processing) if it was stored in the TECHNOLOGY module and is
available in the GMT format.
All files with the extension TMT available in the current directory will
be displayed.
Procedure:

window.
A new sheet with the dimensions of the sheet drawing (with
processing) is created and the sheet layout with processing is
displayed.
6.2
Store file
You have two options in the TECHNOLOGY module:
The function FILE, SAVE SELECTION: to save selected

screen contents
or
The function FILE, SAVE ALL: to save entire screen.
Precondition: The functions FILE, SAVE SELECTION and FILE,

SAVE ALL can only be selected if you have a sheet processing
type active. It is not possible to save a single part in single part
mode.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-29
Save entire screen

Procedure:
File
Save all
Select the function FILE, SAVE ALL.
The data manager of ToPs is displayed.

Accept the default file name or enter a file name. The system
automatically assigns an extension: The "TMT" radio button is
active.
Confirm the selection with OK in the "Data manager" mask.
The contents of the entire screen are stored in a file in TMT

format.
Note: Even parts located outside of the sheet are saved.
You must first delete parts which you do not wish to save.
Storing selected screen contents

Procedure:
File
Store selection
Select the function FILE, SAVE SELECTION.
The data manager of ToPs is displayed.

Accept the default file name or enter a file name. The system
automatically assigns an extension: The "GMT" radio button is
active.
Confirm the entry with OK in the "Data manager" mask.
Identify part or surround several parts in a box.
Confirm your choice with OK in the screen menu.
The marked parts are stored in a file in GMT format.

A group of several single parts can consist of processed
and unprocessed single parts.
5-30
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
7.
Tools
A great number of tools are already integrated in ToPs 300.

The following table show which tools can be used for which
processing type.
Tool
Functions
Automatic Manual punch processing with geometry model:
punch
Individual functions
processing
Create
Start
Single
hole
Next to
On ele- Next to
element/ ment/ on element
next to
contour part.
cont.
Punching
Lin-Lin
Round
Square
Square with
corner radius
Rectangle
Rectangle with
corner radius
Oblong hole
Screw thread
Forming1)
Notching
X
X
X2)
Embossingtool1)
X2)
Bend
Triangle
Slotting
Micro-joint*)
Multicut
Special1)
X
X
X2)
Radius
Marking
Quick forming
X
X
tool
1) Forming, embossing and special tools must consist of a closed contour as a drawing (*.wzg). This drawing is then compared
with the geometry in the single part during processing.
2) These tools are supported by the function NEXT TO ELEMENT/NEXT TO CONTOUR overlaps perfectly at 180.
*) This tool must be treated as a special tool.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-31
Tool
Functions
Manual punch processing without geometry model:
Single
hole
PunPunNibbling
ching up ching up row of
circle
rectanholes
gle
Nibbling
circle of
holes
Round
Square
Square with
corner radius
Rectangle
Rectangle with
corner radius
Oblong hole
Screw thread
Forming1
Embossingtool1)
Bend
Triangle
Slotting
Micro-joint*)
Multicut
Special1)
Radius
Marking
X
X
X
X
1) Forming, embossing and special tools must consist of a closed contour as a drawing (*.wzg). This drawing is then compared
with the geometry in the single part during processing.
*) This tool must be treated as a special tool.
5-32
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
The laser is used as a tool in ToPs 300 and is offered n the form of
laser tables including rules for automatic or manual laser processing.
The following functions are supported with the laser:
Tool
Functions
Automatic Manual laser processing with and without geometry model:
laser
processing
Generate,
Start
Laser
S354E51.DOC
Element Contour
Beyond
element
Cut
TECHNOLOGY module
5-33
7.1
Activating tools
You must first activate or identify a tool when dealing with the
many functions which are used for processing geometries and
contours. This is the case in the single part mode, in contour mode
and in sheet mode.
The following options are available to you:
Activate tool: Main function, symbol and selection menu
Fig. 20089E
Function TOOL in the main menu bar.

A mask with four active index cards is displayed:
"Punching" index card: Depending on the selected tool
type (go to SELECTION in the selection window), all tools
which are available to you in the database will be
displayed.
Via SELECTION, you can determine a tool type and, in
doing so, reduce the number of tools as needed. All tools
for this tool type will then be shown in the indicator window.
To see a display of all the tools, select "All tools" with the
SELECTION function button.
"List" index card: The last tool list selected is offered by

default. In the selection window, you can select the individual tools from the tool list. In the "Tool list" field, you can
select your own tool list at any time.
Index card "Tools already used": Only tools which have

already been used are listed in the indicator window.
"Laser table" index card: In this mask, ToPs offers you the
laser tables which are permitted for the selected material.
Specify the rules after selecting the laser table.
5-34
Symbol (click button) "punch" at the right in the information

and selection bar. Click on the symbol. Identify the tool by
clicking on punch or laser processing or by entering the ID no.
of the tool. Follow the instructions in the command line.
The active tool is indicated at the top of the right selection
window "Active tool".
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Selection window "Active tools" in the information and

selection bar. Click directly in the window or select the arrow.
All used tools will be listed here in an index card. Select the
tool desired.
If you click on a tool data block using the right mouse button,
then the appropriate tool illustration will be blended in for you
in a preview window.
7.2
Machine-independent
tool offering
Punching tools from master data
All the tools in the database are available. However only those
tools which you can actually use with the current machine are
displayed to you. Tapping, slotting, engraving and long tools, for
example, are only displayed if the active machine supports them.
The tools available for the current machine for punching, nibbling
and forming are displayed to you in the "Punching" index card.
"Punching" index card
Punching tools from master data
S354E51.DOC
Fig. 18337
TECHNOLOGY module
5-35
Indicator window for "Selection": It is possible to presort or

reduce the number of tools using the function button with the
"Arrow" symbol or by clicking in the selection window.
Selecting the tool type
Fig. 18628
Select a particular tool type. Only tools of the particular type

sorted according to size are then displayed.
Example: Select the tool type "Oblong hole". Only all oblong
tools now appear in the selection window, with the oblong tool
with the greatest Dim 1 shown first.
Criteria for searching for tools or for reducing the number are
listed at the lower left:
"ID no." and "Comments": The system searches for the

tool according to ID no. or comments text. The percent sign
"%" acts as a placeholder (wildcard).
"Dim 1" and "Dim 2": Enter a number. Only tools whose
dimensions are not greater than the values entered are
found.
Click the desired check button it will be activated. Enter the

data. You start the search according to the defined search
criteria using FIND...
DELETE: The selected data block is deleted from the database

and all tool lists. You must confirm this action.
Quit the mask with QUIT.
5-36
Functions for managing the tools can be selected in the lower

right area. See: Explanation: "Managing tools".
OK confirms the selection and closes the mask.
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
7.3
Tools used
Precondition: The index card which specifies the tools already

used can only be selected if you have already defined a processing
operation.
Select the "Tools already used" index card in the mask for the main
function TOOL.
Index card
"Tools already used"
Activating an already used tool
Fig. 18804
In the mask, specify:
S354E51.DOC
"Number of tools used": The number of tools used in the

current processing operation is displayed for your information.
All of the tools used are listed in the scroll window. When a tool
is selected, the data in the indicator field is displayed above the
scroll window.
"ID no.": ID no. of the tool
"MT": Is this tool a Multitool tool? Yes=1, No=0
"Stroke": Number of strokes;
The tools which are marked with * (asterisk) correspond
exactly in dimensions to the geometry to be processed
during automatic punch processing (single hole or punch
up).
"Punching head position": Active punching head position
for the tool.
"Softp": Is Softpunch activated or not? If yes, which level?
"Angle": Angle at which the tool is used.
"Note": Text with additional information on tool.
TECHNOLOGY module
5-37
"Display Multitool" check button: If Multitool tools are used

during processing, by default only those punches which are
actually used are listed. If you wish to display all of the tool
punches from a Multitool, activate this check box.
This makes it possible to also activate a Multitool which has
not yet been used.
The system recognizes whether a tool from a Multitool has
been used. If this is the case, all tools from the Multitool are
displayed in the list. Example: Only one tool which appears in
the list has so far been used from a quadruple Multitool. With
this function, all tools from the Multitool are displayed
temporarily in the list.
Application: Selecting tools from an already used Multitool to
reduce tool changing.
Note: Multicut tools are managed as Multitool tools.
REDUCE function button: Reducing the number of tools used.

In the two-section follow-up mask, click on the tool you wish to
remove in the upper scroll window. This tool is deleted in the
upper scroll window and automatically entered in the lower
scroll window. The number of tools used is thereby reduced to
one.
Reducing the number of tools used
Fig. 18806
5-38
PRINT function button: The list of tools is printed.

PARAMETER function button: The parameters for the selected
tool is displayed.
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Display tool parameters
Fig. 18805
The selected tool and the parameters defined for it are displayed:
Softpunch: On or off?
Step 1 is quiet; step 4 is loud.
Tool change type (sheet type): Normal sheet, uneven sheet,

formed sheet?
Punching head position: Normal working position, forming

position, fast forming position, variable forming position?
Holding down force
Select the appropriate button to change other parameter settings.

You must confirm the modifications with OK.
The changed parameters do not become active until the first time
the tool is inserted.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-39
7.4
Tool lists
There are two types of tool lists in ToPs.
Superior tool list
Individual tool lists
This ist forms the basis (master

data).
These list contain some of the

tools of the superior tool lists.
The tool management system

always accesses this list.
These lists can for example be

addressed by selecting
automatic processing.
Application examples: You program with a different range of

tools for different machines.
Create an individual tool list for
each machine.
An individual tool list with the name "TRUMPF" is included

when ToPs 300 is delivered. The system uses this individual
list when processing is defined automatically (function
PUNCH
PROCESSING,
AUTOMATIC,
GENERATE,
START).
The tool list "TRUMPF" contains the following tools:

ID no.
Comment
Dim. 1
Dim. 2
WT
LW
MT
min.
max.
03100000
Square 10
10.0
0.0
0.5
8.0
04762050
Rectangle 76.2x5
76.2
5.0
0.5
5.0
04370050
Rectangle 37x5
37.0
5.0
0.5
5.0
04150030
Rectangle 15x3
15.0
3.0
0.5
4.0
You can expand the TRUMPF tool list as desired or add new
individual tool lists (see: "Managing tool lists").
5-40
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Calling up tool list

You can select tools from the TRUMPF list and from other selfdefined tool lists using the LIST index card.
The index card has the following structure:
"List" index card
Activating tool using LIST index card
Fig. 18629
"Selection": Presort and/or reduce the number of tools in the

selected list by selecting a certain tool type.
The four search criteria are also available here:

"ID no.", "Comments", "Dim 1", "Dim 2".
Start the search with SEARCH...
S354E51.DOC
"Tool list": Select individual tool list: Select the function button
with the arrow symbol and click in the indicator window. A
mask opens which contains the names of all individual tool
lists. Select the desired list.
MANAGE LISTS function button: You can create, change and

delete in the two-section mask (see: "Managing tool lists").
TECHNOLOGY module
5-41
Managing tool lists

Managing tool lists means creating, changing and deleting lists.
You will be supported by masks when modifying tool lists. They are
shown if you select the functions TOOL, index card "List" and the
MANAGE LISTS function button.
MANAGE LISTS
function button
Defining tool list
Fig. 19904
The tool display is divided. All available tools are shown in the
upper half (master data), and the tools for the individual tool list are
entered in the lower half.
5-42
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Create new tool list

Precondition: You can only add tools to the individual tool list which
are contained in the superior tool list (master data).
NEW function button: Create new individual tool list. Enter the
new name of the tool list in the mask and confirm the indication
with OK.
NEW function button
"Tool list" display field: Select individual tool list.

Select the function button with the "" (arrow) symbol or click
directly on the display field. A mask opens which contains the
names of all individual tool lists. Select the desired list. The
name of the list is entered in the display field.
Add tool to the individual tool list:

Select the tool in the upper list. The tool is transferred automatically to the lower list. Select a tool again until you have
added all the desired tools to the new tool list.
Make sure that you add all punches of a Multitool when you
add Multitool tools to an individual list.
Adding to existing tool lists

You can add new tools to an existing tool list at any time.
Procedure:
Call up the desired tool list in the mask for MANAGE LIST in
the lower section of the mask.
All tools from the superior tool list are offered in the upper
section of the mask.
Click in the upper section of the mask on the tool you wish to
add to the individual tool list.
The selected tool is entered in the lower window.
BACK confirms the changes and returns you to the previous
mask.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-43
Delete tool from tool list

Function button
REMOVE
Delete tool from the individual tool list:

Select the REMOVE function button in the lower section of the
mask after you have identified the tool in the tool list.
Delete entire tool list

Function button
DELETE
Delete entire individual tool list:
Precondition: The name of the tool list is entered in the entry field.
Click on the DELETE function button. The tool list is deleted with
all tools.
5-44
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
7.5
Manage tools
Managing a tools means entering (creating), changing and deleting

tool data. It also includes simply viewing tool information.
We recommend comparing the included tool data with the
data of your existing tools before generating an NC program
on the machine. Are all tools which are available to you at
the machine also in the ToPs 300 database? This is the
case, for example, if you have special tools or special
forming tools, or if you use tools with special dimensions for
processing. Check the data blocks. If deviations are present,
enter the new data expand the database with your special
tooling information. Only in this way can ToPs provide you
with an exact NC program which you can then process
trouble-free on the machine.
Index card "Punching"
In the "Punching" index cards, function buttons are available to you

which support tool management.
CREATE: Enter data for a new tool. You can create as a new
tool: standard tool, Multitool, tapping tool.
PRINT: print data block for selected tool.
MODIFY: Modify existing data for selected tool.
S354E51.DOC
FULL INFORM.: View data block for selected tool. Data cannot
be modified in this mask.
DELETE: delete the selected data block and in doing so, the
tool from the database.
TECHNOLOGY module
5-45
Overview: Which dimensions must be

entered for which tool?
Tool type
A1
A2
A3
A4
A5
Round
Diameter
Rectangle with
corner radius
Length
Corner width
Square
Length
Rectangle
Length
Width
Diameter
Core hole
diameter
5
Tapping
> see Creating tapping
tool
Radius
Square with corner Length

radius
Radius
Oblong hole
Length
Width
Special
2)
tool
Length
Width
10
Center punch
Diameter
11
Laser (ToPs 250)
13
Forming
2)
tool
Length
Width
(standard)
Penetration
5)
depth
=0 normalforming
+53)
height
>0 variable
6)
forming height
14
Embossing
2)
tool
Length
Width
(standard)
Penetration
5)
depth
15
Arc
Radius
Length
Web width
Center point
16
Radius
Radius
Web width
4)
2) The dimensions of the tool are determined by the drawing of the tool in ToPs. You do not have to enter tool dimensions.
An exact drawing of the tool geometry must be present.
3) A forming height is not permissible for Multitool tools (message).
4) For the arc tool, a differentiation is made between arc tool type 1 and type 2 depending on dimension A2, see: Technical
information on the arc tool.
5) Only for machines with BOSCH CC300 and CC220 control systems. For machines with SINUMERIK 840D or BOSCH
type 3 control, the setting must be entered directly on the control system.
6) The value must be between the minimum and maximum values which are stored in DATA module in the for MACHINES,
DATA, BASIC MACHINE, DATA 3.
5-46
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Tool type
A1
A2
A3
17
Triangle
Angle
Length x
Length y
18
Slotting
tool
Length
Width
20
Marking
tool
Diameter
21
Multicut
tool
Radius R1-R4
Tool reference
offset
19
Quick forming
Length
Width
A4
Penetration depth
A5
Forming
5)
position
For tool administration, please observe the details (length,

width, radius, twisting angle) in the informational booklet
which is included in the tool delivery.
5) Only for machines with BOSCH CC300 and CC220 control systems. For machines with SINUMERIK 840D or BOSCH
type 3 control, the setting must be entered directly on the control system.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-47
Creating standard tool

Procedure:
Functions
TECHNOLOGY
module
Tool
"Punching" index card:

CREATE function
Steps:
Precondition: The TECHNOLOGY module must be selected.
Select the function TOOL in the main menu.
Select CREATE function button in the "Punching" index card.

Click on "Standard" tool type.
Select the CONTINUE function button at the bottom of the
mask. The following can be selected: Standard tools such as
round, rectangle, oblong hole, center punch, slotting,
engraving, forming tools.
Select the tool desired.
The next mask "Create standard tool" will be displayed.

Specify in the left part of the mask:
"Type": The previously selected tool type is displayed in this

display field.
Entry fields for tool dimensions are located underneath:

"Dimensions" using function button "...".
The system suggests a tool drawing. You can modify this
proposal at any time. Select the switch with the "arrow" symbol
and click on the desired illustration in the selection mask (files
with WZG format).
A1 to A5: You can enter the dimension data or call it up with
the "..." function button. You will find the tool parameter defined
exactly here.
Double clicking opens the calculator so you can make
calculations yourself.
"auto. proposal": Specify the ID number and comment text

automatically.
ID number structure
Every tool is entered into the database with a unique identity
number. The ID number is structured in accordance with the
following principle:
5-48
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Format of the ID number for standard tools:

12345678
12
Tool type (with preceding zeros)
345
Dimension A1 (in 1/10 mm)
678
Dimension A2 (in 1/10 mm)
Example: ID number of the rectangular tool 76.2x5 reads

0476050.
Format of the ID number for Multitool tools:
01999xyz
01999
ID for Multitool
ID for the kind of Multitool (2, 3, 4 or 6-tuple)*)
yz
Consecutive punch number of the Multitool
Example: the identity number for the first punch of a 4-station

Multitool reads 01999401.
An identity number defined in this way can be applied as a
useful search criteria for tool selection. Example: Show all
rectangular tools with a 20 mm edge length. Entry: 04200%.
"Whispertool": Does the tool have a slanted cutting edge or

not?
*)
CALCULATE: The system suggests an ID no. depending on

the tool type and the first two dimensions. You can modify the
proposal for the remark text at any time. The ID number has a
certain coded content and is created in dependence of the
present identity numbers in the database. You should accept
the suggestion for this reason.
Deactivate the check button if an automatic proposal is not
desired. The function button is disabled at the same time. This
block then applies to every mask in the tool management
system. Manual modification of the proposals is possible at any
time.
"Material thickness": Enter minimum and maximum sheet

thickness [in mm].
12-station Multitool tool (embossing punch) has the identity number 14999000 in ToPs. Specify an identity number which
can be used in your administration for other 12-station Multitool tools.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-49
At the right side of the mask you determine:
"Magazine station": Which magazine station is occupied by the

tool? This information is not evaluated by the system.
"Long tool" (e.g. for the TC 2000R): Does the tool have a long
punch?
"Block": Should this punching tool be disabled for processing

definition?
NEXT: Do you want to enter data for another standard tool?

Select this function button at the bottom of the mask: The
specified data for the defined tool is written into the database,
the mask stays open, however, for one more tool. The process
restarts with the selection of the tool type. The data for material
thickness remain the same, so that you can successively enter
more tools for the same sheet thickness.
5-50
"Installation position": In which installation position is the tool

used, specified in degrees.
CLOSE: Has you finished your tool definition?

By pressing CLOSE, the data is transferred to the database.
Click function button with the left mouse button: You have
to confirm the data transfer once again.
Click function button with the right mouse button: The data
is written into the database immediately without further
confirmation.
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Create Multitool tool

Procedure:
Functions
TECHNOLOGY
module
Tool

CREATE function
Steps:

Click on "Multitool" tool type.
Select CONTINUE at mask bottom. Click on the Multitool type
and identify the tool type for the first tool punch. Confirm your
selection with OK.
Click on the tool type.
The next mask "Create Multitool" will be displayed.

Specify the data needed for the first punch.
"Type": In this pull-down menu, the selected tool type is specified firstly, and secondly you can modify the tool type via the
"arrow" button. The selection mask will be displayed with tool
types.
Below are the entry fields with the tool dimensions:

"Dimensions" using function button "...".
The system suggests a tool drawing. You can modify this
proposal at any time. Select the switch with the "arrow" symbol
and click on the desired illustration in the selection mask (files
with WZG format).
the "..." function button. You will find the tool parameters
described exactly here.
Double clicking opens the calculator so you can make
calculations yourself.

automatically. ID no. composition see: "Creating standard
tool".
CALCULATE: The system generates a proposal for the identity

number and remark text depending on the defined Multitool
type, the punch number, the tool type and the first two
dimensions.
The proposal for the remark text is generated anew with every
punch, the ID number, however, is only created once during
the first punch. It then remains unchanged, so that all other
punches of the Multitool tool have the same ID no.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-51

system.
"Whispertool": Does the tool have a slanted cutting edge or

not?
"Material thickness": Enter the minimum and maximum sheet

thickness [in mm].
At the right side of the mask, specify:

"Multitool type": You can find the selected Multitool type

displayed here.
"Punch number": The number of the punch which you are

currently defining will be displayed.
"Long tool": is not active.

definitions?
The punches which have already been defined are shown in

the window situated underneath: Punch number, remark text,
dim. 1 and dim. 2. A punch can be clicked on from this list and,
in doing so, processing operations can be defined.
CONTINUE: Determine data for the following Multitool

punches.
Determine firstly the tool type for the next punch again, the
material thickness will be accepted.
As soon as you have defined the last punch this function
button will be deactivated.
5-52

NEXT: This function button is only active when you have

created the entire Multitool tool set.
Do you want to enter data for another Multitool tool?
the mask stays open, however, for one more Multitool tool. The
process restarts with the selection of the Multitool type and the
tool type. The data for material thickness remain the same, so
that you can successively enter more tools for the same sheet
thickness.
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC

confirmation.
A Multitool tool must always be defined completely. If
punches are missing when the CLOSE function button is
selected, the Multitool is deleted. A message appears which
enables you to cancel this procedure. You can then continue
the tool definitions properly.
Create tapping tool

Procedure:
Functions
TECHNOLOGY
module
Tool

CREATE function
Steps:

Click on "Tapping tool" tool type.
The next mask "Create thread forming tool" will be displayed:

At the left side of the mask you determine:
S354E51.DOC
"Type": The selected tool type is displayed in this display field.

Below are the entry fields with the tool dimensions: "Dimensions" using function button "...".
The system suggests a tool drawing.
the "..." function button. You will find the tool parameter defined
exactly here.
Double clicking opens the calculator so you can make calculations yourself.
TECHNOLOGY module
5-53
"auto. proposal": Determine the ID number and comment text

automatically or enter it. ID no. composition see: "Creating
standard tool".
CALCULATE: the system generates a proposal for the identity

number and remark text depending on the first two dimensions.
You can modify the proposal for the remark text at any time.
The ID number has a certain coded content and is created in
dependence of the present identity numbers in the database.
You should accept the suggestion for this reason.
system.
"Material thickness": Enter minimum and maximum sheet

thickness [in mm].
Specify in the right side of the mask:
"Thread type": Rotation direction of thread. Does this thread

forming tool create a right-handed or a left-handed thread?

"Ratio": What ratio does the tapping tool have?
"Pitch": What pitch does the thread forming tool have?

definition?
NEXT: Do you want to enter data for another tapping tool?

Select this function button at the mask bottom: The specified
data for the defined tool is written into the database, the mask
stays open, however, for one more tool. The data for material
thickness remains the same, so that you can successively
enter several tapping tools for the same sheet thickness.
5-54
"Thread type": Design of thread; fine-pitch, standard or

special?

confirmation.
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Create Multicut tool

Procedure:
Functions
TECHNOLOGY
module
Tool

CREATE function
Steps:

Click on "Multicut" tool type.
Select the CONTINUE function button at the bottom of the
mask.
The next mask "Create Multicut" will be displayed.

Specify:

automatically. ID no. composition see: "Creating standard
tool".
CALCULATE: The system suggests an ID no. and remark text

depending on the defined tool type and the entries. You can
modify the proposal for the remark text at any time. The ID
number has a certain coded content and is created in
dependence of the present identity numbers in the database.
You should accept the suggestion for this reason.
system. Manual modification of the proposals is possible at any
time.
Below are entry fields for radius and offset entries and an entry
fir an informational text as a remark text. Double clicking in a
display field for numerical values displays the calculator.
"Material thickness": Enter the minimum and maximum sheet

thickness [in mm].

S354E51.DOC
"Type": The tool type you selected is displayed in this display

field.

TECHNOLOGY module
5-55

definition?
NEXT: Do you want to enter data for another Multicut tool?

the mask stays open, however, for one more tool. The process
restarts with the selection of the tool type. The data for material
thickness remain the same, so that you can successively enter
more tools for the same sheet thickness.
5-56
"Long tool": Does the tool have a long punch?

confirmation.
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Deleting the data block for a tool

Procedure:
Functions
TECHNOLOGY
module
Tool

DELETE function
Steps:
Select the tool (data block) which you wish to delete from the
master data (= superior tool list) and the list (individual tool
list) in the "Punching" index card.
Click the DELETE function button.
Confirm the response from the system:
YES: The tool is deleted from the master record and the
(individual) lists.
NO: The procedure is aborted. You return to the "Punching"
index card.
Changing the data for a tool

Procedure:
Functions
TECHNOLOGY
module
Tool

MODIFY function
Steps:
S354E51.DOC
Select the tool (data block) whose data you wish to change in
the "Punching" index card.
Click the MODIFY function button.
The mask with the entire data block for the selected tool is
displayed.
Carry out the desired changes.
Confirm your selection by pressing the CLOSE function
button. At the same time, you leave the mask and return to
the "Punching" index card.
TECHNOLOGY module
5-57
8.
Module
DATA
The laser tables in ToPs contain the application parameters (data)

which optimize laser processing. The database contains the
application parameters for processing:
Laser
Laser tables
mild steel (St37)

special steel (1.4301) and
aluminium alloys (ALMg3, AlMgSi1)
The application parameters have been determined and released

for the corresponding machines by our process development
department.
You will also find these application parameters in the Data

collection for your machine.
5-58
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
8.1
Structure of laser tables
A laser table in ToPs contains all technology data for the

processing of a material type and sheet thickness.
It corresponds to a data block in the database and is composed as
follows:
The data for the processing operation is determined depending on

the
machine
table no.
laser power
gas pressure
lens focal length
material
material thickness
One or more sets of rules are also assigned.
DATA module: Function LASER, PIERCING

DATA module: Function LASER, GENERAL CUTTING
DATA module: Function LASER, CONTOUR CUTTING
DATA module: Function LASER, VAPORIZE
DATA module: Funktion LASER, MARKING
DATA module: Function LASER, POINT MARKING
DATA module: Function LASER, MICROWELD
DATA module: Function LASER, COMMENTARY
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-59
8.2
Laser table numbers
The numbers in the laser tables are consecutive, 4-digit numbers.

Number range of TRUMPF
The number range from 1000 - 4999 is reserved for the laser tables
created by TRUMPF.
Your number range
you create.
Important: The numbers of the laser tables created by TRUMPF

are rewritten each time the software is updated. For this reason,
you should not change the tables. If you wish to change a table,
assign a new table number from the number range available to
you (5000 - 9999). This is the only way to ensure that your table is
not overwritten when the software is updated. Recommended
procedure: Copy an existing laser table. Change the number and
the values which must be changed (managing laser tables see:
DATA module).
Data collection
In the data collection you received with your machine, the laser
tables are stored under the same number as in the database.
Updating the data collection
The data collections are updated by TRUMPF at regular intervals.

The data collection contains a summary of the table numbers in
which data has been changed and information on the improvements expected from the change. You have the option of deciding
whether to accept our recommendations and change and expand
your present database.
5-60
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
8.3
Programming
Laser table: Programming and NC text
A laser table (and one of the assigned rules) is selected in ToPs for
defining the processing with the laser.
The parameters for the particular processing operation are read in
from these laser tables on the BOSCH or SINUMERIK control
systems of the machines.
Precondition: The laser tables mustbe available to the control
systems.
SINUMERIK control system

Laser table and NC text
The technology table is called up as a cycle parameter in the laser

cycle TC_LASER_ON.
So the question is: How is the data from the laser tables
transferred to the SINUMERIK control systems?
The TC_LASER_ON cycle contains the following cycle parameter:
processing method,
"Table",
piercing type,
cutting type.
TC_LASER_ON (processing method, "Table", piecing type, cutting type)

Example: TC_LASER_ON (5,"2000",0,100)
For a description of the individual parameters, please refer

to the programming instructions for your machine.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-61
Cycle parameter processing

methods
Particular functions are assigned to defined processing methods:

processing
methods
Function
Piercing and cutting with distance control

system
Piercing and cutting without distance control

system
Piercing without distance control system,

cutting with distance control system
Piercing with distance control system, cutting

without distance control system
Cutting with distance control system
Cutting without distance control system
Cutting with distance control system, beam

OFF
Cutting without distance control system, beam

OFF
241
Cutting with "On-the-fly data exchange";

distance control ON
242
Cutting with "On-the-fly data exchange";

distance control OFF
Cycle parameter:
Table
The appropriate laser-technology table is selected by entering the

4-digit table number.
Cycle parameter:
Piercing type
Data is selected from the active laser technology table via the
piercing type.
Several piercing types are stored in the table:
Number
10
Normal piercing
11
Gentle piercing
20
Cycle parameter:
Cutting type
Function
Point marking (spot shaped)
Data is selected from the active laser technology table via the
cutting type. Cutting data (e.g. laser power, cutting and approach
parameters) is stored in the laser table.
A distinction is made between:
small, medium and large contours
normal and reduced cutting speeds
normal and reduced acceleration values
5-62
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
The cutting type is selected with a 3-digit number:

3
1 Large contour
0 normal
0 normal
2 Medium contour
1 reduced
1 reduced
3 Small contour
The following cutting types are available:

Number
100
Cutting large contours with normal acceleration
101
Cutting large contours with reduced acceleration
110
Cutting of large contour with reduced approach

and normal acceleration
111
Cutting of large contour with reduced approach

and reduced acceleration
200
Cutting medium contours with normal acceleration
201
Cutting medium contours with reduced

acceleration
210
Cutting of medium contour with reduced approach

211
Cutting of medium contour with reduced approach

and reduced acceleration
300
Cutting small contours with normal acceleration
301
Cutting small contours with reduced acceleration
310
Cutting of small contour with reduced approach

311
Cutting small contours with reduced approach
400
Vaporization special processing
500
Marking special processing
600
S354E51.DOC
Function
Special processing for centre marking geometry
TECHNOLOGY module
5-63
BOSCH control system

Initial position
In ToPs, the parameters for laser processing are taken from the
laser tables. In BOSCH control systems, the parameters for laser
processing are read in from the technology tables.
So the question is: How is the data from the laser tables transferred to the technology tables?
Scope of information
in the tables
A laser table contains substantially more information than a

technology table. The result of this large information capacity: A
laser table contains several technology tables (control). Example:
Laser table
Key parameters: Table no., machine, laser power (watt),
gas pressure, lens focal length, material, material thickness
Piercing type
Cutting type
Contour size
normal
normal
large
soft
reduced
small
Piercing: normal, cutting type: normal,

Contour size: small
Table no., machine, laser power (watt),
title, lens focal length, material, material thickness
Technology table
Basic rule
General rule: The data which is actually required is selected by

specifying the cutting type, piercing type and contour size.
Number of the
technology table
The number of the technology table is composed according to the

following scheme:
Number of the laser table + code number
4711xyz
5-64
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Structure of the code number

x:
Piercing type
0 = normal
1 = soft
y:
Cutting type
0 = normal
1 = reduced
z:
Contour size
0 = large
1 = small
Example:
Number of the laser table: 4711
Piercing type
Cutting type
Contour size
normal
soft
normal
reduced
large
small
Number of the technology table: 4711001

The code number 001 therefore means: normal piercing, normal
cutting, small contour.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-65
Technology table for the processing types:

Center marking, marking and vaporization
Center marking
Technology tables which contain data for centre marking are

formed according to a fixed scheme. These technology tables
always have the code number 440 regardless of the selected
piercing type, cutting type and contour size.
Schematic overview:
Number of the laser table + 440
4711440
Marking
Technology tables which contain data for marking are formed

according to a fixed scheme. These technology tables always have
the code number 030 regardless of the selected piercing type,
cutting type and contour size. Schematic overview:
4711030
Vaporization
Technology tables which contain data for vaporization are formed

according to a fixed scheme. These technology tables always have
the code number 020 regardless of the selected piercing type,
cutting type and contour size. Schematic overview:
4711020
5-66
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
9.
Rule group
A rule group is a collection of rules according to which decision

processes are to be carried out. A rule group is also integrated in
ToPs which contains all the information for determining the laser
processing operation. The information of this rule group is stored in
the database. Interpretation is done with the specified rules of the
part geometry and the processing operation is assigned in the
TECHNOLOGY module.
By means of the rules specified in the rule group, ToPs recognises
which type of contour is being used, the corner to start at, where to
create a looping and much more.
Stored Information
DATA
module
Rule group
S354E51.DOC
Rule groups from TRUMPF are already stored in the database.

They are valid for the processing of
mild steel (St37),

special steel (1.4301) and
aluminum alloys (AlMg3, AlMgSi1).
TECHNOLOGY module
5-67
9.1
Structure of rule group data
The data block of a rule group is determined according to the

following scheme:
Processing strategies are specified depending on the
rule group name (number)

material
material thickness
machine
gas pressure.
General conditions: General specifications

Small/medium/large contour
Vaporization
Piercing
Cutting
Rounding
Looping
Positioning
Approaching
5-68
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
9.2
Rule group name
The name of the rule group can consist of various characters:

letters, numerals or a combination of both. Maximum length of the
name: 12 characters.
Your rule groups
The first character of you rule group name must be a "K".

Examples:
Rule groups from TRUMPF
The rule groups which we have already stored in the database are
characterized by the fact that their first character is not a "K".
Examples:
K4711
KPR1
K0001
60371
60372
60373
...
60704
Important: The rule groups created by TRUMPF are rewritten

each time the software is updated. For this reason, you should not
change these rule groups. If you wish to change a rule group,
assign a name which starts with "K". This is the only way to
ensure that your rule group is not overwritten when the software is
updated. Recommended procedure: Copy an existing rule group.
Change the number and the values which must be changed.
The names of our rule groups, which are already contained in the
database, are formed according to the following scheme:
Four characters + code number
5001x
The code number indicates which general conditions apply to this
rule group.
The general conditions are summarized in a mask (see: DATA
module: Determining rule group data, Masks) with commentary
under a key word.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-69
Code numbers and

key words
The code number facilitates selection of a rule group. The code

number has the following meanings:
Code
number
Meaning
Round (corners are rounded)
Looping (corners become sharp)
No round/no looping (corners are ground down)
Film/round (sheet is covered with film, corners are

rounded)
Example: The rule group with the name 60373 creates neither
loops nor roundings.
5-70
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
10.
Generate processing operation
In ToPs we speak generally of processing operations, when we

mean either punch or laser processing.
When defining processing operations using the functions of the onscreen menu, one must distinguish between:
The functions PUNCH PROCESSING, MANUAL:

Manual punch processing with tools (punch, nibble and forming
tools).
The functions LASER PROCESSING, AUTOMATIC:

Automatic laser processing with the laser as a tool.
Sheet processing or
Single part processing
The functions PUNCH PROCESSING, AUTOMATIC:

Automatic punch processing with tools (punch, nibble and
forming tools).
The functions LASER PROCESSING, MANUAL:

Manual laser processing with the laser as a tool.
Punch and laser processing can be defined both in the single part
(single part mode) and on the sheet (sheet mode).
You select the processing mode by selecting the function in the
main menu bar, regardless of whether you define the processing
operation for single part or sheet.
Function SINGLE PART
Function TRANSFER
SINGLE PART TO SHEET
Change to single part

processing
Change to sheet processing

(sheet mode)
(Single part mode)
It is always possible to switch between single part and sheet

modes. Processing operations which were defined in the single
part must be transferred to the sheet.
The on-screen menus for processing on the sheet and in the single
part are for the most part the same. The processing functions for
punch an on-screen processing are started in the on-screen menu.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-71
Requirements:
The requirements for defining or changing a processing operation
are:
Geometry as a reference quantity, such as
single part drawing
drawing of a mininest
drawing of a sheet with nested parts
single part or mini-nest with processing
sheet with processing
Geometries without reference sizes: processing operations are
placed freely on the part or the sheet. No geometry is available
as a reference quantity for processing definition.
The procedure for defining processing with removal is always
basically the same regardless of whether you are defining the
operations in the single part or on the sheet.
TECHNOLOGY
module
File
Load
Start the TECHNOLOGY module. Confirm machine or select a

new machine.
Using the function FILE, LOAD:
Select processing mode

Single part
Load parts without processing (format: GEO), or mini nests

(format: MTL) and specify sheet data.
or
Load sheet without processing (format: TAF).
or
Load parts with processing (format: GMT).
or
Load sheet with processing (format: TMT).
Decide whether to carry out processing in single part or sheet

mode:
Single part processing (mode): Select the function SINGLE

PART in the main menu.
After you have loaded several single parts or a sheet, click on
the single part drawing whose processing you would like to
define. This step does not apply if only one single part
drawing is loaded.
In single part mode, you have the option of seeing a contour
view: Function CONTOUR (see: Single part processing with
contour view).
processing operations which were defined in the single part
must be transferred to the sheet: Select the function
TRANSFER SINGLE PART TO SHEET.
5-72
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Processing
Defining the
processing operation
Sheet processing (mode): Select the function Processing in

the main menu. The functions for sheet processing (menu)
are displayed.
First specify the processing technology (punch or laser

processing) and the processing type (automatic or manual).
Select the appropriate control function to define the processing
operation.
Punch processing
The processing options:
PUNCH PROCESSING, AUTOMATIC, control functions
Fig. 20090
PUNCH PROCESSING, MANUAL, control functions
Fig. 20091
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-73
Laser processing
LASER PROCESSING, AUTOMATIC, control functions
Fig. 20092
LASER PROCESSING, MANUAL, control functions
Fig. 20093
The individual menu functions will appear depending on the control

functions.
5-74
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Defining single part processing

Single part
Single part processing can only be carried out in single part mode:
Select the SINGLE PART function.
Precondition: Single part or sheet is loaded.

After you have loaded several single parts or a sheet, click on the
single part drawing whose processing you would like to define.
This step does not apply if only one single part drawing is loaded.
The mask appears as follows:
Single part processing in single part mode
Define processing in
single part mode.
Fig. 19896
The single part is shown filling the entire screen.

The following functions are offered in the main menu bar.
The screen menu for single part processing will be displayed. For
a description of the functions in the menu, see: "Automatically
generating punch processing".
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-75
Transferring single part processing to the

sheet
Function
TRANSFER
SINGLE PART
TO SHEET
You can transfer the processing operation of the single part to the
sheet.
When you have finished single part processing, select the function
TRANSFER SINGLE PART TO SHEET.
Transferring single part processing to the sheet
"General" index card
Choose from the general options in the next mask:
5-76
Fig. 20094
TECHNOLOGY module
Which parts should the processing definition be transferred to?

To all parts of the sheet or
the parts which you select interactively.
Should the angular position of the parts on the sheet be taken
into account?
Active check button: changes are only made to parts with the
same angular position.
Check button not activated: Angular position of the parts is not
taken into account.
S354E51.DOC
"MFN" index card
The "MFN" (multi-copy processing) index card is only active if a

sheet with several multi-copy processing areas is available.
Specify which parts are to be updated in "Update multi-copy processing":
all parts in the multi-copy

parts in the uneven rows
parts in the even rows.
The update applies to the multi-copy processing from which you

have identified the single part.
OK function:
S354E51.DOC
Confirm the specification with OK.
TECHNOLOGY module
5-77
Processing with contour view

You can carry out processing of individual contours in single part
mode.
At the same time you can decide if you wish to transfer the
specified contour processing to other similar geometries (copies) in
the individual part. Contours, texts and points are seen as
geometries.
Application: You can test the processing on the geometry as a

sample and transfer it to other similar geometries.
Procedure:
Functions
Single part
Steps:
Change to single part mode.
Single part mode
Contour
5-78
TECHNOLOGY module
Fig. 18824
Select the CONTOUR function. You see a mask with check

boxes in which you can make certain settings.
"Angular position": Should the angular position be taken
into account for geometries with the same form (and the
same size)? If yes, check the box. Oblong holes with the
same angular position belong to a pattern group. If there
are other oblong hole contours at another angle, they are
treated as a separate pattern group.
If not, all oblong holes are grouped in one pattern group,
regardless of their angular position. Each pattern group
represents one pattern.
S354E51.DOC
OK function
"Fill screen": Should the pattern be displayed filling the

entire screen?
"Consider individual holes": Should processed individual
holes be taken into account or not? In the mask above, that
would be the large square at an angle of 45.
"Autocut suggestion": A processing suggestion for each
pattern is made via the definition of the automatic
processing operation during viewing. The parameters and
the tool settings which are defined in the automatic
processing are used.
Confirm the mask with OK. The viewing of the geometry begins
with a geometry within the single part.
The individual geometries are referred to as a pattern and are
numbered. Also follow the instructions in the message line.
Example: Single part in shown masks
You see the following indications in the message line:
"Pattern no. 3/12": Contour pattern 3 of a total of 12 contour
patterns.
"Copies: 4": There are 4 more contours of this type in the
single part, i.e. oblong holes with the same angular position
(because "Consider angular position" is activated)
"Oblong hole: l=10.00, b=5.00, r=2.50": The contour is an
oblong hole with these specifications for length l, width b
and radius r in [mm].
A random representative from a contour group is selected as

"pattern" and marked with the color magenta. Example: There are
4 oblong holes with the same angular position in the single part.
One oblong hole is displayed in magenta and counts as the pattern.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-79
Full-screen contour mode
Next contour
Select next contour: Click the NEXT CONTOUR function.

If there are several copies of the depicted contour a mask now
appears in which you must confirm whether the processing of
the pattern contour is to be transferred to the remaining
"copies" in the single part.
Transfer the processing of the pattern contour to the copies or not?
5-80
TECHNOLOGY module
Fig. 18826
Fig. 18827
S354E51.DOC
Confirm mask
Confirm the mask with YES or NO.
YES: The geometry processing is transferred to the existing

copies.
NO: The geometry processing is not transferred
The system jumps to the next geometry pattern and displays it.
In this way, you can view the geometries within a single part on
after the other. The function buttons are located in the main menu
bar:
Previous
contour
Next contour
PREVIOUS CONTOUR: The system jumps back to the

previous contour.
NEXT CONTOUR: The system jumps to the pattern within

single part.
View previous or next contour
Fig. 18829E
The system informs you as soon as you reach the first or last
pattern.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-81
Defining sheet processing

Activate sheet mode
You are in sheet mode if you
have loaded a sheet

have switched from single part mode to sheet mode.
The display on-screen contains the depiction of the sheet with parts
as well as, for example, the working area, the overshoot area and
the clamp dead ranges.
Processing
Sheet processing can only be carried out in sheet mode:

Select the Processing function. The menu for processing definition is displayed.
Collision test for punch and laser

processing
Punch processing with
collision test
A collision test of punching tool and contour is always carried out

during processing definition.
Collision test means: the system checks automatically whether a
contour violation by the punching tool will occur during processing
of the contour. Not only the neighboring elements, but all elements
are checked.
Collisions are depicted on screen with yellow circles. This allows
you to recognize and correct possible contour violations.
Laser processing with

collision test
5-82
ToPs 300 automatically performs a collision test when carrying out

laser operations (self collision test). Adjacent contours are not
subjected to a collision test.
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Collision test means: During definition of a laser processing

operation, ToPs checks whether its own contour is violated by a
pre-punch hole approach and move-away flags or loops. The
system enforces a safety distance of 1.0 mm.
If a contour violation is recognized, the system tries to avoid the
collision: Approach and departure flags are shortened, and loops
are reduced. These processing changes are, however, carried out
within the framework of the rules.
Collision tests are also performed for contours which are only
partly processed.
All settings which apply to the collision test are defined in the
system rule group.
Display
Collisions are marked with yellow circles in the TECHNOLOGY

module. Enlarge the desired section of the screen so that you can
see the collision markings more clearly.
Collisions in ToPs: Enlarged display
S354E51.DOC
Fig. 19914
TECHNOLOGY module
5-83
10.1 Generating punch processing

automatically
Functions
PUNCH PROCESSING,
AUTOMATIC, GENERATE,
START
Start automatic processing with punching tools.

Defining automatic processing with punching tools with ToPs 300
means:
Fully automatic processing of the geometry, without manual

tool selection or use of technological know-how.
Individual holes, simple and complicated inner and outer

contours, as well as the punching of breaches of different
geometries are now processed more quickly and easily; e.g.
punching of breaches:
Oblong holes are processed with round or oblong tools.
Rectangles with corner radius are punched automatically
with a square or rectangular tool with corner radius.
Round breaches are punched with round or Multicut tools.
Processing sequence:
Single hole
Punching up
Contours.
User-friendly options for individual adaptation of automatic

punch processing.
Optimal support of all tool types; see: Overview: Which tool
for which processing?"
Precondition:
5-84
Single part or sheet must be loaded.

The setting "Standard selection" must be selected for the tools
(first display field) in the menu PUNCH PROCESSING,
AUTOMATIC.
A tool list with the name "TRUMPF" must be available because
the system accesses this individual list with standard setting
during automatic processing. A tool list with the name
"TRUMPF" is included with the software. See: Standard
settings for automatic processing.
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Procedure:
Functions
File
Load
Single part
processing
Function
PUNCH PROCESSING,
AUTOMATIC,
GENERATE, START
Steps:
Automatic processing at the push of a button.
Load single part or nested sheet.
Switch to single part mode to define the processing.
or
Define the processing of the entire sheet in sheet mode.
Right click on the START menu function in the PUNCH

PROCESSING, AUTOMATIC, GENERATE menu.
Automatic processing of the part or sheet is started
immediately.
or
S354E51.DOC
Mark the part or sheet to be processed.

Start the processing for the marked part or sheet with OK
(fixed function in menu).
Automatic processing starts immediately if OK is selected
directly with no part marked.
TECHNOLOGY module
5-85
Standard settings for automatic punch

processing
Standard settings are the default settings, i.e. the setting which are
there when ToPs is started.
You find the following settings in the selection window of the menu
by default:
Standard settings for automatic punch processing
Tool selection
Fig. 19896
Tool selection for single hole, punch-up, contours:

Which tools can be selected?
You have the following options for tool selection with all three automatisms:
Standard (all tools from master data),
"TRUMPF" list,
any individual tool list,
active tool,
already used tools.
The following tool selection is defined in the display windows by
default:
"Standard": Tools from master data are used for processing

definition.
"TRUMPF": The TRUMPF list is activated as tool list.
"All contours": For the processing definition, all contours (inner
and outer contours) are to be processed.
You can change these settings: Click in the particular window or

select the "arrow" symbol. The selection options are offered to you
as pull-down windows or a mask.
5-86
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
By default, ToPs accesses tools during processing which are

related with certain automatisms:
"Single hole": Should single holes be processed automatically?

If yes: Activate check box.
For individual holes: use all tools ("Standard").
"Punching": Should standard geometries be punched automatically? If yes: Activate check box.
Standard geometries are: round hole, oblong hole, rectangle
and square.
For punching: use all tools (master data).
"Contour": Should contours automatically be processed with

punching tools? If yes: Activate check box.
For contours: Use the "TRUMPF" tool list, an already existing
individual list, which is automatically delivered with ToPs.
Specify which contours are to be processed automatically with
punching tools
all contours
only inner contours
only outer contours.
Check the appropriate box if individual holes, geometries or
contours are to be reset for laser processing. These elements are then not processed and are marked in yellow on
the screen.
Remove small parts
S354E51.DOC
"Removal": First you can check the box for removal. Effect:
ToPs automatically creates a removal procedure for large
breaches in the single part and the single part itself.
TECHNOLOGY module
5-87
"TRUMPF" tool list

Background information on
the "TRUMPF" tool list
The "TRUMPF" tool list is an individual list which was put together
by TRUMPF.
The "TRUMPF" tool list contains the following tools:
Tools in the TRUMPF

tool list
Square 10 mm, ID no. 03100000

Rectangle 15x3 mm, ID no. 04150030
Rectangle 37x5 mm, ID no. 04370050
Rectangle 76.2x5 mm, ID no. 04762050.
You can of course adapt this list to your processing possibilities:

Adding and deleting tools (see: Recommended tools).
It is important, however, that this list contains tools which are
available to you and which allow optimum processing of inner and
outer contours.
Recommended tools
We recommend adding the following tools to the "TRUMPF" tool

list:
Contour
Tool
Long, straight
elements
Large rectangular tool1)
Short, straight
elements
Medium and small

rectangular tool
External arc
Small square tool,

multiple radius tool,
arc tool
Internal arc2)
Multicut too,
arc tool
round tool
Adding a triangular tool to the "TRUMPF" list is also recommended, e.g. for acute angle notches.
Already used tools are also used for contour processing in
addition to the tools from the "TRUMPF" list.
1) Slitting tools are managed as rectangular tools with radius.

2) An arc is processed as a single hole in automatic punch processing if the radius of the arc and the radius of the round tool
are identical.
5-88
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Specifying parameters for automatic punch

processing
Function GENERATE,
PARAMETERS
Further conditions for automatic punch processing are found in the

mask for the PARAMETER function.
"Tools"
Which tools should be used with the highest priority?
Multitool tools? Standard setting NO.
Whispertool tools? Standard setting YES.
Special tools? Standard setting NO.
Tolerance?
With what tolerance should the tool be searched for? A
tolerance 0.01 mm is set by default.
Example: A round tool with a diameter of 10 mm is
present. The drawing shows round holes with a diameter of
10.002 mm. The tool will not be used at a tolerance value
of 0.0001 mm.
"Conditions"
"Smooth edges": Are smooth edges desired when processing the contours: yes or no?
Check box activated: Smooth edges means that no postprocessing is intended for the contour. The system checks,
e.g. when processing arcs, whether using round tools can
be avoided. If other tools are available (e.g. Multicut tool),
no round tools are used.
Check button not activated: The edges do not have to be
smooth when processing arcs and circles (default setting).
"Observe installation angle".
If a tool with a certain angle is installed in the tool adapter
and the installation position is to be considered during
processing definition, this check box must be activated.
This check box can only be activated if it is a machine
without a C-axis (example: TC 240).
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-89
"Tests"
"Collision prevention": Should the collisions be depicted on
screen during automatic processing or not?
Active check button: Automatic processing is carried out

with collision test. Processing operations with collisions are
not displayed.
Processing operations which cause a collision are deleted
immediately during automatic punch processing. The
unprocessed contour remains (default setting).
The collision test is always active with the ON CONTOUR
function!
Check button not activated: Automatic processing with

collision is carried out but the processing with collision is
not deleted from the screen. All collisions are depicted on
screen with yellow circles. This allows you to check the
processing operations with collisions.
Background information:
Collision test also means that in corners with acute or obtuse
angles and at tangential transitions the positions are calculated
exactly tool-specifically.
Tool-specific exact collision tests
5-90
TECHNOLOGY module
Fig. 12298
S354E51.DOC
Using individual functions for automatic

punch processing
Function
PUNCH PROCESSING,
AUTOMATIC, INDIVFUNC:
Specify which tools should be used for processing for the

automatisms as part of the individual functions:
The following individual functions are available:
"Single hole" or
"Punching" or
"Contour"
Or specify:
"Part removal": whether part removal should be automatic or

not.
You can only select one individual function each time.

Then start automatic punch processing using the START function.
Calling up information on punch processing

INFORMATION function
View detailed information on a particular processing operation.
Procedure:
Select the INFO function.

Click the desired processing operation.
The information on the operation and technology will be presented

in the form of a report list.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-91
Example: Displaying information on an operation with removal

###################### 1st processing ###########################
Correspondence
: Element
In a compulsory sequence
: No
Starting point
: 138.824 1084.316
End point
: 226.624 994.316
Type of operation
: Part removal
Number of technologies
:3
Tool: Rectangle 76.2x5
ID no. 04762050
====================== 1st TECHNOLOGY =========================
Straight nibbling
No. of single strokes
:3
Starting point
: 138.824 1084.316
End point
: 152.424 1084.316
Starting angle
: 0.000
Offset angle
: 0.000
Feed rate per stroke
: 74.200
Roughness
: 0.150
Punching mode
: normal
Single stroke display
: No:
Tool orientation activated
: No
===================== 2nd TECHNOLOGY =========================
Single stroke
Position
: 226.624 1084.316
Angle
: 0.000
Punching mode
: Normal
Output in the NC
: Yes
===================== 3rd TECHNOLOGY =========================
Part removal
Flap: 500.00 500.00 position: in front of the punching head
Position
: 226.624 994.316
Use ejection program
: No
Ejection distance
: 0.000 90.000
Ejection speed [m/min]
: 15.000
TRUMASORT container no.
:0
Removal with open flap
: No
First eject, then open flap
Use ejection cylinder
: No
Acknowledgement of light barrier
: Yes
Anti-scratch removal
: No
5-92
TECHNOLOGY module
A processing operation can consist of more than one technology (see: example).
You can also group a number of processing operations
together in a box: All operations are then displayed according
to the processing sequence.
With laser processing, all operations are displayed in a
compulsory sequence.
S354E51.DOC
Setting defaults
Default settings include:
"Punching mode": How is the punching operation going to be

carried out:
"Normal": Single strokes or nibbling operations will be

executed without presser foot and without delay function.
"Delayed": The programmed single stroke or the programmed nibbling path is only executed after a certain period of
time (delayed) after having reached the position.
Application: for processing operations well away from the
center of gravity or if the sheet has to be settled before the
next processing operation.
"Presser foot": The sheet will be tightened hydraulically with

the presser foot against the die for nibbling or punching.
Application: This punching mode is a good idea if distortion
of the sheet can occur (e.g. with a high processing ratio), if
punchings are very close to each other or if thin sheets are
being processed.
Effect: All processing operations defined later will be punched in

the active punching mode.
Set the value for "Overlap": The overlap values which apply for
the processing operations which have not yet been defined are
set with this function.
Set overlap values with:
corners
punching (overlap between the individual nibbling paths)
feed (overlap with nibbling lines)
notches
roughness
Select display of a processing operation as single strokes.

With this mask, you can also determine how the processing
operation is to be displayed on the screen: Depiction as single
strokes or as line.
Displaying the processing operation in single strokes is

very computation-intensive. This is why screen set-up is
somewhat slower.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-93
Using aids
Function scope

stored in the screen menu for the ADDITIONAL EQUIPMENT
control function.
construct drawings.


type dotted.

CONSTRUCTION LINE
The functions for creating construction lines are:
Function 2 POINTS: Drawing construction lines with 2 points.

Function PARALLEL: Drawing parallel construction lines.
Function HORIZONTAL and function VERTICAL: Drawing horizontal and vertical construct lines.
Function TAN PT: Drawing tangents as construct lines on arc
and point.
Function PERPENDICULAR: Drawing perpendicular construction lines.
Function ANGLE X: Drawing a construct line with a point and
angle of inclination.
Function ANGLE/LINE: Drawing a construct line with a point
and an angle to the base line.
Function DIVISION: Dividing element using construction line.
The description of the individual functions can be found in

the module DRAWING see: "Generating construction geometry".
5-94
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC

CONSTRUCTION CIRCLE
The functions for creating construction circles are:
Function 3 POINTS: Drawing a construct circle with three

points.
Function CENTER/RADIUS: Drawing a construction circle with
a center and radius.
Function DIAMETER: Draw construction circle by entering two
points on the circle.
Function CENTER: Drawing construction circle using center
point and diameter
Function CONCENTRIC: Drawing concentric construction
circle.
2 elements.
Function TAN 2PTS: Drawing a construction circle tangential to
an element and two points.
Function TAN 3: Drawing a construction circle tangential to 3
elements.
Function TAN CENTER: Drawing a construction circle tangential to one element and center point.

DELETE CONSTRUCTION
GEO

Procedure:
Delete construction geometry completely: click on ALL.
individually.
screen.

MEASURE

Function POINT: Measuring the coordinates of a point.
Function HORIZONTAL: Measuring the horizontal distance
between two points.
two points.
Function CIRCLE: Measure center points and radius as well as
center points of a circle.
the module DRAWING see: "Measurement".
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-95
10.2 Generating punch processing manually

Functions
PUNCH PROCESSING,
MANUAL
You can also define processing operations using individual functions and "by hand". Specify which function is to be processed with
which tool, where removal takes place, etc.
Procedure:
Functions
File
Load
Single part
processing
Select the functions for

PUNCH PROCESSING,
MANUAL
GENERATE control function
5-96
Steps:
Define processing using individual functions.
Switch to single part mode to define the processing.
or
The functions of the menu PUNCH PROCESSING,

AUTOMATIC are displayed.
Switch to manual processing by selecting the second window
MANUAL.
The menu functions for the control function GENERATE are
displayed.
These and the functions for the other control functions are
available for manual processing definition.
Define processing using individual functions. You select the

individual functions via the control function GENERATE:
GEOMETRY: Create processing using an existing geometry.
WITHOUT GEOMETRY: Create processing operations without
having a defined geometry available as a model.
ROWS OF HOLES: Convert single holes in rows of holes and
then process these as rows of holes.
COMPULSORY SEQ: Set processing operations in compulsory
sequences, break up present compulsory sequences, split or
invert.
INFO: View information on a processing operation. To do so,
you must identify the particular processing operation in the part.
DELETE: To delete a certain processing operation or processing operation for a certain tool, disposal system, a positioning path or to delete all processing operations.
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Other control functions
Other functions are available for manual processing definition. They

can be started using control functions. In particular:
Control function EXTRAS: Add NC functions, define positioning

paths, display unprocessed geometries, set compulsory
sequences.
Control function SMALL PARTS: Specify removal system for

small parts.
Control function LIFT: Unload parts using TRUMALIFT

SheetMaster or TRUMALIFT SB/SC/SE. Can only be selected if
a lift is in the configuration of the current machine.
SHEET control function: Specify resetting procedure and

clamping operation. Only active in sheet mode.
Control function MODIFY: Modifying processing operations.
DEFAULT control function: Set punching mode and overlap

values as well as display for the processing.
DRAWING TOOLS control function: Create construction

geometries and select measurement functions.
Generate processing with geometry model

Processing single hole
Function GENERATE: GEOMETRY, SINGLE HOLE

Define single punching with a tool.
Activate tool.
Click on the geometry or
define the processing without geometry. Processing can be
positioned as required.
For this purpose, execute the instructions in the command line:
1. Enter angle, i.e. define position of tool to the X-axis.
2. Click on centre point of tool or enter the coordinates.
1
a
X
Picture 1: angle 0
Picture 2: angle 30
Fig. 4759
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-97
Processing single element

along the contour
Function GENERATE: GEOMETRY, AT ELEMENT

Process single element of a contour. The tool center runs alongside the contour.
Precondition: Geometry as basis.

Procedure: Click on geometry element of contour.
Effect: the system automatically recognises on which side the
Processing must be positioned. The processing direction is
determined by clicking: The starting point of the nibbling path is
placed where the distance to the next corner point is the shortest.
The overlapping, roughness and punching mode is set in the
menu for the SETTINGS control function and taken into consideration with this function.
Special case: If an element is smaller than the tool used, the set
overlap will be ignored. If the tool for the element is too large, the
operation will not be executed. In this case, select the AT EL.PART
function to execute the operation.
Processing complete
contour
Function GENERATE: GEOMETRY AT CONTOUR

Processing a complete contour which consists of several processing elements. The tool center is adjacent to the contour.
Precondition: Geometry must be present.

Procedure:
1. Select tool. Along with the standard tools (e.g. round, square
and rectangular tools) this function now also supports special
tools which have congruent processing with 180 rotation.
2. Click on first element (start element) of the contour.
3. Click on last element (end element) of the contour.
To process the contour completely: Click first element twice.
Effect: The system automatically recognises on which side the processing must be positioned. The processing direction is determined by clicking: The starting point of the nibbling path is placed
where the distance to the next corner point is the shortest.
Punching up contour
Function GENERATE: GEOMETRY, PUNCH UP

Punching up a contour.
Click on contour to be punched up. The contour will be punched up
with the active tool.
Advantage the contour is completely punched up without having to
eject scrap.
5-98
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Partial processing of
contour element
Function GENERATE: GEOMETRY, AT EL.PART

Process a contour element not completely, but rather partially (tool
center adjacent to geometry). See AT ELEMENT function.
This function can only be executed at line elements. Only this
function enables already processed elements to continue to be
processed (example: adding triangular processing to a corner).
Procedure:
1. Click on element.
2. Click on starting point.
3. Click on end point.
Create single stroke: A single stroke is carried out when the distance between the start and end points is less than the tool length.
The position of the single stroke depends where you define the
starting point and end point on the line element.
Example 1: set single stroke symmetrical to element
Identify element (1.),

define starting point (2.) and end point (3.).
The single stroke will be set symmetrical to element if all three points are at the
same position.
Fig. 12857
Example 2: set single stroke to element corner
Identify element (1.),

define starting point (2.) and end point (3.).
The single stroke is set to the element corner if (1.) is defined differently from (2.)
and (3.).
Fig. 12857
Processing with triangular tool and defining AT EL.PART

function: If the function AT ELEM.PART is carried out with a
triangular tool, only single strokes are generated.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-99
Procedure:
1. Click on element.
2. Define starting point; the position of the top of the triangular
tool will now be determined.
3. Determine end point; the position of the back of the triangular
tool will now be determined.
Creating processing directly

on element
Function GENERATE: GEOMETRY, ON ELEMENT

Define processing directly on the geometry element. This is different to the AT ELEMENT function, because the tool center is
positioned on the geometry.
See AT ELEMENT function.
Creating processing directly

on contour
Function GENERATE: GEOMETRY, ON ELEMENT

Define processing directly on a part of the processing element.
This is different to the AT CONTOUR function, because the tool
center is positioned on the geometry.
See AT CONTOUR function.
TRIM
Function GENERATE: GEOMETRY, LIN-LIN

Function for defining cuts over parts limits. Example: processing
with common cuts.
Precondition: The linear elements along which the cut should run
must be aligned.
Procedure: Click on starting point and end point of a cut. Example:
1
2
3
Trimming path
Vertical parting cut
Horizontal parting cut
Trimming, common cuts
5-100
TECHNOLOGY module
Fig. 4410
S354E51.DOC
On the contrary to grid processing, no remnant arises when

processing with common cuts. The tool width corresponds to the
parting cut width. The definition of common parting cuts must be
observed at every programming step. Already during sheet layout,
the part spacing must be adapted to the parting cut.
This parting strategy is usually selected along with sheet trimming.
Punching notches
Function GENERATE: GEOMETRY, NOTCH

Punching up notches.
Procedure:
1. Click on straight line element.
2. Click on straight line element.
You can process several notches successively.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-101
Create processing without geometry model

Creating single hole
Function GENERATE: WITHOUT GEOMETRY, SINGLE HOLE

Define single punching with a tool.
Procedure:
Activate tool:
Define the processing without geometry model. Processing can
be positioned as required.
Follow the instructions in the command line:
1. Enter angle, i.e. define position of tool to the X-axis.
2. Click on centre point of tool or enter the coordinates.
a
X
Picture 1: angle 0
Picture 2: angle 30
4759
Punching up circle
Function GENERATE: WITHOUT GEOMETRY, PUNCH UP

CIRCLE
Punching up circle
Precondition: No geometry as basis. Processing can be positioned
as required.
Procedure:
1. Click on center point (alternative: enter coordinates).
2. Enter radius.
Effect: The inner cutout is completely punched up. Advantage no
waste must be disposed of.
5-102
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Punching up rectangle
Function GENERATE: WITHOUT GEOMETRY, PUNCH UP RECT

Punching up rectangle.
Precondition: No geometry as basis. Processing can be positioned
as required.
Procedure:
There are two different ways of proceeding.
Variant 1
1. Click on starting point (alternative: enter coordinates).
2. Click on the second point, which is diagonally across from the
starting point.
Variant 2:
1. Click on starting point (alternative: enter coordinates).
2. Enter length of rectangle or click on the point.
3. Enter width of rectangle or click on the point.
4. Enter the angle for the X-axis under which the rectangle should
be placed. Alternative: Define the angler by entering a third
corner point of the rectangle.
Effect: The rectangle will be punched up, no waste must be

disposed of.
Creating row of holes
Function GENERATE: WITHOUT GEOMETRY, ROW OF HOLES

Precondition: No geometry as basis. Can be positioned at will.
Procedure:
Enter frame data in mask.

You can control through the number of strokes whether a nibbling path or a row of holes should be created. Number of
strokes 0 = nibbling.
Enter starting point (alternative: enter coordinates).
End point (alternative: enter coordinates).
Row of holes with offset angle
Offset angle (45)
Row of holes with offset angle
S354E51.DOC
Fig. 7272
TECHNOLOGY module
5-103
Creating circle of holes
Function GENERATE: WITHOUT GEOMETRY, CIRCLE OF

HOLES
Punch or nibble circle of holes or circle element (arc).
Precondition: No geometry as basis. Can be positioned at will.

Procedure:
1. Enter frame data in mask.
You can control through the number of strokes whether a
nibbling path or a row of holes should be created.
Number of strokes 0 = nibbling.
2. Click on center point (alternative: enter coordinates).
3. Enter radius.
Nibble circle element or whole circle.
CCLW
counterclockwise (CLW = clockwise)
Example: Nibbling arc
5-104
TECHNOLOGY module
Fig. 6599
S354E51.DOC
Converting hole pattern in rows of holes

Function GENERATE: Converting hole pattern in rows of holes
Precondition: only axially parallel hole patterns can be converted
into rows of holes.
Converting present hole patterns to rows of holes.
Example: A hole grid is drawn from single holes. Single strokes
were defined here for operation.
Procedure:
Select the function ROWS OF HOLES, CONVERT.
In the sub-mask you select the direction in which the single
holes are to be converted into rows.
"Search direction X" or "Y": Press a switch.
The reference to the geometry is lost in the conversion of the
single holes into rows of holes.
Advantage:
Quicker processing: distance and time-optimized sheet processing.
If the hole grid is very large, the NC texts generated will be a
lot smaller.
Faster optimization calculation during optimization process.
Creating compulsory sequences

Compulsory sequences are a set sequence of processing operations which are executed one after the other. These processing
sequences with fixed definitions always remain unchanged. Even
optimization processes don not make changes. Compulsory
sequences form a possible basis for subroutines.
Compulsory sequences are not bound to the part. You can form
compulsory sequences which transcend the individual part. Create
compulsory sequences, however, so that they are parts-related. In
doing this, you will support the optimization process for sheet
processing.
You can break up, split (divide up) and invert defined compulsory
sequences.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-105
Setting compulsory
sequence
Function GENERATE: COMPULSORY SEQUENCE, SET

Set processing operations in a compulsory sequence.
Procedure:
Click consecutively on the processing operations which you would
like to place in a compulsory sequence.
Effect: The processing operations included in a compulsory
sequence are displayed in a particular colour. Default setting: first
operation: dotted green line, all other operations: solid green line.
Examples: Single part
Compulsory sequence in the single part
Fig. 7343
This example shows that the parting of the inner cutout should be
the end of processing with the square tool. To ensure that the
system calculates a sensible processing sequence, the operations
are put into a compulsory sequence using the square tool.
Break up compulsory
sequence
Function GENERATE: COMPULSORY SEQUENCE, BREAK UP

Break up an available compulsory sequence of operations again.
Procedure:
Click on the operation within a compulsory sequence from which
on the compulsory sequence is to be broken up. Select the menu
field ALL to break up the entire compulsory sequence.
Reverse compulsory
sequence
Function GENERATE: COMPULSORY SEQUENCE, INVERT

Invert sequence of operations which are in a compulsory sequence.
Procedure:
Click on a processing from a compulsory sequence.
Effect: The sequence of processing operations within a compulsory
sequence will be inverted.
Compulsory sequences which contain a disposal may not be
inverted.
5-106
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Splitting compulsory
sequence
Function GENERATE: COMPULSORY SEQUENCE: SPLIT

Splitting compulsory sequence.
Procedure:
Click on the processing operation where the compulsory sequence
has to be split.
Effect: The compulsory sequence is split into two compulsory
sequences. The processing operations no longer included in a
compulsory sequence are displayed cyan.
Defining NC code and positioning path

EXTRAS control function
The following menu functions are activated using the EXTRAS

control function:
NC FUNCTIONS: You can supplement an NC function into the

sequence of present processing operations.
You can call up the following NC functions: any text, or any
cycle, lubrication, sheet thickness, suction unit, tool change
position or flap.
Precondition: you have stored these NC functions as
customized cycles in the DATA module.
POSITIONING PATH: Define a positioning path. Determine

speed and acceleration parameters and maximum punching
head height and determine the starting position of the
positioning path via Start.
COMPULSORY SEQ: Set processing operations in a compulsory sequence.

You can break up, split (divide up) and invert defined
compulsory sequences.

you must identify the particular processing operation in the
part.
DELETE: Delete a certain processing operation or determine

what should be deleted via SELECTION. To delete a processing operation for a certain tool, disposal system, a positioning
path or to delete all processing operations.
Using the index card "Layout" you can delete a part from multicopy processing, sheet area, or external area or delete all.
Please observe the requests and instructions in the
command line when implementing the functions.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-107
Defining NC functions
NC functions are machine functions which you can select directly

via the EXTRAS menu for control functions.
NC functions must always be linked to a processing operation.
Entering NC code directly
Function EXTRAS: NC FUNCTIONS, FREE TEXT

This function allows you to write NC functions or messages directly
into the NC code. Entries are made in a mask.
Procedure:
Enter NC text. The characters and ~ are not allowed!
The following rule applies:
"M27"
If the text is accompanied with single inverted commas,
ToPs executes a syntax and function check. The execution
of this function depends on the result of this check.
Example: If M27 is active in a preceding function, the text
will not be transferred into the NC program.
" M27 " or "M27"
This format tells the system that this function must
definitely be transferred to the NC program.
Before or after which processing operation should the NC text

be inserted? Select the desired radio button: "before" or "after".
Which processing should the text apply to? Click on a
processing operation.
Where should the text be positioned? Click on target position
for text display.
Free texts can only be positioned at the first and last

processing operation of a compulsory sequence. Otherwise:
Break up the existing compulsory sequence and then
position your text at the desired processing operation.
5-108
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Defining free NC cycle
Function EXTRAS: NC FUNCTIONS, FREE CYCLE

You can define the NC cycle by yourself in the DATA module, NC
OUTPUT function, CUSTOMER CYCLES. You can start these
cycles here and integrated them in the processing operation.
Procedure:
A mask is opened:
Select the cycle in the "cycle name" selection window (Scroll
window up). The NC text will be displayed in the scroll window
underneath. Editing of the NC text is not possible in this mask.
Choose the position for target operation by selecting the
corresponding switch.
BEFORE or AFTER? Should the cycle be inserted after or
before the selected processing operation?
Click firstly onto reference processing with the mouse, then on
the target position for display of the NC cycles.
The cycle name is placed as text at the target position in the
part.
For checking the positioned NC cycle (text), it is recommendable to enlarge the screen area by clicking it with the
right mouse key.
For a description and the general conditions for the corresponding M and G functions, please refer to the programming
instructions for your machine.
Defining sheet thickness as

NC code
Function EXTRAS: NC FUNCTIONS, SHEET THICKNESS

You define the sheet thickness preselection for minimum-scratch
processing.
This function is only active for machines which have the
option "Non-scratch processing".
Procedure:
Enter the sheet thickness.
BEFORE or AFTER? Should the sheet thickness preselection
be inserted after or before the selected processing operation?
Click firstly onto reference processing with the mouse, then on
the target position for display of the NC function.
The NC function is inserted as a text
HEIGHT_minimum-scratch" at the target position.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
"WORKING
5-109
Defining chip
vacuum system
Function EXTRAS: NC FUNCTIONS, EXHAUST SYS

Switch chip vacuum system on or off.
Procedure:
A mask is opened.
Should chip vacuum system be switched on or off? Select the
desired setting.
Before or after which processing operation should the ascertained setting be effective?
Click on a processing operation after the mask has been
closed.
Effect: The function is self maintaining.
The chip vacuum system will automatically be switched off
when processing with forming tools. It could be a good idea
for small, not so heavy parts to switch off the vacuum
system before the last stroke, because the parts are
otherwise slightly drawn towards the die.
Defining tool
change position
Function EXTRAS: NC FUNCTIONS, TOOL CHANGE POS

Programming tool change positions.
Precondition:
Single part processing and sheet layout are defined.
You are in the sheet mode. The function WZG.W.POS. (Tool
change position) can only be selected in the sheet mode.
Procedure:
Choose the switching function TOOL CHANGE POSITION. A
mask is opened.
Determine when the position for the tool change should be
approached: before the target operation or after the target
operation.
Define reference processing. Click on a processing operation.
Click on position for the tool change. The defined position is
represented by a character string: TOOL_CHANGE_POS
(yellow color). The positioning paths are displayed.
The programmed tool change position is self-maintaining. All other
tool changes are carried out in this position.
If repositioning takes place during a sheet processing operation,
then the tool change position must be adjusted accordingly.
5-110
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
In ToPs 300, the differing type of approach of tool change

positions is not displayed on the screen. There will always
only be one direct approach path displayed. This is of
particular importance if you have to take formed sections, for
example, into consideration.
Defining NC code for

open flap
Function EXTRAS: NC FUNCTIONS, FLAP

Use this function to determine whether a flap should be open
continuously or not.
Procedure:
A mask is opened for this purpose:
What should the flap status be: closed or open?
BEFORE or AFTER? Before which or after which processing
operation should the flap be opened or closed?
Click on a processing operation after the mask has been
closed. In addition, you can place the [FLAP] text on any free
position.
Effect: The function is self maintaining. This means: If you have set
the flap to "permanently open", then you must ensure that the flap
is closed again.
Application examples: Disposal with the flap opened continuously
is a procedure to save time. This method of removal is mostly
implemented for processing in rows.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-111
Defining travel path

Specify the parameters for
positioning path definition
Function EXTRAS: POSITIONING PATH, PARAMETERS

Specify the parameters for positioning path definition.
Procedure:
"speed" and "acceleration": At what speed and acceleration
should the travel path be traversed?
"max. punching head height": Should the punching head move
into the highest working position in doing so?
Defining positioning path
Function EXTRAS: POSITIONING PATH, START

Define travel motion with the specified parameters.
Procedure: Click on the points of support of the travel path.

Effect: The travel path is displayed. This travel motion is interpreted by the system as if it was a processing operation. This
means: it has not yet been specified to which processing operation
this travel motion has actually been executed in accordance with.
The sorting (determination of the sequence) and optimization of the
processing operations are defined at a later point in time.
If the starting point of a positioning path is attached to a present
processing operation, then the end point of the processing operation is the starting point of the positioning path. This is the reason
why the sequence of processing operations is fixed.
Application example: By-passing of formed sections
Removal of small parts

Control function
SMALL PARTS
Activate functions with which you can determine the removal of

small parts:
5-112
MANUAL REMOVAL: The part is removed by hand.

SMALL PARTS: The part is removed via flap or chute.
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
MICROJOINT: The part stays temporarily connected to the

sheet remainder via small webs (microjoint). The part must be
broken off by hand after the withdrawal of the complete sheet.
As a rule, microjoint tools (e.g. dovetail tools, trapezoid tools)
are used to produce microjoints.

part.

what should be deleted via SELECTION. To delete a processing operation for a certain tool, disposal system, a positioning path or to delete all processing operations.
Using the index card "Layout" you can delete a part from multicopy processing, sheet area, or external area or delete all.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-113
Removing part manually

manual removal
SMALL PARTS function: MANUAL REMOVAL, PARAMETERS

Parameters Specify manual removal of small parts.
Procedure:
Select the desired settings in the mask.
Remove small parts in punching mode. Specify the procedure
during part removal.
The parameters to be selected depend on the machine
selected. With machines with table format such as SINUMERIK 840D, you see a mask with the contents laid out very
differently than with BOSCH or Fanuk control systems.
You can determine other basic conditions by pressing the

PARAMETERS function button.
Will the parts be removed from a grid?
Should the punching head move to the highest position
during removal?
Should the knock-out cylinders be applied (be activated)
during removal?
Should removal via the chute be supported by compressed
air?
Should the removal with flap be acknowledged by the light
barrier or not?
At what speed should the part be pushed out?
Push-out motion Y: by how many millimeters should the
part be pushed in the Y direction?
For TC 600L and TC 2000R: Try to define the same Y pushout motions for the same type of part. A separate table
PART_UNLOAD is created respectively for parts with
differing Y push-out motions. This has the effect that a
longer NC text is generated.
Defining manual removal for

part
SMALL PARTS function: MANUAL REMOVAL, SET

Specify the removal position taking the defined parameters into
consideration.
Procedure:
Click on the processing operation. The last stroke is set and
the symbol for manual removal (red triangle) is placed.
5-114
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Removing small parts using flap or chute

the removal of small parts
SMALL PARTS function: SMALL PARTS, PARAMETER

Removing small parts using flap or chute.
Tip: Check which removal parameters are set at the beginning of

the removal definition.
Specify your removal parameters. You can then click on the
processing operation for the last separating stroke for other
parts without having to call up the PARAMETERS menu.
The parameters to be selected depend on the machine selected.

With machines with table format such as SINUMERIK 840D, you
see a mask with the contents laid out very differently than with
BOSCH or Fanuk control systems.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-115
TC600L:
Defining parameters
For this, select the PARAMETERS function. Select the desired

settings in the mask. The masks appear as follows:
Removing small parts using flap or chute
Remove small parts in punching mode.

How is the sequence of single steps for removal per flap going
to run?
Select the sequence of steps
"separate--> swing-down": separate part, then lower flap
and remove part after that
"swing-down--> separate--> push out": separate part, then
lower flap and push out part after that
"swing-down--> separate--> push out": separate part, push
part onto flap and then lower flap
"separate--> swing-down": first lower flap, then separate
part (make final stroke)
"swing-down--> separate--> push out": lower flap firstly,
then separate part (set last stroke), and then push out part
Ejection of parts in laser mode
5-116
TECHNOLOGY module
Fig. 19906
Fig. 19907
S354E51.DOC
Remove small parts in punching mode.

How is the sequence of single steps for removal per flap going
to run?
Select the sequence of steps
"swing-down": swing down flap, remove part via flap

"swing-down--> push out": separate part, then lower flap
and push out part after that
"push out--> swing down": separate part, push out part
then lower flap after that
"push out --> swing down": eject part with push out
cylinder, lower flap and remove part
"push out --> eject --> swing-down": push out part, eject
part with push out cylinder, then lower flap
You can determine other basic conditions by pressing the

PARAMETERS function button. The following mask appears:
Specify other parameters for part removal
S354E51.DOC
Fig. 19908
Will the parts be removed from a grid?

Should the punching head move to the highest position
during removal?
Should the chip flap be closed during part removal?
air?
barrier or not?
Should the machine move back to the initial position after
the push out procedure?
Should the parts be removed with the flap open?
TECHNOLOGY module
5-117
Should the flap be lowered first (and only swung down

afterwards)?
Push-out motion Y: By how many millimeters should the
part be pushed in the Y direction?
For TC 600L and TC 2000R: Try to define the same Y pushout motions for the same type of part. A separate table
PART_UNLOAD is created respectively for parts with
differing Y push-out motions. This has the effect that a
longer NC text is generated.
SET DEFAULTS
function button
This function button sets the settings back to the default setting.
The default settings are reactivated.
Other machines:
Defining parameters
For all other machines which do not have SINUMERIK control

system 840D, you see the following mask to specify parameters.
All options are active when they are active in the DATA module.
Specifying parameters
Fig. 19905
Should part removal be done using automatic push-out

program?
air?
barrier or not?
Should removal be anti-scratch?
Should the parts be removed with the flap open?
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
5-118
Defining removal of
small parts
Should the ejector cylinders be applied (be activated) during

removal?
With which sequence should the part be pushed out?
"push --> open": First push part, then open flap/chute.
"open --> push": First open flap/chute, then push part.
SMALL PARTS function: SMALL PARTS, SET

Define removal of small parts via flap or chute.
Procedure:
Select the SET function. A mask is opened. With the aid of the
mask, define the following:
For TRUMASORT: Into which container should the part be
moved into? Enter the container number.
Click on the processing operation: Click onto the processing
operation where the last separating stroke will be executed.
Decide how removal will take place: flap or chute? Click on one
of the two removal options (flap/chute operations or character
string). It is usually the flap or the chute.
Position the flap or the chute over the part. A vertical guide line
is drawn at the position of the last stroke to help you with this.
If you are happy with the selected position, click on the OK
function.
or
Place one of the removal units in position again.
The position will be identified by a symbol:
Flap: Green square.
Chute: Red square.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-119
Processing part with microjoint

MicroJoint technology
MicroJoint technology means: The part is not completely separated, it remains connected to the sheet via small webs. A microjoint tool is usually implemented for this processing operation. The
parts are broken out after the end of sheet processing.
Advantage: there are no operation delays caused by removal time

for a sheet layout with many small parts.
Precondition: Contour has been processed, e.g. with a special
microjoint tool.
Procedure:
Select MICROJOINT, SET function.
Enter the width for Microjoint.
Click on the processing operation at that point where the web
is to be inserted.
Effect: Processing is split at a defined point and a web is inserted.
Web width
MicroJoint production
Fig. 3619
Removal is always at the end of a processing sequence

after an automatic sheet optimization.
Removing part with lift

Control function LIFT
5-120
Part removal using TRUMALIFT SheetMaster or TRUMALIFT

SC/SB/SE is described in a separate chapter.
This chapter also contains the description of the automation
components TRUMAGRIP and TRUMASORT.
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Repositioning
SHEET control function
In the menu for the control function SHEET you find stored functions to define a repositioning process and a clamping operation.
You can only reposition in the sheet mode. The sheet is subdivided
into repositioning areas for this action. The processing operations
executed before and after the repositioning move are assigned to
several repositioning areas.
Application: Repositioning is required when a sheet is too long or,

as another example, when processing operations are in the
clamping dead range and cannot be executed on the basis of
normal processing sequences.
REPOSITION: Start and delete a repositioning procedure.
CLAMPING OPERATION: Rearrange processing operations

(which processing operation should be processed after
repositioning? etc) or activate a defined repositioning process.

part.

Using the index card "Layout" (in sheet mode) you can delete a
part from multi-copy processing, sheet area, or external area or
delete all.
Please observe the requests and instructions in the command line when implementing the functions.
Functions for repositioning and clamping are only offered in the

sheet mode.
Defining repositioning:
Options
There are two ways to reposition in ToPs.

Variant 1: the processing operation is defined on the whole sheet
regardless whether repositioning must take place or not. After that,
one determines how often repositioning should take place and
which processing operation should be allocated to which
repositioning area.
Variant 2: the repositioning movements are defined during the
processing operation definition. Processing operation is defined
per repositioning area.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-121
Variant 1
Procedure:
1. Completely define the operating process which is going to be
executed on the sheet.
2. Select the function REPOSITIONING, START. Follow the instructions in the command line:
Specify clamping position.

Repositioning devices (normally: punching head and
repositioning cylinders) are displayed and can be moved
within the cross over area and the sheet with the aid of the
mouse.
Select repositioning devices: Select one of the devices for
repositioning. For this purpose, click on either the punching
head or a repositioning cylinder. If no repositioning devices
are available you can define the repositioning motion
directly.
Define working area according to repositioning: The working range and clamps "stick" on the cursor and can be
positioned at random in the X direction. Confirm the
working range location by pressing OK.
The repositioning path and repositioning direction is represented by a red arrow on the screen.
3. Determine which processing operation is to be processed after
repositioning.
Significance of the colors: The complete, previously defined
operating process after the repositioning process is shown in
blue. Blue: No processing operation is active in the repositioning area. Cyan Active processing operation.
Select the function CLAMPING OPERATION, PROCESSING.REARR. A mask opens in which you decide
whether you want to reorder a processing operation or a
complete part.
Select processing operation: Open box or click on
processing operations individually. The selected processing operation is shown in magenta. Processing operations
which are shown in magenta are taken out of the selection
when click on is repeated.
Confirm your choice with OK. Effect: The processing
operation from the active repositioning area is shown in
cyan.
Variant 2
Procedure:
1. Designate an area of the sheet and define processing operation.
2. Select REPOSITIONING, START function to define repositioning movement.
3. Designate an area of the sheet and define processing
operation.
You can repeat this sequence as often as you wish.
5-122
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Repositioning areas
Repositioning areas are made by repositioning movements. The

processing operations executed before and after the repositioning
move are assigned to several repositioning areas.
1st repositioning area
_
_
_
_
_
_
2nd repositioning area
Excessive length sheet with two repositioning areas
Significance of the colors:

Blue: PProcessing operation which is not in the repositioning
area.
Cyan: Processing operation which is active.
Defining repositioning
procedure
Function SHEET: REPOSITIONING, START

Defining repositioning procedure.
Procedure:
1. Select the function REPOSITIONING, START. Follow the instructions in the command line:
Specify clamping position.
Repositioning devices (normally: punching head and repositioning cylinders) are displayed and can be moved within
the cross over area and the sheet with the aid of the
mouse.
Select repositioning devices: select one of the devices for
repositioning. For this purpose, click on either the punching
head or a repositioning cylinder.
Define working area according to repositioning: The working range and clamps "stick" on the cursor and can be
positioned at random in the X direction. Confirm the working range location by pressing OK.
The repositioning path and repositioning direction is represented by a red arrow on the screen.
2. Determine which processing operation is to be processed after
repositioning.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-123
Deleting repositioning area
Function SHEET: REPOSITIONING, DELETE

Delete repositioning area.
Precondition: Repositioning areas are available due to one or more

repositioning movements.
Procedure: Click on processing operation (color: blue) in the
desired processing operation area.
Effect: All operations from the repositioning area and the following
repositioning areas are assigned to the preceding repositioning
area. Checking possibility: Color changes to cyan, repositioning
arrow is deleted.
Example: From a total of 5 repositioning areas, repositioning area
3 is deleted. Repositioning area 3, 4 and 5 are assigned to
repositioning area 2.
Activating
repositioning area
Function SHEET: CLAMPING OPERATION, ACTIVATE

Clamping operation = activate repositioning areas.
Clamping operations must be activated to change or supplement a
Precondition: Repositioning areas are available due to one or more

repositioning movements.
Procedure:
Click on processing operation (color: blue)
or
Click on the symbol in the desired repositioning area.
Symbol: The first repositioning area is activated by clicking on
the red star (= punching head position) in the lower corner of
the working range, working area. The other repositioning areas
can be activated by clicking on the particular red arrow.
Rearranging
Function SHEET: CLAMPING OPERATION, PROCESS.REARR

Rearrange processing operations or parts in the active repositioning area (clamp).
Procedure:
What do you want to rearrange: single processing operations
or complete part?
Select processing operation or part: Open box or click on
processing operation/part individually.
The selected processing operation is shown in magenta.
Processing operations which are shown in magenta are taken
out of the selection when click on is repeated.
Confirm your choice with OK. Effect: The processing operation
from the active repositioning area is shown in cyan.
5-124
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Modifying processing operations

MODIFY control function
Functions are available to you in this menu with which you can
modify an operation or reverse (invert) a sequence of operations.
Breakdown of separate functions:
OVERLAPPING: Lengthen or shorten nibbling paths.
PUNCHING MODE: How should the single stroke or nibbling

path be punched: regularly, with presser foot or with delay?
PROCESSING: Determine whether a copy of the processing

operation should be moved or rotated. Then click on one of the
options
MOVE: Should the object be moved about two points,
horizontally, vertically or should a multi-copy (grid) be
created?
ROTATE: How should the object be rotated: around two
points or at center point?

part.

Using the index card "Layout" (in sheet mode) you can delete a
part from multi-copy processing, sheet area, or external area or
delete all.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-125
Changing
overlapping values
MODIFY function: OVERLAPPING, MODIFY

Modify overlapping value of a defined operation.
The set overlapping values are defined under the control function
DEFAULT.
Procedure:
Select the function OVERLAPPING, MODIFY.
Define modification:
1. Option
Click on starting or end point of nibbling path near to the
tool center point.
Define the new start or end point by clicking on the nibbling
path.
Click directly on tool center for single strokes.
2. Option
Enter overlapping value.
Click on starting or end point of nibbling path to be
changed.
The overlapping value is self-maintaining. The processing
operation can be selected as often as needed.
Modifying punching mode
MODIFY function: PUNCHING MODE, MODIFY

Change punching mode.
The defined punching mode is set via the DEFAULT control
function.
How is the punching operation going to be carried out:
Normally?
Single strokes or nibbling operations will be executed without
presser foot and without delay function.
With presser foot?
The sheet will be tightened hydraulically with the presser foot
against the die for nibbling or punching.
Application: This punching mode makes sense if:
the sheet metal could become distorted (e.g. with high
processing ratio, hole grid),
the punchings are in very close proximity
processing thin sheets.
Delayed?
The programmed single stroke or the programmed nibbling
path is only executed after a certain period of time (delayed)
after having reached the position.
Effect: All marked operations will now be punched with the active
punching mode.
5-126
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Moving or rotating the

MODIFY function: PROCESSING, MOVE and ROTATE

With these functions, the original for the present processing operation is changed or a copy is created (duplication).
Precondition: Defined processing operation must be present.

This procedure for defining modifications is a suggestion. It can be
varied to suit your needs. Remember to follow the system prompts
Decision: Do you want to modify the original or copy an existing

operation? Select ORIGINAL or COPY.
Selection: Which elements should be modified? Click the

processing operation individually or put a box around several
processing operations.
Enter repetition factor.
Select type of modification: MOVE or ROTATE.
Each change must be terminated with END.
Specify selection: Modify original drawing or create a copy
Procedure:
Specify selection: You must define what is to be modified before
the modification operation.
1st specification: Do you want to modify the original or create a

copy?
ORIGINAL: The original will be modified.
COPY: The original will be preserved. One or more copies will
be created. You can determine how many copies are to be
created by entering a repetition factor.
S354E51.DOC
2nd specification: What shall the modification affect?

Click the elements you want to modify individually or select
several elements by putting a box around them.
3rd specification: Select modify option
TECHNOLOGY module
5-127
Moving processing
operation via 2 points
P1
P3
P2
Fig. 4954
Procedure:
Specify selection: ORIGINAL or COPY.
Select modify option: MOVE, 2 POINTS.
Click on any processing operation in the original or mark
complete processing operation with a box (P3).
Moving processing
operation horizontally
MODIFY function: MOVE, HORIZONTAL.
P1
P2
P3
Fig. 4955
Procedure:
Enter the repetition factor, for example: 1.
Click on reference point (P1) or enter the coordinates,
or
enter distance.
Click on any processing operation in the original or mark
processing operation with a box (P3).
5-128
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Moving processing
operation vertically
P1
P3
P2
Fig. 15167
Procedure:
Enter repetition factor. Example: 1
Click on reference point (P1) or enter the coordinates
or
enter distance.
Click on any processing operation in the original or mark with a
box (P3).
Rotating processing
about two points
P1
-90
P2
P3
Fig. 4958
Procedure:
Rotation around two points is equivalent to rotating and moving
the element at the same time.
Select modification option: ROTATE, 2 POINTS
Enter angle of rotation, for example -90.
Click on any processing operation or mark with a box (P3).
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-129
Rotating geometry
about a centre point
MODIFY function: ROTATE, CENTRE
P2
P1
-90
Fig. 4957
Procedure:
Select modification option: ROTATE, CENTRE
Click on centre point of rotation (P1) or enter the coordinates.
Enter angle of rotation, for example -90.
Click on any processing operation in the original or mark with a
box (P2).
Creating hole grid
MODIFY function: MOVE, GRID
Precondition: defined processing operation must be present.

Procedure:
1. Specification: Do you want to modify the original or create a
copy? Select ORIGINAL or COPY in the selection window.
2. Select processing operation.
3. Select the GRID function. A mask will be opened so that the
dimensions of the hole grid can be determined:
quantity of processing operations in X and Y direction
distance in X and Y direction
angular position
5-130
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Setting defaults
DEFAULT control function
The DEFAULT control function includes the following menu

functions:
Set punching mode
PUNCHING MODE: Set punching mode.

OVERLAPPING: Setting overlapping values.
Check button "Display as single strokes": To select or deselect
display of the single parts.
Control function DEFAULT: PUNCHING MODE

Specify how punching is to be carried out in the selection window:
Normally?
Single strokes or nibbling operations will be executed without
presser foot and without delay function.
With presser foot?

The sheet will be tightened hydraulically with the presser foot
against the die for nibbling or punching.
Application: this punching mode makes sense if:
The sheet metal could become distorted (e.g. with a high
processing ratio).
The punchings are in very close proximity.
You are processing thin sheets.
Delayed?
The programmed single stroke or the programmed nibbling
path is only executed after a certain period of time (delayed)
after having reached the position.
Effect: All processing operations defined later will be punched in

the active punching mode.
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-131
Setting overlapping values
Control function DEFAULT: OVERLAPPING

The overlapping values are set in these enter fields and apply for
the processing operations that follow.
Procedure:
Enter the overlapping values. Click on the appropriate entry field
using the mouse:
Overlapping at corners
Overlapping when punching up between single nibbling lines
Feed (overlap with nibbling lines)
Roughness, when nibbling with round tools
Displaying processing
operation as single strokes
Function DEFAULT: Check button "Display as single strokes"

With this check button, you can determine how the processing
operation is to be displayed on the screen: as single strokes or as
a line.
Displaying the processing operation in single strokes is very
computation-intensive. This is why screen set-up is somewhat slower.
5-132
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Using aids
DRAWING TOOLS
control function
Functions for creating and deleting construction geometry are

stored in DRAWING TOOLS.
draft drawings.


type dotted.

CONSTRUCTION LINE

and point.
Function ANGLE X: Drawing a construct line with a point and
angle of inclination.
Function ANGLE/LINE: Drawing a construct line with a point
Function DIVISION: Dividing element using construction line.

S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-133

CONSTRUCTION CIRCLE
Function 3 POINTS: Drawing a construction circle with three

points.
Function DIAMETER: Draw construction circle by entering two
points on the circle.
Function CENTER D: Drawing construction circle using center
point and diameter.
circles.
2 elements.
elements.
Function TAN CENTER: Drawing a construction circle
tangential to one element and center point.

DELETE CONSTRUCTION
GEO

Procedure:
Delete construction geometry completely: click on ALL.
individually.
screen.

MEASURE

between two points.
two points.
Function CIRCLE: Measure center points and radius as well as
center points of a circle.
5-134
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
Calling up information
Calling up and viewing information on an operation. The INFO

function is offered if any of the following is selected:
EXTRAS control function,
SMALL PARTS control function,
SHEET and control function
MODIFY control function:
Procedure:
Click on INFORMATION function.
Click on the relevant operation with the mouse. A message list
where you can receive detailed information on "Processing"
and "Technology" will be displayed.
Deleting processing operations and parts

You will find the functions with which processing operations can be
deleted in the menu for
EXTRAS control function,
SMALL PARTS control function,
SHEET control function,
MODIFY control function,
DEFAULT control function
Deleting processing
operation directly
Function DELETE, PROCESSING
Procedure: Select the processing operation to be deleted. Click on

an individual processing operation. Or: Open a box. Or: Select the
menu field ALL to delete the screen contents completely.
Effect: The selected operations are shown in magenta. Confirm the
deletion by pressing OK.
If processing operations are deleted individually, then the
traverse paths between the neighboring operations will be
updated automatically. If processing operations are caught
in a box when deleting, then the traverse paths will not be
automatically updated.
Operations in compulsory sequences cannot be deleted.
First break up the compulsory sequence, then delete the
S354E51.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-135
Deleting selected
Function DELETE, SELECTION, index card "Processing"

This function allows you to make a targeted selection of objects to
be deleted. A mask is opened for this purpose:
"Positioning path": Delete positioning path without

processing operation allocated.
Click on the positioning path after closing the mask.
"Tool": Delete entire processing operation of the active tool.

Precondition: Tool has been activated.
Deleting parts of the layout
"Disposal": Delete disposal of a part.
"All processing operations for part": Delete entire processing

operation of a single part.
Identify the single part after closing the mask.
the
Function DELETE, SELECTION, index card "Layout"

This index card is only offered in sheet mode.
It contains the option to delete parts from the present layout.
"Multi-copy processing": Delete parts of a multi-copy processing
operation. If several multi-copy processing operations are
present on the sheet, identify the multi-copy processing
operation you wish to delete. To do so, click on a part in the
multi-copy processing operation.
"Sheet area": Delete parts on the entire sheet.
"External area": Delete part which are located outside of the
sheet.
"All": Delete all parts on the screen.
Select the desired radio button. The corresponding parts are
deleted.
5-136
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E51.DOC
10.3 Generating laser processing

automatically
Prerequisite: No contours which are to be processed with the laser
may be processed with punching tools.
Procedure:
Functions
1st step:
Steps:
During punch processing, specify the contours which are to be
processed with the laser.
1st possibility
Reset contours when defining punch processing.
Deselect the contour type which should not be processed with
punching tools in the mask for automatic punch processing:
Deactivate the desired check button.
The deselected contour type is not processed during definition of
punch processing. The number of unprocessed elements or
geometries is shown in a message list. The geometries or
elements themselves are shown in yellow on the screen.
or
2nd possibility
Define automatic processing with punching tools using PUNCH
PROCESSING, AUTOMATIC and then delete the desired processing operation and define the laser processing.
or
3rd possibility
Do not define punch processing. Process a single part completely
with the laser.
If there are certain general conditions or if the geometry of the
single part is unsuitable for punch processing, you can also
process a single part completely with the laser.
In this case, you may not define any punch processing operations.
Switch directly to laser processing: Click on the display field in the
menu.
File
S354E52.DOC
You must load the part or sheet first if you wish to process a part
or a sheet with the laser only.
TECHNOLOGY module
5-137
Load
Single part
Processing
2nd step:
Switch to single part mode for processing definition.
or
Specify general conditions for laser processing.

You already select a laser table switching from punch processing
to laser processing.
An additional mask is automatically displayed after the laser table
is selected. This mask offers all the rule groups which belong to
the selected laser table.
Decide:
Which laser table do you wish to work with? By selecting the

laser table, you determine the general conditions for
production of the part.
Which rule group should be the basis for processing?
You can only select one of the rule groups which are assigned
in the laser table.
Selecting laser table and rule group see: "Default settings for
automatic laser processing".
3rd step:
Function
LASER PROCESSING,
AUTOMATIC, START
Automatically define laser processing.
Right click on the START menu function in the menu LASER

PROCESSING, AUTOMATIC, GENERATE.
Automatic processing of the part or sheet is started
immediately.
or
5-138
TECHNOLOGY module
Mark the part or sheet to be processed.

Start the processing for the marked part or sheet with OK
(fixed function in menu).
Automatic processing starts immediately if OK is selected
directly with no part marked.
S354E52.DOC
Select laser table

By selecting the laser table, you determine the general conditions
for processing of the part.
Select laser table
Fig. 19909
Table no. of the selected laser table
Name and information text of the selected rule group
Selection window with scroll: All laser tables which are available for the active material and machine group are offered in
the selection window.
S354E52.DOC
Machine display
Search criteria: You can reduce and control the selection of

laser tables using the search criteria.
"Table no.": Enter the number of the table or use a
placeholder.
"Group": Enter or select machine group. Some machines
are placed together in groups.
Example: Group 4 presently contains the TC 600L.
A mask is displayed to support you in selecting a machine
group. Here you can see which machines belong to a
group.
"Max. power": Maximum laser power
"Material ID": The ID no. of the material indicates in code
the material type thickness.
"Material thickness": material thickness in [mm]
TECHNOLOGY module
5-139
For machines with BOSCH control systems, this mask also

contains the search criteria "Gas pressure".
SEARCH function button: You start the search with this

program button.
In the "Display contents" area, you find two function buttons:
5-140
Function button "Lasertech": The contents of the selected laser

technology table are displayed.
This function button is not active for machines with the
Sinumerik control system SINUMERIK 840D.
Function button "Rules": The contents of the selected rule
group will appear.
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Selecting rule group

You will be prompted to select a rule group immediately after
selecting the laser table.
The following mask only offers rule groups which are assigned to
the selected laser table. The assignment of a rule group to a laser
table is done during creation of the laser table in the DATA module.
Select rule group
S354E52.DOC
Fig. 19910
Table No. of the laser table and information text on the laser
table
List of rule groups: rule group number and information text for
the rule group
Select a rule group by clicking a radio button.
Meaning of the rule group number see: "Rule group" description in this chapter.
TECHNOLOGY module
5-141
Default settings for automatic laser

processing
Default settings are defined for laser processing as well.
Automatic laser processing
Function
LASER PROCESSING,
AUTOMATIC, GENERATE,
START
Fig. 19912
Start automatic processing with the laser.
Procedure:
Right click on the START function.

Laser processing starts and runs automatically. The default
settings apply as parameters. Single parts are processed in
single part mode and entire sheets in sheet mode.
or
Select the START function with the left mouse button.
Identify the part to be processed.
Start automatic processing with OK.
In combined processing, only those contours for which no punch

processing has been defined are processed.
Function PARAMETER
5-142
Setting parameters see: "Specifying parameters for automatic

laser processing".
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Defining contours for

processing
Defining part removal

automatically
Specify which contours are to be processed with the laser.
To do so, click in the display window or select the arrow

symbol.
Select the contour:
"All contours"
"Inner contours"
"Outer contours"
"Part removal" check box: The system automatically

generates a part removal suggestion if this box is checked.
Calling up information on laser processing

View detailed information on a particular processing operation.
Procedure:
Select the INFO function.

Click the desired processing operation.
The information on the operation and technology will be presented

in the form of a report list.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-143
Example: Excerpt from a report list

###################### 1. PROCESSING ######################
Correspondence
: Contour
: Yes
Starting point
: 149.147 1265.163
End point
: 149.147 1066.013
Processing type
: Laser cutting
:1
Tool: Laser Id. no. 99999999
==================== 1. T E C H N O L O G Y ======================
CUT
:
==================
:
Contour size
: Large contour:
Height regulation
: Active
Kerf
: 0.075
: 4073
Rule group
: 61181
==================
:
Starting point
: 149.147 1265.163
End point
: 149.147 1066.013
###################### 2. PROCESSING ######################
Correspondence
: Contour
: Yes
Starting point
: 149.147 1066.013
End point
: 148.647 1065.513
Processing type
: Laser rounding
:1
Tool: Laser Id. no. 99999999
==================== 1. T E C H N O L O G Y ======================
ROUNDING
:
==================
:
Contour size
: Large contour:
Height regulation
: As defined in rule group
Kerf
: 0.075
: 4073
Rule group
: 61181
==================
:
Starting point
: 149.147 1066.013
End point
: 148.647 1065.513
Center point
: 148.647 1066.013
Radius
: 0.500
Direction
: Arc direction clockwise
Corner point
: 149.147 1065.513
###################### 3. PROCESSING ######################
Correspondence
: Contour
: Yes
Starting point
: 148.647 1065.513
End point
: -251.003 1065.513
Processing type
: Laser cutting
:1
Tool: Laser ID no. 99999999
==================== 1. T E C H N O L O G Y ======================
CUT
:
==================
:
Contour size
: Large contour:
Height regulation
: Active
Kerf
: 0.075
: 4073
Rule group
: 61181
==================
:
Starting point
: 148.647 1065.513
End point
: -251.003 1065.513
...
5-144
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
A processing operation can consist of more than one
technology.
You can also group a number of processing operations
together in a box: All operations are then displayed according
to the processing sequence.
With laser processing, all operations are displayed in a
compulsory sequence.
Using drawing tools

Function scope

stored in the screen menu for the DRAWING TOOLS control
function.
draft drawings.

Line type and color

type dotted.

CONSTRUCTION LINE

and point.
Function ANGLE X: Drawing a construction line with a point
and angle of inclination.
Function TAN2: Drawing tangents to 2 arc elements as constructionion lines.
Function ANGLE/LINE: Drawing a construction line with a point
Function DIVISION: Divide element using construction line.

S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-145

CONSTRUCTION CIRCLE

points.
Function DIAMETER: Drawing a construction circle with
diameter.
Function CENTER: Drawing construction circle using center
point and diameter.
circles.
2 elements.
elements.
Function TAN CENTER: Drawing a construction circle tangential to one element and center point.
the module DRAWINGsee: "Generating construction geometry".

DELETE CONSTRUCTION
GEO

part by part or completely.
Procedure:
Delete construction geometry completely: Pick ALL.
Delete construction geometry part by part: Pick the elements
individually.
screen.

MEASURE

between two points.
two points.
the radius of a circle.
Function ANGLE: Measuring angle.
5-146
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
10.4 Generating laser processing manually

Functions
LASER PROCESSING,
MANUAL
Generating laser processing manually means to define the

processing of individual contours with the laser. A series of functions are at your disposal here which are called up individually
using the control functions.
The following mask is available to you:
Mask with menu for manual laser processing
Fig. 19913
Procedure:
Functions
File
Load
Single part
Processing
S354E52.DOC
Steps:
Define processing using individual functions.
Switch to single part mode for processing definition.
or

The functions of the menu PUNCH PROCESSING,
AUTOMATIC are displayed.
TECHNOLOGY module
5-147
Combined processing
Select the functions for

LASER PROCESSING,
MANUAL
If you wish to define combined processing of the part or sheet,

you can switch to laser processing directly from punch processing.
The part to be processed is then already loaded.
Switch to manual laser processing by switching to LASER

PROCESSING in the first display window and MANUAL in the
second display window.
The menu functions for the control function GENERATE are
displayed.
These and the functions for the other control functions are
available for manual processing definition.
Define processing using individual functions. You select the

individual functions via the control function GENERATE:
The following setting options are available to you:
LASER MODE: Specify the type of laser processing.
BEGINNING OF CUT: Where should the beginning of the cut

be?
PARAMETER: Activate cutter path compensation as a laser

parameter.
To generate processing, select:
GEOMETRY: Create processing operations using an existing

geometry.
WITHOUT GEOMETRY: Create processing operations without having a defined geometry available as a model.
COMPULSORY SEQ: Set processing operations in compulsory sequences, break up present compulsory sequences,
split or invert.
Other functions are:

part.
5-148
TECHNOLOGY module
DELETE: To delete a certain processing operation or a

processing operation for a certain tool, disposal system, a
positioning path or to delete all processing operations.
S354E52.DOC
Other control functions
Other functions are available for manual laser processing

definition. They can be started using control functions. In
particular:
Control function EXTRAS: Add NC functions, define

positioning paths, detect unprocessed geometries, set
compulsory sequences or measurement point.
Control function SMALL PARTS: Specify removal of small

parts, set Micro-Joint.
Control function LIFT: Unload parts using TRUMALIFT

SheetMaster or TRUMALIFT SB/SC/SE. Can only be selected
if a lift is in the configuration of the current machine.
Control function SHEET: Specify resetting procedure and

clamping operation. Only active in sheet mode.
Control function MODIFY: Define processing operations such

as approach and depart, contour start, processing direction,
etc.
Control function DRAWING TOOLS: Create construction

geometries and select measurement functions.
Specifying parameters for manual laser

processing
Function GENERATE,
PARAMETERS
You can activate cutter path compensation as a parameter during

manual laser processing.
Cutting with cutter path compensation means that the processing is
generated directly on the geometry of the contour. The kerf width is
only taken into account by the control system for processing on the
machine.
Prerequisite: When cutting with cutter path compensation, the
approach path must be defined (in the rule group) so as to allow
the cutter path compensation to be built up.
Cutting with path correction: The contour is cut without cutter path
compensation. ToPs automatically calculates the precise course of
the contour on the basis of the actual kerf width. The laser cut
takes place directly on the defined contour.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-149
Specifying laser mode and cut start

Function LASER MODE
Specify which type of laser processing is to be active.
Procedure:
Function CUT START
Select the function button with the " t" (arrow) symbol or click
directly on the display field. You can select from the following
laser modes:
"Cutting": cut contours with the laser.
"Marking": mark with the laser.
"Center marking": center mark with the laser.
How should the cut start take place?

You have the following options for cutting contours:
"Beam on": The laser beam is ignited in a breach or outside of

the sheet.
In addition to defining the laser processing, it is a good idea to
place a measurement point near the edge. This is done before
the actual laser processing. The current upper edge of the
sheet near the edge of the sheet is determined using the
measurement point. You define the processing path which is
traversed without height regulation using the function MODIFY,
PROCESSING, CHANGE OVER, with the radio button "Height
regulation" active (in the processing type LASER
PROCESSING, MANUAL).
Example 1: The laser cut starts in a previously produced
breach. Prepunching is not necessary.
or
Example 2: Common slitting cuts: The outer contours start or
end outside the sheet area; due to previous trimming, the
outside contour to be processing is at the sheet edge.
5-150
"Piercing": Pierce the material directly with the laser and then
begin contour processing.
Example 1: Processing very small contours. Definition of a prepunching hole would violate the contour. The contour violation
also cannot be corrected by changing the approach flag.
Example 2: Slotting with the laser.
"Pre-punching": Pre-punch a single stroke with the selected
punching tool, and the laser is ignited in this breach (default
setting). Select the tool with which the pre-punching hole is to
be made in the next display window.
Example: Processing of small, medium-sized and large
contours.
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Creating laser processing with geometry

model
Processing element
Function GENERATE GEOMETRY, ELEMENT

Process element with the laser.
Pick the start point for element processing.
The cutting start and element are shown in the color cyan.
Process contour
Function GENERATE GEOMETRY, ELEMENT

Process individual contours with the laser.
Procedure:
Pick the contour. Contours to be processed must be identified
by you.
The way of identifying specifies the contour elements to be
processed as well as the beginning and the end of the
operation and thus the direction of processing.
As soon as you pick the start point for processing a contour,
the removal flap for laser cutting,
the laser and
the laser ejection cylinder are displayed on the screen.
Pick the element up to which the contour is to be processed.
The cutting start and contour are shown in the color green.
A contour consisting of several elements is to be processed
completely: Specify the start and end point of the operation by
double-clicking at the same position.
Identify particular elements of a contour specifically. Pick the first
and last element of a sequence of contour elements. The contour
is processed completely from the first to the last element picked,
including the contour elements in between.
The direction of processing results from the selection of the first
point picked. The beginning of the processing operation is
generated from the end point closest to the point picked.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-151
Process elements outside

the part
Function GENERATE GEOMETRY, BEYOND ELEMENT

Process elements (external contours) over several parts.
Use: Interactive trimming with the laser.
Pick the elements to be processed beyond the part.

Confirm element selection with OK.
Pick the start point for element processing.
The cutting start and processing are shown in the color green.
Please note: Processing can also be created for several parts at a
time, the path between the elements of the individual parts being
automatically closed by means of a linear connecting cut.
Processing defined with this function is part of total sheet
processing. If you displace parts or multiple-copy areas,
outside contour processing will not be transferred. In single
part mode, processing is assigned to the corresponding
single part.
5-152
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Creating laser processing without geometry

model
Generate linear laser cut
Function GENERATE: WITHOUT GEOMETRY, CUT

Generate linear cut on the sheet or within a single part.
Use: Cut off remnant strips or slot contours in the finished part.
Please note when slotting: "Piercing" or "Beam on" must be specified as cutting start.
Procedure:
Pick starting point.
Pick end point.
Terminate cut definition with END.
The cut is shown as a green line between the start and end points.
You can also define verticals, horizontals and lines in any angular
position by clicking on a start and end point.
For sheet cuts which go over the sheet limit:
Automatic approaching of the sheet edge without height
regulation. Subsequent switching to cutting with height regulation is done automatically.
Automatic withdrawal from the sheet edge without height
regulation takes place automatically if the selected rule group
contains a withdrawal path.
Recommendation: For laser cutting without height regulation,
i. e. approaching a sheet edge, it is advisable to define a measuring point. See: the function EXTRAS, NC FUNCTIONS,
MEASURING POINT.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-153
Creating compulsory sequences

Set compulsory sequence
Function GENERATE COMPULSORY SEQUENCE, SET

Set processing operations in a compulsory sequence.
Procedure:
Click consecutively on the processing operations which you would
like to place in a compulsory sequence.
Compulsory sequences can be defined at will:
Only laser processing is put in a compulsory sequence.

Only punching is put in a compulsory sequence.
Punch and laser processing are put in a compulsory sequence.
Effect: The processing operations included in a compulsory

sequence are displayed in a particular colour. Default setting: first
operation: dotted green line, all other operations: solid green line.
Break up compulsory
sequence
Function GENERATE: COMPULSORY SEQUENCE, BREAK UP

Break up an available compulsory sequence of operations again.
Procedure:
Pick a processing from a compulsory sequence. The compulsory
sequence is broken up.
Reverse compulsory
sequence
5-154
Function GENERATE: COMPULSORY SEQUENCE, INVERT

Invert sequence of operations which are in a compulsory
sequence.
Important: A laser processing operation in a compulsory
sequence cannot be inverted. This procedure is not permitted. A
warning is displayed as a message box.
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Split compulsory sequence
Function GENERATE COMPULSORY SEQUENCE: SPLIT

Split compulsory sequence.
Procedure:
Pick the processing operation where the compulsory sequence has
to be split.
Effect: The compulsory sequence is split into two compulsory
sequences. The processing operations no longer included in a
compulsory sequence are displayed in cyan. The selected
processing operation is removed from the compulsory sequence.
Defining NC function and positioning path

EXTRAS control function
The following menu functions are activated using the EXTRAS

control function:
POSITIONING PATH: Define a positioning path. Determine

speed and acceleration parameters and determine the starting
position of the positioning path via Start.
UNPROCESSED GEO: Identify properties which have no

processing. These geometries are shown in the color yellow.
This function provides information to check the processing
operations.
S354E52.DOC
NC FUNCTIONS: You can insert an NC function into the

sequence of present processing operations.
You can call up the following NC functions: define any text and
any cycle and measurement point.
Prerequisite: You have stored these NC functions as customer
cycles in the DATA module.
COMPULSORY SEQ: Set processing operations in a compulsory sequence.

You can break up, split (divide up) and invert defined compulsory sequences.
Compulsory sequences are set sequences of processing
operations which are executed one after the other. These
processing sequences with fixed definitions always remain
unchanged. Even optimization processes do not make
changes. Compulsory sequences form a possible basis for
subroutines.
Compulsory sequences are not bound to the part. You can
form compulsory sequences which transcend the individual
part. Create compulsory sequences, however, so that they are
parts-related. In doing this, you will support the optimization
process for sheet processing.
TECHNOLOGY module
5-155

part.
DELETE: Delete a certain processing operation or part or

determine what should be deleted via SELECTION. Delete a
positioning path or to delete all processing operations. In the
"Layout" area, you can select whether multi-copy processing,
sheet area, or external area is deleted or delete all.
Please observe the prompts and instructions in the
command line when using the functions.
Defining NC functions
NC functions are machine functions which you can select directly

via the menu for the EXTRAS control function.
NC functions must always be linked to a processing operation.
Switching functions are separated and deleted from the
assigned processing operation by sheet optimization, as
long as the switching functions are not in a compulsory
sequence.
NC functions must therefore always be set after sheet
optimization
or
be set in a compulsory sequence with the corresponding
NC functions can only be set at the beginning or at the end
of a compulsory sequence (error message!). If NC functions
are set to another position, the existing compulsory
sequence must be split at this position.
5-156
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Enter NC code directly
Function EXTRAS: NC FUNCTIONS, FREE TEXT

This function allows you to write NC functions or messages directly
into the NC code.
Text is entered in a mask.
Procedure:
Enter NC text. The characters and ~ may not be used.
The following rule applies:
"M27"
If the text is accompanied with single inverted commas,
ToPs executes a syntax and function check. The execution
of this function depends on the result of this check.
Example: If M27 is active in a preceding function, the text
will not be transferred into the NC program.
" M27 " or "M27"
This format tells the system that this function must
definitely be transferred to the NC program.
Before and after which processing operation should the NC

text be added? 0=before it, 1=after it.
Which processing operation should the text apply to? Pick a
Where should the text be positioned? Pick target position for
text display.
Free texts can only be positioned at the first and last

processing operation of a compulsory sequence. Otherwise:
Break up the existing compulsory sequence and then
position your text at the desired processing operation.
The NC function ANY TEXT must be linked to a processing
operation with a compulsory sequence, otherwise the text is
lost or deleted during sorting.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-157
Defining any NC cycle
Function EXTRAS: NC FUNCTIONS, FREE CYCLE

You can define the NC cycle by yourself in the DATA module, NC
OUTPUT function, CUSTOMER CYCLES. You can start these
cycles here and integrated them in the processing operation.
Procedure:
A mask is opened:
Select the cycle in the "cycle name" selection window (Scroll
window up). The NC text will be displayed in the scroll window
underneath. Editing of the NC text is not possible in this mask.
BEFORE or AFTER? Should the cycle be inserted after or
before the selected processing operation?
Click firstly onto reference processing operation with the
mouse, then on the target position for display of the NC cycles.
The cycle name is placed as text at the target position in the
part.
For checking the positioned NC cycle (text), it is advisable to
enlarge the screen area by clicking it with the right mouse
key.
For a description and the general conditions (e.g. function
call-ups) for the corresponding M and G functions, please
refer to the programming instructions for your machine.
5-158
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Define measuring point
Function EXTRAS: NC FUNCTIONS, MEASURING POINT

Define the measuring point before or after a processing operation.
Procedure:
Before = enter 0 or
After = enter 1.
Pick the reference operation.
Pick the target position.
The measuring point is displayed on the screen in the form of a red
cross.
Application:
Setting the measuring point for instance before laser cutting
without height regulation.
Important! Measure the sheet thickness near the sheet edge
prior to starting laser cutting outside the sheet.
Defining travel path

Specify the parameters for
positioning path
Function EXTRAS: POSITIONING PATH, PARAMETERS

Specify the parameters for positioning path definition.
Procedure:
"speed" and "acceleration": At what speed and acceleration
should the travel path be traversed?
"Max. punching head height": Should the punching head move
into the highest working position in doing so?
Define positioning path
Function EXTRAS: POSITIONING PATH, START

Define travel motion with the specified parameters.
Procedure: Pick the points of support of the travel path.

Effect: The travel path is displayed. This travel motion is interpreted by the system as if it was a processing operation. This
means: At first, it has not yet been specified after which processing
operation this travel motion has actually been executed. The
sorting (determination of the sequence) and optimization of the
processing operations are defined at a later point in time.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-159
If the starting point of a positioning path is attached to a present

processing operation, then the end point of the processing operation is the starting point of the positioning path. This sets the
sequence of processing operations.
Positioning paths must be assigned to a processing operation! Positioning paths which are not coupled to a processing
operation will be deleted during the optimization process.
Application example: by-passing of formed sections
Identifying unprocessed geometry

Function EXTRAS: UNPROCESSED GEO, IDENTIFY
With this function, you can display all geometry which still has no
laser processing.
Procedure:
All geometries are shown in the color yellow. You also receive
a message indicating the number of elements which have not
been processed.
Use: checking function for complete processing e.g. for a sheet
with many filigree parts.
5-160
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Removal of small parts

Control function SMALL
PARTS
Activate functions with which you can determine the removal of

small parts:
MANUAL REMOVAL: The part is removed by hand.
SMALL PARTS: The part is removed via flap or chute.
MICROJOINT: The part stays temporarily connected to the

sheet remainder via small webs (microjoint). The part must be
broken off by hand after the withdrawal of the complete sheet.
Microjoint tools (e.g. dovetail tools, trapezoid tools) are usually
used to produce microjoints.

part.

what should be deleted via SELECTION. To delete a
positioning path or to delete all processing operations.
The index card "Layout" is only offered in sheet mode and
allows you to delete a part from a multi-copy processing
section, sheet area, or external area or to delete all.
The individual functions are described in detail in the context of

punch processing See: "Generating punch processing manually".
Removing part with lift

Control function LIFT:
S354E52.DOC
Part removal using TRUMALIFT SheetMaster or TRUMALIFT

SC/SB/SE is described in a separate chapter.
This chapter also contains the description of the automation
components TRUMAGRIP and TRUMASORT.
TECHNOLOGY module
5-161
Repositioning
SHEET control function:
In the menu for the control function SHEET you find stored
functions to define a repositioning process.
You can only reposition in the sheet mode. The sheet is subdivided
into repositioning areas for this action. The processing operations
executed before and after the repositioning motion are assigned to
several repositioning areas.
Application:Repositioning is required when a sheet is too long or,

as another example, when processing operations are in the
clamping dead range and cannot be executed on the basis of
normal processing sequences.
REPOSITION: Start and delete a repositioning procedure.
CLAMPING OPERATION: Rearrange processing operations

(which processing operation should be processed after repositioning? etc.) or activate a defined repositioning process.

you must identify the particular processing operation in the part.
DELETE: Delete a certain processing operation or part or

determine what should be deleted via SELECTION. To delete
a processing operation for a certain tool, disposal system, a
positioning path or to delete all processing operations. As part
of sheet layout you can delete parts from multi-copy
processing, sheet area, or external area or delete all.
Functions for repositioning and clamping are only offered in the

sheet mode.
For a description see: "Generating punch processing manually".
5-162
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Modifying the approach and withdrawal

paths
Function MODIFY,
APPROACH/WITHDRAWAL,
MODIFY
Modify approach flag and withdrawal flag with pre-punching hole.

Approach flags are a user-oriented extension of the parts geometry. They consist of a piercing point or pre-punching hole and an
approach path. The approach path can be a straight line or a
combination of straight line and arc.
Procedure:
Example of approach flags:
a
c
d
Pre-punching hole with tool center

Straight part of the approach path
Arc of the approach path
Contour
1
2
3
Start point of the approach flag

Transition from straight line to arc
Transition from approach flag to
contour (end point approach flag)
Approach flags
Fig. 12786
Please note: Collisions with previously defined processing

may arise if the approach flag is subsequently modified.
Laser processing operations are not checked automatically
for collisions with neighboring processing operations (See:
Collision test).
Recommendation: Make use of the option of enlarging a section of

the screen for changing approach flags (with the right mouse
button).
Procedure:
1st pick point: Pick approach flag.

2nd pick point: Pick new position.
Pre-punching hole and approach path are set to the new
position.
The prepunching hole is only moved along with if the tool
center point is identical with the start point of the approach flag.
The change to the approach flag depends on the position of the

first and second pick points:
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-163
1nd variant:
Shorten straight section of the approach path. Arc and transition
from arc to contour (contour entry) are retained.
Place first pick point near the start point of the approach flag.
Place second pick point on the approach flag in the direction of
the end point.
2nd variant:
Delete the approach path completely. Piercing or punching hole is
placed on the contour.
Place first pick point near the start point of the approach path.
Place second pick point on the end point of the approach path.
3rd variant:
Change arc radius. Start point and tangential transition are
retained.
Place first pick point near the transition from straight line to arc.
Place second pick point near the approach path in the direction
of the start point of the approach flag. The second pick point
describes a position on a nonexistent arc which is used for
calculating the new approach arc.
M Calculated center point of the circle

1.x = 1st pick point; 2.x = 2nd pick point (example)
Changing the radius of the arc of the approach flag
Fig. 12785
4th variant:
Approach arc is deleted; i.e. change in the approach path contour
from straight line with arc to straight line.
Place first pick point near the transition from straight line to arc.
Place second pick point on the end point of the approach path
(transition from arc to contour).
5-164
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
5th variant:
Create approach arc with straight approach path; i.e. change of the
contour of the approach path from straight line to straight line with
arc.
Place first pick point on the end point of a straight approach
path.
Place second pick point near the approach path. The second
pick point describes a position on a nonexistent arc which is
used for calculating the approach arc.
M Calculated center point of the circle

1.x = 1st pick point; 2.x = 2nd pick point (example)
Change the approach path
S354E52.DOC
12863
TECHNOLOGY module
5-165
Offsetting contour start

Function MODIFY,
CONTOUR START, OFFSET
As part of laser processing you can shift defined approach flags

with prepunching hole or piercing position .
Prerequisite: Approach flag is defined on a closed laser operation.

If a microjoint is defined at the end of the contour processing (only
one approach flag present), the microweb is also shifted and is
retained.
If there are a number of microjoint processes, the microjoint cannot
be shifted, as there is in this case no closed laser processing
element present.
Procedure:
1. pick: Select the desired position for the approach flag.

Preliminary punch hole and approach path are set in current
form to the new position.
2. Set pick outside the part: the approach path is generated at
the position desired according to the rules which are defined in
the selected rules data.
3. Set pick outside the part: The approach flag is set back to
the original position.
No processing may be selected with picks 2 and 3.
The following rules apply:
5-166
TECHNOLOGY module
You can also select rounded corners or corners with loops as

the start point. Looping or rounding are deleted.
Microjoints are shifted with an approach flag, for example.
Corners which become free are rounded or a loop is added,
depending on the rule group setting.
Disposals are deleted.
The collision test is activated by default during execution of this
function.
S354E52.DOC
Reversing processing direction

Function MODIFY,
PROCESSING DIRECTION,
INVERT
Inverting the direction of processing for open or closed contours to

be processed with the laser
Procedure:
1
2
Identify the processing operation
Contour element
Laser path
Approach flag with pre-punching

hole
Processing defined prior to inverting
Fig. 13573
The direction of processing is inverted. The suggestion for

inversion is displayed.
Picking the contour again activates display of all possible
suggestions one after the other. The last suggestion is identical
with the initial situation.
The programming system generates the following suggestions:

Inverting the operation with the form of the approach and
withdrawal elements being retained. The direction is changed.
1
2
Contour element
Laser path

hole
Suggestion for inversion: Direction is changed
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
Fig. 13574
5-167
2. Invert the processing operation while generating a completely

new approach and withdrawal flag under consideration of the
specifications of the rule group. In this suggestion, the form
and direction of the approach and withdrawal flag are changed.
1
2
Contour element
Laser path

hole
Suggestion for inversion: Direction and form are changed
Fig. 13575
3. The initial situation is offered again.
1
2
Contour element
Laser path

hole
Suggestion for inversion: Initial situation is displayed
Fig. 13573
If you mark the contour to be inverted by a box, the system

st
will offer you only one suggestion for inversion (1 inversion
suggestion).
Remarks:
Measuring points coupled to laser operations are not changed,

but retain their position in the processing sequence. They are
not changed.
5-168
Changeover points set on the contour will be modified

accordingly.
Any programmed removal other than manual removal will be

deleted.
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Changing over processing operation

Function MODIFY,
PROCESSING,
CHANGEOVER
Switch height regulation on
and off.
Define laser processing operations with or without height regulation

and change contour size.
Procedure
Pick the start point on contour.

Identify the position for changeover point on the contour. The
sequence of changeover points must correspond to the
direction of processing.
In the following mask, specify:

"Initial situation": The current contour size (in the rule
group) is displayed.
"Height regulation": The current settings of the height
regulation system are displayed.
Settings in the "New value" area are made automatically.
Confirm your selection with OK.
Identify the end point of changeover.
The changeover points are displayed. Their positions are marked

by the symbol for the changeover function.
Representation on the
screen
Height regulation:
Changeover on the contour of the height regulation is displayed by

a particular symbol: line type solid, colour green.
1
2
Contour element
Processing without height
regulation
3
4
Processing with height regulation

Processing direction
Symbol for height regulation changeover
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
Fig. 13586
5-169
Remarks:
Change contour size
This function can also be used for approach and withdrawal

flags. The selected function is then effective for the complete
flag. Changeover within the flag is not possible.
Changeover from cutting with height regulation to cutting without height regulation and vice versa within one contour
element is possible.
The system determines whether the contour is large or small

during processing definition. The data is taken from the rule group
for processing definition accordingly, and the contour is processed
with the parameters from the laser table.
This function allows you to change contour size interactively and
thereby call up other cutting data.
Example: A contour is composed of long and short complex
elements. It is advisable to work with different cutting parameters
when processing a contour with different contour elements.
Procedure:
Select function and observe instructions in the command line:
Pick the start point on contour.
The current contour size is displayed in the following mask. The
contour size being changed over to is displayed in the "New
value" display area.
Pick end point.
The change in contour size is marked by a vertical line on the
screen. The contour size is indicated by the arrow size:
Large arrow: large contour
Small arrow small contour
5-170
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Stretching laser processing

Function MODIFY,
PROCESSING, STRETCH
Extending or shortening laser cutting operations

This function allows linear or circular laser cutting operations to be
extended or shortened at any element point. Approach or withdrawal elements and changeover points are modified correspondingly.
Procedure:

Follow the instructions given in the command line.
Enter numerical value (stretching increment):

A positive numerical value means stretching (extending) the
processing
With a negative value, processing is shortened.
Pick the start and end points of the processing operation.
Applications:
Partial processing of a contour, e. g. with manual definition of common slitting cuts or if a contour does not have to be processed
completely.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-171
Using drawing tools

function:

stored in DRAWING TOOLS.
draft drawings.


type dotted.

CONSTRUCTION LINE

Function HORIZONTAL and function VERTICAL: Drawing horizontal and vertical construction lines
Function TAN PT: Drawing tangents as construction lines on
arc and point
Function PERPENDICULAR: Drawing perpendicular construction lines
and angle of inclination
and an angle to the base line

5-172
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC

CONSTRUCTION CIRCLE
Function 3 POINTS: Drawing a construction circle with

three points
a center and radius
diameter
Function CENTER/RADIUS: Drawing construction circle using
center point and diameter
circles
2 elements
an element and two points
Function TAN 3: Drawing a construction circle tangential to
3 elements.
Function TAN CENTER: Drawing a construction circle tangential to one element and center point
Function DRAWING TOOLS:

DELETE CONSTRUCTION
GEO

Procedure:
individually.
screen.

MEASURE
Function 2 POINTS: Measuring the distance between 2 points

between two points
two points
the radius of a circle
Function ANGLE: Measuring angle
the module DRAWINGsee: "Measurement".
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-173
Calling up information
Function GENERATE, INFO
Call up and view information on an operation. The INFO function is

offered if any of the following is selected:
Control function GENERATE
Control function EXTRAS:
Control function SMALL PARTS:
Control function SHEET:
Control function MODIFY:
Procedure:
Click on INFORMATION function.
Pick the relevant operation with the mouse. A message list
where you can receive detailed information on "Processing"
and "Technology" will be displayed.
Deleting processing operations and parts

You will find the functions with which processing operations can be
deleted in the menu for the
GENERATE control function.
Control function EXTRAS:
Control function SMALL PARTS:
Control function SHEET:
Control function MODIFY:
Delete processing operation

directly
Function DELETE, PROCESSING
Procedure: Select the processing operation to be deleted. Pick an

individual processing operation. Or: Open a box. Or: Select the
menu field ALL to delete the screen contents completely.
Effect: The selected processing operations are shown in magenta.
Confirm the deletion by pressing OK.
If processing operations are deleted individually, then the
traverse paths between the neighboring operations will be
updated automatically. If processing operations are grouped
in a box when deleting, then the traverse paths will not be
automatically updated.
Operations in compulsory sequences cannot be deleted.
First break up the compulsory sequence, then delete the
5-174
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Delete selected processing

operation
Function DELETE, SELECTION, index card "Processing"

This function allows you to make a targeted selection of objects to
be deleted. A mask is opened for this purpose:
"Positioning path": Delete positioning path without the

processing operation allocated.
Pick the positioning path or mark it with a box after closing the
mask.
"Tool": Delete entire processing operation of the active tool.

Prerequisite: Tool has been activated.
Delete parts of the layout
"Disposal": Delete disposal of a part. Close the mask and pick

the processing operation on which the symbol for disposal is
defined.
"All processing operations for part": Delete entire processing of

a single part.
Identify the single part or mark it with a box after closing the
mask.
Function DELETE, SELECTION, index card "Layout"

This index card is only offered in sheet mode.
It contains the option to delete parts from the present layout.
"Multi-copy processing": Delete entire multi-copy processing. If

several multi-copy processing sections are present on the
sheet, identify the multi-copy processing section you wish to
delete. To do so, click on a part in the multi-copy processing
section.
"Sheet area": Delete parts on the entire sheet.
sheet.
"All": Delete all parts on the screen.

deleted.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-175
11.
Multifunction processing operation

with the laser
Multifunction processing in laser mode refers to processing

definitions that can be programmed by combining certain functions.
Two frequently defined processing operations are described here
as examples:
Trimming with the laser

Manual definition of common parting cuts
Trimming with the laser

Requirements:
Your sheet layout requires trimming of the parts, as is the case

with common parting cuts.
Elements that have to be trimmed may not be processed in

single part mode.
Trimming can be defined in sheet mode only.
Default settings for laser cutting:
5-176
TECHNOLOGY module
Select menu LASER PROCESSING, MANUAL with "Cutting

start" BEAM ON.
Any table suitable for the type and thickness of the material to
be processed may be selected as laser technology table.
Rule group: "At will": It is, however, advisable to select a rule
containing withdrawal.
S354E52.DOC
Procedure
Example:
1
3
Sheet
Trimming cut on sheet
Single part
Trimming when using common slitting cuts
Fig. 14144
1. Define sheet layout.

Important: Only elements that are visible can be selected for
trimming. Activate the SYMBOL function button at the bottom
of the mask.
2. Select the function GENERATE, GEOMETRY, MULTIELEMENT (menu for LASER PROCESSING, MANUAL).
Now identify all elements to be included in laser cutting for
trimming either individually or by placing them in a box. The
identifying sequence is not relevant.
The selected elements will be displayed in magenta colour.
A marked element can be deselected by clicking on it again.
3. Pick the start point for element processing.
The laser cut for trimming the composed contour is made
automatically.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-177
4. Extend the processing operations at their beginning and end

using the function MODIFY, PROCESSING; STRETCH.
Extend the laser cut after the approach path and before the
withdrawal path, e. g. by approx. 3 mm. Switching of the height
regulation can then be defined on this path.
5. Modify the approach and withdrawal flags:Select the function
MODIFY, APPROACH/WITHDRAWAL, MODIFY.
Change the direction of processing of the approach and withdrawal paths, so that they are positioned toward the sheet
edge.
An optimum course of the cut can be generated by adding an
arc to a linear approach and withdrawal element.
Note: It is advantageous to select a rule with the following
features:
Approach: at corner with line/arc
at element with line/arc
Withdrawal: at corner with line/arc
at element with line/arc
6. Extend approach and withdrawal flag: Function MODIFY,
PROCESSING, STRETCH
If the approach element begins or the withdrawal element ends
inside the sheet area, you must extend it beyond the sheet
edge.
Note: It is advantageous to select a rule with the following
features:
Approaching and withdrawal: select a relatively great maximum
length; take into account the margin specified for sheet layout.
1
3
Sheet
Cut on sheet
Stretching the approach path
5-178
TECHNOLOGY module
2
4
Single part
Extended approach path on sheet
Fig. 14145
S354E52.DOC
1
3
Sheet
Cut on sheet
2
4
Single part
Extended withdrawal path on
sheet
Stretching the withdrawal path
Fig. 14146
7. Activate or deactivate the height regulation: Select the function

MODIFY, PROCESSING, CHANGEOVER.
The beginning and the end of the trimming cut are outside the
sheet area. As the height regulation is normally activated for
cutting, it must be deactivated in time at the beginning and end
of the cut.
The height regulation is activated or deactivated at the
extended part of the contour. The approach and withdrawal
elements are always processed completely without height
regulation.
Deactivating the height regulation

at the beginning of the cut
Fig. 14148
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-179

at the end of the cut
Fig. 14149
8. Determine the sheet thickness: The function EXTRAS, NC

FUNCTIONS, MEASURING POINT.
A measuring point must be defined in the area of the sheet
where the cut starts, as the beginning of the cut is outside the
sheet and the first part of the cut is executed without height
regulation. The measuring point is inserted before the laser
processing begins.
Activating the height regulation at

the beginning of the cut
Define measuring point for sheet

thickness determination
Fig. 14147
5-180
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
9. .Specify removal: Select the MANUAL REMOVAL, SMALL

PARTS function.
A manual removal is defined at the end of the trimming cut. A
manual stop is programmed for this.

at the end of the cut
Define manual stop for removal
Fig. 14150
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-181
Manual definition of common slitting cuts

with the laser
Prerequisite:
Sheet layout has been done. Web widths in X and Y direction were
chosen according to the kerf width of the laser (= beam diameter).
The kerf width of the laser cut is stored in the laser technology
table in the DATA module.
Presettings for laser cutting:
Select BEAM ON in the menu LASER PROCESSING,

MANUAL with "Cutting start" .
Any laser technology table compatible with the material and
material thickness can be selected. Make sure it contains the
required kerf width.
Rule group: It is advantageous to select a rule group in which a
withdrawal is already defined and which generates no loops or
rounded corners.
Procedure:
1. In single part mode: Define single part processing
The processing operation for all single contours is defined in
single part mode. Outside contours are processed only
partially.
Process outer contour elements of a part which have common
parting cut edges with adjacent parts with the laser.
The outer contour of parts which are located for example in the
outer area of a multi-copy processing operation are processed
in sheet mode with trimming.
You then transfer the parts processed in different ways in
single part mode interactively onto the sheet layout (Function
TRANSFER SINGLE PART TO SHEET).
Note: Trimming is usually done before the actual separation of

the parts. This means that the edge of the material moves
directly up to the part to be separated. You must take this into
consideration during processing definition in single part mode.
5-182
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
1
3
Sheet edge
Edge of single part
2
4
Single part
Common parting cut
Trim parts
Fig. 14151
2. Specify separation of the parts: Select the function GENERATE, GEOMETRY, CONTOUR or ELEMENT.
Identify elements for separation. Selecting the first element
also specifies the processing direction.
Note: The laser cut begins at the edge of the sheet if trimming
has been done.
3. Modify the approach and withdrawal flags: Select the function
MODIFY, APPROACH/WITHDRAWAL, MODIFY.
If the approach and withdrawal flag has not already been
placed in the desired direction, this can be changed. You can
also add an arc at this point so that an ideal approach and
withdrawal is generated.
4. Program height regulation: Select the function MODIFY,
PROCESSING, CHANGEOVER.
The cutting start and end are no longer located on the sheet.
Because cutting is usually done with height regulation, the
height regulation must be deactivated promptly at the
beginning and end of cutting.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-183
1
3
Single part
Switch on height regulation.
Common parting cut
Switching on height regulation
Fig. 14152
5. Specify measuring point: Select the function EXTRAS, NC

FUNCTIONS, MEASURING POINT.
Because the laser cut begins outside of the sheet, the current
sheet thickness should be measured before cutting. Define a
measuring point near the edge of the sheet before the laser
cut.
Single part
Switch on height regulation.
Place measuring point
2
4
Common parting cut

Define measuring point:
Fig. 14153
6. Define removal of the part: Select the SMALL PARTS function.

Define the desired removal for the part at the end of the laser
cut.
5-184
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
7. Define
compulsory sequences
if
necessary.Function
GENERATE, COMPULSORY SEQ, SET
If the outer contour is specified by sections in several laser
cuts, it is advisable to specify the desired sequence of laser
cuts using a compulsory sequence. Use: Separation of parts is
more user-friendly.
Important: Note the subsequent sorting strategy when
defining laser processing.
Further procedure
After defining the processing in single part mode, the transfer of
the processing to the sheet takes place selectively; i.e. the
processing is only transferred to suitable parts of the sheet.
In this procedure, only parts which require a different processing
definition are now processed.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-185
12.
Laying out sheet
In ToPS, you can do sheet layout in both the NEST and TECHNOLOGY modules.
Lay out sheet in NEST
module
Lay out sheet in

TECHNOLOGY module
Single part drawings (with or without processing) or drawings of

mini-nests are the basis for nesting. Sheet layout is dine either
manually or using nesting processors. Specify the sheet size and
how many of which parts is to be placed on the sheet.
A drawing of the nested sheet is generated. You can load this
sheet as a drawing in the TECHNOLOGY module and define the
processing.
Sheet layout is done in a different way in the technology module.

You have several options in selecting the layout strategy:
Simple multi-copy
processing
Simple multi-copy processing

Sectional multi-copy processing:
The same part is on the sheet multiple times.
Simple multi-copy processing
Sectional multi-copy
processing
5-186
Fig. 5883
Specify sections of the sheet in which a part is placed on the sheet

several times. This layout method also allows you to carry out all
layout strategies on the sheet. Example: One section is defined
with multi-copy processing and another with nested parts.
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Sectional multi-copy processing
Initial blank
Fig. 5884
A single part is placed on the sheet.
Initial blank
Layout
Control functions
Fig. 4773
Sheet layout is primarily defined using the control functions for the
main function LAYOUT. The following control functions are
available:
CREATE: Lay out the sheet with parts in simple or sectional

multi-copy processing.
MODIFY: Modify section properties, move section, compare
geometry.
MODIFY SHEET: modify sheet dimensions.
LOAD: Specify loading position.
MODIFY PART: change number of parts, move or rotate parts.
CLAMP: Change clamp positions.
DRAWING TOOLS: Create construction geometries and select
measurement functions.
Display on the screen:

By default, only the first 2 or 4 parts of a multi-copy processing
section are displayed with geometry and processing. All other parts
are represented as symbols (=surrounding rectangle). You can
change this display at any time using the SYMBOL function button
at the bottom of the mask.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-187
Specifying sheet data

Sheet data is queried
automatically.
The sheet data (dimensions of the sheet, material) is requested

automatically as soon as a sheet is loaded.
You only need to select the function FILE, NEW in the main
window bar if you wish to define a new sheet with a new layout and
processing.
Enter new sheet data
Select the function FILE, NEW to define a new sheet. A mask is
opened for this purpose:
Procedure:
You must make the following entries:
Sheet size
Material thickness
Material designation The material designation must correspond
with the entries in the database (DATA module).
PARAMETER: You specify here
whether you want non-scratch processing operation or not.
Non-scratch processing means: The stripper is positioned
approx. 1 mm higher during processing.
Specify the sheet type: normal sheet, uneven sheet or formed sheet?
For the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster: MODIFY "Lift parameter".
Do you wish to use the sheet detector?
Should the sheet be stripped?
Output type: direct or preparatory?
Change speed.
Change acceleration.
To keep from having to type everything in: select the material by
clicking in the display field or selecting the "Arrow" symbol.. Effect:
The dimensions from the database are entered in all other entry
fields.
Define sheet processing
5-188
Effect: Existing screen displays are deleted and the new sheet is
displayed in the specified size. An insertion symbol (red star) is
drawn inside the sheet. This symbol is important for defining the
processing operation when dealing with resetting motions See:
"Repositioning".
The sheet is loaded centered by default. The loading position and
the sheet size can be changed later (see: the function FILE,
SETUP SHEET or the menu SHEET LAYOUT, function LOAD or
the function MODIFY SHEET.
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Creating sheet layout

A multi-copy processing section can be formed in two ways.
Variant 1: All part on the sheet are aligned in the same way.
Variant 2: The parts within the multi-copy processing section are
placed so that optimum utilization of the area is achieved. The
parts are rotated for this if necessary.
Multi-copy processing:
simple
Definition: The entire sheet is used as the basis for sheet layout.
The sheet is not divided into different sections. Instead: Sheet size
= section size of the multi-copy processing section.
Simple multi-copy processing (variant 1)
Function CREATE, SIMPLE
Fig. 7270
Prerequisite You must have already loaded one or more parts to

define a multi-copy processing section.
Procedure
1. Select the function. A mask for entering margins and webs
opens automatically.
2. Enter dimensions for outer margins and webs. Close the mask
with OK.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-189
1
2
3
4
Left margin
Upper margin
Right margin
Lower margin
5
6
Web width in Y direction = part spacing

Web width in X direction = part spacing
Margins and webs
Fig. 4412
3. Define unit to be the basis fir multi-copy processing. E.g. pick

part, or pick several parts one after the other, or group several
parts in a box.
4. Complete part selection with OK.
Effect: Sheet is laid out. The parts located inside the sheet are
taken into account in the generation of the NC program. You can
delete these parts before NC generation using the functions
DELETE, PART or SELECTION, index card "LAYOUT" ("Outer
area" radio button).
Multi-copy processing:
sectional
Definition: Define different rectangular sections to be filled with

parts.
Function CREATE,
SECTIONAL
5-190
Fig. 5884
Prerequisite You must have already loaded several parts to place

parts in the sections.
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Procedure:
1. Select the function. A mask for entering margins and webs
opens automatically.
2. Enter dimensions for outer margins and webs. The dimensions
refer to the multi-copy processing sections (in comparison: In
definition of a simple multi-copy processing section, these
specifications refer to the sheet, see: Simple multi-copy processing). Close the mask with OK.
3. Define unit (e.g. part or pick several parts one after the other or
group parts in a box) which should be the basis for the multicopy processing.
4. Complete part selection with OK.
5. Define section orenter the number of parts in the X direction
and Y direction. The multi-copy processing sections are usually
defined inside the sheet. But: Any placement on the screen
can be used to achieve ideal layout.
Effect: The section is displayed on-screen with layout.

Applications: This function is usually used to place several parts in
several multi-copy processing sections on the sheet. Other possibilities are shown in the following example:
Fig. 7269
Explanation of sheet: The upper left corner is occupied by a nested

sheet (500x500). Multi-copy processing sections are also defined.
The parts of the nested sheet are treated as single parts. The
section where these pats are located is not a multi-copy processing
section.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-191
Modifying sheet layout

Change web widths
MODIFY function: SECTION PROPERTIES, WEB WIDTH

Change web widths within a multi-copy processing section.
Procedure:
Enter the web width in the X and Y direction.
Select multi-copy processing: Pick part within the multi-copy
processing section.
Breaking up multiple-copy
section
MODIFY function: SECTION PROPERTIES, BREAK UP

Break up group of several parts in a multi-copy processing section.
Procedure: Select multi-copy processing: Pick a part within the

multi-copy processing section to do so.
Application You have to use this function if you wish to move parts
which belong to a multi-copy processing section. It is possible to
copy parts without breaking up the multi-copy processing section.
Modify rows and columns
MODIFY function: SECTION PROPERTIES, ROWS

MODIFY function: SECTION PROPERTIES, COLUMNS
Rotate position of parts within a multi-copy processing section by
180 according to rows or columns.
Procedure:
A mask opens.
Select the row or column whose parts you wish to rotate: Odd
or even numbered? Confirm with OK.
Select multi-copy processing: Pick a part within the multi-copy
processing section.
Application This function is good to use for generating technologyoriented positioning. Example: Place parts with notches next to
each other in such a way that the notches can be processed
simultaneously.
5-192
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Move section
MODIFY function: MOVE SECTION, 2 POINTS or HORIZONTAL

or VERTICAL
An entire multi-copy processing section can be changed in position
with this function.
These function correspond for the most part with the functions for
modifying geometry elements. The procedure is described in the
chapter on the DRAWING module (see: "Modifying geometry").
Compare geometry
MODIFY function: GEO COMPARER

The functions in the GEO COMPARER menu allow you to do the
following:
Function COMPARE PART: Compare geometries of two parts

(source part, target part) and transfer the processing operation
of one part to the other.
and
Function REPLACE PART: Replace a part in a sheet layout.
Mask with sheet layout and menu:
Mask with example
S354E52.DOC
Fig. 18830
TECHNOLOGY module
5-193
Example:
The sheet layout in the mask depicted above is intended as an
example. The section markings are for orientation and are not
visible to you on-screen in ToPs 300.
Four multi-copy processing sections (1-4) are defined on the sheet:
The parts in multi-copy processing sections 1 and 2 are almost
identical. They differ only in one geometry: The parts in section 1
have an arc and the parts in section 2 have a square at the same
position. The parts in multi-copy processing sections 3 and 4 are
identical.
Application: to modify existing geometries with processing

operations in the single parts on an existing sheet quickly and
easily, or even to replace parts of a complete multi-copy processing section with a different part quickly and conveniently.
Comparing geometry
All closed contours, texts and points are compared with their
processing operations. Processing operation in the target part are
deleted because processing operations of the original part (source
part) act as a model. They are transferred to the target part.
If geometries exist in the source part but not in the target part, or
vice-versa, no comparison can be made of the geometries. These
geometries are not modified. They are retained unchanged in the
target part.
Open contours are not taken into account in the comparison.
Procedure:
Select the LAYOUT function. Activate the MODIFY control

function button in the menu. The menu functions for MODIFY
are displayed.
5-194
Select the TECHNOLOGY module. Load single parts or nested

sheet.
Select the COMPARE PART function. The following mask

opens:
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Specifying parameters for geometry comparison
Fig. 19026
Specify by clicking the check boxes:
"Observe position": The form, position, angle position and

geometry are considered in the comparison. The function
also checks whether the geometry has the same reference
point.
"Retain compulsory sequence": Should processing

sequences which exist as compulsory sequences be
retained as such or should they be broken up?
Confirm your choice with OK. The geometry comparison is
started.
Identify the source and target parts by clicking with the mouse:
Source part: is the part whose processing is to be adopted.
Target part: is the part which should receive the processing.
The selected parts will be displayed in magenta colour.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-195
Replacing geometries and

parts
Procedure:
Select the TECHNOLOGY module. Load single parts or nested

sheet.
Select the LAYOUT function. Activate the MODIFY control

function button in the menu. The menu functions for MODIFY
are displayed.
Replacing parts
Fig. 19027
In this example, a single part with processing was loaded. This part
is intended to replace the parts in multi-copy processing section 1.
Select the REPLACE PART function.

First identify the new part ("source part"), then the part to be
replaced ("target part").
Should the angular position of the part to be replaced be
taken into account? Enter 1 for YES and 0 for NO. Confirm
with RETURN
Do you want to replace anther part? If yes, identify the part;
if no, end the action with OK.
The identified parts will be displayed in magenta colour. The
parts on the sheet are replaced when the action is ended.
5-196
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Parts in multi-copy processing section 1 are replaced
Fig. 19028
Always observe: When you replace part, you must ensure

that the outer dimensions of the parts correspond. If the
outer dimensions differ, it can cause geometry violations or
the sheet area will not be utilized optimally. The webs
between the parts can become wider than is necessary,
because the webs are not adapted to the new external
dimensions of the parts.
You can change the selection of identified parts interactively.
Procedure:
specify whether the angular position is to be taken into

account. The parts of the multi-copy processing section are
now displayed in magenta.
Now click on the parts which are not to be replaced or to be

replaced separately. The color display changes again: These
parts are marked in white again.
S354E52.DOC
Identify the part to be replaced and
Complete the action with OK. Now only those parts which you
have not interactively excluded are replaced.
TECHNOLOGY module
5-197
Modifying sheet dimensions

Function MODIFY SHEET: DIMENSIONS
Modify the dimensions of the sheet.
Procedure The sheet data is entered in a mask. The default dimensions from the database (material data) are preset. You must
overwrite this data if do not wish to work with the standard data.
Effect: The sheet is drawn enlarged or reduced. An already
existing sheet layout is not changed.
Changing the loading position

Function LOAD: LOADING POS.
Change the loading position of the sheet. The sheet is loaded
centered by default. You can change the loading position.
Procedure
Select the function. A mask is opened.
Select how the loading position is to be changed in the mask:
Index pin no.: Enter the number of the index pin.

Number 1 = without lift
Number 2 = with lift
The pin number must always be changed when you switch
between loading with the lift and manual loading (or viceversa).
Should the sheet be loaded from the center?
TECHNOLOGY module
Loading side (point of view: in front of the machine) left or

right? Effect: The sheet is loaded as far to the left or right
as possible.
5-198
Type of loading: manually or using lift? (only if lift is

available)
Should the processing be anti-scratch?
S354E52.DOC
Changing number of parts and part position

PART
The control function MODIFY PART contains menu functions with

which you
can move or rotate the original,
or
make copies of the original and be able to simultaneously
move or rotate them.
Procedure:
Decide whether you wish to modify the original or make a

copy.Click the display field or the "Arrow" symbol.
If you select "Copy",specify the number of copies.
Select the modification function (menu function).Follow the

instructions in the command line.
Breakdown of separate modification functions:

Move part
Rotate parts
Function MOVE, 2 POINTS: Move part (original or copy) by

two parts.
Function MOVE, HORIZONTAL: Move part horizontally.
Function MOVE, VERTICAL: Move part vertically.
Function ROTATE, 2 POINTS: Rotate geometry around two
points.
Function ROTATE, CENTER: Rotate geometry around a
center point.
The individual menu functions correspond for the most part with
the functions which are described in the DRAWING module see:
"Moving geometry" and "Rotating geometry".
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-199
Changing clamps
Function SHEET LAYOUT, MANUAL, control function CLAMP:
In the menu for manual sheet layout, you can change the clamp
positions and the dead strip display.
Change clamp position
Function CLAMP: MOVE:

Set clamp to another position.
The clamp itself is not displayed on screen, but rather the clamp
dead range.
Procedure
Display/hide dead strips
Pick clamp.
Pick the position to which the clamp is to be moved (target
position).
Function CLAMP: DEAD STRIPS

Hide or display clamp dead strips on the screen.
The term "dead strip" refers to the entire collision area between the
clamps and the inserted tool. No processing can take place in the
dead strip.
The dead strip is marked by a yellow line on the screen.
Procedure
5-200
TECHNOLOGY module
Pick function: Dead strip is displayed.

Pick the function again: Dead strip is hidden.
S354E52.DOC
Using drawing tools

function:

located in the DRAWING TOOLS menu.
draft drawings.


type dotted.

CONSTRUCTION LINE

Function HORIZONTAL and function VERTICAL: Drawing
horizontal and vertical construction lines
Function TAN PT: Drawing tangents as construction lines on
arc and point
Function PERPENDICULAR: Drawing perpendicular construction lines
and angle of inclination
Function TAN2: Drawing tangents to 2 arc elements as construction lines
and an angle to the base line

the module DRAWINGsee: "Measurement". Creating
construction geometry.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-201

CONSTRUCTION CIRCLE

points
a center and radius
diameter
Function CENTER/RADIUS: Drawing construction circle using
center point and diameter
circles
2 elements
an element and two points
elements.
Function TAN CENTER: Drawing a construction circle
tangential to one element and center point
the module DRAWINGsee: "Measurement". "Creating
Function DRAWING TOOLS:

DELETE CONSTRUCTION
GEO

Procedure:
individually.
screen.

MEASURE
Function 2 POINTS: Measuring the distance between 2 points

between two points
two points
the radius of a circle
Function ANGLE: Measuring angle
the module DRAWINGsee: "Measurement". Measuring
5-202
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Sheet layout: Delete functions

Delete part.
Function PART, DELETE

Prerequisite: The part to be deleted my not be in a multi-copy
processing section. To delete parts from a multi-copy processing
section you must first break up the multi-copy processing section.
Procedure Pick part.

Effect: Part is deleted together with processing.
Delete layout
Function DELETE, SELECTION.

Delete particular parts. A mask is opened for this purpose: Select:
"Multi-copy processing": Delete parts of a multi-copy processing section. If several multi-copy processing sections are
present on the sheet, identify the multi-copy processing section
you wish to delete. To do so, click on a part in the multi-copy
processing section.
"Sheet section": Delete parts on the entire sheet.
sheet.
"All": Delete all parts.

deleted.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-203
13.
Optimizing sheet processing
The processing of the complete sheet is optimized. The optimizing

concept is based on the following goals: as few tool changes as
possible, exact parts, controlled NC programs and to create short
NC programs.
Please observe the
following points
The selected cutting order of single parts can only be taken

into account if a removal operation was defined for all parts,
e.g. removal via flap/chute, removal via TRUMALIFT
SheetMaster or manual removal.
When operations are sorted, reference is always made to the

part or the contour. If operations are now copied, this
processing reference will be lost, as copying involves only
processing operations. It is therefore generally wise not to copy
processing operations!
Compulsory sequences have lost significance in the optimum
processing sequence. Operations generally no longer have to
be defined in compulsory sequences. Example: Contours which
contain a removal component are now automatically sorted etc.
Compulsory sequences which you define in the PUNCH
PROCESSING, GENERATE or LASER PROCESSING,
GENERATE menu are retained during automatic sheet
optimization. You should therefore use them specifically in
conjunction with the sheet optimization, as they compromise
the options available with the optimization processor.
5-204
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Procedure:
Optimization
Prerequisite:
A sheet processing operation is defined.
Function OPTIMIZE SHEET,

AUTOMATIC, CALCULATE,
START
Function OPTIMIZE SHEET,

MANUAL, START
Optimize sheet automatically.

The options are offered as index cards. You can choose between:
Index card "Grid" Sheet processing with grid processing
Index card "Row by row": Row by row processing of parts on
the sheet within a multiple-copy function
"Flexible" index card Arranging sheet processing flexibly
Optimize sheet manually. The following control functions for doing

this are available:
S354E52.DOC
REARRANGE: Rearrange processing operations on the basis

of the corresponding tools.
INTERACTIVE: Define sheet optimization manually using
individual functions.
SIMULATION: Simulate sheet processing on the screen.
DRAWING TOOLS: Create help geometries and use
TECHNOLOGY module
5-205
Setting the general conditions

Whenever an index card is selected, a mask will appear allowing
you to define the general conditions for the processing sequence.
Each index card has the same structure. Three areas allow you to
define the following:
Separation sequence of parts on the sheet: serpentine form,

row by row, column by column etc.
The part cutting sequences are displayed in graphic form, and
can be selected by clicking with the mouse.
Serpentine: The separation sequence of the parts reverses

at the end of every row.
Fig. 4424
Row by row: Process all parts in a row.
Fig. 4425
Column by column: Process all parts in a column.
Fig. 4417
5-206
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Function buttons in the

mask for the index cards
Cutting strategies for parts (only for index cards ROW BY

ROW and FLEXIBLE): Separating parts part by part or row by
row, process complete rows or optimized to tool change.
Parameters for NC program: Create short or a fast NC
program.
Function buttonCANCEL
The process is terminated.
Function button CONTINUE
A sub-mask is displayed in which you can accept the suggested
tool sequence as a system proposal or edit them.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-207
Optimizing sheet processing as grid

processing
Index card "Grid"
For grid production, you can set:
"Direction": Select cutting sequence of parts on the sheet

(as seen from: behind the machine.
Serpentine form front left to back right (default setting)
Serpentine form from back right to front left
The serpentine processing direction can be altered via the
MODIFY button.
Standard procedure dictates separation part by part. Select the

"Process parts completely" strategy if every part is to be processed completely and removed.
These settings effect all tools which are presently used.

"Parameter":
"Short program": The optimizer searches for repeating
processing patterns within a part and generates a proposal
for possible subroutines based on them. The starting
corner is positioned within a part. Result generation of a
short NC program.
"Fast NC program": The sequence of sheet operations is
sorted according to time over the entire sheet. The starting
corner is positioned within the sheet. Result generation of
a fast NC program which is generally not "short".
If a multiple tool-change is present after a tool-optimized

sorting of the operations, then the actual sequence of tools
will be issued as a report list.
5-208
Function button CONTINUE The tool sequence for operation is

listed. You can now sort or rearrange the tools.
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Optimizing row by row sheet processing

Index card "Row by row":
You can set the following for row by row processing of a multi-copy
processing section on the sheet:
"Direction": Select cutting sequence for parts on the sheet (as

seen from behind the machine).
Serpentine form from front left to back right (standard
setting) and serpentine form front right to back left.
Row by row: each row from left to right or vice-versa and
from top to bottom
Column by column: each column from top to bottom and
from left to right
The separation sequence can be changed with the
MODIFY function button.
"Strategy": Define cutting strategy.

How are the parts to be separated from the sheet?
"Separating part by part": The part is completely cut out
and then removed.
"Separating row by row": Processing of outside contour,
which contains removal, is carried out in rows. The other
outside contour elements are processed within a row
according to optimum time plan.
If the parts are to be cut out in multiple copies with an open
flap, this cutting strategy must be selected for single parts.
How should the sheet be processed?
Optimized tool-change: The tools are employed in a
sequence which ensures that (where possible) only 1 toolchange takes place per tool.
If a multiple tool-change is present after a tool-optimized
sorting of the operations, then the actual sequence of tools
will be issued as a report list.
S354E52.DOC
Complete rows: Each row is processed to completion with

all tools.
TECHNOLOGY module
5-209
Combination of the processing strategies is possible.

Example: "Cut row by row" and "Opt. tool change"
1. Processing of the parts is such that (where possible) only 1
tool-change takes place per tool. The parts are, however,
cut out and removed in rows.
2. "Separating part by part", "Rows completely".
In this example, rows are processed completely with all
tools; only the separation of parts takes place within these
rows. This requires multiple change of tools.
"Parameter": What sort of NC program is to be generated?

"Short program": The optimizer searches for repeating processing patterns within a part and generates a proposal for
possible subroutines from them. The starting corner is
positioned within a part. Result generation of a short NC
program.
corner is positioned within the sheet. Result generation of
These settings effect all tools which are used.
Function button CONTINUE The tool sequence for operation is

listed. You can now sort or rearrange the tools.
5-210
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Arranging flexible sheet processing

"Flexible" index card
This optimization option can be used for sheets with and without
multiple-copy areas. It is also independent of whether a nested
sheet was created using the RECTANGULAR nesting processor or
the free geometry processor.
This "flexible optimization option" also allows

interactive correction of the parts sequence and
interactive specification of parts groups.
(What are part groups? See: description in the following
pages "Defining part groups")
Specify:
"Strategy": Specify cutting strategy.

"Separating part by part": The part is completely separated
and then removed.
"Separating row by row": Processing of outside contour,
which contains removal, is carried out in rows. The other
outside contour elements are processed within a row
according to optimum time plan.
"Slitting tool part by part": yes or no?
Should processing of the inner contours with the slitting
tool be done immediately before separation of the part with
the slitting tool?
This function can only be selected in combination with "Cut
part by part".
S354E52.DOC
"Direction": Select cutting sequence of parts on the sheet (as

seen from behind the machine).
Serpentine from front left to back right (default setting)
Serpentine from back right to front left
The separation sequence can be changed with the MODIFY
function button.
"Parameter": What sort of NC program is to be generated?

"Short program": The optimizer searches for repeating
processing patterns within a part and generates a proposal
for possible subroutines from them. The starting corner is
positioned within a part. Result: generation of a short NC
program.
corner is positioned within the sheet. Result: generation of
TECHNOLOGY module
5-211
Function CONTINUE
Press CONTINUE to confirm your settings.

The "Tool sequence" sub-mask is divided into two areas:
The upper mask area lists the tool sequence which is
applied to the entire sheet.
The lower area lists the tools which are optimized only
within the existing part group.
OK function:
Confirm your settings with OK. Follow the instructions in the

command line:
A suggestion appears for the processing sequence:
Red part geometry: single part within a part group.
Yellow part geometry: last part within a part group.
Yellow arrow: processing direction.
Correct part sequence or confirm with OK.
Part groups can now be defined based on the parts sequence.
Confirm the process with OK.
If an optimization process is repeated, the sheet display

described above will only appear if you answer NO to the
"Retain parts sequence?" prompt. If you answer YES, the
process is carried out immediately and the parts sequence is
not altered.
5-212
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Defining part groups

Definition:
A part group is a group of parts on a sheet. You can define one or

several part groups on one sheet.
A part group is defined by using the mouse to identify the last part
of the group. The first part to the second-to-the-last part of a part
group is displayed in red. The last part is marked yellow (=end of
the part group).
If there is only one part group on a sheet, the last part does not
have to be marked.
Application:
As with the "Row by row" optimization option, where complete rows

can be processed, parts can be grouped together with this
function. The first stage of sorting operations involves the processing of all parts in one group, before the next group is begun.
This processing sequence requires additional tool changes.
Process-secure processing and precisely cut parts are the results
of part groups.
Example:
1
2
Single part: red marking, start of

the part group and all other parts
Processing direction: yellow arrow
Single part: yellow marking, end of

the part group
Part group with serpentine processing
S354E52.DOC
Fig. 15451
TECHNOLOGY module
5-213
Defining a sample part

A sample part was until now identified and defined by clicking on
the corresponding single part.
"Flexible" index card
With this version and higher, you can only define a sample part
after selecting the FLEXIBLE optimization option.
Procedure:
Answer NO to the "Retain parts sequence?" prompt.
Define a part as part group: Pick the first part on the sheet. The
part is shown in yellow. You have now defined a part group
comprising one single part (=sample part). The next (i.e. the
second) part group now contains the remaining parts.
5-214
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
13.1 Automatic sheet optimization

In the menu for sheet optimization, the following functions for
automatic sheet optimization are available to you:
SIMULATION: Simulate processing sequence of complete

sheet processing.
Automatic calculation of
sheet optimization.
CALCULATE: Automatic calculation of sheet optimization.
DRAWING TOOLS: Individual functions with which you can

generate or measure construction lines, construction circles.
Procedure:
Control function CALCULATE is selected.

Select the START function.
The options are offered as index cards. You can choose between:
Index card "Grid" Sheet processing with grid processing.
Index card "Row by row": Row by row processing of parts
on the sheet within a multiple-copy function.
"Flexible" index card: Arranging sheet processing flexibly.
After selecting the CONTINUE function button the tool
sequence will be displayed.
The function buttons in the mask for "Tool sequence" are:
Function SORT: Sort tool sequence.
Function REARRANGE, BEFORE A tool is placed in front of

another.
1. Step: Press function button.
2. Step: Select tool which is to be rearranged.
3. Step: Identify tool which the selected tool is to be placed in
front of.
S354E52.DOC
OK function: You accept the suggested tool sequence.

Optimization process will be started.
Function REARRANGE, AFTER A tool is placed behind

another.
1. Step: Press function button:
3. Step: Identify tool which the selected tool is to be placed
behind.
TECHNOLOGY module
5-215
TECH PARAMETERS function: (TECHNOLOGY PARAMETERS function): Defining technical parameters for the selected
tool.
"Softpunch": Activate or deactivate? If yes, which level?
"Tool change type": Which type of sheet is being processed: Normal sheet, uneven sheet or formed sheet?
"Punching head position": Which working position should
the punching head go to for this tool: normal working
position, forming position, fast forming position, variable
forming position?
CANCEL function: The procedure is aborted.
Function OPTIMIZATION PARAMETERS

In the following screen, you can specify optimization parameters
especially for the selected tool:
"Tool": The selected tool is displayed.
"Small NC program": Operations with the selected tool are
only time-optimized within the part limits. All identical parts
are processed in the same way. Subroutines are then
created when generating the NC program.
"Fast NC program": Processing with this tool is optimized
so that processing is time-optimized. Part limits are
ignored.
"Consider part sequence:": Should the suggested part

sequence be retained for this tool or not?
"Start corner": If the optimization process for this tool begin
at a certain corner, then select starting corner
or
If the starting corner, with the tool change position taken
into account, be automatically defined by the system, then
select "Optimum tool change".
Example: With tools which are introduced from a tool change
wheel or if Multitool tools are employed, it may be wise not to
define a fixed setting for the starting corner for a tool. In this
case, the system can define the starting corner itself, and thus
minimize the approach distances of the tool change positions
to the next operation.
Selecting a start corner excludes the "Optimized tool change"
option.
5-216
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
13.2 Manual sheet optimization

In the menu for sheet optimization, the following functions for
manual sheet optimization are available to you:
INTERACTIVE: Change sheet optimization manually.
SIMULATION: Simulate processing sequence of complete

sheet processing.
Rearrange tool sequence
REARRANGE: Place a processing operation at the beginning

or end, or before or after a particular operation.
DRAWING TOOLS: Single functions with which you can

generate or measure construction lines, construction circles.
Function REARRANGE, BEGINNING

Set processing operation at the beginning of sheet processing.
Function REARRANGE, END
Set operation to the end of sheet processing.
Function REARRANGE, BEFORE
Set processing operation in front of another.
1. Step: Select processing operation which is to be rearranged.
2. Step: Select processing operation which will have the selected
operation placed in front of it.
Function REARRANGE, AFTER
Set processing operation after another.
1. Step: Select processing operation which is to be rearranged.
2. Step: Select processing operation which will have the selected
operation placed behind it.
Interactive sheet
optimization
Function INTERACTIVE, START

The operation is sorted interactively for all tools.
All used tools will be listed here in an index card. You can confirm
the tool sequence or modify it if necessary.
Then the processing operation will be shown with the first tool
(yellow operation).
The function buttons in the mask for "Tool sequence" are:
S354E52.DOC
OK function: You accept the suggested tool sequence. Optimization process will be started.
Function SORT: Sort tool sequence.
TECHNOLOGY module
5-217
Function REARRANGE, AFTER A tool is placed behind

another.
1. Step: Press function button:
3. Step: Identify tool which the selected tool is to be placed
behind.
TECH
PARAMETERS
function:
(TECHNOLOGY
PARAMETERS function): Define technical parameters for the
selected tool.
"Softpunch": Activate or deactivate? If yes, which level?
"Tool change type": Which type of sheet is being
processed: Normal sheet, uneven sheet or formed sheet?
"Punching head position": Which working position should
the punching head go to for this tool: normal working
position, forming position, fast forming position, variable
forming position?
Options for interactive

sorting of tools
Function REARRANGE, BEFORE: A tool is placed in front of

another.
1. Step: Press function button.
3. Step: Identify tool which the selected tool is to be placed in
front of.
CANCEL function: The procedure is aborted.
Function INTERACTIVE, OPTIONS

Because a specific tooling must be selected, sorting is carried out
selectively.
You can choose between:
all tools
active tool
SELECTION: Tools used
Tool for the operation picked.
First of all, the processing operation of your choice will be shown
on the sheet (yellow operation).
Please note: The tool which you have allocated the removal
to must always be at the end. Processing operations which
you have set in compulsory sequences are retained.
5-218
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Other functions for

INTERACTIVE
The following functions are available for interactive modification of

the processing sequence:
Function INTERACTIVE, DISTANCE OPT.: Processing with

the selected tools should be carried out distance-optimized.
function INTERACTIVE, NEXT TOOL: With this function, the

next tool and the operation sequence connected to it will be
displayed.
Function INTERACTIVE, INVERT: The processing direction of

individual, linear nibbling paths are inverted for interactive
sorting.
Processing: display on the screen

Color/symbol
Display
Operation
Red processing Starting point of the first

processing operation carried out
by the particular tool.
Pick with mouse pointer:

identification as erroneous
operation.
Yellow
processing
Processing operation which have Pick with mouse pointer:

already been sorted.
identification as erroneous
operation.
Blue
processing
Processing operation which must Pick with mouse pointer:

yet be sorted.
Definite a new sequence.
White cursor
pointer
End point of the processing

operation; mouse pointer is
caught on rubber band.
If an erroneous operation is
identified, then the cursor
pointer will jump to the
identified position.
Procedure:
Functions
1st step:
Steps:
Start interactive sheet optimization:
Select function INTERACTIVE, START

or
function INTERACTIVE, OPTIONS.
After confirming the tool sequence by pressing OK, the processing

operations with the first tool or selected tool will be shown on the
sheet.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-219
2nd step:
Interactive sorting of the processing operations based on the

functions
Sort tools interactively
DISTANCE OPT: distance-optimized

NEXT TOOL: next tool
INVERT: invert
Select function NEXT TOOL: operation with the next tool will be
shown.
If the current processing operation sequence is correct, then the
next processing operation sequence can be shown. Pick the operation (marked in red or yellow) from where the sequence should
be modified. The mouse pointer jumps to the selected operation.
The operation sequence situated in front of that is retained and
will continue to shown in yellow. The operations whose sequence
is to be modified are marked in blue.
You can sort these operations (blue color) as follows:
Pick the operations one by one.

With the DISTANCE OPT function, sort all remaining
operations.
Place those operations to be sorted in a box. All operations
marked in this way are shown in magenta. Select the
DISTANCE OPT function: Only the available operations in the
box will be sorted.
Important: The first point of the box also serves as the starting
point for the path optimization procedure.
If separation processing operations are sorted using the
function INTERACTIVE, DISTANCE OPT,the cutting out
operations is sorted based on the processing direction
which was active during the automatic run-through.
If the present operation is correct, then a change can be made

to the next tool. Select the NEXT TOOL function.
This procedure can be repeated for the next processing

sequence.
Function INVERT
5-220
You must select this function if you want to selectively invert the
processing direction of individual, linear nibbling paths.
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
14.
Simulating sheet processing
Sheet processing can be executed with varying speed when

supported with processing simulation and, in this way, check tested
exactly.
Procedure:
Activate SIMULATION control function.
To set the "Speed": click on the beam in the slide bar and push
it in the required direction. Push to the right: simulation speed
will be reduced. Push to the left: speed will be increased.
START: Start simulation. The screen contents will be deleted
and the simulation begins from the very start at the speed you
have set. You can vary the speed during the simulation.
STOP: Stop simulation.
CONTINUE: Continue execution of simulation.
Step: Let simulation run step by step.
Examples of useful combinations:
STEP BY STEP, CONTINUE functions: The processing operations, positioning movements etc. are displayed step by step.
In doing so, you have to click on the function button STEP BY
STEP for each step. Stop the simulation at the desired position
and then continue the process automatically.
or
START, STEP BY STEP, CONTINUE functions: Execute the

simulation automatically until the desired processing operation
is reached, then change to the incremental mode. Continue the
execution of the automatic processing operation after the
appropriate position has been reached.
CANCEL function: The simulation process is canceled using

this function.
Displaying tool change
Menu function TOOL CHANGE, DISPLAY

The number of tool changes per tool is shown in the form of
message list in the simulation.

function
The menu functions for the control function DRAWING TOOLS are
described in the module DRAWING see: "Generate construction
geometry".
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-221
15.
Generating NC program
The NC program can be generated on completion of sheet optimization.

NC program
The menu for NC PROGRAM contains the following control

functions:
GENERATE: Generate the NC program.
PALLETIZING: When unloading with automation components,
specify placement of the parts on pallets. See: description
in separate chapter.
SIMULATION: Simulate NC program (execution).
DRAWING TOOLS: Create help geometries and use
Generating NC program automatically

Function GENERATE,
START
After modifying sheet processing or sheet layout you must first

carry out sheet optimization once more and then generate a new
NC program.
After selecting the START function you will be offered index cards
in which you will be able to select required settings before going on
to create the NC program.
5-222
TECHNOLOGY module
"Settings" index card: general settings for defining NC program

issue; e.g. name of NC program and program number.
"Parameters" index card: general parameters like clamp
monitoring, defining NC program with block numbering etc.
"Subroutine technique" index card: defining settings for the
issue of an NC program with subroutines.
"Setup plan" index card: Which details should the setup plan
include: production instructions, single part information, etc.?
S354E52.DOC
General settings for the NC

program
"Settings" index card

General settings which affect the generating of an NC program can
be defined in this index card:
"Name of NC program": Enter a file name. The system automatically attaches the extension LST. The whole path is shown
in the input line.
The sheet name is suggested as a program name by the
system, this name can be changed.
File name: (program name).LST
Example: sheet name 4711 becomes 4711.LST.
"Program number": Enter the number of the desired program.

This detail will be written in the NC program as "Main program
number". The system automatically prefixes a P. Example:
1098 becomes P1098.
"Subroutine numbers": Specify number for subroutine.
"Processed by": Who created this program?
"Company": For which company was this program created for?
"NC title": A title is always issued at the beginning of the NC
program. Define the title content here.
"Remark and setup plan": You can input additional information
as a remark in text form which is then issued in the setup plan.
Define parameters
S354E52.DOC
"Parameters" index card

You can define the following as parameters:
Enter number of program runs.
Should clamp positions and space between clamps be monitored?
Should the loading procedure be carried out before the end of
the program? (e.g. TC 240R, TC 260)
Should the first tool be reloaded at the end of the program?
(Only if sheets are loaded using TRUMALIFT SheetMaster).
This function enables you to end program execution in such a
way that the first tool will be reloaded. This makes sense, for
example, if the last tool used was a forming tool.
Should the NC blocks be issued with block numbering during
NC output?
Should sheet layout be prepared on the machine? (Only for
machines with BOSCH CC200/CC300 control system).
See the following chapter: "Flexible sheet layout directly on
the machine".
Should the technology data also be transferred using this NC
program?
Should the push-out subroutine also be transferred using this
NC program?
Should the subprogram for sheet layout also be transferred?
TECHNOLOGY module
5-223
Define details for

application of the
subroutine technique
"Subroutine technique" index card

Subroutine technique means: Certain execution sequences which
repeat themselves within sheet processing are written into a
separate program (=subroutine). The subroutine can be started
multiple times within the main program.
Define the following basic conditions here:
Which strategy should be used for NC generation?
"Part-oriented": The NC program will be generated partoriented. This means that the system searches for the
equivalent processing sequences in a multi-copy processing
section. These same processing sequences are then set
into subroutines according to the defined rules.
"Compulsory sequence": Processing operations in
compulsory sequences are generated in subroutines.
These specifications are evaluated if the subroutine "Part-oriented"
is generated.
Vaporize with the laser
Setup plan
5-224
Minimum number of processing operations for a subroutine?

Define minimum number of processing operations for a subroutine.
What is the minimum number of subroutine call-ups in a main
program? Input the minimum number of call-ups for one
subroutine.
"Laser table" index card

You specify how vaporization is to be done using this index card:
"No": This option is deselected.
"Sheet by sheet": Carry out vaporization sheet by sheet.
"Part by part". Vaporize the film part by part.
"Setup plan" index card

The setup plan is stored by the system as a file. The file name
corresponds to the sheet name which you have entered in the
mask for generating the NC program:
File name: (Sheet name).EIN
Example: 4711 becomes 4711.LST.
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Mark the information which should be included in the setup plan

with a cross:
"General data": includes, amongst other things, machine,
control system, program numbers, sheet name with path
details, size of sheet or initial blank with weight, processing
time and memory space requirement.
"Production instructions": clamp positions, stop pin, starting
point.
"Tool data": tool list with used tools.
"Single part information": parts number, drawing number and
name, amount of parts, weight, file name with path details.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-225
Flexible sheet layout directly on the machine

In practice, it is very common that individual parts must be laid out
on a sheet directly on the machine.
In ToPs the fabrication of individual parts is realized by preparing
for sheet layout on the machine.
Why lay out sheets on the
machine?
Sheet layout directly on the machine can be necessary for different

reasons:
Prototype or individual
part?
Fabricating an individual part directly on the control system

without having to call up the program for optimized sheet
processing (with prototype).
Flexible fabrication of consistently recurring parts.
Maximizing use of the sheet: Use the areas of incompletely
covered sheets
or
assign residual sheets on the machine.
ToPs 300 offers the possibility to fabricate a prototype or an individual part for sheet layout directly on the machine.
Prerequisite:
Machines with a Bosch CC200, CC220, CC300 control system
(See overview: "Preparing sheet layout on the machine" in this
chapter).
The individual part for the sheet layout does not replace the
prototype.
When programming in ToPs, you can choose a prototype from
inside the laid out sheet as well as prepare an individual part for
sheet layout. A separate NC program will be given for the chosen
individual part.
The difference is in the production sequence:
In ToPs, the prototypes on a nested or laid out sheet are produced
first. The remaining sheet is optimally processed.
With an individual part for sheet layout, the programming system
generates a separate NC program for each individual part.
These NC programs will be attached to the main program
(complete sheet processing). The NC text for the individual part
can be called up on the control system independent of the
complete optimized sheet processing.
5-226
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
With the help of a CPL dialogue program, the control system gives
the operator the required parameters for the desired sheet layout.
A graphic display is available for control.
When using individual part fabrication, the sheet layout can be
completely executed without attention to additional tool changes for
the processing of a prototype. The pieces can simply be laid out on
a sheet and produced. The necessary CPL program is included
with the ToPs 300 package.
Background:
Programs created with ToPs 300 are sheet-oriented. Tooling work
is summarized for the entire table and optimized for time. This form
of optimization occurs for all pieces on the sheet. The result is that
the processing of an individual piece is no longer recognized in the
generated NC program for a complete sheet.
On the control system, it is not possible within the NC text to
discard the processing of an individual part from the entire NC
program.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-227
Programming in ToPs
An individual part must be completely fabricated in individual
part mode (geometry and removal). With the preparation of
individual parts for sheet layout, the control system will not
consider processing that is completed in sheet mode.
Procedure
DATA module
Step 1: Define machine configuration (allow or forbid individual

part fabrication for the NC version).
Choose in the following order:
DATA module
MACHINES, DATA,
BASIC MACHINE, DATA3
"Prepare sheet layout on the machine", function button:
YES/NO.
Save changes with the MODIFY function button.
Example - TC 500R: Preparing sheet layout on the machine
Fig. 20474
The entries and switch settings in the mask are the standard
settings.
Make modifications only when your configuration differs from the
standard settings.
5-228
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Overview: "Preparing sheet layout on the machine"; individual part

fabrication
Machine
Control system
DATA module, MACHINE

PARAMETERS, BASIC MACHINE,
DATA3
(Machine software)
Comment
"Prepare sheet layout on the

machine", function button
TC 120R
Bosch CC 220
YES
TC 160R
Bosch CC 220
YES
TC 190R
Bosch CC 220
YES
TC 200R
Bosch CC 220
YES
TC 180 K/W
Bosch M5TC
NO
TC 180.2 K/W
Bosch M5TC
NO
TC180 K/W
Fanuc 6MB
NO
TC180 K/W
Sinumerik 8N
NO
TC 235
Bosch CC 200
NO
TC 235
Sinumerik 3 N
NO
TC 240
Bosch CC 200 (T19)
(YES)
Multitool not supported
TC 240
Bosch CC 200 (>= T21)
(YES)
TC 240L
(YES)
TC 240L
Bosch CC 200 (>= T23)
(YES)
TC 240R
Bosch CC 300
(YES)
TC 260
(YES)
TC 260
Bosch CC 300 (>= T23)
(YES)
TC 260L
(YES)
TC 260L
Bosch CC 300 (>= T23)
(YES)
TC 500R
Bosch CC 220
YES
TC 600L
Sinumerik 840 D
NO:
TC 2000 R
Bosch type 3
NO:
S354E52.DOC
(YES) = Limited functionality with these control system versions.

It is not possible to request information about the working
range and the clamp dead range on the machine.
Multitools are not supported from version T23.418 control
systems.
TECHNOLOGY module
5-229
TECHNOLOGY module
Step 2: Prepare individual parts for sheet layout on the machine.

Generate a separate NC text for an individual part in the
TECHNOLOGY module. This occurs in the realm of NC creation
for the complete sheet.
Preparing sheet layout on the machine
Fig. 20475
Choose in the following order:

TECHNOLOGY MODULE
NC PROGRAM
GENERATE
START
PARAMETER
Click on "Prepare sheet layout on the machine"
Note:
The setting is not stored and must therefore be reset each
time NC is activated.
Click on "Transfer sheet layout subroutine"
With this selection, the CPL dialogue program "P9994" is
attached to the NC program for sheet layout. When
transferring the processing program, this CPL dialogue
program will also be transferred.
(This CPL dialogue program must be transferred only for
the first NC program. It can be stored and overwriteprotected in the control system).
5-230
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
S354E52.DOC
OK
Comment in the command lines: "Mark individual part for sheet
layout or OK".
Mark one or more individual parts on the sheet layout. The
selected individual parts will be displayed in magenta. Remarking a part reverses the selection.
OK
NC text is created
TECHNOLOGY module
5-231
NC program
The NC text for the individual parts is attached to the optimized
program for the sheet layout. All processing of individual parts will
be delivered in the same sequence as occurs in the optimized
sheet layout. As a standard, the individual part will be laid out onto
the smallest possible sheet. To this extent, the edges and webs of
the multi-copy processing area will be used. If the individual part is
not located in the multi-copy processing area, standard values will
be given. The loading position will always be set to 0. Clamp
positions will be given as with the optimized sheet program.
Building an NC text
The generated NC text is presented as follows:
0. Subroutines for the optimized sheet (if applicable).
1. Main program for processing the optimized sheet.
2. CPL program for 1st individual part,
CPL program for 2nd individual part,
etc.
3. CPL dialogue program P9994 for sheet layout with subroutine
numbers starting with 99 on the machine. This CPL dialogue
program must be transferred only for the first NC program.
The CPL programs for the individual parts (2) are independent programs. They are numbered like the subroutines (0) of
the optimized sheet program. In this way the CPL programs,
like the subroutines, can be deleted together with the main
program.
5-232
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Example of an NC program
A clarification of the NC text is found in the left column.
...
NC Main program:
beginning
Processing of parts,
optimized for time over the
entire sheet
Calling up the "individual
part" subroutine at the end
of the main program (used
to delete the subroutine
together with the main
program)
NC Main program: end
Beginning of program for
processing 1st individual
part
First block: Values for

sheet layout
Second block: Values for

the CPL dialogue program
Calling up the dialogue

program as a subroutine
S354E52.DOC
%
(DFS,P1998,TOPS300)
10#MACHTYP$="500/91T"
N10(*MSG,MAIN PROGRAMME NUMBER,P1998)
...
N310X779.28Y814.64C45M25
N320X1209.95Y736.57C-45
...
N330G24L998.1
N340Q990001998
N350Q980001998
N998.1(*MSG,JUMP FLAG)
....
N410G07
N420M02
(DFS,P990001998,SAMPLE TOPS300)
10#MACHTYP$="500/91T"
N20(V:3.00#B:171.0#D:19981217#P:TOPS300_EXE)
N30(V:3.7#B:51#D:981221104305#P:TOPS300_ACCESS20)
N40(*MSG,SINGLE PART FOR SHEET LAYOUT: 000
C:\TRUMPF\TEILE\LOCH2.GEO)
1 .START1
N90(PARAMETERS FOR SHEET LAYOUT)
1 #A54LPX=0
1 #A54EZX=20.00
1 #A54EZY=117.00
1 #A54PSX=525.00
1 #A54PSY=425.00
...
N100(---------------)
1 #A54SSX=540.00
1 #A54SSY=537.00
1 #A54PDX=500.00
1 #A54PDY=400.00
...
1 .START2
N110M09
N120Q9994
TECHNOLOGY module
5-233
Normal start of individual

part machining
Flexible loading position
Tool change
...
1 .START3
N130G92
N140F108.17
N150G01M20
...
N200G56X[#A54LPX+(680)]Y140.01
N210(*MSG,ZERO POINT 0 0)
N220(*MSG,LOAD SHEET )
N230M61
N270(*MSG,TOOL ID NO:4500050)
N280(*MSG,WZG RECTANGLE,X=50.00,Y=5.00)
N290T1[4,50.00,5.00]
N300M6[0,1]
...
Grinding for sheet layout

process according to
chosen parameters
1 FOR I%=#A54SNY% TO #A54NPY%

1 IF I%>#A54SNY% THEN K%=1
ELSE K%=#A54SNX%
ENDIF
1 IF I%<#A54NPY% THEN L%=#A54NPX% ELSE
L%=#A54ENX% ENDIF
1 FOR J%=K% TO L%
Zero point correction on a

specific part of the layout
N320G92
N330G92X[(CPOS(1)-(#A54LPX+#A54EZX+#A54PSX*(J%-1)))]
N340G92Y[(CPOS(2)-(#A54EZY-#A54PSY*(I%-1)))]
Processing the individual

part
(Coordinating relative to
the part zero point)
N350X262.48Y238.9C45M25
...
Deactivating all processes
End of grinding
Possibility of finishing
several sheets with this
individual part.
5-234
N360M20
N370C0
...
1 NEXT: NEXT
N380G92
...
1 DLG
1 T%=0
1 SFK(T%,"END", ,"NEW&LAYOUT","CHANGE&LAYOUT",
"SAME&LAYOUT")
...
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Program end
Beginning of program for

processing 2nd individual
part
CPL dialogue program

P9994
End of file *.LST
1 .ENDE
N440C0
N450G56X[#A54LPX+(680)]Y140.01
N460M51
N470M0
N480G07
N490M02
(DFS,P980001998,SAMPLE TOPS300)
10#MACHTYP$="500/91T"
N20(V:3.00#B:171.0#D:19981217#P:TOPS300_EXE)
N30(V:3.7#B:51#D:981221104305#P:TOPS300_ACCESS20)
N40(*MSG,SINGLE PART FOR SHEET LAYOUT: 090
C:\TRUMPF\TEILE\LOCH2.GEO)
...
(Continuation based on 1st individual part)
(DFS,P9994,DIALOG)
N10(SUBROUTINE NUMBER,P9994)
N20(*MSG,PARAMETERS FOR SHEET LAYOUT,P9994)
...
M02
The subroutine numbers assigned to the individual parts begin with

the maximum allowable number (P99...) and are counted
backwards (P98..., P97..., P96... etc.).
Example:
Maximum subroutine number: "P990001998" = 1st individual part
subroutine.
Further subroutine numbers: "P980001998" = 2nd individual part
subroutine, "P970001998 = 3rd individual part subroutine.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-235
Setup plan
In the setup schedule you can check to see whether the individual
parts for sheet layout have been defined on the machine or not.
a, b
5-236
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
You can gather the following information:

a: Machining time: This detail contains only the processing time for
the optimized sheet.
b: Required memory: Full size of *.LST file; in this detail are included the main program and subroutines for optimized sheet
layout, programs for individual parts and the dialogue program
(as long as its included in the LST file).
c: Individual part for sheet layout: Here you will find details about
the angular position of the individual part on the sheet and the
program number of the subroutine for individual part machining.
Example: Individual part for sheet layout:
000 990001998
000 = angular position 0, 990001998 = subroutine number for
the processing of the 1st individual part under the angular
position of 0.
090 980001998
090 = angular position 90, 98000198 = subroutine number for
the processing of the 2nd individual part under the angular
position of 90.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-237
Operating the machine

With ToPs 300 it is possible on the machine to simply and quickly
create a sheet layout with prepared individual parts.
Operation of the control system is driven by menus and supported
by graphics.
Prerequisites
Your machine must have a BOSCH control system (CC200,

CC220, CC300) with CPL program extension.
In case your machine has no linear magazine, it is recommended to undertake a simple test program with one individual part. That way it is possible to determine whether your
machine can reset the corresponding CPL program.
5-238
An NC program must be accessible that includes the individual

part program for the sheet layout. It is possible to create such
programs with ToPs 300.
For the machine operator, this is clearly identified in the NC
program "(DFS, P.....,Muster...)" and in the settings plan (last
line: 000 99...).
The CPL dialogue program "P9994" must be accessible by the
control system. With the first NC program transfer from
ToPs 300 to the machine, this CPL program must also be
transferred.
(Recommendation: Set the CPL program in the control system
to "READ ONLY").
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Procedure
Step 1:
Call up the individual part program (e.g. 990001998 Sample

ToPs 300).
To lay out a sheet with an individual part directly on the machine,
call up the NC program for the individual part. Inside this program,
the CPL dialogue program will be called up as a subroutine:
The sheet layout (a single part on the smallest sheet necessary) is
displayed graphically on the screen. The clamps are shown at the
bottom of the display (as in ToPs, upon closer examination they
are situated behind the machine). Additionally, a menu bar with
function keys (softkeys) is available.
Step 2
Modify sheet layout values.

Details for the sheet layout can be modified.
The following functions are available in the menu bar:
Lay out sheet
Change loading position
Special functions
After each function, the graphic will be updated. Before you select
this function, double-check the graphic display on the screen!
Step 3
Start sheet processing.

From the menu bar, select the function button
Start program.
Function button
"Program start"
The dialogue program ends and the process proceeds according to

the currently set values.
If there are no modifications to make (only a prototype), you

can immediately start individual part machining. With this
procedure, Step 2 is skipped.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-239
Machine functions
Functions on the control panel:
+/-
*
_
ENTER
Control panel: Select function
Function button
Lay out sheet
EINLEGEPOS SONDER
PROGRAMM
AENDERN
FUNKTIONEN START
TAFEL
BELEGEN
_
_
Fig. 11770
With this function, you can:

Enter dimensions of the sheet to be used,
Modify edges and webs.
The maximum possible sheet layout is then calculated and
displayed on the screen.
When inquiring about the desired number of parts in the X and Y
directions, the current and maximum number is displayed. You can
confirm these values with the <ENTER> button or overwrite with
new values. Modifications will be immediately reflected by the
graphic on the screen.
Function button
5-240
First, directly enter the approximate loading position as a value in

millimeters. The loading position may be modified in increments of
+/- 10 or +/- 100 mm until the sheet has been properly situated into
the clamps. Each correction is immediately displayed on the
screen.
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Function button
Special functions
Intentionally leave out individual parts.

In case an individual part program should be implemented
repeatedly on the same sheet, it can make sense in further
processing to leave out the already finished first individual part. It
can be determined which row (of the supposed layout) and which
number with which to begin in this row.
If an exact number of parts is to be made, it is also possible to
leave parts out of the last row.
Notes on clamps
Clamp positions are not adjustable here because they must

already have been adjusted when starting the individual part
program (in the linear magazine under "Release clamps" for
machines with clamps).
These values are necessary here only for the graphic, to

facilitate your determination of the best loading position.
Available individual part and dialogue programs are coordinated especially for the type of clamp on the machine.
Clamps in the linear magazine:

The control systems on these machines allow an instant query of
clamp positions. To this extent, the clamps are always shown in
the positions where they are currently located.
Translation clamps:
Here the clamps are shown in the position where the optimizing
sheet program suggests they should be. Clamps are not checked
here. Work between the clamps is not possible!
Retractable clamps:
Clamps are shown in fixed positions and play no roll in processing.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-241
Explanation of parameters in the individual part

program
The values listed here are only used for example.
First block: Parameters for
sheet layout
Parameter
Explanation
Loading position
1 #A54EZX=20.00
X-position of the original part:

lower left corner of the outlined rectangle around
the rough geometry
1 #A54EZY=117.00
Y-position of the original part:

lower left corner of the outlined rectangle around
the rough geometry
1 #A54PSX=225-00
X-distance between the parts:

#A54PDX + desired web width in X
1 #A54PSY=75.00
Y-distance between the parts:

#A54PDY + desired web width in Y
1 #A54NPX%=1
Number of parts in X
1 #A54NPY%=1
Number of parts in Y
1 #A54SNX%=1
Start part number in the starting row
1 #A54SNY%=1
Start row number
1 #A54ENX%=#A54NPX%
Number of the last part in the last row
1 #A54CPMAX%=2
Number of clamps
1 #A54CP1=350
Only with translation clamps: position in mm
1 #A54CP2=825
1 #A54CP3=1628
1 #A54CP4=2100
5-242
1 #A54LPX=0
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Second block:
Parameters for the
CPL dialogue program
Parameter
Explanation
Sheet dimension in X
1 #A54SSY=187.00
Sheet dimension in Y
1 #A54PDX=200.00
Part width in X: length of the rectangle outlined

around the rough geometry
1 #A54PDY=50.00
Part width in Y: width of the rectangle outlined

around the rough geometry
1 #A54DX=25.00
Distance from part in X: between geometries
1 #A54DY=25.00
Distance from part in Y: between geometries
1 #A54LM=20.00
Left margin
1 #A54RM=20.00
Right margin
1 #A54TM=20.00
Upper margin
1 #A54BM=20.00
S354E52.DOC
1 #A54SSX=240.00
Lower margin; above the clamp dead range
TECHNOLOGY module
5-243
What you still need to know...

This method of sheet layout directly on the machine is a simple
and quick way to arrange parts on a sheet.
Please note the following:
5-244
TECHNOLOGY module
Sheet loading can only be done manually and from the left.
Inserting from the right or loading with TRUMALIFT
SheetMaster is not supported.
Extra long sheets may not be loaded because repositioning is
not possible.
Sheet processing is essentially an exercise in minimizing the
scrap skeleton.
An individual part is always laid out on the sheet as an outlined
rectangle (around the individual part geometry). The selected
edges and webs always correspond to the outlined rectangle of
the individual part.
For each program process, a part can either be laid out on the
sheet individually or as multiple copies. Nesting an individual
part or several different individual parts is not possible.
Row-by-row execution and removal is not possible.
A tool change optimization occurs during sheet layout. The
rows are executed from top to bottom and left to right (as seen
from behind the machine).
Machines with a linear magazine: It is not possible to position
clamps with the dialogue program because the clamps are
already fully checked at the beginning. Should the clamps be in
other positions, this must first be set on the machine in an
individual part program.
Machines with transitional clamps: No clamp positions or
clearances are checked. Placing parts between clamps is not
possible.
After canceling, it is only possible to reenter the program
before a tool change.
The layout can be checked with the graphic display. Especially
in the last row, push-out movements should be controlled. The
program does not monitor the dead range. With releasable and
retractable clamps, it must be checked to see whether a
clamping edge is stuck.
S354E52.DOC
Displaying or printing NC program

Function NC PROGRAM,
DISPLAY or PRINT
The NC program executed at the machine can be displayed or

printed using these functions. The file selection mask is opened.
Choose the NC program that you want to print. The file name of
the current NC program is preset.
File name
The NC program is stored in the system as a file. The file name
corresponds to the sheet name. Example: Sheet name 4711
becomes 4711.LST.
(Sheet name).LST
The file name is always issued in the upper case in the NC
program - regardless of the type of writing in the programming system.
The structure and functions which are issued in the NC text are
described in the programming instructions for your machine.
Displaying or printing setup plan

Function SETUP PLAN,
DISPLAY or PRINT
The setup plan is displayed or printed with this function.
File name
The setup plan is stored in the system as a file. The file name
corresponds to the sheet name you defined.
(Sheet name).EIN
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-245
Checking NC program
Menu NC PROGRAM,
function SIMULATION
Sheet processing can be executed with varying speed when

supported with processing simulation and, in this way, the
processing sequence can be check tested exactly.
For a description see: "Simulating processing sequence"
Drawing tools: Generating construction

geometry
Menu NC PROGRAM,
function DRAWING TOOLS
5-246
The menu functions for the control function DRAWING TOOLS are
described in the module DRAWING see: "Generate construction
geometry".
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
16.
Function scope:
Printing screen contents
in the FILE main menu. In the pull-down menu the functions
Procedure
File

Print
Screen
The Windows printing mask appears. Select the

corresponding printer or plotter.
or
Procedure:
Print

File

window.
Start the print procedure using PRINT. The Windows printing
File

plotter

using the program "Printer. You will find this program in the
that the dip switch configuration on the plotter is compatible with
the Windows configuration for the serial interface.
operating system.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-247
17.
File
Transfer
Transfer of NC data
The TRANSFER function is contained in the main menu under

FILE.
PC TRANSFER is a TRUMPF software product which enables
1)
data transfer to the machine control system via a data line. For
detailed information, refer to the documentation for PC-TRANSFER. This should contain a basic explanation of data transfer.
Operating mode

Example:
c:\trumpf\users\mach02 (all programs for a machine, for
File format

gearwheel.LST
4711.LST
For BOSCH control systems:

The machine can only call up programs from the transfer directory
whose names correspond to the following format:
P(4711)

machine file.
1)

Not required for open control systems Sinumerik SIN840 and BOSCH Type 3.
5-248
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
Copying files

Procedure:
Moving files

appears.
"Source file name": Enter a file name with the extension LST or
program should be copied. \users\mach01\ is offered as
CANCEL.

directory.
Procedure:

appears.
"Source file name": Input a file name with the extension LST or
Confirm your selection with OK, or break off the procedure with
CANCEL.
Example:
c:\trumpf\parts\user1\gearwheel.LST
becomes
\users\mach01\P4711.LST.
S354E52.DOC
TECHNOLOGY module
5-249
18.
File
Setup sheet
Translate clamps.
Setting up sheet
This function allows you to make changes to the sheet data during
programming.
These functions are only offered in sheet mode.
Translate clamps.
Function SETUP SHEET, TRANSLATE CLAMPS
Procedure:
Select the function SETUP SHEET, TRANSLATE CLAMPS.

Follow the instructions given in the command line.
Pick the clamp you wish to offset.
Pick the slot or enter the slot number (position on the
transverse rail).
Function SETUP SHEET, LOADING POSITION
Procedure:
Select the function SETUP SHEET, LOADING POSITION. The

"Change sheet loading" mask appears.
Specify "Loading type" and "Loading side".
Specify parameters for the loading position.
Confirm the specifications with OK.
Function SETUP SHEET, SHEET DIMENSIONS
Procedure:
5-250
Select the function SETUP SHEET, SHEET DIMENSIONS.

Reenter the dimensions of the sheet in the X and Y direction
as well as the sheet thickness (Z dimension). You cannot
change the material ID numbers.
Confirm the changes with OK.
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
19.
Table comparison
Option of transferring the tool master data and laser technology

tables managed in the database of ToPs to the machine control
system without generating an NC program.
Background: This compact data transfer ensures that the same

tool and laser technology data is available to the user on the
machine as is available to you when programming with ToPs.
Procedure:
File
Requirements:
The TABLE COMPARISON function can only be selected if:
Table
comparison
In the TECHNOLOGY module, select:
S354E52.DOC
The current machine (control system) supports the table

format (e.g. SINUMERIK 840D and BOSCH Type 3 control
systems).
No sheet is loaded.
the FILE function in the main menu,

and immediately after it the function TABLE COMPARISON in
the pull-down menu.
Specify in the following mask which data should be used as
files for the table comparison:
Output of tool data:
Select: all tools or tool type?
File name: "wzg.tab" is offered as file name. You can also
enter a different name. The system automatically attaches
the extension.
Output of the laser technology tables (LTT):
Which LTT group does your machine belong to?
File name: "ltt.tab" is offered as file name. You can also
enter a different name. The system automatically attaches
the extension.
"Target directory": The target directory is displayed in this line.
You can transfer the generated files with the file name "*.tab"
to the machine control system and read them in there (as with
"*.lst" files).
TECHNOLOGY module
5-251
The tool master data and the laser technology tables are not
overwritten on the control system. Example: A table "4711"
already exists on the control system. If a laser technology
table "4711" is also transferred with the file "*.tab", the
transferred table "4711" is ignored during the comparison
and the one on the control system is retained.
5-252
TECHNOLOGY module
S354E52.DOC
1.
Database management
In the various phases of the program creation, ToPs 300 accesses

data and NC cycles stored in the integrated data base.
Stored Information
When you receive the system, the data base already contains the
essential information you need for machining mild steel (St37),
special steel (1,4301) and aluminium alloys (AlMg3) on your
TRUMPF machine. Included are:
Module
DATA
6-4
Module DATA
machine data
material data
laser tables
process rules data
NC output (NC modules)
user settings.
In the DATA module, you can supplement, modify or delete the

stored data to meet your requirements.
S354E61.DOC
Function scope
Machines
Configuration
Daten
Material
Laser
Process rules
Data
System
The main functions for the DATA module are presented next
to each other at the top of the screen. The corresponding
subfunctions become visible and can be activated after a main
function has been selected.
Record machine data.

Configuration define machine configuration.
Daten define machine data.
Record material data.
Record laser tables.
Record process rules data.

Data: Record process rules data for laser machining.
System: System process rules - password protected support function.
Punching
Punching rules data for punching technique - function which is

protected by a password.
Machine
Machine: rules data for machine - function which is protected by a

password.
NC output
Times
Customer cycles
Functions for NC output.

Times:modify processing time.
Customer cycles store self-defined NC cycles.
Cycles
Header data
S354E61.DOC
Cycles: Functions for support. Function which is protected by

password.
Header data table information which is issued in the NC program.
Function which is protected by password.
Module DATA
6-5
User
Editor
Paths
6-6
Module DATA
Define user settings.

Editor: Working with user settings.
Paths: Management and definition of computer names and paths.
S354E61.DOC
2.
Standard masks in the DATA module
Data blocks differ in size. It is not always the case that the contents
of a data block can be displayed in a mask. Two types of masks are
differentiated for large data blocks in order to record a complete
data block:
Initial masks (with the supplementary masks)
Sub-masks
The primary data of a data block are recorded with the initial masks
and the sub-masks combined with them. The entries for other data
fields are recorded in the sub-masks.
A data block is recorded in various masks:
A sub-mask is opened when

MODIFY, CREATE, COPY
and DELETE are pressed.
Supplementary mask
Initial mask
The sub-masks are called

up by activating CONTINUE.
continue
Sub-masks (overview)
return
1st sub-mask
return
2nd sub-mask
return
3rd sub-mask
return
Fig. 4867
S354E61.DOC
Module DATA
6-7
2.1
Initial masks
In the initial mask, the selection of a data block can be made where
you can initiate modifications should you desire.
Main menu bar

Mask header
Output and sort
functions for
the display
Selection window
with data blocks
Mask footer
Fig. 19560
Mask header
Sort functions
Click on a data block in the selection window. The data are

displayed in the display fields.
By using the sort functions, the data blocks in the selection window
can be reduced as exactly as required (see Basic information on
standard functions, Masks: basic functions).
Selection window
All data blocks are displayed in the selection window. Using the
search symbols (Scroll) at the right edge of the window, you can
display all data blocks (see Basic information on standard
functions, Masks: basic functions).
Mask footer
6-8
The mask header contains a title. Modifications cannot be made

directly.
The functional buttons accomodated in the mask footer are

activated by clicking them with the mouse.
Module DATA
S354E61.DOC
Function buttons of the initial mask

Function button MODIFY
Modifying data: data from the mask header can be modified.

Usually this is by means of sub-masks.
The number of data blocks in the database and in the selection
window remains the same.
Function button
CREATE
Creating data block: a completely new data block is created. As a

rule, the entries in the mask header are made with the aid of a
supplementary mask. All the other data fields remain temporarily
empty until they are also filled with the aid of sub-masks.
A new data block is added to the existing data blocks in the
database and selection window.
Function button
COPY
Copying data block: a data block already existing is copied (1:1) in

order to create a new data block with similar data.
database and selection window.
Function button
DELETE
Deleting data block: An existing data block is completely deleted.

One data block less will be included in the selection window and in
the database.
Function button
CONTINUE
Function button
OUTPUT
Output of data block: output of laser technology tables and rules.
Function button
READ IN
S354E61.DOC
Continue: calling up sub-masks
Reading in data block: read in laser technology tables from the

control system.
Module DATA
6-9
2.2
Supplementary masks
Data from the mask header is modified with the aid of the submask. The input possibilities in this mask correspond to the inputs
in the mask header of the initial mask and sub-masks.
Function buttons in sub-masks

Function button RETURN
Function button READ
Back: return to the initial mask.
Read: reading in data. The input fields are filled with settings.
Precondition: These functions can only be activated if an

unambiguous search criterion has been entered. The unambiguous
search criterion is specified in the description of individual data
storage areas.
Function buttons
MODIFY,
COPY,
DELETE,
CREATE
6-10
Module DATA
These function buttons appear regardless of which function button

you have activated in the initial mask. Select the displayed function
button and initiate the required action with it.
S354E61.DOC
Selection functions in the sub-masks

You can use the sub-mask for selecting the data blocks which are
to be copied, modified and deleted. These selection functions are
integrated in the system so that the desired operation is executed
with several data blocks consecutively. You can save yourself the
trouble of jumping back into the initial mask after every entry.
Procedure:
Functions
Steps:
1. Fill the data input windows which have a unambiguous search
criterion.
Function button
READ
Function buttons
MODIFY,
COPY,
DELETE,
Function button RETURN

Function button
CONTINUE
S354E61.DOC
2. Read in assigned data.
3. Select the function.
4. Jump back into the initial mask

5. Call up sub-masks to make more data block modifications.
Module DATA
6-11
2.3
Sub-masks
Sub-masks are called up in the initial mask by using the

CONTINUE button.
Special function buttons for calling up various sub-masks are listed
under the mask header. This kind of function button is also labelled
with a color identification in the top right corner.
Significance of the colors: red or white
Red indicates that the mask is active.
White indicates that the mask is inactive.
Function buttons in sub-masks

Function button
MODIFY
Function button
RETURN
6-12
The modifications are accepted in the data block.
Jump back into the initial mask.
Module DATA
S354E61.DOC
3.
Machines
Recording of machine data
The machine data are the basis for the creation of the NC program.
ToPs can be configured for various machines with NC interfaces.
The technical data for machine and control system are stored in the
data base. The data for programming TRUMPF machines is
entered in the database before the system is delevered to the
customer.
In the documentation for your machine (operators manual,
programming manual) you can find the data which has to be
entered. Check the stored values. When generating the NC
program, ToPs accesses this data. The NC program will not
run properly if the wrong values were entered.
Zero point of the

coordinates input
The zero point for the input of all X and Y coordinates is the center
point of the punching head, the so-called loading position.
Selecting machine
Select machine
Machines
Configuration
Machines
Data
What do you have to do?

You must select the machine before you configure the machine data.
After you have activated the MACHINES, CONFIGURATION
function, a mask is opened where all machines are displayed in a
selection window
or
Select the function combination MACHINES, DATA.
The selection window for the machines appears initially in this case
as well.
The following data are displayed in the selection mask for the
machine:
Function button
CONTINUE
S354E61.DOC
Description of the machine.

Type of machine: the machine type specifies whether the
machine is a standard type or another type. No. 1 is normally
entered.
Description of the control system.
Working range format.
Remark on the machine.
Select the desired machine. Confirm your selection by pressing
the CONTINUE function button.
Module DATA
6-13
Modifying, copying, deleting, creating

machines
Modifying, copying,
deleting, creating machine
Machines
The data for a machine can be modified, copied, deleted or a new

machine can be created as soon as the corresponding function
buttons are available in the footer of a mask. Proceed in one of the
following two ways:
Select the following in succession: MACHINES CONFIGURATION

CONTINUE switch button with color identification then the
function buttons MODIFY, COPY, DELETE and CREATE in the footer
Configuration
or
Machines
Select the following in succession: MACHINES CONFIGURATION

CONTINUE switch button with color identification then the
function buttons MODIFY, COPY, DELETE and CREATE in the footer
Data
Select the desired function button and then a machine in the

scrollbar.Execute the desired action:
Function button
MODIFY
Function button
CREATE
Create new machine.

Enter the new machine data in the input fields of the display mask.
Confirm your alterations: Select the CREATE function button.
Function button
READ or
COPY
Copy machine.
Function button
DELETE
6-14
Modify the present machine.

Enter the modified data in the input fields of the display mask.
Confirm your alterations: Select function button MODIFY.
Delete machine.
Select the DELETE function button. The displayed machine will be
deleted.
Module DATA
Execute the following steps with the aid of the display mask:
1. Read in the data block of the selected machine: select function
button READ.
2. In the input fields, enter the name, type, and the control system
for the machine to which you wish to allocate the read-in data
block.
3. Copy the data block to the selected machine: select function
button COPY.
S354E61.DOC
3.1
Machines
Configuration
Function button
DATA 1
In the submenu CONFIGURATION you can modify the configuration of your machine.
Select one of the two function buttons: DATA 1 or DATA 2.
Make the following definitions:

Which processing types can be executed by using your
machine?
PUNCHING
LASER
PUNCHING +LASER
In which way is the material to be fixed down during
repositioning?
with CYLINDER
with PRESSER FOOT
with CYL.+PRESSER.: Cylinder and presser foot
How is the material to be positioned when loading ("Stop")*)?
without stop: NONE
with PIN
Type of support*)?
TABLE
What devices does your machine have at its disposal for
automatic tool changing*)?
NONE
MAGAZINE: tool magazine
Which other kinds of processing types has your machine been
set up for?
NONE
THREAD: tapping
Can the level of lubrication be programmed?
Yes: SELECTABLE
No: NONE
Which scrap deflector is available*)?
NONE
What type of scrap box does your machine have at its
disposal*)?
NONE
*)
Modifying machine configuration
Which sorting unit is available?

NONE
TRUMASORT L/DOUBLE CART
TRUMASORT R4/S / DEFLECTOR,
TRUMASORT L + R4/S,
DEFLECTOR
These details are not evaluated by ToPs.
S354E61.DOC
Module DATA
6-15
Function button
DATA 2
6-16
Module DATA
Which measuring system does your machine have?

NONE
Is your machine equipped with a flap/chute?
YES
NO
How are the clamps mounted?
NONE there are no clamps
MOVABLE: movable standard clamps
FIXED: fixed standard clamps
RETRACTABLE: swing-back/retractable clamps.
Which devices are available for skeleton removal?
NONE (sheet skeleton removed manually)
GRIP SELECTION: Select TRUMAGRIP.
Which automation components are available for loading?
manual (=none)
Lift selection: select Lift for loading if your machine is
equipped with a TRUMALIFT SheetMaster or TRUMALIFT
SB/SE/SC.
How are sheets rotated on the machine?
MANUAL
Which automation components are available for unloading?
MANUAL (=none)
LIFT SELECTION: select Lift for part removal if your
machine is equipped with a TRUMALIFT SheetMaster or
TRUMALIFT SB/SE/SC.
S354E61.DOC
3.2
Machines
Data
Modifying machine data
In the submenu DATA you can modify the following data of your
machine:
BASIC MACHINE
STOP PIN DATA
SMALL PART REMOVAL
REPOSITIONING DATA
PUSH-OUT DATA
CLAMP DATA
FORMULAE
TOOLING SYSTEM DATA
LUBRICATING SYSTEM DATA
GRIP
UNLOADING AREA
SUCTION CUP DATA
LIFT GROUP 1 SHEETMASTER
LIFTGROUP 2 SB/SE/SC
Select a function button (switch with color identification).

Function MACHINES, DATA: Calling up sub-masks
S354E61.DOC
Module DATA
Fig. 19916
6-17
Modifying data for basic machine

BASIC MACHINE switch,
DATA 1
Switch, DATA 1
Modifying data for basic machine.
*)
Which limit values apply for the working range of your machine?
Which limit values apply for the overshoot range of your machine?
What is the maximum sheet size that may not be exceeded?
At what acceleration can your machine work? Enter the
maximum and minimum values. ToPs calculates the optimal
acceleration depending on the sheet weight.
How high is the minimum and maximum positioning speed with
which your machine can travel?
min. positioning speeds*) in X, Y and Z direction.
max. positioning speed in X, Y and Z direction.
6-18
Module DATA
S354E61.DOC
BASIC MACHINE
switch, DATA 2
Switch, DATA 2
Modifying data for basic machine
*)
What is the maximum sheet thickness that may not be

exceeded for punching?*)
What is the maximum punching capacity of your machine?
What is the maximum weight of the material allowed to be? *)
How great is the conversion factor for the sheet weight?*)
At which roughness depth does nibbling normally take place?
Load material:*)
minimum loading position in the X direction?
minimum loading position in the Y direction?
Where is the loading position for tool change next to the sheet
("Lateral t. change pos.")?*)
X coordinate
Y coordinate
Maximum diameter of the tools?
Maximum length of edge of the square tools?
Default values for the definition of roughness depth: *)
feedrate factor when nibbling with round tools?
feedrate factor when nibbling with rectangular tools?
How great is the conversion factor for punching capacity?*)
Minimum overlapping values when nibbling:
overlapping at corners?
during shape cutting?
at what feedrate?
Should the last stroke be executed automatically by the
machine for manual unloading?
YES: the last stroke will be set by the machine.
NO: last stroke will be generated by the programming
system.
Is the tool change position fixed or variable?
FIXED:
VARIABLE
Tool change before sheet panel: what is the smallest distance
the tool change position may be from the sheet edge in the Y
direction ("Y increment tool change at sheet")?
Tool change before working range: what is the smallest
distance the tool change position may be from the working
range in the Y direction ("Y increment tool change at working
range")?
Parts-related unloading table: YES/NO?
S354E61.DOC
Module DATA
6-19
BASIC MACHINE
switch, DATA 3
Switch, DATA 3
Modifying data for basic machine.
*)
"punching head" how is the ram on your machine moved?*)

MECHANICALLY
HYDRAULICALLY
Does your machine feature antiscratch machining?
Should sheet layout be prepared with single parts at the
machine?
YES: a separate NC text is created for the selected single
part for NC generation in the TECHNOLOGY module. This
NC text can then be called up at the machine (regardless of
the NC program for the complete sheet processing).
Can processing operation include Softpunch?
Is the power for presser foot programmable?
Which forming heights can be approached?
variable forming height: minimum and maximum heights:
fast forming height: maximum height
"Y reduction limit": in which area in the Y direction should
traveling take place with reduced speed?
"X reduction strip": in which strip in the X direction should
traveling take place with reduced acceleration?
"Max. reduced speed": what is the slowest speed the machine
is allowed to travel at?
"Acceleration reduced by": by what percentage should acceleration be reduced?
Is tool rotation possible?
Which processing types are supported by the control system?
tapping
slotting
marking
Can long tools be implemented on the machine?
Is rapid forming possible?
6-20
Module DATA
S354E61.DOC
BASIC MACHINE
switch, DATA 4
Switch, DATA 4
Modifying machine data for processing with Multitool tools.*).
BASIC MACHINE
switch, DATA 5
Can your machine work with Multitool tools?

YES
NO
Select Multitool type: if your machine can work with Multitool
tools, then the following definitions must be made for every
Multitool type:
how large is the diameter of the outer circle of the tool
("Diameter of hole circle")?
how large is the angle between the fitting position and the
first punch ("Start angle")?
what is the maximum material thickness that can be
processed?
for punching
for nibbling
for embossing
Switch, DATA 5
Modifying data for laser processing table format, punching
head/laser offset and ejection cylinder.
*)
Is laser table output possible?

Which laser table format should be output at the end of the NC
text?
Type 1: variables are output in lines.
Type 2: every variable is output separately in a line.
Type 3: general table format in accordance with
DIN V 4001. Type 3 must be set for the TC 600L.
X and Y offset from punching head to laser station?
At which magazine station is the dummy tool? A dummy tool is
inserted into the punching head during laser processing to
protect the tool adapter from spattering.
At which minimum Y position should the dummy tool be
exchanged?
X- and Y- offset for ejector cylinder?
Minimum and maximum acceleration in the X and Y direction?
Is the microweld process possible?
Microweld process: Separated parts are rejoined to the sheet
skeleton with small welding points.
S354E61.DOC
Module DATA
6-21
BASIC MACHINE
switch, DATA 6
Switch, DATA 6
Modifying machine data for laser machining.
BASIC MACHINE
switch, DATA 7
Can process ensue with contour control mode (rounding)?

Can process ensue with path slope?
Can process ensue with distance control?
Can process ensue with high pressure?
Can process ensue with Feed Forward?
Can process ensue with laser power control (here LLS)?
Which measuring cycle for ascertaining material thickness
should be used for piercing?
Switch, DATA 7
Modifying machine data for processing with subroutine technique.
Make the following specifications for subroutine program definition
and type of subroutine output type:
Should subroutine output take place?

Should subroutines be output together with main programs?
Should main programs and subroutines be linked for NC
output?
If yes:
Maximally how many subroutines may be linked?
Maximally how many digits can the main program number
have?
How should subroutines be output?
PART-ORIENTATED: If the NC program is to be output
part-oriented, then an automatic search is made for
identical processing sequences within multi-copy
processing. Subroutines are then generated for each of
these identical processing sequences according to the
defined rules.
COMPULSORY SEQ: present compulsory sequences are
generated as subroutines.
For part-oriented subroutine technique:

minimum number of machining operations for a subroutine?
What is the minimum number of subroutine call-ups in a main
program?
6-22
Module DATA
S354E61.DOC
BASIC MACHINE
switch, DATA 8
Switch, DATA 8
Modifying the data for machine control.
Define maximum values for NC output:
What is the highest main program number which can be given?

What is the highest subroutine number which can be given?
Which maximum limit values apply for the X, Y, I and J values?
What is the highest block number which can be given?
What is the maximum value for feedrate per stroke?
Maximally how large can the distance beween single strokes be
("subdivision of path/distance")?
Note: Information text may be added as comments to these
entries.
Define parameters for NC output:
S354E61.DOC
Are the blocks in the NC program numbered?

What is the step size for block numbering ("Block increment")?
Should the push-out subroutine be transferred to machine
control on NC output?
What is the maximum permissible number of NC characters in
an NC program?
In which directory are the NC programs normally located for
your machine ("Name of transfer path")?
Module DATA
6-23
Modifying stop pin data

STOP PIN DATA
switch, DATA 1
Switch, DATA 1
Modifying stop pin data.
What is the maximum amount of stop pins at your disposal?

What is the number of the default stop pin? (If no other entries
are made, then ToPs will assume the use of the default stop pin
during program creation).
How wide are the stop pins in the X direction ("Dimension of
pin")?
width of the first stop pin?
width of the second stop pin?
Input the following data for every pin:
At which position are the stop pins mounted?

X coordinate
Y coordinate
How is the sheet loaded?
with Lift?
manually
From which side is the sheet loaded?
from the right
from the left
Which Y loading positions apply when loading the sheet:
with Lift?
manually?
If your machine is equipped with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster
or has been modified ex works for a subsequent attachment
of TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1300 or 1600, then stop pin 2
must be activated.
6-24
Module DATA
S354E61.DOC
Modifying removal of small parts

REMOVAL SMALL PARTS
switch, DATA 1
Switch, DATA 1
Modifying data for the removal of small parts.
Select a data block in the lower selection window.
Then make the following definitions:
Dimensions of the flaps/chutes?
Minimum and maximum values in X direction and Y direction
(zero point is the center point of the punching head, the socalled loading position)
Does the flap/chute have a sensor at its disposal?
What should the minimum length of the push out path in Y
direction be?
Is the last stroke activated by the push-out cycle?
YES. The last stroke is suppressed by ToPs.
NO. The last stroke is generated by ToPs.
Should the flap or chute be active prior to the last stroke?
select YES if the machine is equipped with TRUMASORT.
Effect: a check is made as to whether TRUMASORT is
ready for removal of part.
Can the part to be expelled lie in the sheet skeleton?
YES
NO
Example of TC 200R: parts which are removed from the pushout cycle via the large flap must be released.
NC cycles: select NC cycles in the scroll window. The data is
displayed on the left in the input fields. This will save you
having to type everything in.
REMOVAL SMALL PARTS

switch, DATA 2
Switch, DATA 2
Modify data for removal of small parts.
The definitions are dependent on the way your machine has been
equipped:
S354E61.DOC
should removal via the chute be supported by compressed air?

Does the punching head of your machine have blow-out
nozzles?
Example: the C-axis is rotated by 180 for the TC 260 so that
the air nozzles can blow in the push-out direction.
Module DATA
6-25
Is the chute monitored by a light barrier?

Is antiscratch removal possible?
Which tool is connected to activating the flap: LASER,
PUNCHING or LASER/PUNCHING?
Is a removal possible with an open flap?
Which drawing should be displayed? Enter the name of the
drawing for the flap/chute.
The NC cycle name and the minimum and maximum X and Y
dimension of the respective flap or chute is displayed in the
scroll window.
Select a data block. This will save you having to type everything
in.
Modifying repositioning data

REPOSITIONING DATA
switch, DATA 1
Switch, DATA 1
Modifying data for repositioning.
*)
At what speed does repositioning take place?

How far is the sheet moved in the Y direction during
repositioning ("1. Y lift dimension")?
In which area is the repositioning position?
minimum position in Y direction for standard clamps
minimum position in the Y direction for retractable clamps
Maximum position in the Y direction*) for retractable clamps
Minimum position in Y direction for laser
What is the minimum position for the presser foot?
in Y direction ("Min. Y pos. presser foot")
in X direction ("Min. X position")
At which positions are the punching head and repositioning
cylinders located?
in -X direction
in +X direction
in -Y direction
in +Y direction
How large is the diameter of the cylinder?
How large is the diameter of the punching head
("Diameter of presser foot")?
Note: The punching head is used as the presser foot.
6-26
Module DATA
S354E61.DOC
Modifying push-out data

PUSH-OUT DATA
switch, DATA 1
Switch, DATA 1
Modifying push-out data.
Select a data block in the selection window.

Thickness of material to be pushed out

Minimum sheet thickness
Maximum sheet thickness
How long is the minimum and maximum push-out path in the X
and Y direction?
How high is the minimum and maximum push-out speed in the
X and Y direction?
Modifying clamp data

CLAMP DATA
switch, DATA 1
Switch, DATA 1
Modifying data for clamps.
Which identity number does the clamp have?

What are the dimensions of the clamp contour?
PUNCHING: the contour of the clamp dead area is
displayed for standard clamps.
RETR.CL.ACTIVE: the contour of the clamping area of the
clamp is displayed for retractable clamps.
RETR.CL.INACTIVE: if the retractable clamps are not
active, then a clamp dead strip will be displayed.
LASER WITHOUT DUMMY laser without dummy (only for
combined machines like, for example, the TC 600L)
LASER WITH DUMMY laser with dummy (only for
combined machines like, for example, the TC 600L)
Another sub-mask is opened on selection of a function button.

Enter the coordinates of the contour positions for the clamp dead
range or the clamp clamping area. The X coordinates of the contour
positions are in the left column, the Y coordinates in the right
column.
S354E61.DOC
Module DATA
6-27
Representation of clamp types in ToPs

Standard clamps
The contour of the dead range of a standard clamp is displayed as

a yellow rectangle. The yellow cross marks the postion on the
transverse rail. Standard clamps can be movable or fixed depending on the machine design.
For your information:
1-4
5-9
a
b
A
S
P
Contour position of the clamp dead range for multitool tools

Contour position of the clamp dead range for standard tools
Clamp dead range for multitool tools
Clamp dead range for standard tools
Working range
Clamp axis of symmetry
Clamp (not shown on screen)
Contour positions of the clamp dead range
Retractable
clamps
Fig. 12125
the contour of the clamping area of the clamp is displayed as a

yellow trapezoid. The position of the clamp is specified. Retractable
clamps cannot be offset.
1-4 Contour positions of the clamping area for the retractable clamp
A
Working range
Clamp axis of symmetry
Clamping area of clamp
Example: Contour positions of clamp clamping area

for retractable clamps
6-28
Module DATA
Fig. 9623
S354E61.DOC
CLAMP DATA
switch, DATA 2
Maximum number of clamps which can be installed on your

machine?*)
How many slots are available for the fitting of clamps?
How many clamps are actually used?
Can the clamps be opened individually?
Application of retractable clamps:
Minimum range of dead range strips in the Y direction?
How large is the distance from the clamp center to the
sensor?*)
Minimum safety dimension for retractable clamps in Y direction
("Min. Y dimension")?
Positions of the clamps on the transverse rail:
How large is the distance between the machine zero point
and the first clamp ("1st X dimension")?
How large is the distance between the clamps ("dx from
one clamp to the next")?
Identification in the NC program:
Is the clamp located in the magazine?*)
1 = Yes
0 = No
This information is accessed by ToPs when creating the
NC program as long as no other entries are made.
with which number is the clamp identified in the NC
program ("Cons. number")?
Switch, DATA 2
*)
*)
Clamps in the linear magazine: what are the numbers of the

magazine positions where the clamps are normally located?
ToPs uses the entered values for the graphical representation
(see: TECHNOLOGY module
What are the numbers of the sensor clamps?
How large may the traversing path be in the positive Y direction
for closing the workpiece clamp?

S354E61.DOC
Module DATA
6-29
CLAMP DATA
switch, DATA 3
Switch, DATA 3
Make the following definitions for standard clamps:
CLAMP DATA
switch, DATA 8
In which range can the clamps at the individual X positions be

moved?
from ("minimum")
to ("maximum")
How large is the minimum distance between the clamps?
What should the NC clamp monitoring check:
the clamp positions?
clamp distances?
Which dimension (-X and +X coordinates) should apply for
clamp monitoring? The dimensions refer to the clamp center.
Where are the standard fixed positions for the clamps? ToPs
uses the entered values for the graphical representation
( see: TECHNOLOGY module).
Switch, DATA 8
The following data for "sheet loading position" can be defined:
Sheet dimension in X direction?

Loading position in X direction? ("Zero traverse rail-sheet
edge")
Loading type: manually or via TRUMALIFT?
From which side does loading take place? (You stand in front of
the machine)
Is the retractable screen active?
The data block is displayed in the selection window.

Modifications to this mask should only be made after
consultation with TRUMPF Customer Support.
6-30
Module DATA
S354E61.DOC
Modifying formulas
FORMULAS
switch, DATA 1
Switch, DATA 1
Modifying formulas.
Select one formula in the selection window.
Which number does the formula have?

"Active": should the formulas be selected or not?
"Note": what is calculated with the formula?
Polynomial degree?
Minimum value of the result accepted.
Maximum value of the result accepted.
Which values apply to the coefficients A(0) to A(n)?
Modifications to this mask should only be made after
consultation with TRUMPF Customer Support.
Modifying tooling system data

TOOLING SYSTEM DATA
switch, DATA 1
Switch, DATA 1
Modifying tooling system data.
S354E61.DOC
How many tool magazines can your machine access?*)

(A TRUMATOOL also counts as a magazine.)
How many magazine positions in total are available on your
machine?
Should your machine have a magazine wheel at its disposal:
how many tools can the magazine wheel accept?*)
Should your machine have a linear magazine at its disposal:
how many tools can the linear magazine accept?*)
Module DATA
6-31
TOOLING SYSTEM DATA

switch, DATA 2
Switch, DATA 2
Modifying tooling system data.
Make the following definitions via the NC output formats for tool
change and for optimization of tool set-up:
Through which address does the tool change ensue? Activate

the type of tool change that your machine understands.
The mask contains the following information concerning the tool
change types possible:
format (coding in the NC text): T address, K address or
CCTOOLNO.
"type": description of the corresponding address.
"preparatory": Yes or No: Only applies to the 8-digit
K address.
"activated": Activate corresponding format.
Should all tool angles be rotated through 180 during NC output?
This tool optimization setting makes good sense if you have
machines where the tools have to be set up with a varying
fitting position.
Example: TC 240R or TC 260 and TC 200R or TC 500R
The address your machine understands depends on the machine

type and on the software series version for your machine:
13-digit T addresses
13-digit T address: punching machines with BOSCH control

system to software series version T23-4xx.
ToPs offers two alternatives for this address:
The position x4x5 in the T address is output as consecutive

two-digit number for tools treated as special tools;
or
The last two digits of the identification number (ID number in
ToPs management) are taken for the position x4x5.
Please note:
The consecutive two-digit number is always unambiguous, but it is
effective for the created program only.
For identifying a tool by the last two digits of the ID number from
ToPs, you have to make sure that these two digits have been
specified unambiguously in tool management. If necessary change
these ID numbers.
Example: ID No. 09560050 and ID No. 09762050; the last two
digits are identical!
Example: 13-digit T address, for example, for TC 260 or TC 240R

General: Tx1-x13
x1x2
6-32
x3
Module DATA
Consecutive tool number in the NC text

Tool shape in coded form
(1 for round tool, 4 for rectangular tool etc.; 9S354E61.DOC
for special
tool with X4,X5 = number of the special tool)
x4-x8
Dimension 1
(diameter, edge length in X or length of tool in general)
x9-x13 Dimension 2
(edge length in Y or width of tool in general)
Code in the NC text:
e.g.: rectangular tool 20 x 10mm: T0440200000100
18-digit T address
18-digit T address: from software series version T23-4xx.
Note:TRUMALTOOL 40 must be programmed by the 18-digit

T address with identification number.
Example: 18-digit T address for TC 500R
General: Tx1x2[x3-x18]
x1x2
x3x4
x5-x8
x9-x12
x13-x14
x15-x16
x17-x18
Consecutive tool number in the NC text

Tool shape in coded form
(01 for round tool, 04 for rectangular tool etc.)
Dimension 1
(diameter, edge length in X or length of tool in general)
Dimension 2
(edge length in Y or width of tool in general)
Multitool type
(4 for 4-station Multitool, 6 for 6-station Multitool, 12 for
12-station Multitool)
Punch within the multitool
Consecutive number of a Multitool type for differentiating
various Multitools of the same type.
Code in the NC text:

e.g.: rectangular tool 20 x 10mm: T04[4,20,10]
e.g.: rectangular tool 10 x 5mm, as second punch in a 4-station
Multitool; third 4-station Multitool: T08[4,10,5,4,2,3].
For tool management in ToPs, a maximum of nine digits may

be used for the identification number. The first two digits are
normally reserved for the tool type. Please take these
conditions into account when creating new tool data. The
identity number given there must be selected in such a way
that machine control understands the details in the tool
change call-up.
S354E61.DOC
Module DATA
6-33
K address
K address is, for example, for the TC 260 with cell control and for
machines from software series version T23-4xx.
CCTOOLNO
Valid for TC 600L.

Tool selection for the tool which should be installed next in the tool
adapter with the command TC_TOOL_CHANGE.
Example: TC_TOOL_NO (Ident-Number)
For a description on programming and the meaning of the

various tool changes (addresses), please refer to the
respective programming manual for your machine.
6-34
Module DATA
S354E61.DOC
Modifying lubricating system data

LUBRICATING SYSTEM
DATA switch, DATA 1
Switch, DATA 1
Modifying data for tool lubrication. *)
How many lubrication containers does your machine have at its

disposal?
Which container is allocated for tool lubrication? Default selection: 1
How should the lubrication intensity be set: example for TC 600L.
WEAK after every 60 strokes, a set amount of oil is released
MEDIUM after every 30 strokes, a set amount of oil is released
STRONG after every 5 strokes, a set amount of oil is released
EXTRA STRONG: Tool lubrication at every punching stroke,
however max. 200 Impulses per minute.
Precise details of the lubrication intensities are to be found in
the operators manual for your machine.
S354E61.DOC
Module DATA
6-35
Automation components
The automation components are completely supported by ToPs.
Programming in the TECHNOLOGY module and the configuration or settings in the DATA module are fully described in
Chapter 8.
GRIP switch
Switch
UNLOADING AREA
SUCTION CUP
DATA switch
TRUMAGRIP is supported in ToPs 300
Palleting supported in ToPs 300
In ToPs 300 this function is supported.
Switch
LIFTGROUP 1
SHEETMASTER
Switch
LIFTGROUP 2
SB / SC / SE
6-36
TRUMALIFT SheetMaster is supported in ToPs 300.
TRUMALIFT SB/SC/SE are supported in ToPs 300.
Module DATA
S354E61.DOC
4.
Recording material data
You must enter the materials which you wish to process into the
database.
Stored Information
The data for the processing of mild steel, special steel and
aluminium alloys are normally included.
The whole material data is recorded on one single mask:

Material
Data blocks for the materials which are already entered in the
database are displayed in the selection window.
The following information is issued as soon as you have selected a
data block in the selection window:
Function button
MATERIALIDENT
S354E61.DOC
Material ID:
Tensile strength
Specific gravity
Dimensions:
Material size: X and Y dimension
Material thickness: Z dimension
Remarks in plain text
Material group
You can scroll to the beginning of the data list in the selection
window using this function button.
Module DATA
6-37
Modifying, deleting and creating

material data
Record material data
Procedure:
1. Select a data block in the selection window. Data is entered in
the input fields.
2. Modify the data.
3. Finish your alterations by clicking the MODIFY function button.
Deleting material data
function button DELETE
Procedure:
1. Select a data block in the selection window. Data is entered in
the input fields.
2. Select the DELETE function button. This data block no longer
appears in the selection window.
Entering new material in the

database
Function button CREATE:
1st possibility:
1. Input the new values into the entry fields.
2. Select the CREATE function button.
selection window.
2nd possibility:
This option is mainly used to save you the bother of writing.
1. Select an existing data block in the selection window. Data are
entered in the input fields.
2. Modify the data (at least the material ID number).
3. Select the CREATE function button.
6-38
Module DATA
S354E61.DOC
5.
Laser tables
The laser tables in ToPs contain the application parameters (data)

which optimize laser machining. The database contains the
application parameters for machining:
Mild steel (St37)
Special steel (1.4301) and
Aluminium alloys (ALMg3, AlMgSi1)
The application parameters are determined and issued by our
process development department.
You will also find these application parameters in the data

collection for your machine.
S354E61.DOC
Module DATA
6-39
5.1
Structure of laser tables
A laser table in ToPs contains all technology data for the processing of a material type and sheet thickness.
It corresponds to a data block in the database and is composed as
follows:
The data for the machining operation is determined depending on

the
table no.
machine (machine group)
laser power
material
material thickness:
lens focal length
cutting gas. One or more sets of rules are also assigned.
Control system
Control system
SINUMERIK 840D
BOSCH CC...
Piercing
Piercing
General cutting
Cutting
Cut contour
Vaporization
Vaporization
Marking
Marking
Center marking
Center marking
Comment:
Microweld
Process rules
Comment:
6-40
Module DATA
S354E61.DOC
5.2
Laser table numbers
The numbers in the laser tables are consecutive, 4-digit numbers.

Number range of TRUMPF
created by TRUMPF.
Your number range
you create.
Important: The numbers of the laser tables created by TRUMPF

are rewritten each time the software is updated. For this reason,
you should not change the tables. If you wish to change a table,
assign a new table number from the number range available to
you (5000 - 9999). This is the only way to ensure that your table is
not overwritten when the software is updated. Recommended
procedure: Copy an existing laser table. Change the number and
the values which must be changed (managing laser tables see>
DATA module).
Data collection
In the data collection you received with your machine, the laser
tables are stored under the same number as in the database.
Updating the data collection
The data collections are updated by TRUMPF at regular intervals.

The data collection contains a summary of the table numbers in
which data has been changed and information on the
improvements expected from the change. You have the option of
deciding whether to accept our recommendations and change and
expand your present database.
S354E61.DOC
Module DATA
6-41
5.3
Recording laser table data: Masks
The complete data block of a laser table is recorded with masks.

Module
DATA
Laser
Select the main function LASER in the initial mask.

Laser tables already contained in the database can be displayed in
the selection window.
Select a laser table to be checked, modified or deleted. The mask
header is filled out.
Function buttons
MODIFY
CREATE
COPY
DELETE
Function button
CONTINUE
6-42
A sub-mask is opened when one of the function buttons in the mask

footer.Execute the desired actions.
Selecting CONTINUE opens a sub-mask in which data for e.g.

piercing, cutting etc. can be called up.
See Description "Sub-masks".
Module DATA
S354E61.DOC
Sub-masksOverview
Overview of sub-masks
Laser data: Overview of sub-masks, BOSCH control system
Fig. 19558
Each function button with color identification leads to a sub-mask,

the function buttons of which vary according to the machine
selected:
Machines with BOSCH CC...
control systems
Machines with control system

SINUMERIK 840D:
Function button PIERCING
Function button CUTTING
Function button GENERAL CUTTING
Function button VAPORIZE
Function button CUTTING CONTOUR
Function button MARKING
Function button CENTER MARKING
Function button COMMENTARY
Function button RULES
Function button MICROWELD
----
The sub-masks for the function buttons are described in the

following pages, depending on the machine control system.
For a description and details of individual parameters of a
laser table please refer to the respective data collection for
your machine.
S354E61.DOC
Module DATA
6-43
Masks for machines with BOSCH CC...

control systems
Defining piercing data

Which parameters should be valid?
Defining cutting data
Which application parameters apply for piercing with reduced

and full laser power?
"Piercing time"
"Ramp cycle number"
"rel. piercing distance"
"Blow-out time"
"Piercing gas pressure"
"Setting value"
Which gas should be used for piercing?
at reduced laser power
at full laser power

6-44
Module DATA
Which application parameters will be used for cutting small,

medium and large contours?
"Laser power (watts)?"
"Gating frequency"
"Cutting speed"
"Kerf"
"Time delay"
"Cutting gas pressure"
"Gas change time"
Cutting speed to be used for the reduced approach?
"Reduced gas pressure"
"Reduced laser power"
"Reduced gating frequency"
Which cutting gas to use?
Gas to be used for the approach?
S354E61.DOC
Defining vaporizing data

Defining marking data

S354E61.DOC

"Gating frequency"
"Cutting speed"
"Kerf"
"Time delay"
"Gas change time"
"Vaporizing nozzle distance": Distance from material upper
edge to nozzle?
"Gas type": Which gas should be used for vaporizing?
"Laser power (watts)"

"Gating frequency"
"cutting speed"
"Kerf"
"Time delay"
"Gas change time"
"Positioning height" for marking?
The positioning height for material thicknesses 3 mm is
8 mm
For material thicknesses > 3 mm it is 30 mm. These
positioning heights are approached automatically if a 0
(zero) is entered in the mask.
"Nozzle distance": Enter distance of nozzle from sheet.
0: The nozzle distance entered in the "Commentary" mask is
evaluated.
"Gas type": Select the gas to be used for marking.
Module DATA
6-45
Defining centre marking

data

Enter commentary on laser

table

A commentary on your laser table is entered in this mask.
Assigning rules to the laser

tables

"Gating frequency"
"Cutting speed"
"Kerf"
"Time delay"
"Gas change time"
"Piercing time"
"Ramp cycle number"
"Piercing height"
"Blow-out time"
"Nozzle distance": Distance of nozzle from sheet?
evaluated.
"Gas type": Which gas should be used for center marking?
Cutting head number: Enter the number of the cutting head.

Which nozzle distance is permissible for cutting at "normal"
laser power and at "reduced" laser power?
Which focus position is permitted?
Nozzle and lens identification number?
"Creation date": When was this table created?
"Processed by" Who created this table?
"Note": In addition it is possible to enter short pieces of information in plain text, e.g. to explain the laser table contents.
Function button RULES

Rules: Which rules should be assigned to the laser table?
For which rules should this table apply?
A check is made whether the gas pressure entered in the rules

corresponds to the gas pressure in the laser table. If the system
finds no correspondence, it notifies you with an error message.
6-46
Module DATA
S354E61.DOC
Masks for machines with SINUMRIK 840D

Defining piercing data

Defining general
cutting data
Function button GENERAL CUTTING

Defining contour
cutting data
"Setting value": The position of the focus in relation to the

nozzle tip. Value set at the cutting head.
"Corner cool-off time": How long?
At what acceleration should work take place: normal, reduced
or high?
Should the approach be at reduced cutting speed?
Should punch hole be cut at reduced speed?
Switch plasma sensor on or off?
"Threshold value 1"
"Threshold value 2"
"Gas type": Which cutting gas should be used?
Function button CUTTING CONTOUR

S354E61.DOC
"Setting value" The position of the focus in relation to the nozzle

tip. Value set at the cutting head.
"Time SPRINT LAS":
Which application parameters apply for piercing with reduced
and normal laser power?
"Piercing time"
"Ramp cycle number"
"Nozzle distance"
"Blow-out time"
"Piercing gas pressure"
"Spray oil"
Which gas should be used for piercing?
Which application parameters (reduced or normal) apply for

cutting small, medium and large contours?
"Kerf"
"Setting value" The position of the focus in relation to the
"Gating frequency"
"Cutting speed"
"Nozzle distance"
Module DATA
6-47
Defining vaporizing data

Defining marking data

Which parameters should apply?
Defining centre
marking data
Module DATA
"Setting value": The position of the focus in relation to the nozzle

"Gating frequency"
"Cutting speed"
"Nozzle distance": Distance of nozzle from sheet?
evaluated.
"Gas pressure"
"Gas type"

Which parameters should apply to the center marking of a
geometry or point?
6-48
"Setting value": The position of the focus in relation to the nozzle

"Vaporisation time"
"Gating frequency"
"Cutting speed"
"Vaporizing nozzle distance": Distance of material upper edge
from nozzle for vaporizing?
"Gas pressure"
"Gas type"

"Gating frequency"
"Cutting speed"
"Nozzle distance": Distance between nozzle and sheet?
evaluated.
"Time delay"
"Piercing time"
"Ramp cycle number"
"Gas type"
S354E61.DOC
Defining Microweld
process data
Function button MICROWELD

Microweld is a process by which parts are connected to the sheet
by welding points.
Assigning commentary to
laser table

"Time"
"Ramp cycle number"
"Nozzle distance": Distance between nozzle and sheet?
evaluated.
"Gas pressure"
"Gas type"

In this mask, a commentary on your laser table is entered and the
assignment of rules to the laser table defined.
"Nozzle type"
The nozzles are differentiated by shape. Depending on the
material and material thickness, different nozzle types are used.
0: no entry
1: Nozzle type 1
2: Nozzle type 2
"Cutting head number"

Gas flushing between cutting and piercing? Time value in [s].
Gas flushing between piercing and cutting? Time value in [s].
"Processed by" Who created this table?
"Creation date": When was this table created?
"Alteration date": When was this table altered?
"Note": In addition it is possible to enter a short piece of
information in plain text, e.g. to explain the laser table contents.
In the right mask area: assignation of rules to laser table:
For which rules should this table apply? Enter the number of
the rules.
A check is made whether the gas pressure entered in the rules

corresponds to the gas pressure in the laser table. If the system
finds no correspondence, it notifies you with an error message.
S354E61.DOC
Module DATA
6-49
5.4
Modifying, deleting and creating laser

tables: Procedure
The procedure is always the same for creating, deleting and

modifying long data blocks (see Overview of the various masks).
The procedure is explained step by step for a laser table as an
example.
Modifying data blocks

Modifying data blocks
Functions
Module
DATA
Laser
Function button
MODIFY
Steps:
1. Start the DATA module.
2. Select data range to be accessed: laser tables

3. Select data block: Click in the selection window with the
mouse. The data are entered in the mask header and in the
sub-masks.
4. Modifying data in mask header: Select function button MODIFY.
The sub-mask is opened.
Function buttons
MODIFY
BACK
Function button
CONTINUE
6. Select function button CONTINUE in the initial mask to open the

sub-masks.
Function button
MODIFY
7. Conclude working in the respective sub-mask with MODIFY and

transfer the data modifications to the existing data block. Call up
the subsequent sub-masks one by one.
Function button
RETURN
6-50
5. Conclude working in the sub-mask with MODIFY and select

initial mask again with BACK.
8. Finally select the initial mask again.
Module DATA
S354E61.DOC
Creating new data blocks

Creating new data blocks
Functions
Steps:
Data
Laser
2. Select data range to be accessed:

sub-masks.
Function button
CREATE
4. Creating new data in the mask header: select the CREATE

function button. The sub-mask is opened.
Funktionsknpfe
CREATE
5. Conclude working in the sub-mask with CREATE and select

initial mask again with BACK.
BACK
Function button
CONTINUE
Function button
MODIFY
7. Carry out work in the sub-mask and save it and conclude with
MODIFY. the modifications are accepted in the existing data
block. Call up the subsequent sub-masks one by one.
Function button
BACK
S354E61.DOC
6. Select function button CONTINUE in the initial mask to open

the sub-masks.
Module DATA
6-51
Copying and modifying data blocks

Copying data blocks
Functions
Module
DATA
Laser
Steps:

sub-masks.
Function button
COPY
4. Modifying data in mask header: select function button COPY.

The sub-mask is opened.
Function button
READ
5. Select this function button to read in the marked data. At least

the following data entries must be modified in the sub-masks.
Data range:
Laser table
Number
Machine data
Name
Material data
Identnumber
Rules
Name (Number)
Function buttons
CONTINUE
BACK
Function button
CONTINUE
7. Select function button CONTINUE in the initial mask to open

the sub-masks.
Function button
MODIFY
8. Conclude working in the respective sub-mask with MODIFY

and transfer the data modifications to the existing data block.
Call up the subsequent sub-masks one by one.
Function button
BACK
6-52
6. Conclude working in the sub-mask with COPY and select initial

mask again with BACK.
Module DATA
S354E61.DOC
Deleting data block

Deleting data block
Functions
Module
DATA
Laser
Steps:

sub-masks.
Function button
DELETE
Function buttons
DELETE
BACK
S354E61.DOC
4. Select function button DELETE. The sub-mask is opened.
5. Remove data block with DELETE and select initial mask again
with BACK.
Module DATA
6-53
6.
Rules
On selection of the RULES function in the main menu, the subfunctions DATA, SYSTEM, PUNCHING and MACHINE will be offered.
6.1
Rule data for laser machining
A rule group is a collection of rules according to which decision

processes are to be carried out. A rule group is integrated in ToPs
which contains all the information for determining the laser
machining operation. Rule group information is stored in the
database and designated the knowledge base. Interpretation is
done with the specified rules of the part geometry and the
machining operation is assigned in the TECHNOLOGY module.
By means of the rules specified in the rule group, ToPs recognises
which type of contour is being used, the corner to start at, where to
create a looping and much more.
Module
DATA
Data stored in the database.

Rule groups from TRUMPF are already stored in the database.
They are valid for the machining of
Rule group
mild steel (St37),

special steel (1,4301) and
aluminum alloys (AlMg3, AlMgSi1).
Data
6-54
Module DATA
S354E61.DOC
6.2
Structure of rule groups
The data block of a rule group is determined according to the

following scheme:
The data for the machining operation is determined depending on the
rule group name (number)

material
material thickness:
machine (machine group)
"Gas pressure".
General conditions: General specifications

Small/medium/large contour
Piercing
Approach
Cutting
Moving away
Positioning
Rounding
Looping
Vaporization
S354E61.DOC
Module DATA
6-55
6.3
Rule group name
The name of the rule group can consist of various characters:

letters, numerals or a combination of both. Maximum length of the
name: 5 characters.
Your rule groups
The first character of you rule group name must be a "K".

Examples:
Rule groups from TRUMPF
The rule groups which we have already stored in the database are
characterized by the fact that their first character is not a "K".
Examples:
K4711
KPR1
K0001
60371
60372
60373
...
60704
Important: The rule groups created by TRUMPF are rewritten each

time the software is updated. For this reason, you should not
change these rule groups. If you wish to change a rule group,
assign a name which starts with "K". This is the only way to
ensure that your rule group is not overwritten when the software is
updated. Recommended procedure: Copy an existing rule group.
Change the number and the values which must be changed.
The names of our rule groups, which are already contained in the
database, are formed according to the following scheme:
Four characters + code number
5001x
The code number indicates which general conditions apply to this

rule group.
Function button GENERAL 1
6-56
Module DATA
The general connditions are summarized in a mask

( see: DATA module: Record process rules data. Masks) with
commentatry under a key word. The code number facilitates
selection of a rule group.
The code number has the following meanings:
S354E61.DOC
Code numbersand key

words
Corner: (Round)
(corners are rounded)
Corner: Looping
(corners become sharp)
Corner: (Not round / No looping)

(Corners are smoothed)
Film / Round
Sheet is covered with film,
corners are rounded)
Example: The rule group with the name 60373 creates neither
loops nor roundings.
6.4
Record process rules data: Masks
The complete data block of a rule group is recorded with the

following masks:
Module
DATA
Rule group
Data
Function buttons
MODIFY
CREATE
COPY
DELETE
Function button
CONTINUE
S354E61.DOC
In the initial mask
The rule groups stored in the database are displayed in the

selection window.
Select the rule group whose data is to be checked, modified or
deleted.
The sub-mask is opened. Execute the desired actions.
An overview of the sub-masks which can be opened is displayed.
Module DATA
6-57
Sub-masks
Overview of sub-masks
Sub-masks are displayed for the following function buttons

(=switches with colour coding):
Function button SMALL CONTOUR

Function button MEDIUM CONTOUR
Function button LARGE CONTOUR
Function button APPROACH
Function button MOVE AWAY
Function button POSITIONING
Function button ROUND
Function button LOOPING
Recording general data

(part 1)


6-58
Module DATA
Keywords can be entered in the remarks field. In rule groups

issued by TRUMPF, the keywords are entered according to the
code numbers.
How shoudl open contours be treated? Define contour size.
Define contour size. Which contours count as small medium or
large contours?
Medium contours - laser tables
The medium contour size defined here is treated as a small
contour during assignment of the laser tables.
Should the parts be positioned?
"Overshoot height"
Should corners primarily be rounded or should a looping be
produced?
"Corner cool-off time"
"Precutting distance"
"Precutting speed"
Should SprintLas be used for cutting?
Should SprintLas be used for marking?
Should work be done basically with or without acceleration
programming?
Enter absolute X and Y acceleration values.
S354E61.DOC
Notes on acceleration programming:

Acceleration programming is based on the functions G06 and G07.
Application: Acceleration programming is primarily used with
Aluminium (4-6 mm) and Edelstahl (4-10 mm). Acceleration
programming for these materials primarily means: Reduction of
acceleration (m/s2). Reduction counts for the complete contour but
is particularly effective however in corners and during approach.
Corners: No further special corner treatment with rounding or

looping is necessary.Corners are cut with sharp edges by
reduction.
Approach flag:Contours which had to be approached in an arc
without acceleration programming can be approached linearly.
Effect: The function is generated automatically, independently of

the contour size and effects all contours of the sheet.
Recording general
data (part 2)

Processing type "Cutting" withi texts: Should text elements be

cut: YES or NO? If yes, to which contour size should they be
assigned?
Precondition: Texts to be cut must be displayed in "white".
Select a text type which makes cutting sensible (e.g."bold").
The following rules apply to the processing of vector texts:
Approach flages and move-away flags. Piercing is directly
on the contour.
It is not possible to reorder a process interactively. This may
lead to uncontrolled scrap (depending on the font used).
The cutting of vector texts is always set to NO as default in the
delivered rule groups.
S354E61.DOC
Processing type "Marking" with texts: Should text elements be

marked: YES or NO? If yes, to which contour size should they
be assigned?
SMALL is set as default.
Processing type "Marking" with contours: Should contours be
marked: YES or NO? If yes, to which contour size should they
be assigned?
SMALL is set as default.
Marking: Should vaporization occur before marking: YES or
NO?
Module DATA
6-59
Processing type "Center marking of a point": Should the point

be center marked: YES or NO? If yes, which contour size
should be set as basic? SMALL is set as default.
Should vaporization occur before center marking: Yes or
No?
Representation of center marking:
How should the symbol for center marking be displayed:as
a point, circle, square or circle?
Which dimensions should the selected symbol have?
Module DATA
ToPs automatically calculates which contours cannot be

processed during processign definition. These parts can be
specially marked by ToPs. This marking is issued in the NC
program.
6-60
Processing type "Center marking of a symbol": How should the

symbol be center marked: as a point or as two circles with
different diameters?
How should unprocessable contours be treated?

"Marking": All contours which cannot be processed should
be assigned to the marking processing type.
"Contour line": Mark entire contour line.
"Center of gravity standard": Mark standard contours
(rectangle, circle, oblong hole) at center of gravity.
"Center of gravity irregular": Mark irregular contours at
center of gravity.
"Center marking": Center mark contours at center of gravity.
This processing type has priority over marking at center of
gravity if both functions are active.
S354E61.DOC
Recording general
data (part 3)

Should contours be machined with or without common parting

cuts?
Which areas should be approached at reduced speed?
How long should the overlapping cut be?
Initial blank processing: Define approach path for reduced

approach.
Sheet parting cut Define approach path for reduced approach.
Microweld process:
Length for reduced approach
Length for overlapping cut
Length for preparatory cut
Offset to the contour
Type of execution:soft or hard.
Contour piercing
Function button SMALL/MEDIUM/LARGE CONTOUR

S354E61.DOC
Should piercing occur or not?

How should piercing occur?
Ramp mode with reduced or full laser power?
Fast piercing?
Should piercing be with or without a measuring cycle for
ascertaining material thickness?
What spatter circle radius should be set? Safety area in which
no contour which might be damaged may lie. This safety area
is automatically taken into account by the collision checking.
Work with or without height regulation?
Module DATA
6-61
Contour approach
Function button SMALL/MEDIUM/LARGE CONTOUR,

Function button APPROACH
Should approach occur or not?

How should approach occur?
FULL: at full laser power?
REDUCED: at reduced laser power?
Which limit values apply for the approach path?
The approach path must be smaller than the selected web
width.
Which limit values apply for the approach radius?
Should precise stop, track slope, distance regulation and feed
forward operate during the approach?
By what percentage should the cutting of the straight part of the
approach path be reduced?
"Angle of approach" Which angle applies for the inner or outer
contour?
Note: Entering the angle determines the contour type to which
this definition should apply - inner contour or outercontour.
Input (Examples)
0
Effect
Move-away flag with 90 produced (1)
20
Move-away flag with 110 (90+20) produced (2)
-20
Move-away flag with 70 (90-20) produced (3)
Fig. 9097
Automatic production of approach and move-away flagsat straight

contours at an angle.
This setting can be made dependent on contour size. Example:
Process small contours with approach and move-away flags at an
angle; approach large cotours normally.
Approaching circles
Setting an approach flag for circular contours at any angle.
Use: Flexible formation of approach flags for circles. Example: In
order to position the approach flag of a circle which is approached
from outside in the scrap, the circle is approached at an angle.
Procedure: This definition is made in the internal system rule group
and automatically applies to all circles.
6-62
Module DATA
S354E61.DOC
Example:
Approaching a circle
Fig. 9099
Approach strategy
Should a corner, element, a corner/element or element/
corner be approached?
Select a function button. Then the function button CONTINUE.
In the auxiliary mask define:
Approaching an element:
Should approach be in the form of a line or of a line/arc?
Which form should be preferred for approaching?
Which minimum and maximum limit values apply to the
elements to be approached?
Approaching a corner:
Should approach be in the form of a line or of a line/arc?
Angle of the corner?
Length of the element before and after the corner?
S354E61.DOC
Module DATA
6-63
Contour cutting

Should cutting occur or not?

Should cutting be at reduced or normal speed?
Cutting with or without precision stop?
Should precise stop, track slope, distance regulation and feed
forward operate during cutting?
Cutting with or without track correction?
The parameter "Max. nozzle extension" has no significance.
Producing micro-Joints
Micro-Joints are located between the approach and move-away
flags.
Definition:
Should micro-joints be produced on outer contours: Yes or No?
Should micro-joints be produced on outer contours: Yes or No?
What length should the micro-joints have?
Beam end before contour end Should the laser beam be turned
off before the end of the contour?
Application: Micro-Joints are used

to reduce the risk of collision for small parts.Small parts are
inclined to tip; fixture by micro-joints can avoid tipping.
to simplify the removal of small parts (parts remain hanging on
the sheet).
Procedure: Make settings in the DATA module.
APPROACH mask: Enter angle of approach.

MOVE-AWAY mask: Enter move-away angle.
CUTTING mask: The special information for micro-joints is
entered in this mask.
Effect: Micro-Joints are set automatically when processing is

generated.
There are many possibilities for the formation of micro-joints:
Different forms of approach and move-away flags, no approach
flag, no move-away flag, length of the micro-joint web.
Recommendation: It makes sense if the approach and move-away

flags are created at an angle. The approach and move-away flags
should run linearly.
6-64
Module DATA
S354E61.DOC
Length of the micro-joints
Micro-Joint
Fig. 9109
Example: To determine the position of the micro-joint, it is advisable

to define the geometry element to be approached via the
assignment of line type.
Controlling micro-joint position by line type
Moving away from the

contour
Fig. 9110

Function button MOVE AWAY
Rules can be defined for withdrawing from the contour: Make the
following definitions:
S354E61.DOC
Should an outer contour or an inner contour be moved away

from or not?
"Distance": Safety distance from contours which must not be
damaged. This safety area is automatically taken into account
by the collision checking.
"Angle of withdrawal": Which angle applies for the inner or
outer contour?
How should withdrawal occur: From a corner or from an
element? Moving away is linked to the type and manner of
approach. Example: If approach was to a corner, moving away
must also be from a corner.
Which limit values apply for the move-away path?
The move-away path must be smaller than the selected web
width.
Module DATA
6-65
Which limit values apply for the move-away radius?
Note: Entering the angle determines the contour type to which

this definition should apply - inner contour or outercontour.
Basic rule: Entering positive angle details produces an acute
angle; negative angle details a blunt angle.
Input (Examples)
Effect
Move-away flag with 90 produced (1)
20
Move-away flag with 110 (90+20) produced (2)
-20
Move-away flag with 70 (90-20) produced (3)
Fig. 9098
Defining positioning
between the contours
How should withdrawal occur?

with precision stop?
with path slope?
with distance regulation?
with Feed Forward?

Function button POSITIONING
Should positioning occur between two contours to be cut?
Recommendation: Always select YES here.
Which overshoot height is permitted?
6-66
Module DATA
S354E61.DOC
Registering corner rounding

Function button ROUND
Should rounding occur or not?

which corners should be rounded?
inner corners?
outer corners?
Inner and outer corners?
Type of rounding:
rounding or
working with corner cooling? Determine time for corner
cooling.
Which limit values apply for rounding?
Rounding
S354E61.DOC
Fig. 4750
Minimum (2) and maximum (1) rounding radius? (If the

radius is to be kept exactly, the minimum must correspond
to the maximum radius.)
Minimum (3) and maximum (4) deviation? This gives the
tolerance range (5) for a rounding.
Angle of corner to be rounded?
Minimum and maximum length range of the element before
and after the corner to be rounded?
Module DATA
6-67
Producing loops

Function button LOOPING
Should looping be carried out?

Form of looping: pointed or with radius?
Which limit values apply for the generation of loopings?
Looping
Vaporizing contours
Fig. 4751
Looping radius (3)?

Length of entire looping (4)?
The length of the looping must be smaller than the defined
web width for nesting.
Angle area of the corner at which looping is to be
generated?
Length of the geometry element before the looping (1)?
Length of the geometry element after the looping (2)?

6-68
Module DATA
Should vaporization occur or not?

Should the entire contour or just the piercing point be
vaporized?
S354E61.DOC
6.5
Module
DATA
System-internal rules
This function is designed to be used exclusively by TRUMPF

Software Support and is therefore protected by a password.
Process rules
System
6.6
Process rules
Punching
This function is protected by a password.

There are rules stored in the punching rules which relate to
punching technology.
6.7
Process rules
Machine
S354E61.DOC
Punching rules
Machine rules

There are rule data stored in the rules for machines which relate to
the machine.
Module DATA
6-69
7.
Assignment: Laser tables - Rule group
Group TC4, mild steel St37

Rule group
Sheet
thickness
1500W
2200W
5"
5"
[mm]
60371
60372
60373
1.0
1978
1998
60381
60382
60383
1.5
1979
1999
60391
60392
60393
2.0
1980
2000
60401
60402
60403
2.5
1981
2001
60411
3.0
1982
2002
60421
4.0
1983
2003
60431
5.0
1984
2004
60441
6.0
1985
2005
60451
8.0
1986
2006
Sheet
thickness
[mm]
1500W
2200W
5"
5"
60501
60502
1.0
1987
2007
60511
60512
1.5
1988
2008
60521
60522
2.0
1989
2009
60531
60532
2.5
1990
2010
60541
3.0
1991
2011
60551
4.0
1992
2012
60561
5.0
2013
60861
6.0
2014
Group TC4, special steel 1.4301

Rule group
6-70
Module DATA
S354E61.DOC
Group TC4, Aluminium alloy AlMg3

Rule group
Sheet
thickness
1500W
2200W
5"
5"
[mm]
60661
60662
1993
2015
60671
60672
1.5
1994
2016
60681
60682
2.0
1995
2017
60691
60692
2.5
1996
2018
60701
3.0
1997
2019
60711
S354E61.DOC
1.0
4.0
2020
Module DATA
6-71
8.
Output of database contents:

Laser tables, Rule group
Output functions are integrated in the DATA module with which

database contents can be converted into a list format and output to
a printer or a file.
Output of data to from the

database
Function button OUTPUT

Reading in data
Which table number or rule group number should be output?

Select output form: File, printer or display?
FILE: A file is produced with the following format: (Number.lis).
This file can be read by various editors.
PRINTER: The data are sent to the connected printer and
output as a list.The HPGL file produced is deleted automatically
after the print procedure. The familiar Windows mask is
displayed, as for other print procedures.
DISPLAY: The data are displayed on the screen.
Function button READ IN

Reading in laser tables from the control system and outputting them
to a file or to the printer.
6-72
Module DATA
Enter file name (as the program is in the control system, e.g.:
P4711.LST)
Output form: File or printer?
FILE: A file is produced with the following format:
(Number.lis). This file can be read by various editors.
PRINTER: The data are sent directly to the printer and
output as a list.
S354E61.DOC
Example (Printout of a rule group):

-- Laser --
RULE GROUP Rule group name 60393
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Conversion date
: Mon, 07 December 1998
14:13
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Machine type
TC4
Material
St37-20
Material thickness [mm]
2.000000
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Contour size
| small
| medium
| large
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Vaporization
| No
No
No
Type
| Contour
Contour
Contour
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Piercing
| Yes
Yes
Yes
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Meas. cycle
| Yes
Yes
Yes
Spatter circle radius [mm]
| 0.10
0.30
0.30
Piercing Type
| reduced
reduced
reduced
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Cutting
| Yes
Yes
Yes
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Cutting type
| normal
normal
normal
Precision stop
| No
No
No
Distance regulation
| Yes
Yes
Yes
Path slope
| Yes
Yes
Yes
Feed Forward
| No
No
No
Path correction
| No
No
No
max. nozzle extension
| 0.00
0.00
0.00
Outer Contour with Microjoint
| No
No
No
Inner Contour with Microjoint
| No
No
No
Microjoint Length [mm] outer
| 0.40
0.40
0.40
Microjoint Length [mm] inner
| 0.40
0.40
0.40
Beam off before contour end Y/N
| No
No
No
Beam off before contour end L = [mm] | 0.00
0.00
0.00
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Rounding
| No
No
No
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Round corner
| inner/outer
inner/outer
inner/outer
Type
| Round
Round
Round
Radius [mm] min
| 0.50
0.50
0.50
Radius [mm] max
| 0.50
0.50
0.50
Deviation [mm] min
| 0.01
0.01
0.01
Deviation [mm] max
| 11.00
11.00
11.00
Angle [degreees] min
| 5.00
5.00
5.00
Angle [degrees] max
| 175.00
175.00
175.00
Length of element before corner min | 2.00
2.00
2.00
Lengt of element before corner max
| 99999.99
99999.99
99999.99
Length of element after corner min
| 2.00
2.00
2.00
Lengt of element after corner max
| 99999.99
99999.99
99999.99
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------outer contour move-away
| No
No
No
inner contour move-away
| No
No
No
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Distance [mm]
| 0.50
0.50
0.50
Move-away angle [degrees] outer
| 0.00
0.00
0.00
Move-away angle [degrees] inner
| 0.00
0.00
0.00
Form corner
| Line
Line
Line
Form Element
| Line/arc
Line/arc
Line/arc
Length [mm] min
| 2.00
2.00
2.00
Length [mm] max
| 2.00
2.00
2.00
Radius [mm] min
| 0.15
0.30
0.30
Radius [mm] max
| 0.15
0.30
0.30
Precision stop
| No
No
No
Path slope
| Yes
Yes
Yes
Distance regulation
| Yes
Yes
Yes
Feed Forward
| No
No
No
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
S354E61.DOC
Module DATA
6-73
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Contour size
| small
| medium
| large
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Looping
| No
No
No
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Form
| Radius
Radius
Radius
Radius [mm] min
| 0.30
0.20
0.20
Radius [mm] max
| 2.50
2.50
2.50
Length [mm] min
| 5.00
2.00
2.00
Length [mm] max
| 5.00
5.00
5.00
Angle [degreees] min
| 5.00
5.00
5.00
Angle [degrees] max
| 120.00
120.00
120.00
Length of element before looping min | 0.10
0.10
0.10
Length of element before looping max | 99999.99
99999.99
99999.99
Length of element after looping min | 0.10
1.00
0.10
Length of element after looping max | 99999.99
99999.99
99999.99
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Positioning
| Yes
Yes
Yes
Overshoot height [mm]
| 20.00
20.00
20.00
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Approach
| Yes
Yes
Yes
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Type
| full
full
full
Precision stop
| No
No
No
Distance regulation
| Yes
Yes
Yes
Path slope
| Yes
Yes
Yes
Feed Forward
| No
No
No
Reduction [%]
| 95.00
95.00
95.00
Precut
| No
No
No
Strategy
| Corner/Element Corner/Element Corner/Element
Approach angle [degrees] outer
| 0.00
0.00
0.00
Approach angle [degrees] inner
| 0.00
0.00
0.00
Length [mm] min
| 0.40
2.65
2.65
Length [mm] max
| 2.90
4.50
4.50
Radius [mm] min
| 0.00
0.00
0.00
Radius [mm] max
| 0.00
0.25
0.25
Form Element
| Line/arc
Line/arc
Line/arc
Form preferred
| Line
Line
Line
Length [mm] min
| 3.00
5.00
5.00
Length [mm] max
| 10000.00
10000.00
99999.99
Form Corner
| Line
Line
Line
Angle [degrees] min
| 30.00
30.00
30.00
Angle [degrees] max
| 145.00
145.00
145.00
Length of element before corner min | 3.00
5.00
5.00
Length of element before corner max | 10000.00
10000.00
99999.99
Length of element after corner min
| 3.00
5.00
5.00
Length of element after corner max
| 10000.00
10000.00
99999.9
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Comment
Positioning parts
Overshoot height [mm]
open contour
Corner:No round - no looping

Yes
20.00
large
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Contour area [mm2]

| small
| medium
| large
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------min
| 0.78
0.78
28.26
max
| 28.26
28.26
99999.99
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Cornern priority
Round
Corner cooling time [s]
0.50
Precut length [s]
0.00
Precut speed [%]
0.00
Starting corner
bottom left
Working direction
in Y
Acceleration programming
X value [m/s2]
Y value [m/s2]
No
0.00
0.00
Cutting with Sprint Las

Marking with Sprint Las
No
No
6-74
Module DATA
S354E61.DOC
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------| Contour size

| Vaporization
Type
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Cutting
Text
| No
Marking
Text
| small
Cutting
Contour
| small
No
Center marking
Point
| small
No
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Center marking
Symbol
Circle
Dimension [mm]
0.60
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
Non-processable contours
| Contour line | Center of gravity | Center of gravity
|
| standard
| any
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------Marking
| Yes
No
No
Center marking
|
Yes
----------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
S354E61.DOC
Module DATA
6-75
9.
NC Output
When the function NC-OUTPUT is selected from the main menu,

two sub-functions are offered.
TIMES function
CUSTOMER CYCLES function
CYCLES function
HEADER DATA function
9.1
Module
DATA
Modifying processing times
In the DATA module, select the function NC OUTPUT.
NC output
Times
Modifying processing times for NC cycles

Function button
NC CYCLES
There is a stored time in the database for every NC cycle. The

individual times for NC cycles can be modified.
Procedure:
Select the desired NC cycle. NC cycle and time will be
displayed.
Enter the new time in the "Time (can be modified)" input field.
Confirm your alteration by clicking on the MODIFY function
button at the foot of the mask.
6-76
Module DATA
S354E61.DOC
Calculating processing times for

NC functions
Function button
NC MANAGEMENT
There is a stored time in the database for every NC function.

Individual times for NC functions can be modified in the
management of NC functions.
Procedure:
S354E61.DOC
Select the desired NC function. The designation of the NC

function, the address letter and the address value as well as the
time will be displayed.
Enter the new time in the "Time (can be modified)" input field.
Confirm your entry by clicking on the MODIFY function button at
the foot of the mask.
Module DATA
6-77
9.2
Module
DATA
NC output
Customer cycles
Self-definition of NC cycles
When you select the function NC OUTPUT, CUSTOMER

CYCLES, a mask is opened.
Specify:
"Cycle name": Enter the name of the cycle in the input field
"NC cycle".
The cycle name must not contain any umlauts or accents.
These symbols will not be displayed during processing.
Enter the NC text in the lines given below the input field
"NC cycle".
Input rules:
Every line must start with the character @ and terminate with a
semicolon ;.
Example 1: @TC_SUCTION_ON;
Example 2: @G04F3;
Entries written between apostrophes will not be subject to the
check routine. These entries will always be output.
Example: MSG Manual removal
Entries written without apostrophes, will be subject to the
check routine.
The system checks:
whether the function is stored in the system and
whether the function is already active in the NC text.
Properties
The cycle can have the following properties:
NONE: No properties are assigned to the cycle.
REMOVAL: The cycle shall have the property of a removal.
This is e.g. the case if you define a removal in the cycle.
This information is important for optimizing, as processing
operations with removal must be put at the end of a
processing sequence.
6-78
Module DATA
S354E61.DOC
NC-Cycle total time: how much time will the NC cycle take?
Input the time in [s].
Store your entries by means of the function STORE in the mask

footer. The cycle will be stored under the cycle name defined and
the cycle name will be inserted in the scroll window on the left.
This NC cycle will be at your disposal under the given cycle name
for defining machining (TECHNOLOGY module).
The mask footer contains further functions which can be activated:

DELETE: deleting customer cycles
COPY: copying existing customer cycles. You can copy
existing customer cycles in order to edit them. Store the
modified cycles under a new name.
Calling up self-defined cycle
In the screen menu for the control function EXTRAS in the

TECHNOLOGY module, you can call up self-defined cycles and
select them through NC FUNCTIONS, FREE CYCLE.
9.3
Cycles

All necessary NC cycles are stored here for creating an executable
NC program in ToPs.
9.4
Header data

All data necessary for the output of header data in the NC program
for the TC 600L (with control system SINUMERIK 840D) are stored
here.
S354E61.DOC
Module DATA
6-79
10.
User
Editor
Working with user settings
With the function USER you, as the user, have the option of:
carrying out "User settings" via the sub-function EDITOR, i.e.

selecting a defined editor or setting a new editor
or
Paths:
performing "Management of computer names and their paths"

via the PATHS sub-function.
Each sub-function offers you a mask which supports you when

making settings.
The following editors are available:
STD_EDITOR: Editor via system

LST_EDITOR: Editor fpr NC programs
EIN_EDITOR: Editor for processing plans
At the moment, only the entry "trumpf" is valid as "USER".
6-80
Module DATA
S354E61.DOC
1.
Index card "Version"
Displaying software version
The first index card enables the viewing of the version and revision
number of the installed ToPS software.
Displaying software version
2.
Index card "Database"
Fig. 19561
Displaying database version
You will receive details of the actual database by selecting the

"Database" index card.
database name with version number

Path specification
Example: ToPs 300 Version: 3.00
7-2
INFO module
S354E71.DOC
3.
"Language" index card
Modifying language setting
This index card displays a language selection in the form of radio

buttons.
You can choose between the following languages:
German
English
French
Spanish
Italian
Dutch
Kanji (this display cannot be applied with Windows user
interfaces used in Europe).
Czech
Modifying language settings
S354E71.DOC
Fig. 19562
INFO module
7-3
4.
Index card "File
management"
File management
Files stored on the hard disk can be deleted with the aid of this
index card.
Procedure:
Select the index card.

The following mask is opened:
Deleting files
Fig. 19563
Click on the DELETE function button.

The file selection mask is opened. You will be shown all of the
files (radio button: *.* is active).
Select the file which is to be deleted. The file name will be
entered into the "File name" indicator window.
Confirm deletion of the file. The file is deleted from the
directory.
It makes sense to check and manage your files at regular
intervals: Delete the files which you no longer need.
Another option for part management is offered by ToPs via

the function selection FILE, LOAD, index card "part management" see: the description "Standard masks, part management" in this manual):
7-4
INFO module
S354E71.DOC
1.
Automation Components in ToPs 300
1.1
Supported Automation Components in

ToPs 300
The following automation components are supported by ToPs 300:

Designation in
Lifting
grip
Machine
200
yes
TC 200R
1000
yes
TC 120R, TC 500R
medium 1250
yes
TC 240, TC 240L, TC 240R,

TC 260, TC 260L, TC 500R
1300
no
TC 500R
1306
no
TC 600L
1600
no
TC 500R
1606
no
TC 600L
medium 1300
no
TC 260, TC 260L
large
no
TC 260, TC 260L
260_1250
TC 260, TC 260L
260_1500
TC 260, TC 260L
500_1300
TC 500R
500_1306
TC 600L
500_1600
TC 500R
500_1606
TC 600L
TRUMASORT L
TC 260, TC 500R, TC 600L
Storage cart
TC 260, TC 500R, TC 600L
Shifting cart
TC 260
Double cart
TC 500R, TC 600L
TRUMASORT R4
TC 500R, TC 600L
TRUMASORT S (single-row)
TC 260
sheet
small
large
TRUMALIFT SB/SE/SC
TRUMAGRIP
ToPs 300
1600
The palletizing is additionally supported by an unloading platform.
S354E81.DOC
8-3
Important!
First activate the automation components in the Data Module in

accordance with their sequence on your machine. Once this is
done, the automation components can then be programmed in the
Technology Module. The complete data (default values) are stored
in the data base.
Please note: If your data do not correspond to those in the
data base, then you must use the masks to make the data
conform!
8-4
S354E81.DOC
1.2
Brief Overview: Which data need to

be activated where?
DATA
Module
Machines
Function button
CONFIGURATION
Set the configuration of machine in the Data Module.
Procedure
Select the following in the sequence given:
Select basic machine
DATA 2
LIFT SELECTION
LIFT SELECTION
Function button
DATA
MODIFY
Loading: Select TRUMALIFT

SheetMaster
Unloading: Select TRUMALIFT
SheetMaster
Save modified data

Select TRUMALIFT SheetMaster
LIFT GROUP 1
SHEETMASTER
DATA 1
Establish general lift data
MODIFY
Save modified data
DATA 2
MODIFY
Save modified data
DATA 3
Establish data for loading
MODIFY
Save modified data
DATA 5
Establish data for unloading
MODIFY
Save modified data
DATA 6
MODIFY
Save modified data
DATA 8
Establish data for grip disposal
MODIFY
Save modified data

DATA 1
Establish stop pin data
S354E81.DOC
STOP PIN DATA

MODIFY
Save modified data
8-5
TRUMALIFT SB/SE/SC
DATA
Module
Machines
Function button
CONFIGURATION
Establish the configuration of machine in the Data Module.
Procedure
Select the following in sequence:
DATA 2
LIFT SELECTION
LIFT SELECTION
MODIFY
Loading:
Select TRUMALIFT SB/SC
Unloading:
Select TRUMALIFT SE/SC
Save modified data
Loading with TRUMALIFT SB

Function button
DATA
LIFT GROUP 2
SB / SE / SC

Select TRUMALIFT SB for
loading
DATA 1
MODIFY
Save modified data
DATA 2
MODIFY
Save modified data
DATA 3
MODIFY
Save modified data
DATA 4
Code for material detector
MODIFY
Save modified data

8-6
STOP PIN DATA

DATA 1
S354E81.DOC
Unloading with TRUMALIFT SE

Function button
DATA
LIFT GROUP 2
SB/SE/SC

Select TRUMALIFT SE for
unloading
DATA 1
MODIFY
Save modified data
DATA 2
MODIFY
Save modified data
DATA 5
MODIFY
Save modified data
DATA 6
MODIFY
Save modified data
Loading and unloading with TRUMALIFT SC

Function button
DATA
LIFT GROUP 2
SB / SE / SC

Select TRUMALIFT SC for
loading and unloading
DATA 1
MODIFY
Save modified data
DATA 2
MODIFY
DATA 3
Save modified data

MODIFY
Save modified data
DATA 4
Enter code for material detector
MODIFY
Save modified data
DATA 5
MODIFY
Save modified data
DATA 6
MODIFY
Save modified data
STOP PIN DATA
DATA 1
MODIFY
Save modified data
S354E81.DOC
8-7
TRUMAGRIP
DATA
Module
Machines
Function button
CONFIGURATION
Set the fixed configuration of machine in the Data Module.
Procedure
Select the following in the sequence given:
DATA 2
GRIP SELECTION
Select TRUMAGRIP
MODIFY
Save modified data
GRIP

Select TRUMAGRIP
DATA 1
Establish grip disposal
Function button
DATA
MODIFY
Save modified data
TRUMASORT R4 or TRUMASORT S
DATA
Module
Machines
Function button
CONFIGURATION
Procedure
DATA 1
SORT R4/S /
DEFLECTOR
Select TRUMASORT R4 or
TRUMASORT S
8-8

"Sort/Double Cart"
MODIFY
Save modified data
S354E81.DOC
TRUMASORT L, Unloading Platform,

Shifting Cart, Double Cart, Storage Cart
DATA
Module:
Machines
Function button
DATA
Procedure
UNLOADING AREA
DATA 1
Palletizing: Establish units and

pallets
"Units"
CREATE OR
Establish TRUMASORT L or
unloading platform or shifting cart
or double cart or storage cart in the
next mask by selecting Create
Create a new unit
MODIFY OR
Modify a unit that already exists
DELETE
Delete an existing unit and all the

pallets connected to it
"Pallets"
MODIFY OR
Modify an existing pallet
S354E81.DOC
CREATE OR
Define the pallets belonging to the

selected unit with Create
Create a new pallet
DELETE
Delete an existing pallet
8-9
1.3
Function Buttons Frequently Used
Function button
MODIFY
Modifying data: The modified data contained in the mask are

stored to the data base.
The number of data blocks in the data base and in the selection
window remains the same.
Function button
CREATE
Creating a data block: A completely new data block is created. As

a rule, the entries in the mask header are made with the aid of an
option mask. All the other data fields remain temporarily empty
until they are also filled with the aid of sequence masks.
A new data block is added to the already-existing data blocks in
the data base and in the selection window.
Function button
DELETE
Deleting a data block: An already-existing data block is completely

deleted.
One data block less will be included in the selection window and in
the data base.
Function button
RETURN
Function button
CONTINUE
8-10
Return to the summary mask, if you are in a sequence mask,

or
return to the entry mask, if you are in an option mask.
Continue: Activate sequence masks.
S354E81.DOC
2.
Configuring Automation Components

in the DATA Module
You must establish the individual settings for the automation components of your machine in the DATA Module.
Using as examples the machines TC 600L Type 1 (operation:
SINUMERIK 840D) and TC 260 Type 1 (operation: Bosch CC 300),
this chapter will describe the default settings for the automation
components of these machines.
2.1
Machines
Configuration
Establishing Configuration of Machine
You can establish the configuration of your machine in the submenu

CONFIGURATION.
Choose your machine type from the selection list.
Using the function button CONTINUE will bring you to the
configuration of machine submenu DATA 1 and DATA 2.
Selecting TRUMASORT
Function button
DATA 1
Choose from the list "Sort/Double Cart" one of the two

determinations:
S354E81.DOC
Which sorting installation is available?

NONE
SORT R4/S/DEFLECTOR
Select the function button, if you are unloading small parts
through the flap or the chute of the machine into a
TRUMASORT R4 or a TRUMASORT S. With the TC 2000R,
the deflector is configured using this function button.
8-11
MACHINES, CONFIGURATION, DATA 1, "Sort/Double Cart"
Fig. 20163
The other function buttons in the list "Sort/Double Cart" have

no significance. The unloading platform and the automation
components TRUMASORT L, shifting cart, storage cart and
double cart are configured through selection of the function
button UNLOADING AREA under MACHINES, DATA.
8-12
S354E81.DOC
Establishing Automatic Loading and

Unloading
Function button
DATA 2
Select the following determinations for your automation components from the lists "Grip", "Loading", "Unloading":
MACHINES, CONFIGURATION, DATA 2
Fig. 20164
"Loading": Which TRUMALIFT is available for loading the

machine?
MANUAL: No lift is available.
LIFT SELECTION: Select a lift for loading your machine
from the field list of the sequence mask.
S354E81.DOC
"Grip": Which TRUMAGRIP is available for sheet skeleton

unloading?
NONE (The sheet skeleton is manually removed, either
with lift suction cups or with the lift grip).
GRIP SELECTION: Select TRUMAGRIP from the list field
of the sequence mask.
"Unloading": Which TRUMALIFT is available for unloading the

units?
MANUAL: No lift is available.
LIFT SELECTION: Select lift for unloading the units from
the list field of the sequence mask.
8-13
2.2
Machines
Data
Establishing Machine Data
You can establish the data of your automation components in the

submenu DATA.
Select your machine type from the selection list.
Selecting the function button CONTINUE will bring you to the
submenu DATA. The following function buttons (switches with
color recognition) are available for the configuration of the
automation components:
GRIP
UNLOADING AREA
SUCTION CUP DATA
LIFT GROUP 1 SHEETMASTER
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC
MACHINES, DATA and sequence masks
Fig. 20165
The stop pin must be tested again after each new

TRUMALIFT configuration.
If your machine is equipped with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster,
TRUMALIFT SB/SE/SC or has been modified ex works for a
later connection to the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1300 or
1600, then stop pin 2 must be activated: STOP PIN DATA,
DATA 1
( see Chapter 6: "Recording of Machine Data, Modifying
Stop Pin Data").
8-14
S354E81.DOC
Configuring Unloading with TRUMAGRIP

Function button
GRIP, DATA 1
TRUMAGRIP is for the extraction of remainder sheets and sheet

skeletons. Select from the list field of the option mask the "grip
type" of your machine or define a new grip type using the function
button CREATE. Confirm your choice with OK.

ToPs 300 contains the following allocations for TRUMALIFT and
TRUMAGRIP:
Machine
TRUMALIFT
TRUMAGRIP
SheetMaster 1250 (Lifting grip) SC/ SE 1300

SC/ SE 1600
260_1250
260_1500
SheetMaster 1000 (Lifting grip) SheetMaster 1250 (Lifting grip) SheetMaster 1300
500_1300
SheetMaster 1600
500_1600
SheetMaster 1306
500_1306
SheetMaster 1606
500_1606
The entries and switch settings of the option mask, "Grip data" and
function button DATA 1 correspond to the default settings for the
selected TRUMAGRIP.
Modifications are only to be undertaken when your configuration
differs from the default settings:
"Position (operators view)":

Position of the TRUMAGRIP (operator stands before the
machine): RIGHT or LEFT.
"Grip name": The grip name is displayed.
"Name of drawing": The name of the drawing is displayed.
"Traversing speed"*):
How quickly should the TRUMAGRIP proceed? Enter the
speed in [m/min].
"Traversing acceleration"*):
With which acceleration should the TRUMAGRIP proceed?
2
Determination of acceleration in [m/s ].
*) not supported in this version of ToPs 300
S354E81.DOC
8-15
"Standard Y pos.tr.guide rail"

In which Y position is the guide rail located during remainder
sheet extraction?
"Retract from clamp in DY":

Traversing path in Y direction, in order to move the remainder
sheet or the sheet skeleton from the clamp area.
"Number of Grippers (max. 2)"
Important!
"Transfer Position in X":

At which X position is the TRUMAGRIP to extract the
remainder sheet?
negative value: Grip is to the right (operator stands before
the machine):
positive value: Grip is to the left (operator stands before
the machine).
"1st gripper position in X", "1st gripper position in Y"

"2nd gripper position in X", "2nd gripper position in Y":
X and Y positions at which the two grippers are located.
TRUMAGRIP position right (operator stands before the machine):

all X positions are negative.
TRUMAGRIP position left (operator stands before the machine):
all X positions are positive.
8-16
S354E81.DOC
Establishing Palletizing in the Unloading Area

Function button
UNLOADING AREA,
DATA 1
Units and the accompanying pallets are configured in the

unloading area.
MACHINES, DATA, UNLOADING AREA ("Palletizing"), Data 1
Fig. 20166
Definition of a unit:
A unit takes up a group of pallets. It can be mobile or stationary. All
pallets on all unloading platforms belong to one unit, for example.
The following are available for selection as units.
Unloading platform
TRUMASORT L
Storage cart
Shifting cart
Double cart
S354E81.DOC
8-17
Definition of the Pallets:

A pallet is a site at which lift items can be placed. A pallet can be,
for example, a designated area, a European standard pallet or a
scrap bucket.
Pallets must always be referred to according to unit.
Definition of the unloading area:

More than one unit can be present in the unloading area of a
machine. For example: unloading platform for stationary pallets
and a TRUMASORT L for mobile pallets.
The function button UNLOADING AREA can be selected only
when a lift type for unloading has already been configured
under MACHINES, CONFIGURATION, DATA 2, "Unloading".
You can modify, create or delete data regarding units and pallets.
The function buttons MODIFY, CREATE and DELETE are available
for the list of the units and the list of the pallets assigned to them.
8-18
S354E81.DOC
Defining Units
Select a Unit (bar marked with black).
The function buttons can now be selected.
Units:
To view or modify the data of a selected unit.

"Number (ID)" and "Type" cannot be modified in this mask. In this
example of an unloading platform, the entry can be modified in the
field "Remark". All other function buttons are disabled.
Different function buttons and entry fields are enabled for the
mobile units TRUMASORT L, storage cart, shifting cart and double
cart.
Carry out the entries as described in the following section (Units:
function button CREATE).
View or modify the selected unit
S354E81.DOC
Fig. 20167
8-19
Units:
Function button CREATE
Create a new unit and enter the data connected with it.
Creating a new unit
Fig. 20168
Carry out the following entries:
"Number ID"
Enter a specific number for the unit. The following rules apply
for assigning numbers:
Each number (per unit) can be assigned only once for
each machine.
Number 0: Reserved for the unloading platform.
For that reason, only one unloading platform
can exist per machine.
For machines whose control systems are programmed with
M-functions and U-addresses (TC 500R, for example), the
following applies:
Number 2: first TRUMASORT L (L2) or double cart.
Number 3: second TRUMASORT L (L3) or double cart.
The Number (ID) in ToPs 300 must conform with the number of the TRUMASORT at the machine control (only in the
case of U-addresses).
For machines with control systems of the SINUMERIK 840D

type - tabular output in the NC text (TC 600L, for example), the
following applies:
Numbers 1 to 4: can be assigned freely to TRUMASORT L
and/or double carts.
Recommendation: Numbers 2 and 3 to be assigned as with
TC 500R.
8-20
S354E81.DOC
"Type"
Click onto the arrow symbol in the display field and select
desired unit (unloading platform, TRUMASORT L storage cart,
shifting cart, double cart).
"Remark"
Enter an appropriate text into the entry field. The remark(s) will
be shown in the TECHNOLOGY Module in the palletizing
designation of the unit and in the processing information
(Function button INFO; registration list palletizing information).
Recommendation: Enter a text that is informative.
"NC output: Y in Positions"

For units that can be positioned in the Y direction:
Presentation of the Y value in millimeters; typical for TRUMASORT L:
switch position NO
or
Presentation of the Y value as a position number, i.e. Y values
are fixed, predefined positions; typical for double carts: switch
position YES.
All other entry fields of this mask area are enabled. The entries
will allow the calculation of the position values to be more
closely specified in millimeters.
For non-mobile units (unloading platform), the switch is to be
set at NO.
"Starting position"
Enter Y value of the first position in [mm].
The pallet position in Y must concur with the starting position
in Y. If you enter pallets for this unit later, you must be careful
that the given starting position is within the pallet range. The
Y position of the pallet must be selected accordingly.
S354E81.DOC
"Starting number"
Enter the number of the first position (usual value: 1).
"Ending number"
Enter the number of the final position (usual value: 19).
8-21
Important!
"Distance between positions"

Enter the Y distance between two adjacent positions in [mm].
Examples: Y = 60 mm between TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1300
and double cart or storage cart.
Y = 75 mm between TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1600
and double cart or storage cart.
"Upper/lower carriage identical"
This function button can be selected only for double carts.
Switch position YES:
Upper and lower carriages are identical. Pallets need be
entered only for the upper carriage. The pallets for the lower
carriage are created automatically.
For TC 600L with operating version < 6.0: It is required that the
switch position be set at YES.
Switch position NO:
Pallets must be entered for both upper and lower carriages.
Number and size of the pallets can be different for upper and
lower carriages.
Example:
Double cart with positions 1 to 19 (starting number 1, ending
number 19) and a distance between positions of 60 mm. The
starting position (starting number 1) is located for Y = 60 mm.
The pallet position is at Y = 0 mm.
Example: UNIT, CREATE, double cart
8-22
Fig. 20171
S354E81.DOC
If a pallet position of Y = 0 is defined for a starting position of Y = 60 mm,

then the lift (Y lift zero position) will move to the position of Y = 60 mm
from pallet edge.
If the lower edge of the raised lift items coincides with the Y lift zero
position, then the lift items will be unloaded precisely at the starting
position a rare event. In other cases, the unloading position will
not coincide exactly with the starting position ( see Fig. 20232).
3
1
60 mm
1
2
3
Starting number 1
Starting position Y = 60 mm
Lift items
Ending number 19
4
5
Double cart (upper carriage)

Pallet with pallet position
Y = 0 mm
Positions: Double cart (upper carriage), pallet and lift items
Units:
Function button DELETE
Fig. 20232
The selected unit and all the data connected with it are deleted.
When a unit is deleted, all pallets are simultaneously deleted

that were assigned to that unit. Pallets always possess an
unambiguous connection to a particular unit!
S354E81.DOC
8-23
For your understanding

Definition of terms:
Lift items
Lift items are items (for example finished parts, scrap, sheet skeletons, residual strips) that are taken up and unloaded using a lift.
Each unloading of a lift corresponds to one lift item.
Stack item
A stack item can be made up of one or more identical lift items

(for example finished parts).
Stack items are identical when the following conditions are met:
the geometries of the lift items are identical,
the sheet thicknesses of the lift items are identical,
the lift items are all raised up in the same manner by the
lift. Example: For all finished parts with identical geometry,
the lift fixes each time upon the same place of the finished
part.
Stack
8-24
A stack corresponds to the total of all lift items that are stacked at
one position. All the lift items of a stack must be made up of the
same kind of stack item. For example, only identical finished parts
can make up a stack.
S354E81.DOC
Defining Pallets
Prerequisite:
First select the unit (bar marked with black), upon which pallets are
to be placed.
Select a pallet (bar marked with black).
The function buttons MODIFY and DELETE can be used.
Pallets:
Viewing or modifying the data of a selected pallet.
Viewing or modifying a selected pallet
Pallets:
Function button CREATE
Create a new pallet and enter the data connected with it.
Carry out the following entries:
S354E81.DOC
Fig. 20169
"Pallet number (ID)"

Enter an unambiguous number for the pallet. The following
rules exist for assigning numbers:
The numbers must be unambiguous for the entire unloading
area of the machine. When assigning pallet numbers, it is
possible that pallets already existing in connection with
other units must be taken into consideration.
8-25
For machines whose control systems are programmed with

M-functions and U-addresses (TC 500R, for example), the
following applies:
The numbers can be freely assigned, but must be
unambiguous.
For machines with control systems of the SINUMERIK 840D
type - tabular output in the NC text (TC 600L, for example), the
following applies:
The numbers of the pallets in ToPs must correspond to the
numbering of the pallets of the control system.
"Remark"
Text can be entered freely into the entry field. The remark will
be displayed in the TECHNOLOGY Module in the palletizing
designation of the unit and in the processing information
(Function button INFO; message list palletizing information).
Recommendation: Enter a text that is informative.
8-26
"Stack item"
Click the arrow in the display field and select one of the
following stack item types:
Finished part
only finished parts may be loaded on the selected pallet.
Scrap
only scrap may be loaded on the selected pallet.
S354E81.DOC
Sheet skeleton
only sheet skeletons may be loaded on the selected pallet.
Mixed
all stack item types may be loaded on the selected pallet.
The restriction to finished parts/ scrap/ sheet skeleton holds
for automatic palletizing. When done interactively, a finished
part could be unloaded onto a scrap pallet, for example.
Creating a new pallet. Example: TC 600L with an unloading platform
S354E81.DOC
Fig. 20170
8-27
"Position X, Y"
The position of the pallet datum point in reference to the punch
midpoint is illustrated in the following drawing.
The reference edge of the pallet has in each case the smallest
distance to the punching head.
3
X
+X
Y
+Y
-X
+Y
1
2
Pallet left-hand lift

Pallet datum point
3
4
Punching head midpoint

Pallet datum point
Pallet right-hand lift
Position of the pallet datum point in reference to the punching head midpoint
(operator view)
Enter the X- and Y position as follows:
8-28
Lift (Example TRUMALIFT SheetMaster) is positioned to

the left of the machine. The operator stands before the
machine.
Position of pallets
X-value: positive
Y-value: positive.
Lifts (Example TRUMALIFT SC/SE) is positioned to the
right of the machine. The operator stands before the
machine.
Position of pallets
X-value: negative
Y-value: positive.
S354E81.DOC
If the pallets lie on units which are programmed into

positions in Y-direction, then the Y-position of the pallet must
be made to correspond with the first programmable Yposition of the unit.
"Dimension X, Y"
Dimensions of the pallet in X- and Y-directions. The values are
to be entered as positives.
"Under table"
The pallet is located entirely or partially under the machine
table.
The machine table must first be moved to the rear when
unloading is done onto a pallet "under table". This causes an
increase of the machine time.
Switch position NO:
The pallets are located outside of the machine table.
"Fixed Position"
All stacks upon this pallet were assembled upon the same
position. Application example for this setting: Scrap bucket.
Switch position NO:
There is no fixed position on this pallet for items to be stacked.
"Position X, Y": In cases where "Fixed Position" YES was

selected:
Establish a fixed position upon which lift items is to be
unloaded, based upon the pallet datum point.
TRUMALIFT SheetMaster:
The lower left-hand corner of the rectangle surrounding the lift
items comes to rest upon the fixed position. Coordinates: +X +Y.
TRUMALIFT SC, SE:
The lower right-hand corner of the rectangle surrounding the lift
items comes to rest upon the fixed position.
Coordinates: +X +Y.
S354E81.DOC
8-29
4
3
5
+Y
+Y
1
+X
1
2
3
4
Pallet datum point

Fixed Position +X, +Y based upon
the pallet datum point: Lower lefthand corner (surrounding rectangle)
of the lift items
- with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
Pallet
Lift items
+X
5
6
Rectangle surrounding the lift items

Fixed Position +X, +Y based
upon the pallet datum point:
Lower right-hand corner (surrounding rectangle) of the lift items
- with TRUMALIFT SC, SE.
Pallet with pallet datum point and fixed position (from the ToPs viewpoint)
"Max. Stack Height"

Maximum height of stacks that can be placed upon this pallet.
If zero is entered as the maximum stack height, then no
stack can be assembled at this position.
"Cart Number"
Prerequisite:
A cart number can be established only if a double cart is
present with different upper and lower carriages.
Click onto the arrow symbol in the display field and select
upper or lower carriage upon which the pallet is to rest.
In the case of double carts with identical upper and lower
carriages, pallets will be assigned to only one carriage. The
pallets upon the identical second carriage will be automatically
created by the system.
"Pallets"
Function button DELETE
8-30
The selected pallet is deleted.
S354E81.DOC
Establishing Suction Cup Data

Function button
SUCTION CUP DATA
Select your "Lift type" in the list field found in the option mask, or
define a new lift type using the function button CREATE. Confirm
your choice with OK.
MACHINES, DATA, SUCTION CUP DATA, "Lift type"
Function button
SUCTION CUP DATA, DATA 1
Fig. 20172
Suction cup loader:

The default values of the suction cup loader are dependent upon
the lift type. They are entered into the mask by the system itself.
The entries are modified in accordance with the default values and
not in accordance with your configuration.
The entries in SUCTION CUP DATA, DATA 1 and SUCTION CUP DATA, DATA 2 are identical for all TRUMALIFT
SheetMasters and TRUMALIFT.
The entries in DATA 1 and DATA 2 differ for TRUMALIFT SB/SE.
S354E81.DOC
8-31
Machines, Data, Suction cup data, Data 1
Fig. 20173
Choose from the list field a suction cup (line marked with black).
The data are transferred to the entry fields. The modifications
undertaken in the entry fields will not be saved until you click upon
the function button MODIFY.
"Suction cup type": Which type of suction cup is being referred

to?
CARRIER = Type 1
Carrier suction cups are suction cups that attach
themselves firmly through vacuum suction to the metal
sheets and then transport them during loading and
unloading procedures.
SWIVEL = Type 2
Swivel cups enable an exact loading of the sheet metal
using the machines workpiece clamps during loading.
STRIPPER = Type 3
Within the range of the stripper cup, the topmost sheet
panel is made to buckle during lifting. This causes the
sheet panels to be separated.
"Vacuum": YES, NO. *)
*) This is not supported in this version of ToPs
8-32
S354E81.DOC
"Sheet sensing"
Does this suction cup have a sensor for sheet sensing?: YES,
NO.
"Max. number programmable": What is the maximum number

of suction cups that can be programmed for loading?
"Suction cup No.": Enter the sequence number of the suction

cup. In the case of coupled cups, the sequential number will be
repeated, corresponding to the quantity of the coupled suction
cups.
Example: Three suction cups are coupled to one another. The
sequential suction cup number is four. The suction
cup number four is assigned to each one of the three
cups.
"Coupled cup No.": What is the number of the coupled suction

cup?
Example: Three suction cups are coupled to one another. The
sequential number is four. The suction cup number
four is assigned to each one of the three cups. Each
of the three cups is assigned a coupled cup number
(one, two or three).
Couple cup number zero means: The cup is not
coupled.
"X-pos.": Which position does the suction cup have within the
suction frame in the X-direction?
Enter the X-dimension in [mm].
"Y-pos.": Which position does the suction cup have within the
suction frame in the Y-direction?
Enter the Y-dimension in [mm].
"Max. diam.": What is the diameter of the suction cup?

Enter diameter in [mm]
"Min. diam.": The cup continues to possess the maximum

carrying capacity down to this diameter.
Enter diameter in [mm]
S354E81.DOC
"Kind of suction cup": Which kind of suction cup is assigned to

the selected suction cup type?
STANDARD
COUPLED
Coupled suction cups are carrier cups which are activated
together with other cups. Coupled cups cannot be
activated individually.
"Carr. capac.": What is the maximum carrying capacity of the

cup?
Enter the carrying capacity in [N].
8-33
Function button
SUCTION CUP DATA, DATA 2
Unloading cups:
The default values of the suction cup unloader are dependent upon
the lift type. They are entered into the mask by the system itself.
The entries are modified in accordance with the default values and
not in accordance with your configuration.
The entries in SUCTION CUP DATA, DATA 1 and SUCTION CUP DATA, DATA 2 are identical for all TRUMALIFT
SheetMasters and for TRUMALIFT SC.
The entries in DATA 1 and DATA 2 differ for TRUMALIFT
SB/SE.
MACHINES, DATA, SUCTION CUP DATA, DATA 2
Fig. 20174
The mask description SUCTION CUP DATA, DATA 2 can be found

under: Function button SUCTION CUP DATA, DATA 1.
8-34
S354E81.DOC
Configuring TRUMALIFT SheetMaster

Function button
LIFT GROUP 1
SHEETMASTER
The Lift group 1 SheetMaster contains different lifts, depending

upon the machine selected. These lifts are equipped for the
unloading of sheet skeletons and remainder sheets with and
without gripping devices. Machines with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster
having no gripping devices for unloading of sheet skeletons can be
provided with an additional TRUMAGRIP (option). see Chapter:
Configuring Unloading with TRUMAGRIP.
Lifting grip
TRUMAGRIP
200
yes
no
1000
yes
no
1250
yes
no
1300
no
yes
1600
no
yes
1306
no
yes
1606
no
yes
LIFT GROUP 1 SHEETMASTER, "Lift type"
S354E81.DOC
Fig. 20175
8-35
Select your "Lift type" in the list field found in the option mask, or
define a new lift type using the function button CREATE. Confirm
your choice with OK.
On the left-hand side of the nearby TRUMALIFT SheetMaster
pedestal there is a type plate (true for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster
after January 1995). This contains data concerning the
machine number, production year and production version
number of your TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
The program version number is important for entry in ToPs
300 (LIFT GROUP 1 SHEETMASTER, DATA 1, "Name of
Lift"), because the number contains the original delivery
configuration of the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster. Example:
SM 1606 V 105.
Type plate: TRUMALIFT SheetMaster
8-36
Fig. 17198
S354E81.DOC
Function button
LIFT GROUP 1
SHEETMASTER, DATA 1
"General Lift data" of your TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
LIFT GROUP 1 SHEETMASTER, DATA 1 "General lift data"
Fig. 20176
The entries and switch settings of the mask correspond to the

default settings for the selected TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
"NC output format": Direct or preparatory?
S354E81.DOC
"Position (operator view)": Is the lift positioned to the left or to

the right of the machine?
Operator view: You are standing in front of the machine.
TRUMALIFT SheetMasters are always positioned to the left of
the machine!
"Sheet thickness detector":

How does the testing procedure function that determines
whether just one sheet has been taken up for loading?
MANUAL
A sheet thickness detector (double sheet detector) is present
that cannot be programmed. There is no sheet thickness
detector present.
MECHANICAL
Applies to all TRUMALIFT SheetMasters: The sheet thickness is checked with an armature probe.
INDUCTIVE
The sheet thickness is checked inductively. The sheet thickness detector is programmable.
8-37
"Name of Lift": The name of the lift corresponds to the program

version number on the type plate (only for TRUMALIFT
SheetMaster after 1/95 see Fig. 17198).

A drawing of the lift is available for displaying the TRUMALIFT
SheetMaster in ToPs 300. The names of the drawings are
contained in the directory "\TRUMPF\TOPS_ZCH\*.*".
"Max. carrying capacity": What is the maximum allowable

weight in [kg] that the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster is allowed to
transport?
"Max. sheet thickness": Sheet thickness is displayed in [mm].
"Min. sheet dimension in X", "Min. sheet dimension in Y"

"Max. sheet dimension in X", "Max. sheet dimension in Y":
Minimum and maximum sheet dimensions that can be
transported by the lift are displayed. Should one of the four
limitations not be observed, then manual loading will be
generated.
"X-dim. sheet edge-Lift zero pt":

X-dim. measured in [mm] from the sheet edge to the zero point
of the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
8-38
"Prepare loading at end of program":

Is a new sheet to be brought forward, before the machine is
finished with the sheet processing?
NOT POSSIBLE
The preparatory loading is not possible in any case and is
organized with this setting as the standard. The corresponding option in the TECHNOLOGY Module is not enabled.
NO
The preparatory loading is possible, but should not be
preselected. The option YES/NO can nevertheless be
selected in the TECHNOLOGY Module.
YES
The preparatory loading is possible and should be
"X-dim. sheet edge-Lift ref. pt.":

X-dim. measured in [mm] from the sheet edge to the reference
point of the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
S354E81.DOC
Function button
LIFT GROUP 1
SHEETMASTER, DATA 2
Additional "General lift data" regarding your TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
LIFT GROUP 1 SHEETMASTER, DATA 2 "General lift data"
Fig. 20177E

"X-offset value zero pt. of suction carriage / tool center"

Offset value is displayed in [mm].
"Safety offset in addition to X offset":

The safety offset value in [mm] which is to be calculated is
displayed.
The X offset value is the measurement of the distance that the
sheet edge is to be moved away from the stop pin or the tool
center during loading before the speed is reduced.
"Are speed, acceleration and sheet thickness programmable?":

YES, NO *).
*) The position of the switch is not taken into consideration for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster
S354E81.DOC
8-39
Function button
LIFT GROUP 1
SHEETMASTER, DATA 3
Data for "Loading" with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
LIFT GROUP 1 SHEETMASTER, DATA 3 "Loading"
Fig. 20178

"NC output format": STEPS or %.
"NC output speed" STEPS:

Each speed step is assigned to a specific speed in [m/min].
"NC output Acceleration" STEPS:

Each acceleration step is assigned to a specific acceleration in
2
[m/s ].
Step
1
10
20
30
50
80
8-40
% of maximum speed,
% of maximum acceleration
100
S354E81.DOC
"X dimension waiting position": Waiting position in [mm] while

loading in the X-direction?
"Max.sht thickn. stripping": What is the maximum sheet thickness in [mm] that the sheet panel can have and still be able to
be stripped?
During stripping, each sheet is separated with the aid of a
stripper suction cup. If the sheet is too thick, the suction power
will not be enough to bend the sheet up. In this case, the
stripper suction cup is not activated.
"X dim. sheet edgemachine":

Corresponds to the pick-up position of the loading sheet.
Enter the X-dimension for the distance from sheet edge
machine in [mm].
Function button
LIFT GROUP 1
SHEETMASTER, DATA 5
"Y dim. sheet edgemachine":

Corresponds to the offset of the loading stack when measured
from the lift zero position.
Enter the Y-dimension for the distance from sheet edge
machine in [mm].
Data for "Unloading" with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
LIFT GROUP 1 SHEETMASTER, DATA 5 "Unloading"
S354E81.DOC
Fig. 20179
8-41

"Number of carrier cups", "Number of coupled cups": How

many carrier and coupled cups does the lift have?
"NC output format": STEPS or %.
"NC output speed":

"NC output acceleration": in STEPS or %.
see LIFT GROUP 1 SHEETMASTER, DATA 3 in this
Chapter.
"1st dropping height in Z":

Statement of minimum height for the regular dropping of parts
onto units which are located under the machine table. The 1st
dropping height corresponds to the value of the maximum
dropping height ( see DATA 6, "Max. dropping height" in this
Chapter). A "soft dropping" or "depositing" is not possible for
the area under the machine table *).
"DY- retract from clamp":

Indicate the length of the Y-traverse path required to move a
part out of the clamp area.
"Traversing speed":
With which speed in [m/min] should the traverse motion for
release from the clamp be executed?
*) not supported in this version of ToPs 300.
8-42
S354E81.DOC
Function button
LIFT GROUP 1
SHEETMASTER, DATA 6
Data for "Unloading" with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
LIFT GROUP 1 SHEETMASTER, DATA 6 "Unloading"
Fig. 20180

"Max. dropping height" is the height for "Regular dropping".

The lift drops the items from the maximum height when
"Regular dropping" has been selected in the TECHNOLOGY
Module.
"Lift stroke Y": Traverse path for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster

when unloading after laser processing (only for TC 600L).
"Software limit switch laser X axis": Measurement < 0, to which

the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster can travel when the laser is
activated.
S354E81.DOC
"Min. dropping height" is the height for "Soft dropping". The lift
drops the items from this height when "Soft dropping" has been
"Min. traverse pos.Y punching": Minimum position for traversing in

Y-direction of the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster during punching.
8-43
"Min. traverse pos.Y laser": Minimum position for traversing in

Y-direction of the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster during laser
processing.
"Last punching stroke fr. Lift": Function button YES/NO.

The machine triggers the last stroke once the TRUMALIFT
SheetMaster has reached the position for unloading the item.
Machine-specific presetting:
For TC 600L: Function button to YES.
For all other machines: Function button to NO.
Important!
Machine-specific default settings:

For TC 600L: Function button to YES.
For TC 500R: Function button at YES is possible
For all other machines: Function button to NO.
Important!
8-44
"Last stroke after sucking": YES/NO.

YES: This setting ensures that a part is not separated out
before the suction cup has attached itself onto that part. This
allows a safe extraction of the part.
"Safety offset in addition to X offset":

Value in [mm], which is to be calculated as a safety offset at
the minimum X-pick-up position.
Default for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster: 0 mm
Default for TRUMALIFT SE,SC: 1 mm.
S354E81.DOC
Function button
LIFT GROUP 1
SHEETMASTER, DATA 8
"Unloading using grippers on the Lift"

Data for unloading with grippers on the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
LIFT GROUP 1 SHEETMASTER, DATA 8

"Unloading using grippers on the Lift"
Fig. 20181
Example: TC 500R Type 2 with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250.
The entries of the mask correspond to the default settings for the
selected TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
"1st gripper position in X", "1st gripper position in Y", "2nd

gripper position in X", "2nd gripper position in Y": Enter the Xand Y-positions for each lifting grip.
S354E81.DOC
"Number of Grippers (max. 2)"

The TRUMALIFT SheetMasters 1000 and 1250 are equipped
with a maximum of two grippers.
The default versions of the TRUMALIFT SheetMasters 1300,
1600, 1306 and 1606 are not equipped with lifting grips.
Skeleton sheets can be extracted using TRUMAGRIP.

Enter the traverse direction in Y-direction, in order to draw
back the opened clamp.
8-45
"Min.Y-position tr. guide rail"

At which Y-position is the sheet skeleton to be transferred to
the Lifting grip?
8-46
"Transfer position Lift in X"

At which X-position is the sheet skeleton to be taken up by the
Lifting grip?
Enter "X position of sheet skeleton".

What is the unloading position of the sheet skeleton when it is
extracted with the Lifting grip?
S354E81.DOC
Basic Data in ToPs 300 - Overview

Data Sheets
The following data sheets are information sheets for your personal
use. They are for securing the data for your TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
Each data sheet contains a drawing and data regarding the automation components.
The drawing shows the machine installations with automation
components, as it is realized in ToPs 300. The drawings present
the viewpoint found when standing in front of the machine.
Basic Data in the

DATA Module
S354E81.DOC
In the drawing, the basic data are made visible which are used in
the Data Module masks.
The values can be determined using the data found in the
operators manual. In doing so, take note of whether the measurements refer to the Lift reference point (this can be a suction cup or
a screw) or to the NC reference point (machine zero point).
8-47
Data Sheet for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250: Loading
Basic Data for Loading: TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 with TC 500R

In parentheses: Alternate Data for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250
with TC 260
8-48
Fig. 9227
S354E81.DOC
Data sheet for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250: Unloading
Basic data for unloading: TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 with TC 500R

In parentheses: Alternate Data for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250
with TC 260
S354E81.DOC
Fig. 9228
8-49
Data sheet for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1300 and

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1306: Loading and Unloading
Front view (upper illustration) and view from above (lower
illustration)
Basic data for loading and unloading: TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1300

and TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1306
Fig. 11523
For legend, see next page
8-50
S354E81.DOC
Legend for Fig. 11523:

1
Machine
Support table
TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1300 and TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1306
Loading stack (on pallet)
Unloading platform
European standard pallets
Finished parts stack
Unloading area under table
Tool center (punching)
11
Max. stack height unloading (European standard pallet + finished parts stack)
12
Max. dropping height (1st Z dropping height)
13
Min. dropping height (2nd Z dropping height)
14
Min. distance between stacks
15
Max. loading stack height (pallet + loading stack)
16
X-coordinates Lift reference point
17
Y-value: tool center to sheet edge

(Y-value: sheet edge-machine; loading)
Max. X-sheet dimension
(X-pallet dimension; loading)
Max. Y-sheet dimension
(Y-pallet dimension; loading)
X-dimension: sheet edge-lift zero position
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Distance X-coordinate reference point to the sheet edge (loading)

(X-dimension: sheet edge-lift reference point)
Unloading area outside the machine table
(X-pallet dimension; unloading)
Y-dimension pedestal
(Y-pallet dimension; unloading)
Distance tool center to sheet edge; loading
(X-dimension: sheet edge-machine; loading)
Beginning of unloading area outside the machine table
(X-offset: pallet-machine; unloading)
X-dimension: Waiting position during loading
27 *)
Beginning of unloading area within machine table

(X-position scrap, 1st X-dropping area)
28
End of unloading area within machine table
(2nd X-dropping area)
sheet skeleton extraction**)
*) for TRUMASORT R4: 1800 mm

**) Addition: Sheet skeleton unloading takes place, depending upon the size, at positions which are 725
S354E81.DOC
8-51
Data sheet for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1600 and

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1606: Loading and Unloading
Front view (upper illustration) and view from above (lower
illustration)
Basic data for loading and unloading: TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1600

and TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1606
Fig. 11524
For legend, see next page
8-52
S354E81.DOC
Legend for Fig. 11524:

1
Machine
Support table
TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1600 and TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1606
Loading stack (on pallet)
Unloading platform
European standard pallets
Finished parts stack
Unloading area under table
Tool center (punching)
11
Max. stack height unloading (European standard pallet + finished parts stack)
12
Max. dropping height (1st Z-dropping height)
13
Min. dropping height (2nd Z-dropping height)
14
Min. distance between stacks
15
Max. stack height loading (pallet + loading stack)
16
X-coordinates reference point Lift
17
Y-dimension: Tool center to sheet edge

(Y-dimension: sheet edge-machine; loading)
Max. X-sheet dimension
(X-pallet dimension; loading)
Max. Y-sheet dimension
(Y-pallet dimension; loading)
X-dimension: sheet edge-lift zero position
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
Distance X-coordinates reference point to the sheet edge (loading)

(X-dimension: sheet edge-lift reference point)
Unloading area outside the machine table
(X-pallet dimension; unloading)
Y-dimension pedestal
(Y-pallet dimension; unloading)
Distance tool center to sheet edge; loading
(X-dimension: sheet edge-machine; loading)
Beginning of unloading area outside the machine table
(X-offset: pallet-machine; unloading)
X-dimension: Waiting position during loading
27 *)
Beginning of unloading area within machine table

(X-position scrap, 1st X-dropping area)
28
End of unloading area within machine table
(2nd X-dropping area)
sheet skeleton extraction **)
*) for TRUMASORT R4: 1800 mm

**) Addition: Sheet skeleton unloading takes place, depending upon the size, at positions which are 725
S354E81.DOC
8-53
Problems and Supports

Problem
Solution
Sheet hits against stop pin during loading. Pick-up position of the loading stack does not coincide with the real position of the
loading stack.
Modify U16 with dimension A.
Correct the position of the loading stack.
Modify U18 with dimension E.
Grip unloading with SM 1250 leads to
error message from the machine.
Grip extraction position lies within the triggering range for emergency shut-off of
the lift control.
Modify the G-Parameters of the U12.
Correct triggering range.
Grip unloading with SM 1250 in ToPs 300

leads to following error message from the
machine: "Gripper cannot reach left/right
sheet edge by ...mm". Even when the
transverse rail travels as far as the end of
the crossing, the SM is still unable to
reach the sheet edge with the gripper.
Modify loading position [DATA] [MACHINES] [DATA] [CLAMP] [DATA 8].
Suction cups, which are on the machine

in complete contact with the metal sheet,
are not activated in the NC program.
Check suction cup position in the data base.
Clamp disposal does not function on the

machine with the SM 1250 Gripper
grasps empty space.
Correct U12 Parameters through reduction of the G variables.
Lift cannot separate the metal sheets

individually.
Use fanning magnet.
Reposition.
In the case of the TC 500R, with 2500 mm working range, a test can be made
to determine if it would suffice to have the grip positions in the data base
slightly altered (as a rule, a secure gripping of the sheet edge is also possible
when the grippers advance 5 mm less closely to the sheet). For this, the
dimensions of the 1st and 2nd X grip position can be reset from 2045 to 2040
in [DATA] [MACHINES] [DATA] [LIFT GROUP 1] [DATA 8]. This should be
attempted in any case!
Correct the position of the loading stack.
Modify U16 with dimension A (stripper suction cup 25 is activated only below
predefined sheet thicknesses [default: 2 mm]).
Check 1st and 2nd dimensions of X-grip position in [DATA] [MACHINES]
[DATA] [LIFT GROUP 1] [DATA 8].
Ensure that the stripper suction cup 25 lies on the sheet and that it is activated.
For sheets with smaller spread in Y, the stripper suction cup must also be
displaced (in the data base as well). The best position is in the outermost righthand sheet corner (operators view) across from the fanning magnets.
Place small distancing pieces between the sheets on the sheet loading stack.
These must however extend far enough out of the sheet stack that they fall to
the side of the stack when the sheets are removed from above (otherwise the
pieces will be transported on the machine table!).
8-54
S354E81.DOC
Problem
Solution
After the finished parts stack has reached

an approximate height of 10-20 mm, the
lift comes to a stop during depositing of
the next finished part.
No suction cup with an unloading sheet bero6) was used in the NC Program for
unloading the finished part (these suction cups are marked in the data base
under [DATA] [MACHINES] [DATA] [SUCTION CUP DATA] [DATA 2] with the
switch "Sheet sensing").
Unloading sheet bero is defective on the suction cup.
During loading / unloading, one or more

suction cups draws air and emits a highpitched whistle.
Check suction cup position in the data base / on the lift.

Check the position of the loading stack.
Check NC program.
Check C and D dimensions.
6) Sheet beros are sensors for registering the deflection of the suction cups upwards after they touch the ground. The
SM 1250, SM 1300 and SM 1600 possess three suction cups with one sheet bero, whereby two are responsible for
unloading, and one for loading.
S354E81.DOC
8-55
Configuring TRUMALIFT SB/SE/SC

TRUMALIFT SB for loading, TRUMALIFT SE for unloading and
TRUMALIFT SC for loading and unloading have no gripping device
for sheet skeleton extraction.
They can be additionally equipped with a TRUMAGRIP (Option).
see Chapter: Configuring Unloading with TRUMAGRIP.
TRUMALIFT
TRUMAGRIP
Lifting grip
possible
SB
yes
no
SE
yes
no
SC
yes
no
Loading and Unloading with TRUMALIFT SC

Function button
The Lift group 2 SB/SE/SC contains different lift types, depending

upon the selected machine. Select your TRUMALIFT SC in
accordance with your configuration of machine.
8-56
Fig. 20192
S354E81.DOC
Function button
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC,
DATA 1
"General lift data" of your TRUMALIFT SC.
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, Data 1, "General lift data"
Fig. 20193

default settings for the selected TRUMALIFT SC.
"NC output format": Direct or preparatory? Only direct is

possible.
S354E81.DOC
"Position (operators view)": Is the lift positioned to the left or to

the right of the machine? Operators view: You are standing in
front of the machine.
TRUMALIFT SC: ON THE RIGHT

MANUAL
A sheet thickness detector (double sheet detector) is
present that cannot be programmed. There is no sheet
thickness detector present.
MECHANICAL
Only SheetMaster: The sheet thickness is checked with an
armature probe.
INDUCTIVE
Applies to all TRUMALIFT SheetMasters: The sheet thickness is checked inductively. The sheet thickness detector
is programmable.
8-57
"Name of Lift": The lift name is displayed.

A drawing of the lift is available for displaying the TRUMALIFT SC
in ToPs 300. The names of the drawings are contained in the
directory "\TRUMPF\TOPS_ZCH\*.*".

weight in [kg] that the TRUMALIFT SC is allowed to transport?

generated.

X-dimension measured in [mm] from the sheet edge to the
zero point of the TRUMALIFT SC
8-58

NOT POSSIBLE
organized with this setting as the default. The
corresponding option in the TECHNOLOGY Module is not
enabled.
NO
YES

X-dimension measured in [mm] from the sheet edge to the
reference point of the TRUMALIFT SC.
S354E81.DOC
Function button
DATA 2
Additional "General lift data" regarding your TRUMALIFT SC.
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, DATA 2, "General lift data"
Fig. 20194

"X-offset zero pt of suction carriage / tool center"

"Safety offset in addition to X-offset":

The calculated safety offset value in [mm] which is to be
subtracted is displayed.
The X-offset value is the measurement of the distance that the
S354E81.DOC

YES, NO.
Default setting: NO.
YES for a TASC 100 Lift operation.
8-59
Function button
DATA 3
Data for "Loading" with TRUMALIFT SC.
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, DATA 3, "Lift data"
Fig. 20195

"NC output format": STEPS or %. Fixed setting: STEPS.
"NC output speed" STEPS (only with TASC 100 Lift operation):
Each speed step is assigned to a specific speed in [m/min].
"NC output acceleration" STEPS (only with TASC 100 Lift

2
operation): A specific acceleration in [m/s ] is assigned to each
acceleration step.
Step
1
10
20
30
50
80
8-60
% of maximum speed,
100
S354E81.DOC
"X-value waiting position": Waiting position in [mm] while

"Max.sht thickn. stripping": What is the maximum sheet

thickness in [mm] that the sheet panel can have and still be
able to be stripped?
will not be enough to buckle the sheet. In this case, the stripper
suction cup is not activated.
"X-dim. sheet edgemachine":

Enter the X-dimensions for the distance from sheet edge
machine in [mm].
Function button
DATA 4
"Y-dim. sheet edgemachine"

Enter the Y-dimensions for the distance from sheet edge
machine in [mm].
"Code for material detector"

The inductive double sheet detector (code for material detector) is
supported. The measured values can be entered into the memory
storage positions 0 to 99 in the data base.
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, DATA 4, "Code for material detector"
S354E81.DOC
Fig. 20196
8-61
Proceed as follows:
"Material" Function button SELECTION: An option mask appears.

Choose a material from the selection list. Except for the
"Material code", the values are entered automatically into the
DATA 4 mask.
"Material code": Enter the material code. The values between

0 and 99 must correspond to the storage positions of the
machine operating system. You have already reserved the
storage positions in the machine control. Number 0 stands for:
no measurement.

You assign the values 1 to 99 as follows:
Carry out a measurement with the double sheet detector
and the desired material (for example St37-20).
Store the measurement result in one of the storage
positions 1 - 99 in the machine control.
"1" for St37-20, for example.
Enter this number as "Material code" in ToPs 300.
Once you have entered all the data including the material code,
click upon the function button CREATE. The data is taken up in the
list under the entry fields.
8-62
S354E81.DOC
Function button
LIFT GROUP SB/SE/SC,
DATA 5
Data for "Unloading" with TRUMALIFT SC.
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, DATA 5, "Unloading"
Fig. 20197


many carrier and coupled cups does the Lift have?
"NC output speed":

see LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, DATA 3 in this Chapter.
"1st dropping height in Z"*):
*) The value has no significance for TRUMALIFT SC/SE.
S354E81.DOC
8-63
Function button
DATA 6
"DY - retract from clamp":

Indicates the length of the Y-traverse path required to move a
"Traversing speed":
retraction from the clamp be executed?
Data for "Unloading" with TRUMALIFT SC.
Fig. 20198

Lift stroke in Y: Traverse path for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster

8-64
"Min. dropping height" is the height for "Soft dropping".
"Software limit switch laser X-axis": Dimension > 0, to which

the TRUMALIFT SC can travel while the laser is activated.
S354E81.DOC
"Min. traverse pos.Y laser": Minimum position for traversing in

Y-direction of the TRUMALIFT SC during laser processing.

Fixed setting: NO.

Fixed setting: NO.
S354E81.DOC
"Min. traverse pos.Y punching": Minimum position for traversing in

Y-direction of the TRUMALIFT SC during punch processing.

Default for TRUMALIFT SE, SC: 1 mm.
8-65
Function button
DATA 8
"Grip disposal on the Lift"
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, DATA 8, "Grip disposal on the Lift"
Fig. 20199
Make no entries in this mask! TRUMALIFT SB/SE/SC possess

no Lifting grips.
8-66
S354E81.DOC
Loading with TRUMALIFT SB

Function button

upon the selected machine. Select your TRUMALIFT SB in accordance with your configuration of machine.
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, "Lift type"
Function button
DATA 1
"General Lift data" of your TRUMALIFT SB.
S354E81.DOC
Fig. 20182
Fig. 20183
8-67

default settings for the selected TRUMALIFT SB.

possible.

MANUAL
MECHANICAL
Applies to all TRUMALIFT SheetMasters: The sheet thickness is checked with an armature probe.
INDUCTIVE
Applies to all TRUMALIFT SBs: The sheet thickness is
checked inductively. The sheet thickness detector is programmable.

NOT POSSIBLE
enabled.
NO
YES
"Name of Lift": The Lift name is displayed.
8-68

TRUMALIFT SB: LEFT.
"Name of drawing": The name of drawing is displayed.

A drawing of the lift is available for displaying the TRUMALIFT
SB in ToPs 300. The names of the drawings are contained in
the directory "\TRUMPF\TOPS_ZCH\*.*".
S354E81.DOC

generated.

of the TRUMALIFT SB.
Function button
DATA 2

weight in [kg] that the TRUMALIFT SB is allowed to transport?

point of the TRUMALIFT SB.
Additional "General lift data" regarding your TRUMALIFT SB.
S354E81.DOC
Fig. 20184
8-69



displayed.
Function button
DATA 3

YES, NO.
Data for "Loading" with TRUMALIFT SB.
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, DATA 3, "loading"
8-70
Fig. 20185
S354E81.DOC

A specific speed is assigned to each speed step in [m/min].
A specific acceleration is assigned to each acceleration step in
2
[m/s ].
Step
% of maximum speed,
10
20
30
50
80
100
"X-value waiting position": Waiting position in [mm] while

"Max.sht thickn. stripping": What is the maximum sheet

thickness in [mm] that the sheet panel can have and still be
able to be stripped?
will not be enough to buckle the sheet. In this case, the stripper
suction cup is not activated.
"X-dim. sheet edgemachine":

Enter the X-dimension for the distance from sheet edge
machine in [mm].
S354E81.DOC
"Y-dim. sheet edgemachine":

Enter the Y-dimension for the distance from sheet edge
machine in [mm].
8-71
Function button
DATA 4
"Code for material detector"

The inductive double sheet detector (code for material detector) is
supported. The measured values can be entered into the memory
storage places 0 to 99 in the data base.
LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, DATA 4, "Code for material detector"
Fig. 20186
Proceed as follows:
8-72
"Material" Function button SELECTION: An option mask

appears. Choose a material from the selection list. Except for
the "Material code", the values are entered automatically into
the DATA 4 mask.
"Material code": Enter the material code. The values between
0 and 99 must correspond to the storage positions of the
machine operating system. You have already reserved the
storage positions in the machine control. Number 0 stands for:
no measurement.
S354E81.DOC

You assign the values 1 to 99 as follows:
Carry out a measurement with the double sheet detector
and the desired material (for example St37-20).
Store the measurement result in one of the storage
positions 1 - 99 in the machine control.
"1" for St37-20, for example.
Enter this number as "Material code" in ToPs 300.
Once you have entered all the data including the material code,
click upon the function button CREATE. The data is taken up in the
list under the entry fields.
S354E81.DOC
8-73
Unloading with TRUMALIFT SE

Function button

upon the selected machine. Select your TRUMALIFT SE in accordance with your configuration of machine.
Function button
DATA 1
"General Lift data" of your TRUMALIFT SE
8-74
Fig. 20187
Fig. 20188
S354E81.DOC

default settings for the selected TRUMALIFT SE.

possible.

MANUAL
MECHANICAL
Only SheetMaster: The sheet thickness is checked with an
armature probe.
INDUCTIVE
Applies to all TRUMALIFT SEs: The sheet thickness is
checked inductively. The sheet thickness detector is
programmable.

NOT POSSIBLE
enabled.
NO
YES
S354E81.DOC

TRUMALIFT SE: On the RIGHT
"Name of Lift": The lift name is displayed.
8-75

weight in [kg] that the TRUMALIFT SE is allowed to transport?

Minimum and maximum sheet dimensions that can be transported by the lift are displayed. Should one of the four limitations
not be observed, then manual loading will be generated.

of the TRUMALIFT SE.
Function button
DATA 2
"Name of drawing": The name of drawing is displayed.

A drawing of the lift is available for displaying the TRUMALIFT SE
in ToPs 300. The names of the drawings are contained in the
directory "\TRUMPF\TOPS_ZCH\*.*".

point of the TRUMALIFT SE.
Additional "General lift data" regarding your TRUMALIFT SE.
8-76
Fig. 20189
S354E81.DOC



displayed.
Function button
DATA 5

YES, NO.
Data for "Unloading" with TRUMALIFT SE.
S354E81.DOC
Fig. 20190
8-77


many carrier and coupled cups does the lift have?
"NC output speed":

see LIFT GROUP 2 SB/SE/SC, DATA 3 in this Chapter.
"1st dropping height in Z"*):

Indicate the length of the Y-traverse path required to move a
"Traversing speed":
release from the clamp be executed?
*) The value has no significance for TRUMALIFT SC/SE.
8-78
S354E81.DOC
Function button
DATA 6
Data for "Unloading" with TRUMALIFT SE.
Fig. 20191

Lift travel in Y: Traverse path for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster

"Software limit switch laser X-axis": Measurement > 0, to which

the TRUMALIFT SE can travel when the laser is activated.
"Min. traverse pos.Y-punching": Minimum position for traversing in

Y-direction of the TRUMALIFT SE during punch processing.
"Min. traverse pos.Y-laser": Minimum position for traversing in

Y-direction of the TRUMALIFT SE during laser processing.
S354E81.DOC
"Min. dropping height" is the height for "Soft dropping".

Fixed setting: NO.
8-79
8-80

Fixed setting: NO.
Default for TRUMALIFT SE, SC: 1 mm.
S354E81.DOC
Lift Parameters: Application in ToPs 300

The lists appearing on the following pages are for clarification purposes and for your information, to show how the various U parameters
arise in ToPs 300 during the programming of TRUMALIFT.
Take this information into consideration when you modify
data in ToPs 300.
S354E81.DOC
8-81
The sheet is not valid for NC-Codes corresponding to

DIN V4001!
Abbreviations used:
Tctr.:
SCO:
SCRP:
SCZP:
SM:
tool center
Suction carriage origin
Suction carriage reference point
Suction carriage zero point
Variable
Meaning
Mask in the DATA Module,

Description in the mask field
X-dimension loading sheet edge to suction carriage

origin
SM Data 3: "X-dim. sheet edge - machine"
X-offset value between Tctr. and suction carriage

origin
SM Data 2: "X-offset zero pt of suction carriage -- tool

center"

zero point 1)
SM Data 1: "X-dim. sheet edge - Lift zero pt"

reference point (NC datum point) 2)
SM Data 1: "X-dim. sheet edge - Lift ref. pt."
"Safety offset in addition to X-offset"
SM Data 2: "Safety offset in addition to X-offset"
X-unloading position of the sheet skeleton stack with

grip disposal
SM Data 8: "X position of sheet skeleton"
X-transfer position of the sheet skeleton on the SM
SM Data 8: "Transfer position Lift in X"
X-position scrap
SM Data 6: "X-pos. - scrap
X-offset of the unloading area of the finished part

pallet to the SCO
SM Data 5: "X-offset pallet - machine"
X-unloading position of the sheet skeleton stack with

suction cup disposal
SM Data 8: "X-position of sheet skeleton"
X-position for which the SM should wait before loading "X-dimension waiting position"
1) This value is only an imaginary calculation value and can be seen only in the suction cup reference drawing.
2) This value is only an imaginary calculation value and can be seen only in the suction cup reference drawing. This point
was once identical with suction cup 25, but in the meantime a screw on the lift frame is used for this. The NC output is
a reference to this point on the lift frame.
8-82
S354E81.DOC
Loading
parameters
Remark
Variable
Example
U16
Pick-up position Lift
A+B+C
800+200+80 U1601080
e.g. TC 260 with SM 1250
U18
Transfer position at the

machine
B+D+E
200+80+20 U1800300
U17
Waiting position SM
2760 U1702760
for example, SM 1300 and 1600
Unloading
parameters
Remark
Variable
Example
U123)
Finished part
B+D-C
200+80-50 U1200230
Example for TC 260 with SM1250
U134)
Finished part
RW5)+D+J+B-C
70+80+3650+200-50 U1303950
U12
Scrap
B+D-C
200+80-50 U1200230
U13
Scrap
B+D+H-C
200+80+4155-50 U1304380
U12
Sheet skeleton with

gripper
G+B+D-C
355+200+80-50 U1200585
U13
Sheet skeleton with

gripper
F+D+B-C
4615+80+200-50 U1304840
U12
Sheet skeleton with

suction cup
B+D-C
200+80-50 U1200230
U13
Sheet skeleton with

suction cup
D+K+B-C
80+4155+200-50 U1304380
The underlined variables are linearly independent, i.e., they

appear in no other equations. They are therefore suited for
specific modifications of the corresponding U parameters.
3) U12 determines the pick-up position of the Lift.

4) U12 determines the unloading position of the Lift.
5) This value has been included in the regulations and serves as a safety distance surrounding the finished parts stack.
This also prevents the sheet thickness detector from colliding with a previous finished parts stack. Because this
distance is measured from every stack, the result is a distance between stacks of 2 * 70 mm.
S354E81.DOC
8-83
3.
TECHNOLOGY Module: Configuring

Loading with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster
Workpiece sheet loading does not have to be programmed

separately.
It is carried out automatically with the definition of a new sheet if:
2 is the number of stop pins selected (standard preliminary
choice) in the DATA Module. DATA Module, MACHINES, DATA,
STOP PIN DATA, "contact data", DATA 1.
the sheet to be loaded lies within the predefined boundaries.
DATA Module, MACHINES, DATA, LIFT GROUP 1 SHEETMASTER,
"Lift data", DATA 1.
The loading operation proceeds parallel with the unloading operation, if "Prepare loading" was selected for the preceding sheet.
When loading is done by a TRUMALIFT SheetMaster, make
sure you select appropriate clamp positions to eliminate the
chance of collision between the clamps and the punching
head during sheet transfer.
The determinations you have made in the DATA Module are
of significance for loading and unloading with the Lift in the
TECHNOLOGY Module.
8-84
S354E81.DOC
4.
TECHNOLOGY Module: Configuring

Unloading with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster
Removal of finished parts and scrap can be configured either on

the single part or on the sheet. Extraction of sheet skeletons and
cutouts, however, can be defined only in sheet mode.
Removing parts:
configuring in the sheet mode
or in the single part mode
No distinction is made between configuration of removing in the sheet

mode or in the single part mode. The functions are identical. The
functions for the unloading are called up using the main menu bar:
Function SINGLE PART
Function PROCESSING
Single part processing
Sheet processing
Procedure in Overview
Prerequisites
The prerequisites necessary in order to be able to configure

unloading with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster:
In the DATA Module: Check the systems configuration. Have all
data been set in accordance with your configuration of
machine?
The lift processing that is to be defined needs the drawing as a
basis. Single parts or cutouts must be available as drawings.
The procedure for defining processing with unloading is always the
same - regardless of whether you are defining the processing for a
single part or on the sheet.
You must configure unloading with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster. You
determine where the processing with unloading procedure is to be
set.
S354E81.DOC
8-85
Execution
Unloading with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster is configured in a way

similar to that of unloading via flap/chute:
Step 1:
Step 2:
Configure the processing of the geometry elements in the part,

excluding the unloading of the part.
Step 3:
Select unloading with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster. At this point,

change over in the menu to manual punch or laser processing.
Select the LIFT control function.
Pick processing, where the last stroke is to be.
Step 4:
Place the suction frame over the part and establish position for
unloading.
Step 5:
Define the sheet layout.

or
In case parts are already on the sheet, transfer the processing
configuration onto the available parts.
Step 6:
Execute sheet optimization.
Step 7:
Define palletizing for the parts:

Select Function NC PROGRAM, PALLETIZING.
Step 8:
8-86
Load single part(s) or sheet.
Generate the NC program.
S354E81.DOC
4.1
Configuring Unloading
The first stage of unloading a part with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster

consists of configuring the unloading position; the second stage of
unloading the part consists of establishing its palletizing.
Prerequisite:
The drawings of the single parts or the drawing of the nested sheet
have been loaded.
Sheet skeletons or residual strips can also be removed without
geometric references. For description, see: "Configuring Removal
with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster without Geometry Reference"
Step 1
Load parts or sheet.

Select the function FILE, LOAD. Load the parts or sheet in the
Data manager.
Step 2
Establishing processing.
The processing can be configured either automatically or manually.
Select function SINGLE PART (for single part mode) or Function PROCESSING (for sheet mode).
The menu for either PUNCHING or LASER PROCESSING is
displayed.
Select the function START when using automatic processing.

The check box for "part unloading" should not be activated. A
processing proposal is generated by the system.
Changing over to manual operation after automatic processing

definition: Select MANUAL. The menu for the operating functions for manual processing are displayed.
Step 3
Select TRUMALIFT SheetMaster for unloading.

Select the LIFT control function. Configure unloading in the corresponding Menu.
Function LIFT, PARAMETER
Function PARAMETER: Using this function, you select the basic

conditions for the NC output for unloading with the TRUMALIFT
SheetMaster.
S354E81.DOC
8-87
A mask is opened:
Select the output mode, speed and acceleration for unloading with
the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster. Confirm your choice with OK. The
mask closes.
Establishing the parameters for unloading with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster
Fig. 20465
Output mode "immediate" is required for: TRUMALIFT

SheetMaster: 200, 1000, 1250 and TRUMALIFT SC, SE.
The unloading parameters are displayed immediately before
the lift processing.
Output mode "time-optimized": Immediately after the unloading,

the unloading parameters for the next unloading are displayed.
This output mode shortens the processing time.
Note: The feasibility of this NC output mode depends on which
version of machine control system you have.
8-88
Mode of speed in which the NC output is to proceed?

Speed in steps: Selection of a defined speed for NC output in [%].
A certain speed value in [m/min] is assigned to each speed
step:
Step 1 is equivalent to 10 % of maximum speed
S354E81.DOC
Output mode of acceleration for loading and unloading

workpieces with the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster?
Acceleration in steps: Selection of a defined acceleration in
steps. A certain acceleration value in [m/s] is assigned to each
acceleration step:
Step 1 is equivalent to 10 % of maximum acceleration
The mode of the NC output for speed and acceleration
proceeds in % with the TC 600L, in steps with the other
machines.
Step 4
Function LIFT, SET
Configure the position for unloading with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.

In the auxiliary mask you define:
Setting the position of the Lift
S354E81.DOC
Fig. 20466
What is to be unloaded: a finished part, a scrap part or a sheet

skeleton? For a sheet skeleton, establish with what the sheet
skeleton is to be unloaded:
Suction cups (always possible)
Grippers (only with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 200, 1000,
1250)
8-89
Check box "Open clamps": If the part lies in the clamp area,
then the clamps should be opened, so that the part can be
removed with the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
or
Check box "Open clamp group 1", "Open clamp group 2",
"Open clamp group 3": Clamps can for example be opened in
groups with the TC 260 or also individually with the TC 500R,
TC 600L.
Check box " Last stroke after sucking": In order that the part
being removed does not slide away with the TRUMALIFT
SheetMaster, the possibility also exists of having the part be
first stabilized by the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster and then not
executing the final stroke until afterwards.
After confirmation of the mask, the Lift is displayed with the suction
cups. You can move the Lift with the help of the mouse. Configure
the final position for unloading with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster:
Click onto Processing.
As a result, a stroke will be placed on the unloading position on the
processing.
Step 5
Configure the sheet layout

or
If a sheet layout is already present, then transfer the preset
processing to all the parts of the sheet.
8-90
Laying out the sheet.

Select the sheet mode using SINGLE Function TRANSFER
SINGLE PART TO SHEET. Confirm the mask with OK.
Select the LAYOUT function.
The screen menu for sheet layout will be displayed. Configure
a simple or an area-wide versatility.
Sheet layout has already been done.
Transfer the processing of the individual parts onto the parts of
the sheet using function TRANSFER SINGLE PART TO SHEET.
Select settings and confirm the mask with OK.
S354E81.DOC
Step 6
Execute sheet optimization.
Functions SHEET OPTIMIZATION, AUTOMATIC, GENERATE,

START:
With automatic optimization, you choose the parameters for
the optimization process using an index card. The system
creates a recommendation for you which you can accept or
make manual modifications to the processing sequence.
Step 7
Select the main function OPTIMIZATION. The menu for

SHEET OPTIMIZATION will be displayed.
Functions SHEET OPTIMIZATION, MANUAL, INTERACTIVE:

With the aid of the Menu function for operating function
INTERACTIVE, you can now modify the processing sequence.
Configuring palletizing of the parts following unloading using the

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
You will find the functions for this in the menu for NC generation.
Select the following: Function NC PROGRAM in the main menu.
You have available to you in the screen menu the operating
function PALLETIZING with the relevant menu functions.
The functions for palettizing are thoroughly described on the
following pages. see: "Configuring Palletizing: Depositing Parts
with the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster"
Step 8
Generating NC program.
Once all the parts are deposited, you have carried out all the steps
and can now generate the NC program.
S354E81.DOC
Select functions GENERATE, START.

You establish the desired parameters with the help of the index
card. The NC program is generated as soon as you close the
mask with OK. You can display or print the generated NC text.
8-91
Adjusting the Suction Cups

Prerequisite: Unloading with the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster has
been selected.
Effect: The suction cups can be placed over the part with the help
of the mouse. At the same time, the functions for ADJUST are
activated.
Functions ADJUST,
SUCTION CUP
This function can be used to select or change the suction cup

choice. The diverse types of suction cups can be recognized by
their size and the number of circles. The colour indicates if the
suction cup is activated for unloading of that part or not. You can
recognize which suction cup is being used by looking at the suction
cup number.
Selecting suction cup
Fig. 20467
here: Presentation of the suction plate
8-92
S354E81.DOC
Criterion for suction selection from a suction cup group on

the suction plate:
When a suction cup of one suction cup group is selected, then all
of the suction cups of that suction group are either activated or
deactivated. Reason: The suction cups of a suction cup group are
coupled to one another.
At least one suction cup of that group must be positioned on

the sheet.
When a 3-way or a 9-way suction cup group is selected (carrier

suction cup 18 mm), a maximum total of 5 individual suction
cups can be activated, to which no vacuum is attached.
When the suction cups on a suction plate are selected, then up

to a maximum of 50 individual suction cups need have no
vacuum attached to them.
No selected suction cup may be positioned on the sheet

skeleton or upon another part.
A suction cup may lay over a breakthrough.
Only the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1300, 1306, 1600 and

1606 can be equipped with a suction plate (Option).
S354E81.DOC
8-93
Representation of a suction cup

The suction cups are displayed as circles (line type: solid/dotted) in
different colors.
Suction cup plate: The suction cup plate is displayed completely with all suction cup groups. The suction cup groups are
marked with numbers.
Example:
A suction plate receives 291 carrier suction cups 18 mm
(Display: simple circle), which are combined into 37 suction
cup groups (Display: broken lines).
Circle display: Suction cups outside the suction cup plate

simple circle, small: Carrier suction cup 47 mm
simple circle, large: Carrier suction cup 120 mm
double circle, large: Pivot suction cup 110 mm
triple circle: Stripper suction cup 110 mm
Color
red circle: Suction cup is active.
yellow circle: The cup is not active.
Number: Number of the suction cup
For further information regarding TRUMALIFT SheetMaster

see: "Operating Manual TRUMALIFT SheetMaster".
8-94
S354E81.DOC
Moving the Lift or the Part

If it is necessary to move the part and the Lift, then you
should proceed according to the following sequence of steps:
Move 1st part (Part position), move 2nd Lift (Lift position).
Background: To move a part cancels out Lift movements that
have already taken place.
Function ADJUST,
PART POSITION
If a part is located at a position in the sheet which is unfavorable

for unloading with the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster, it must be moved
to a better position.
Parts can be moved freely for this, if the sheet thickness allows it.
Important!
The function "PART POSITION" may not be utilized with the

TC 600L (NC older than V6.0)!
Procedure:
The TRUMALIFT SheetMaster appears on the mouse symbol.
By moving the Lift, you change the position of the part relative
to the Lift. The movement of the Lift (the part will be moved!)
can be defined at will in X- or Y-direction.
Click on the new unloading position. The TRUMALIFT
SheetMaster will be repositioned.
Confirm the selected position with OK.
Display of the movement of the part is not possible in ToPs.
To illustrate the action, the Lift is moved instead. You should,
however, be aware that in actual fact you are programming a
movement of the part. This has to do with a machine
function which is displayed in the programming system.
S354E81.DOC
8-95
1
2
3
4
Suction cup
Sheet panel
Part that is unloaded
Programmed path
Moving the part: Defining the path
The path around which the part

is moved
Side spacing
Fig. 9150
Moving parts cut from thin sheet metal may adversely affect
process reliability. For example, the sheet may be pushed
over the part and the latter not be moved at all.
The following is to be considered when choosing a suction
cup: one part is moved around a defined path, without the
width of the side spacing being taken into consideration.
That means that the part is actually moved only along the
path that remains once the side spacing has been
subtracted from the defined path
8-96
S354E81.DOC
Selecting Lift Strips (only with

TRUMALIFT SC or SE)
Function ADJUST,
LIFT POSITION
Moving the Lift: The defined position of the Lift relative to the part is
modified.
You can use this function to move the position of the Lift. The Lift
can be moved only horizontally (in X-direction) and up to the
position of the punching head.
Procedure:
The Lift appears on the mouse symbol (cross) and can be

repositioned with the help of the mouse.
Functions LIFT STRIPS,

STRIP 2 and STRIP 1
Select the functions ADJUST, LIFT POSITION:
Select OK to confirm the new position.
Two lift strips are available to you with machines which are
equipped with a TRUMALIFT SC or SE. You can move these strips
in the framework of the programming.
The functions are not enabled with other Lifts.
Procedure:
Select unloading with TRUMALIFT SC: Select functions MANUAL,

LIFT, SET.
The lift is displayed with the suction cups and is to be moved

with the cursor. Now the Functions LIFT STRIPS, STRIP 2 and
STRIP 1 are activated for you.
Select the desired strip which you would like to move and thus
use for unloading the part.
Confirm the position with OK.
When programming, observe the following points:
S354E81.DOC
No automatic test of Y > 40 mm or 190 mm, if Lift strip 1 is

extended to position 1 or 2 during pickup.
8-97
No automatic test of the Lift position if Lift strip 1 is extended to

190 mm and the machine TC 260L is working in laser mode
(suction cup 4 must not move closer than 321 mm from the
vacuum carriage zero point).
No movement of the Lift strips between loading and depositing

is possible.
Moving the scrap skeleton during unloading of the suction cups is

possible, in order to be able to move the scrap skeleton to Y190 mm,
for example (so that Lift strip 1 can be moved).
8-98
S354E81.DOC
4.2
Functions NC PROGRAM,
PALLETIZING, START
Menu Function START
Defining Palletizing: Depositing Parts

with the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster
During palletizing, all parts (finished parts, scrap parts or sheet

skeleton) that are removed using the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster
are unloaded upon a defined position. The positions must be
defined in advance in the DATA Module. Only the procedure itself
is programmed in the TECHNOLOGY Module.
Configuring automatic palletizing
Display of automatic palletizing
Fig. 20468
If unloading is defined for TRUMALIFT SheetMaster without

reference to geometry (for example, sheet skeleton), then
you must enter the size of the lift items in an additional step.
For a detailed description see: "Configuring Lift Removal
without Geometry Reference".
The automatic palletizing proceeds as a rule in the following steps:
1st Step:
Enter stack items on a list and adjust their data to

conform.
2nd Step: Establish or modify settings for die automatic palletizing.

3rd Step: Execute automatic palletizing. The result will be displayed on the monitor screen.
4th Step: Modify manually, in order to adjust to the automatic
palletizing ( see: "Modifying Palletizing Manually").
S354E81.DOC
8-99
Establishing data regarding

stack items
Select the functions PALLETIZING, START.

Next, enter the data for the stack items in the sequence mask. One
line of stack item data corresponds to one stack item.
Establishing stack item data
8-100
Fig. 20469
S354E81.DOC
All the stack items are listed in the selection window. Select one of
the stack items. The corresponding data are displayed in the
display fields. In addition, the geometry of the lift items is shown in
one of the preview windows.
Data in the preview window:
"Mode": Finished part, scrap or sheet skeleton. You have already

determined this configuration when you set the unloading
configuration with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster. You cannot
modify this determination.
"Stack mode": How are the lift items belonging to this stack
item to be unloaded?
Select one of the possibilities from below in the mask:
"depositing mandatory": All lift items must be unloaded;
regular dropping is not possible.
"depositing optional": As far as it is possible, the lift items
will be deposited. In order to avoid collisions, individual lift
items can also be dropped.
"soft dropping": All lift items will be dropped from a reduced
height from the lift.
"regular dropping": All lift items will be dropped from a
maximum height from the lift.
"Height": Maximum height of the stack of lift items in [mm]. The

stack height is calculated by multiplying the maximum total of
the lift items in the stack by the sheet thickness.
"Number": Maximum number of lift items that a stack is able to

contain.
"Sheet thickness": Sheet thickness of the lift items in the stack.

This sheet thickness might possibly not conform to the sheet
metal sheet thickness, due to malformations, for example.
In the lower area of the mask, you can also establish the following:
"Name": Establishing name for the lift items.

"Remark": Enter remark regarding the lift items.
In this ToPs version, Name and Remark are automatically inserted

in connection with the name of the drawing. Modifications that you
undertake here last only as long as the ongoing ToPs session
itself. This information is not stored when ToPs is closed.
S354E81.DOC
8-101
The geometry of the lift items is shown in the preview window.

In addition, the size of the parts (surrounding rectangle of the parts
geometry) and the offset are displayed. The offset value in the Xand Y-directions, from the point of view of the datum point of the lift
items (lower left-hand corner of the surrounding rectangle) to the
drawing zero position of the Lift, is the one designated as the
offset.
1
1
2
Offset
Lift zero position (drawing zero
position)
3
3
rectangle surrounding the stacked

item
Offset of one stacked item
Fig. 20472
End the determinations and modifications in the mask using the

function button CONTINUE.
Function button CONTINUE
Establishing configuration for automatic palletizing

An additional sequence mask is opened, in which you can
establish parameters for palletizing, based upon four index cards.
8-102
S354E81.DOC
Index card "Strategy"
Establishing strategy for stack formation.
Establishing strategies for stack formation
Fig. 20462
"Arrangement of stack items": How are the lift items sorted

upon the stack?
Is it permissible that finished parts and scrap parts come to
lie upon the same pallet
or
should the finished items and the scrap parts lie separate
upon different pallets?
Select the desired radio button.
The selection of the switch with color recognition is useful only
if you have also configured the palletizing mode "mixed" in the
DATA Module.
S354E81.DOC
"Number of identical sheets": Entries in this entry field are not

utilized in this version of ToPs. The palletizing is always carried
out for just one sheet.
"Stack growth": Only the switch "Successive filling" can be

selected in this version.
For this configuration, one stack is filled first, with a second
stack begun then only as needed.
8-103
8-104
"Dealing with collisions during stacking":

Collisions between the Lift and already existing stacks can
occur when lift items are to be unloaded by the lift. A collision
avoidance must be executed in such cases. Select the strategy
that is to be applied.
"Modify stacking mode": The mode with which the part is to
be stacked is changed from "depositing" to "soft dropping",
insofar as this is permissible (predetermination with stack
item). If "depositing mandatory" is determined, then no
alteration of the stack mode can be undertaken. A new
stack will be formed.
"New stack": In order to avoid collisions, a new stack will
be formed in every case. It should be noted with this
strategy that more space is taken up on the pallets.
S354E81.DOC
Index card "Stack item"
Establishing definitions for stack items.
Index card "Stack item" Establishing definitions.
Fig. 20463
Specify:
S354E81.DOC
"Finished part" How may the finished part be stacked?

Switch "Mixed": Mixtures of different finished parts may be
stacked on the same pallet.
Switch "Sorted": Only one type of finished part may be
stacked upon a pallet.
"Scrap" and "Sheet skeleton": Where should scrap and sheet
skeleton be unloaded?
Switch "Fixed position": Scraps or sheet skeletons should
be stacked upon pallets for which a fixed position has been
configured. If no pallets with fixed positions were
configured in the DATA Module, then this switch is not
enabled.
Switch "Pallet": Scraps or sheet skeletons should be
stacked upon pallets for which no fixed position has been
configured. Prerequisite: Pallets must be configured in the
DATA Module that accept these lift items.
8-105
Selection window with the symbol (arrow)

"Finished part under table", "Scrap under table", "Sheet
skeleton under table": With which priority should pallets that lie
under the machine table be filled with parts?
Prerequisites:
Pallets under table must be possible with the particular
machine: only TC 500R and TC 600L.
"Under table" must be configured in the DATA Module under
Palletizing.
8-106
"Not admitted": Do not use the pallets under table for the
particular kind of stack item (finished part, scrap, sheet
skeleton).
"Privileged": Use the pallets under table for one particular
kind of stack item in preference to all others.
"Reserve": Use the pallets under table only when there is
no more space available on another pallet for the particular
kind of stack item.
S354E81.DOC
Index card "Parameters"
Establishing parameters for pallet sequence and stacking on the

pallet.
Establishing parameters
Fig. 20464
This switch is of importance only for Trumasort L or with

Double cart. With unloading platform, positioning can be done
only in X-direction.
Specify:
S354E81.DOC
"Pallet sequence": In which sequence should the pallets be

used, when more than one is needed?
Switch "X before Y": The next pallet is sought first in the Xdirection (positioning movement of the Lift), and then
afterwards in the Y-direction (positioning movement of the
Trumasort L or double cart). Pallets that are near to the
punching head will be preferred over those that are not so
near to it.
Switch "Y before X": The next pallet is sought first in the Ydirection, then afterwards then in the X-direction. Pallets
that are near to the punching head will be preferred over
those that are not so near to it. This switch is of importance
only for Trumasort L or with Double cart. With unloading
platform, positioning can be done only in X-direction.
Switch "as in data base": The sequence of the pallets
corresponds to their numbering as was established in the
DATA Module.
8-107
"Stacking on the pallet": How should the sequencing of several

stacks on the pallet be carried out?
This switch is of no significance for the unloading platform.
8-108
Switch "X before Y": The stacks will be first unloaded in

continuous X-direction, afterwards in Y-direction.
Switch "Y before X": The stacks will be first unloaded in
continuous Y-direction, afterwards in X-direction.
S354E81.DOC
Index card "Double cart"
Establishing cart selection.

This index card can be selected only when a double cart has been
configured for the particular machine in the unloading area (Data
Module).
Specify for the double cart the following:
"Cart choice": How should the two carts be selected?

Switch "free": Upper and lower carriages will be treated as
two independent unloading units. Stacks can be distributed
freely onto both carriages with Automatic / Palletizing and
also with Manual / Modify.
Switch "automatic": Stacks will be formed only on the
upper carriage. If a stack reaches the maximum possible
height for the double carriage, then the the double carriage
operation will automatically replace the upper carriage with
the lower carriage. Once the maximum height is reached
for the lower carriage, then the changeover can be made
back to the upper carriage (that has been emptied in the
meantime). From the viewpoint of palletizing, this method
leads to stacks that have no limitations regarding stacking
height.
The automatic carriage choice is only possible where identical capacities for upper and lower carriages are available
for the double cart. For this, the corresponding switch must
be set in the DATA Module for configuration of the double
cart.
The free choice of carts is not supported by the older double
cart operating systems. Inform yourself in advance regarding
the possibilities of your double cart. If in doubt, always activate the automatic cart choice. For this, always configure
double carts with identical upper and lower carriages.
S354E81.DOC
8-109
Display of the palletizing result upon the monitor screen

After you have established all the parameters for automatic
palletizing, confirm your entries in the mask with OK.
The system creates for you a stack layout with unloading area,
based upon the specifications. The machine and sheet drawings
will be replaced by palletizing graphics on the monitor screen:
The following colors will be used in the display:
Color
Explanation
Cyan
(Light Blue)
Drawing of the pallets
White
Drawing of the units, as rectangle surrounding all

the related pallets (including border for improved
differentiation from the pallet drawings).
For units whose Y-dimensions are programmed as
positions, the positions are shown as broken white
auxiliary lines.
Yellow
Stacks which can take up even more lift items.

More lift items can be stacked on these stacks.
Green
Stacks that can take on no more lift items (full

stacks).
Red
Stack that presents an error, for example; collision,

stack lies outside of a pallet.
If a stack is shown in the color red, it can be due to the following

causes:
Collision of the Lift with another stack: If lift items are being
unloaded, then it is possible that the Lift will collide with
another already-existing higher stack. Remedy: Use regular
drop with the lift item instead of depositing it, or move the
stack.
8-110
Collision of the stack with another stack: The surrounding rectangles of the two stacks fail to maintain the minimum distance
of 10 mm between them. Remedy: Increase distance between
stacks.
Stack could not be unloaded upon any pallet. It will then be

marked under the unloading area. Remedy: Position the stack
manually upon an unoccupied pallet place or restart the
automatic palletizing with modified parameters.
S354E81.DOC
4.3
Modifying Palletizing Manually
In case not all of the lift items were put into place without any
collisions during automatic palletizing, or if the created layout does
not meet expectations, then you can modify the palletizing result
manually. In addition, you can have information and settings
regarding stack item displayed.
Start automatic stack formation. In the menu field for the PALLETIZING
operating function there are other menu functions available.
Screen menu for palletizing
S354E81.DOC
Fig. 20470
8-111
Moving the Stack

Functions
STACK INTERACTION, MOVE
Moving a stack that is already present.
Procedure:
Click onto the stack that is to be moved.

The mouse cursor must be located within the rectangle
surrounding the selected stack. The drawing of the stack to be
moved as well as the drawing of the Lift now both hang onto
the mouse cursor.
In doing so, the mouse cursor displays the datum point of the
stack. This is the lower left-hand corner of the rectangle
surrounding the stack.
Establish a new position on a pallet.

The stack will be unloaded as soon as you have clicked the
target position with the left-hand mouse button. If this is a valid
position, the stack will be unloaded on the new position and a
collision calculation will be carried out. If the moving of the
stack leads to collisions, these will be displayed. You must
configure a new position upon a pallet.
Rules governing stack placement
8-112
The datum point of the stack (mouse cursor) must be located

within a pallet (cyan-colored rectangles) during placement of
the stack. The stack will be assigned to this pallet through
positioning, even when the largest part of the stack surface is
lying upon another pallet.
S354E81.DOC
A stack may overlap the pallet edge, but it must always lie
completely within a unit, i.e., within the rectangle surrounding
all of the pallets of that unit.
The white line which presents the units shows a certain
distance to the rectangle surrounding all of the pallets of the
unit. This display was deliberately chosen in order to make
the overall display clear.
Exception: Stacks upon the unloading platform may extend
beyond the unit in the monitor screen display, because the
Lift can travel only in X-direction, and the position of the
stack in Y-direction is dependent upon how the lift items was
taken up by the Lift. The stacks are displayed outside the
unloading areas and displaced downwards.
The maximum stack height of the pallet upon which the stack
is to be unloaded must be greater than the actual height of the
stack that is to be moved.
If one of these conditions is not met, then the stack will not be
unloaded. The Lift drawing continues to remain visible on the
mouse cursor and a different, correct position can be clicked.
S354E81.DOC
8-113
Automatic Correction of the Placement

Position
Correction of the stack position is carried out automatically,
depending upon which pallet or which unit a stack is unloaded.
Pallet upon an unloading
platform
Here the Lift can only travel to the Y-position 0 (zero). The Y-position
of the stack is corrected in this way in order that the Y-position 0
(zero) is generated for the Lift.
Example: The lift items is separated out with a rectangular 76 x 5 mm
stamp. The part will not be pushed out. The offset of the LIft consists of -2.5 mm (= half of the stamp width) in Y-direction for this
stack item. The Y-position of the stack is corrected on the unloading platform by +2.5 mm, no matter which Y-position is selected.
Pallet with fixed position
When a stack is to be unloaded upon a pallet with a fixed position,

the stack position is always corrected to match the position on this
pallet configured in the DATA Module.
Pallet upon a unit where the

Y-values are programmed
as positions
Stacks cannot be positioned using freely-chosen Y-values upon

these pallets, because the Lift must always be unloaded precisely
above one of the possible positions.
It is not the stack which engages with these auxiliary lines,
but the Lift itself.
Due to reasons of collision safety, the correction is carried out as a
rule in the direction of larger Y-values. As an aid to orientation, the
possible positions are displayed as white auxiliary lines in the
palletizing drawing.
The conditions described above must also be observed
during automatic correction of placement position, otherwise
the stack cannot be unloaded. see: "Rules Governing
Stack Placement".
8-114
S354E81.DOC
Merging Stacks
Functions STACK
INTERACTION, MERGE
Using this interaction, the lift items from one stack can be
transferred over to another stack.
Procedure:
Identify the "source stack", i.e. the stack that contains the lift
items that are to be transferred.
The Lift drawing is shown with the stack drawing on the mouse
cursor.
Identify the "target stack", i.e. the stack that is to receive the lift
items that are to be transferred.
As many lift items as possible will now be transferred from the
source stack to the target stack. If all of the lift items can be
transferred, then the source stack will be deleted afterwards.
At the end of the interaction, a collision calculation will be carried

out and possible collisions will be shown using red stack displays,
for example when the Lift unloads upon the now higher target
stack.
Rules for merging two stacks
The maximum stack height of the target stack may not be

exceeded. The stack height of the target stack can be limited
by configuring a limited maximum stack height for the stack
item or by having the stack be located upon a pallet for which a
limited maximum stack height has already been configured.
If the target stack is already full, then no lift items from the
source stack can be transferred to the target stack.
S354E81.DOC
Only those stacks can be merged that contain identical kinds of

stack items. That means that no stacks can be formed that
contain different kinds of stack items.
If the capacity of the target stack is not sufficient to accept all

the lift items of the source stack, then precisely that number of
lift items will be transferred that brings the target stack to just
its maximum stack height. In this case, the number of the
transferred lift items will be displayed in a report list.
8-115
Unloading the Stack

Functions STACK
INTERACTION, STACK
The type of placement of all lift items of a stack can be modified

using this interaction.
After clicking upon the stack to be modified, the following mask
appears:
Unloading the stack
Fig. 20471
Some information regarding the selected stack and its stack items
are displayed in the mask. You can modify only the stacking mode.
"soft dropping": All lift items of the stack will be dropped from a
reduced height. For this there is no more risk of collision.
8-116
"depositing": All lift items of the stack will be unloaded.

Warning - risk of collision: Changing the stack mode to
"depositing" can lead to the Lift possibly placing items upon
another, already-existing stack. If collisions occur, then the
stack will be displayed in red.
"regular dropping": All lift items of the stack will be dropped

from the maximum possible height.
S354E81.DOC
It can happen that different lift items on the same stack show
different placement modes, following automatic palletizing. This
situation will be displayed in the text field of the stack mode with
the text "mixed".
Rule
Modifying the stack mode from "depositing" to "soft dropping" or
"regular dropping" is not possible, if the preliminary stack mode for
the stack item has been set at "depositing mandatory".
If the stack mode is nevertheless to be modified, then the
preliminary stack mode settings for the stack items must be
changed beforehand to at least "depositing optional".
S354E81.DOC
8-117
Eliminating Stacks
Functions STACK
INTERACTION, ELIMINATE
Should collisions occur following the execution of interactions, then

these should be eliminated.
The elimination of collisions is carried out only through modification
of the stack mode of individual lift items, and not through the
displacement of stacks.
As a result of this, only collisions of the type "Lift with stack" can be
eliminated, and not collisions of the type "Stack with stack".
If a collision cannot be eliminated, then check to see whether the
lift items affected are not in a stack that has been assigned the
preliminary stack mode "depositing mandatory". In this case, it will
be displayed in a corresponding information list.
Requesting Information regarding a Stack

Function INFORMATION,
STACK
With the help of this function, you can request information

regarding a stack.
Procedure:
Identify the stack by clicking the desired stack with the lefthand mouse button.
The mask which is displayed corresponds to the mask of the

functions STACK INTERACTION, STACK. The information will
be displayed. However, you cannot make any changes in the
data of the stack.
Information in the mask:
"Number": Current number of lift items upon the stack.
"Height": Designation of the current height of the stack.
"Position upon pallet (x,y)": The coordinates of the stack datum

point (lower left-hand corner of the surrounding rectangle) in
relation to the pallet datum point (lower left-hand corner of the
pallet).
8-118
"Name" and "Remark": Name of the stack item that was

unloaded on the stack, and relevant remark.
"Stacking mode": stack mode of all lift items in the stack. If

"mixed" is displayed, than that means that some of the lift
items of the stack have been stacked differently.
S354E81.DOC
Modifying Settings for Stack Items

Functions SETTINGS,
STACK ITEM
These menu functions allow for modification of stack item data.

The following mask that opens corresponds to the mask for "Stack
item data", that is displayed at the start of palletizing.
Procedure:
Select the desired stack item in the selection window. The data
will be shown in the display windows in the lower mask area.
Enter the desired modifications.

The existing stacks will be tested in accordance with the
modified stack item data for collisions. The result of this testing
will be graphically displayed. Stacks with collisions receive the
color red. The stack positions remain the same.
When the maximum number of lift items for the stack is
changed for this stack item, you must take care that the
number may not become smaller than the largest number of lift
items in already-existing stacks of this stack item. In other
words, this modification does not permit the distribution of one
stack into two smaller stacks.
If you wish to have a distribution of a stack into two smaller
stacks, then you must restart the automatic palletizing using
the functions PALLETIZING, START. Enter the modified
number of lift items in the stack in the mask for "Stack item
data ".
A new palletizing will be calculated by the system and
displayed on the monitor screen.
S354E81.DOC
8-119
4.4
Defining Removal with TRUMALIFT

SheetMaster without Geometry Reference
No geometry with processing serves as a basis for defining unloading position for the unloading of such things as sheet skeletons or
residual strips with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster.
In such cases, the sizes of the lift items cannot be automatically
determined by the system.
Nevertheless, you can also have parts removed without geometric
references with the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster. Note the following
procedures:
Procedure:
At the beginning of the automatic palletizing using the functions

PALLETIZING, START, you will be separately required to enter
the size of the lift items.
The processing of the unloading position will be displayed in

the colour magenta.
Afterwards, click upon the lower left-hand corner of the

rectangle surrounding the lift items, and then the upper righthand corner of the surrounding rectangle. Alternate method:
For simplicitys sake, you can also click upon any two
diagonally-opposed corners of the surrounding rectangle.
If the sizes of all lift items are defined accordingly, without

reference to geometry, then the system will inform you in an
information box that you can start the automatic palletizing
procedure anew.
Select functions PALLETIZING, START. The masks already

described will open.
Lift items without geometric reference will be symbolized by a
rectangle with drawn-in diagonals in the monitor screen display
for palletizing.
The data which are communicated by clicking upon the

surrounding rectangle will not yet be stored in the format
TMT ("Tafel mit Bearbeitung": Sheet with Processing) in this
version of ToPs 300. These data must therefore be
reestablished after leaving palletizing and after a restart of
the automatic palletizing.
If one does not leave palletizing, then the automatic palletizing can be restarted as often as necessary. The geometry
information is requested only once.
8-120
S354E81.DOC
4.5
Ending Palletizing
Palletizing is ended when
the function Generate is selected in the operating field

or
a function in the Main Menu bar is selected.
Exception: Not with the functions FILE SAVE, FILE SAVE ALL
and FILE PRINT.
Attention: When leaving palletizing, the layout on the monitor
screen changes as follows: the drawing for palletizing is
deleted and the sheet drawing is displayed again. The layout
of a palletizing that has already been carried out can not be
displayed again in this version. Only the automatic palletizing
can be restarted.
Recommendation:
S354E81.DOC
Before you leave palletizing, print the drawing for the generated
palletizing. Select for this the functions FILE, PRINT, MONITOR.
8-121
Deutschland
Germany
Allemagne
Brasilien
Brazil
Brsil
Frankreich
*
(
(
*
(
(
*
TRUMPF GmbH + Co.,

Maschinenfabrik Stuttgart
TRUMPF Maskin AB
Johann-Maus-Strae 2
Schweden
D-71254 Ditzingen
(07156) 303-0
Sude
Sweden
int. 0049 / 7156-303-0
TRUMPF Maquinas Ltda.

Avenida Juru, 150 - Alphaville
Schweiz
06455-010 Barueri-Sao Paulo
Switzerland
(011) 421-5331
Suisse
int. 0055 / 11-421-5331

TRUMPF S.A.R.L.
Aleforsvgen 5
Box 606
(
(
*
(
(
*
S-441 17 Alingss
(0322) 639100
int. 0046 / 322-639100
TRUMPF Maschinen AG
Ruessenstrae 8
CH-6341 Baar
(041) 7696-666
int. 0041 / 41-7696-666
TRUMPF Pte Ltd
Bote Postale 50239
Singapur
France
86, Alle des Erables
Singapore
02-28/29 German Centre
France
Paris Nord II
F-95956 Roissy - Charles de
Gaulle Cedex
Singapour
Singapur 609916
(
(
Grobritannien
(
(
(01-48) 17 80-40
int. 0033 / 1-48 1780-40
TRUMPF Ltd.
President Way
Spanien
Great Britain
Airport Executive Park
Spain
Grande-Bretagne
Luton, Beds. LU2 9NL
Espagne
Italien
Italy
Italie
Japan
(
(
*
(
(
*
Malaysia
(
(
*
TRUMPF Homberger S.R.L.

Via Malta 2/1
Tschech. Republik
I-16121 Genova
Czech Republic
(010) 5765350
Tchquie
int. 0039 / 010-5765350

TRUMPF Corporation
1-18-2 Hakusan
USA
United States
Yokohama 226
Etats-Unis
(045) 931-57 10
int. 0081 / 45-931-57 10
TRUMPF Pte Ltd.
No. 74, 1st floor
Malaysia
Jalan SS 15/4D
Malaisie
Subang Jaya
(
(
sterreich
Austria
Autriche
*
(
(
(
(
5627780
int. 0065 / 5627780
TRUMPF Maquinaria, S.A.
Avenida de Valdelaparra, 13
E-28100 Alcobendas (Madrid)
(91) 6573662
int. 0034 / 91- 6573662
int. 0044 /1582-725-335
Midori-ku
Japan
Japon
(01582) 725-335
25 International Business Park
47500 Petaling Jaya

(037) 343889
int. 0060 / 37343889
TRUMPF Maschinen Austria
GmbH & Co. KG
Industriepark 24
A-4061 Pasching
(07221) 603-0
int. 0043 / 7221-603-0
Stand 15. Mrz 1999
*
(
(
*
(
(
TRUMPF Praha spol.s.r.o.

Stetkova 18
140 00 Prag 4
(02) 42 33 29
int. 00420 / 2 42 33 29
TRUMPF Inc.
Farmington Industrial Park
Farmington, CT 06032
(860) 677-9741
int. 001 / 860-677-9741
Update information
ToPs 300
Version 3.10
Update information
ToPs 300
Version 3.10
Edition: 08/2000
Please state the title of the document, the language required,

TRUMPF Maschinen GmbH & Co. KG
Johann-Maus-Strae 2
D-71254 Ditzingen
Tel. (0 71 56) 3 03-0
Fax (0 71 56) 3 03-5 40
e-mail: docu.501@de.trumpf.com
This document was drawn up in the Technical Documentation of TRUMPF

Maschinen GmbH + Co. KG.
All rights to this documentation, especially the rights of reproduction and distribution
as well as that of translation are retained by TRUMPF Maschinen GmbH + Co. KG,
also in the event of notifications of protective privilege. Without previous written
consent of TRUMPF Maschinen GmbH + Co. KG, no part of the documentation, no
matter in which form, may be reproduced, processed, copied or distributed using
electronic systems. Errors and technical changes excepted.
TRUMPF Maschinen GmbH + Co. KG
TRUMPF Maschinen GmbH + Co. KG is not liable for any errors in this
documentation. Liability for direct and indirect damage or injury resulting from the
delivery or use of this documentation is excluded, in so far as this is legally
permissible.
The most important innovations
Working with the

processing samples
Complex processing of contours can be defined and saved as

machine- and material-dependent processing samples.
The editing of often used, complicated-to-process contours can be
created once and then reapplied through the saved processing
sample automatically and as often as needed.
Identifying characteristics of a processing sample could be a
closed contour or a placeholder in the form of a text.
TRUMPF provides processing samples for metric threads. The
processing samples are assigned using a model or a customer
created text.
Display and print new setup

plans
With the creation of the NC program, ToPs generates a new, easyto-use setup plan in 'pdf' and 'html' formats. The former setup plan
in 'ein' format will additionally be saved.
The new setup plan contains information on each single part in
addition to displaying the sheet in use. The single part information
includes the graphics, drawing name, drawing number, number of
parts and weight.
In the new setup plan, the company logo can be integrated
according to the respective configuration.
Laser processing:
Configuring a corner
treatment
Corner treatments of a processed contour can be later manually

created, modified or deleted. A single corner can be selected by
clicking on it, and several corners by marking the start and end
points of the contour.
Generating laser cuttings on

the sheet
The manual programming of laser cuttings on the sheet can be

used to e.g. separate a waste grid or remaining unprocessed part
of a sheet for a simpler removal. Another application is the
trimming of the sheet.
A selection can be made between polygonal, horizontal and
vertical cuts.
Adapting the machinedependent customized

process rules
U354EN.DOC
In addition to the internal process rules, public, machine-dependent

customized process rules describing the machine data are made
available.
In the customized process rules, changes can be made without
daily passwords.
The most important innovations
Table of contents
1
1.1
1.2
1.3
Installation ......................................................................... 9
Update from Version 3.03 to 3.10 ....................................... 9
Update from Version < 3.03 to 3.10 .................................... 9
Passwords for several dongles in a password file (pwd) .... 9
2
2.1
2.2
2.5
Drawing module .............................................................. 10

Entering file information .................................................... 10
File manager: Expanded functions ................................... 10
Setting the path............................................................ 10
Displaying additional file information ........................... 11
Displaying .mi files ....................................................... 12
Contour preparation for the drawing ................................. 12
Loading ".igs" files........................................................ 12
Loading ".mi" files ........................................................ 13
Generating bending lines .................................................. 15
Defining bending lines.................................................. 15
Assigning bending information..................................... 16
Modifying bending lines ............................................... 17
Transferring bending tools ........................................... 17
Unfolding bending profiles ........................................... 18
Creating bending profiles ............................................. 19
Selecting the font for texts ................................................ 20
3
3.1
Nesting module ............................................................... 21

Calling up job management with job selection.................. 21
4
4.1
Technology module ........................................................ 22

Laser processing: Configuring a corner treatment............ 22
Create corner treatment............................................... 24
Modifying a corner treatment ....................................... 25
Deleting a corner treatment ......................................... 25
Working with processing samples..................................... 26
Creating / Saving processing samples ........................ 26
Organizing processing samples................................... 28
Deleting processing samples ....................................... 29
Using processing samples ........................................... 29
Using TRUMPF processing samples for metric
threads ......................................................................... 30
Modifying processing samples..................................... 33
2.3
2.4
4.2
Table of contents
U354EN.doc
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
4.14
5
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
6
6.1
6.2
U354EN.doc
Producing sample parts .................................................... 34

Creating laser cuttings on the sheet ................................. 35
Geo Comparer: Transferring processings from the
source part to the target part............................................. 36
Defining compulsory sequences with the Box function..... 37
Expanded functions in the NC program main menu ......... 37
Generating the NC program.............................................. 38
"Settings" index card.................................................... 38
"Laser" index card ........................................................ 39
Entering self-holding remarks in the setup plan........... 40
Displaying and printing a new setup plan ......................... 40
Integrating the company logo in the setup plan ........... 42
Adapting the 'tops300.ini' file ....................................... 43
Displaying setup plan in html format............................ 43
Displaying setup plan in pdf format.............................. 43
Printing the setup plan ................................................. 44
Using Microsoft Word as html editor ............................ 44
Revising NC texts.............................................................. 45
Using the TRUMPF program for revising NC texts...... 45
Using an individual program for revising NC texts....... 46
Palletizing.......................................................................... 47
Lift removal for parts without reference geometry ....... 47
Modifying standard specifications for the
stacking mode.............................................................. 48
Printing the lift position ...................................................... 49
Removal with open flap..................................................... 49
Clampdisplay and selection .............................................. 49
Data module..................................................................... 50
Machine-dependent customized process rules - public.... 50
Description of Variables ............................................... 52
Machine selection ............................................................. 63
Modifying the PTT (Punch Tool Tech) output ................... 63
Entering the machine-dependent transfer path name
(NC file transfer)................................................................ 64
Machine information ....................................................... 65
Additionally supported machines and components .......... 65
TC 2000 R......................................................................... 65
Schnelles Sicken (Q4, Quick beading) ........................ 65
Correct installation position of tools ............................. 67
Table of contents
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
7
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
Index
Table of contents
TC 600L: Releasing sheet tension after loading............... 67

Time calculation for the TC 600L and TC 2000 R ............ 69
TC 200R: Positioning speed ............................................. 72
Configuring the TC 180 ..................................................... 73
Setting the tool changing type...................................... 73
Reducing speed ........................................................... 73
Automatic processing................................................... 74
Adapting the customized process rules ....................... 75
Adapting small part flaps (on left) in the Data
module ......................................................................... 75
TC 260L: Removing small parts with ejector cylinder....... 76
TC L2000 .......................................................................... 77
Activating/deactivating flap sensors............................. 77
Marking ........................................................................ 77
Applies only to the TC 500R with standard clamps and
working range of X = 2500 mm: Switching from
standard to high stroke rate .............................................. 78
Setting a high stroke rate ............................................. 78
Entering the maximum value for acceleration in
X direction .................................................................... 80
Modifications affecting all modules .............................. 81
Calculator .......................................................................... 81
Activating online help in ToPs........................................... 81
Using new TRUMPF drawings .......................................... 81
Database conversion program: DB_SORT.BAT in the
directory \Trumpf\Macros .................................................. 82
Using long directory and file names.................................. 83
Printing nesting results with Wordpad............................... 83
Displaying and printing laser tables and process rules..... 84
Technology module...................................................... 84
Data module................................................................. 84
.......................................................................................... 85
U354EN.doc
Installation
1.1
Update from Version 3.03 to 3.10
In the Data module, the following machine-dependent data is no

longer overwritten:
"Basic machine", "Stop pin data", "Small parts removal",
"Repositioning data", "Push-out data", "Clamp data", "Tooling
system data", "Lubricating system data", "Grip", "Unloading area",
"Suction cup data", "Lift group 1" and "Lift group 2".
1.2
Update from Version < 3.03 to 3.10
In the course of an update the machine-dependent data is

overwritten.
1.3
Procedure
Passwords for several dongles in a

password file (pwd)
1. Edit 'tops300.ini' file.

2. Search for the line TC_PWD_PFAD= $(TC_TRUMPF_PFAD).
3. Search for the line which corresponds to the listing behind the
$ symbol (in this case: TC_TRUMPF_PFAD).
TC_TRUMPF_PFAD= $(TOPSLW)\TRUMPF
The listing behind the $ symbol corresponds to the directory in
which the 'tops_pwd' file lies.
4. Edit 'tops_pwd' file.
5. At the end of file: Enter subcode and password for an
additional dongle.
6. Save.
U354EN.doc
Installation
2
2.1
Open the dialog window
with:
Drawing module
Entering file information
>Drawing module >File >Properties.
Fig. 25038
With the arrow symbol, the "Programmer", "Customer name",

"Machine", "Material", "Table" and "Rules" file information can be
selected from the database.
2.2
File manager: Expanded functions
Setting the path

The path can be selected with the list field and the "*" symbol. If
you click on "*", the path is shortened by one directory respectively.
A quick way of calling up already set paths is with the "arrow"
symbol at "Search in".
The path cannot be manually entered.
A set path or a selected .geo file is self-holding, even when
switching to another module.
10
Drawing module
U354EN.doc
Displaying additional file information

Requirements
File information
In the Drawing module, file information

>File >Properties.
"Preview" is selected in the file manager.
is
entered
at
File format
Displayed file information
*.geo
Drawing name and drawing

number
*.gmt, *.tmt
Machine name, machine type,

material used
*.mtl
Path of *.geo file
*.taf
Material used
File manager in DRAWING module, Displaying file information
U354EN.doc
Drawing module
Fig. 25037
11
Displaying .mi files

If you click on the "*.mi" box, all files within the set directory with or
without file extensions will be displayed.
Reason: The ME10 CAD system saves .mi files without file
extensions.
If drawings with the .mi extension are saved, the following
variables
can
be
modified
in
the
'tops300.ini'
file
(\trumpf\tops300w\tops300.ini) in the [STACK] section:
ST_MiSelect
= *
to
ST_MiSelect
= *.mi
If ToPs 300 is restarted, only those files with the .mi extension are
displayed when you click on the "*.mi" box.
2.3
Contour preparation for the drawing
Loading ".igs" files

A tolerance can be entered for the drawing's contour preparation.
Points which are separated by a smaller distance than the
tolerance given will be merged.
with:
>Drawing module >File >Load >"*.igs" >OK.
Fig. 25039
12
Drawing module
U354EN.doc
Loading ".mi" files

A tolerance can be entered for the drawing's contour preparation.
Points which are separated by a smaller distance than the
tolerance given will be merged.
"B-spline" elements of ".mi" files can be transformed into the ToPs
elements "lines" and "arcs".
with:
>Drawing module >File >Load >"*.mi" >OK.
Fig. 25040
"B-splines"
A B-spline is a description of a curve. When the option "B-splines"
is selected, additional specifications must be entered in the
selection field:
U354EN.doc
"Interpolating"
"Distance"
"Min. length"
or
"Approximating"
"Distance"
"Min. length"
or
"Control polygon"
Drawing module
13
Note:
"Interpolating"
With interpolation, the curve is transformed into a continuous line.
Distance
Min. length
Interpolation of B-splines
"Distance" parameter
This parameter defines the step size along the curve. The smaller
this value is, the more exactly the interpolation matches the curve.
Disadvantage: The number of generated lines increases.
"Min. length" parameter
Each line must be longer than the value given for "Min. length".
If the total length of the B-spline is shorter than the value given
for "Min. length", the B-spline will not be converted.
"Approximating"
With approximation, the curve is transformed into a continuous line
made up of lines and arcs.
1
2
Distance
Min. length
Approximation of B-splines
14
Drawing module
U354EN.doc
"Distance" parameter
This parameter defines the maximum distance from the lines and
arcs to the curve. The curve is divided until the distance between
the approximated continuous line and the curve is smaller than the
value given.
"Min. length" parameter
Each line must be longer than the value given for "Min. length".
If the total length of the B-spline is shorter than the value given
for "Min. length", the B-spline will not be converted.
"Control polygon"
The B-spline control polygon will be displayed.
You can check how a B-spline is defined. Example: B-splines with
a total length that is too short.
2.4
Generating bending lines
Defining bending lines

Requirements
Procedure
A bending line is drawn in the color cyan.
1. Click on >Bending >Create.

2. Enter values at "Define bending line".
3. Confirm entries with OK.
4. Click on the line drawn in cyan.
Note:
Bending lines are automatically adapted to the contour.
For the "folding" type of bend, 180 must be entered for the
opening angle and the preangle must be entered.
If the "Pre- and postbend" type of bend is selected, the preangle
applies to the prebend. The opening angle corresponds to the final
angle.
The bending radius is used for display purposes. If the notches are
not large enough, a small display radius should be chosen since
otherwise problems occur when generating the bending part
(as long as this edge isn't contacted).
U354EN.doc
Drawing module
15
Rule of thumb for the

bending radius
Notch and sheet thickness > bending radius.

Note:
Geometric drawings which are to be further processed in ToPs 600
may not contain any other drawing parts beyond the unfolding and
bending lines. If external formats such as ".igs" or ".dxf" are
imported, the drawing frames, views, fonts, etc. must be removed
from the drawing.
Assigning bending information

Bending information is not transferred. It must be assigned.
Exception: ".mi" files from SheetAdvisor.
Procedure
1. Click on >File >Properties.

2. Enter "Number of drawing", etc., at "File information".
You must enter: Material and material thickness.
3. Click on OK.
4. Click on >File >Save.
or
5. Click on >File >Save as, if a name is to be given to the
program.
Note:
In the Drawing module, .dxf, .igs, .mi or .gra files can also be readin. The bend factors with which the model is generated must in this
case be entered and later converted into ToPs 600.
The upper and lower tools (see Modifying bending lines) must
likewise be entered.
16
Drawing module
U354EN.doc
Modifying bending lines

Bending lines can be later modified.
Procedure
1. Click on >Bending >Modify.

2. Click on the bending line you wish to modify.
3. Enter changes at "Define bending line".
4. Click on OK.
The changes are adopted.
Transferring bending tools

Tool data from one bending can be transferred to other bendings.
Procedure
1. Click on Tools at "Data transfer".

2. Click on the bending line from which tools are to be transferred
(reference bending line).
3. Click on the bending lines which are to receive the processing
data from the reference bending line.
or
4. Click on All.
The data will then be completely replaced for all bending lines.
U354EN.doc
Drawing module
17
Unfolding bending profiles

Bending parts with a rectangular unfolding and parallel bendings
can also be drawn simply in the form of the desired profile after
bending, with or without bending radiuses.
Profile drawing
Fig. 24586
With the Unfold function, the profile can then be converted to an

unfolding drawing.
Procedure
1. Click on Unfold at "Profile".

2. Enter the type of material, material thickness, and profile depth
(width of the unfolding part).
3. Upper and lower tool groups are required in order to determine
the appropriate tools and the corresponding bend factors.
4. Click on OK.
To define the placement of profile materials:

1. Click on a line element of the profile.
2. Click next to the element in the direction where the material is
located.
The material is then replaced by the respective unfolding.
18
Drawing module
U354EN.doc
Creating bending profiles

Bending profiles can be created with the Create function in order to
check and modify an unfolding drawing. If the bending part
contains internal contours, these will be deleted. When unfolding
again, only the external contour is rectangular.
Procedure
1. Click on Create at "Profile".

2. Enter the type of material and material thickness.
3. Select whether the profile is for the top or bottom side of the
bending part.
4. Select "with radii" if the profile should include bending
radiuses.
5. Click on OK.
6. Click on a suitable bending line in order to specify which bending direction and cross section for the profile is desired.
By clicking again, the profile is created vertically to the bending
line on which you clicked. It accounts for all bendings parallel
to the selected bending line.
Creating profiles as construction geometry

The profile generated is displayed as construction geometry in the
current drawing.
Requirements
Procedure
In the dialog field "Create bending profile", "Create profile as

construction geometry" is selected.
1. Click on the Drawing tools button at "Drawing".

2. Click on the All button at "Delete construction geo".
Or
3. Click on the Bending button at "Drawing".
4. Click on the Selection button at "Delete".
5. Select the color magenta.
The construction geometry is deleted.
U354EN.doc
Drawing module
19
Note:
Defined bending lines cannot be split. A splitting must be done

before the line is defined as a bending line.
If a bending line which runs through an internal contour is to be
deleted, the entire bending line will be deleted.
Changes to the color or line type of a bending line are possible
through >Modify 2 >"Color" >All and >Modify 2 >"Type" >All.
Bending lines are open contours. The Open contour points button
in the icon bar shows the end point of a bending line. If bending
lines do not end exactly on a contour, they must be modified via
the Modify Stretch function so that they end on the contour.
2.5
Selecting the font for texts
The font can be selected through >Text >Create >Parameter

>Font Select. The font of an existing text cannot be modified.
20
Drawing module
U354EN.doc
Nesting module
3.1
Calling up job management with job

selection
Within the Nesting module, ToPs Version 3.02 has the option of
calling up job management with job selection.
with:
U354EN.doc
>Nesting module >File >Load >Job >Modify.
Nesting module
21
Technology module
4.1
Laser processing:
Configuring a corner treatment
Corner treatments of a processed contour can be later manually

generated, modified or deleted. A single corner can be selected by
clicking on it, and several corners by marking the start and end
points of the contour.
Requirements
Laser processing has been created.

The contour contains corners without corner treatment.

with:
>Technology module >Processing > Punching, Laser processing

> Manual > Adapt.
or
>Technology module >Single part > Punching, Laser processing
> Manual > Adapt.
Setting the selection filter
The "Object", "Contour" or "Part" selection filters are available at

"Corner treatment". The Generate, Modify and Delete functions
can be applied to the selected filter.
When ToPs is started, the default filter activated is "Contour". The
set filter is self-holding throughout the ToPs session.
Object
The Generate function should be used for a corner:
You need to click on the corner or near it.
The Modify or Delete functions should be used for a rounding or
looping:
You need to click on the rounding, the looping or near the corner
being processed.
Contour:
The Generate, Modify, or Delete functions should be used for
several corners of a contour:
You need to click on a start and end point on the contour.
Alternatively: By double-clicking on the contour, all corners will be
treated.
22
Technology module
U354EN.doc
Part
The Generate, Modify, or Delete functions should be used for all
corners of a part:
These actions apply to all laser processing of a part.
You need to click on the part in the Processing main menu.
In the Single part main menu, the function is applied to the current
part.
Corner types
1
Rounding
Looping, Shape: Loop
Looping, Shape: Bisecting line angle
Corner treatment: Corner types
U354EN.doc
Fig. 25033
Technology module
23
Create corner treatment

"Apply corner treatment to"
Limit corner treatments to corners of a certain angle range.

Limit the path before or after a corner to a certain dimension.
Limit the corner treatment to internal or external corners.
Fig. 25031
Note:
Loopings are only created on closed contours.
Loopings are only created on external corners.
24
Technology module
U354EN.doc
Modifying a corner treatment

"Parameters"
Set parameters for an existing corner treatment. New corner treatments are not created.
Example:
For an existing "Rounding" corner type, the radius should be
increased from 1 mm to 2 mm.
"Corner type"
Modify an existing corner type into a new corner type.

Example:
The existing "Rounding" corner type is to be modified into the new
"Looping" corner type with "Length: 2.00 mm" and "Shape: Loop"
as parameters.
Fig. 25032
Deleting a corner treatment

The "Rounding", "Looping" or "All" (rounding and looping) corner
treatments can be deleted. What is deleted is determined by the
"Object", "Contour" or "Part" selection filters.
U354EN.doc
Technology module
25
4.2
Working with processing samples
Complex processing of contours can be defined and saved as

machine- and material-dependent processing samples.
The processing of often used, complicated to edit contours can
thus be created once and then reapplied through the saved
processing sample automatically and as often as needed.
Identifying characteristics of a processing sample could be a
closed contour or a placeholder in the form of a text.
TRUMPF provides processing samples for metric threads. The
processing samples are assigned using a model or a customer
created text.
Creating / Saving processing samples

with:
>Technology module >Single part >File >Processing sample >Save.
Example 1: The editing of a geometry/contour should be saved as

a processing sample.
Requirements
Or
Procedure
The Single part main menu is opened.

A file in *.gmt format has been loaded.
A file in *.geo format has been loaded.
Recommendation: The geometry should be completely edited.
1. Click on >File >Processing sample >Save.

2. Enter "Name".
3. "Remarks" can be entered.
4. "Rotatable" can be selected.
5. Click on OK.
6. Click on the reference contour.
The operations performed on the reference contour are shown
in magenta.
Note:
The reference contour is the contour which is to serve as the
identifying feature for using the processing sample. The operations
performed on the reference contour are always contained within
the processing sample.
26
Technology module
U354EN.doc
7. Further operations can be selected by clicking on them.

The operations performed are shown in magenta.
8. Click on OK.
All selected operations are shown in "blue". The processing
sample is saved.
Example 2: A text is to be inserted as a placeholder for a complex

composite of geometric drawings. Application: perforated plate.
Requirements
Creating placeholders
A file in *.geo or *.gmt format has been loaded.

The placeholder must be present in the file.
The Single part main menu is opened.
1. Click on >Drawing module >File >Load.

2. Select .geo file.
3. Click on >Text >Create.
4. Enter text.
5. Click on parameters.
6. Define parameters. Define the position of the reference point
for the text.
The processing is later generated in the Technology module in
relation to the reference point of the text.
7. Click on >OK >OK.
The text is shown as a circumscribed square. The position of
the reference point is shown with a cross.
8. Click with the cross on the place in the drawing which is to be
the reference point for the processing.
The text is imported into the drawing.
U354EN.doc
Technology module
27
Assigning a processing to
the placeholder
1. Click on >Technology module >File >Load.

2. Select the file with the placeholder.
3. Click on >Technology module >Single part >File >Processing
sample >Save.
4. Enter "Name".
7. Click on OK.
8. Click on the placeholder.
9. Click on the desired processing operation.
The operations performed are shown in magenta.
10. Click on OK.
All selected operations are shown in "blue". The processing
sample is saved.
Note:
If this processing is to be used in the future, only the placeholder
needs to be created and not the complex drawing within the .geo
file.
Organizing processing samples

Processing samples can be organized into groups. The grouping of
processing samples is useful if e. g. complex processing operations are to be assigned in a customized manner. If processing
samples are used, their number can be limited through the
selection of customized groups.
The same processing sample can be made available to various
groups.
Delete removes the group only. All processing samples remain
saved. The saved processing samples have the file extension
'mmt' ("sample with technology")
with:
>Technology module >File >Processing sample >Organize

or
>Technology module >Single part >File >Processing sample
>Organize.
28
Technology module
U354EN.doc
Deleting processing samples

When a processing sample is deleted, the data is deleted.
Processing samples which are assigned to a group are then
removed from this group. A group continues to remain, even if it
contains no processing samples.
Using processing samples

The contours of the part to be processed should be compared with
the contours of the saved processing sample.
If the processing sample contour, machine and material match
those of the current part, the processing is automatically transferred to the current contour.
If several processing samples match the contour, the first will be
used with the "not rotatable" option.
"Not rotatable" means that the processing sample is not used for
contours with a differing relative position.
Processing samples are used only on contours that have not been
edited.
Requirements

with:
Current machine, material and material thickness must match

that of the processing sample.
Text which serves as a placeholder for a processing sample
must exactly match the text of the part to be processed.
Capitalization must be taken into account. Font size and type
may be freely selected.
>Technology module >Processing

>Punching, Laser processing >Automatic >Sample
or
>Technology module >Single part >Punching, Laser processing
>Automatic >Sample.
U354EN.doc
Technology module
29
Procedure
1. Click on "All samples".

The contour comparison is performed for all processing
samples.
or
2. Click on the arrow symbol and select group.
The contour comparison is performed for the processing
samples contained within that group.
3. Click on Start with the left mouse button.
4. Click on the reference contour(s).
5. Click on OK.
The contour comparison begins.
Alternatively:
1. Click on "All samples".
The contour comparison is performed for all processing
samples.
or
2. Click on the arrow symbol and select group.
The contour comparison is performed for the processing
samples contained within that group.
3. Click on Start with the right mouse button.
The contour comparison begins immediately.
Using TRUMPF processing samples for

metric threads
TRUMPF provides processing samples for metric threads.
TRUMPF processing samples cannot be modified or deleted.
The processing samples contain a text as a placeholder. The text
in the part drawing must be identical to the text in the processing
sample.
Defining the text format:
M2,5
M2,5+
M2,5
30
Technology module
Metric threads, diameter 2.5 mm.

"+" signifies that metric threads are produced in a
hole.
The decimal symbol must be a comma.
U354EN.doc
Example:
The texts are to be used as placeholders for the

TRUMPF processing sample "Threads".
Requirements
If a text is used as a placeholder for a processing sample, that

text must lay within the contour.
Thread former with or without tips are assigned the "with tip" or
"without tip" attribute at >Technology module >Tool >Punching
>Create >Thread former >Continue. The processing samples
are otherwise not used.
Fig. 25312
Using models
Procedure

3. Click on >Macros >Parameters >Model.
4. Select the metric thread through Selection Model.
The model is activated.
6. Click on Single hole, Row of holes or Circle of holes.
7. Click on the position in the drawing where the threads are to be
generated.
The text for the selected thread is shown with the reference
point for the processing.
U354EN.doc
Technology module
31
Alternatively: Creating your own text

Procedure

3. Click on >Text >Create.
4. Enter text.
5. Click on parameters.
6. Define parameters. Define the position of the reference point
for the text.
The processing is later generated at the reference point in the
text in the Technology module.
The text is shown as a circumscribed square. The position of
the reference point is shown with a cross.
8. Click with the cross on the place in the drawing where the
threads are to be created.
The text is imported into the drawing.
10. Load these files in the Technology module.
11. Open the Single part main menu.
12. Click on >Punching >Automatic >Sample >Start.
The processing samples for the thread machining are applied
to the placeholders.
32
Technology module
U354EN.doc
Modifying processing samples

with:
Procedure
>Technology module >File >Processing sample >Organize.

1. Select the processing sample from the list field
or
2. Find the processing sample using "Sample", "Group", etc. as
the search criteria.
3. Click on OK.
The processing sample is displayed.
4. Modify the processing operations.
5. Click on >File >Modify.
6. Keep the "Name" or enter a new name.
9. Click on OK.
The modified processing sample overwrites the original
processing sample.
or
10. Create new groups.
or
11. Mark groups at "available groups".
12. Click on the arrow symbol on the right.
The marked groups are entered in the right list field.
Several groups can be sequentially entered in the right list
field.
13. Click on OK.
The processing sample is assigned to the selected groups.
U354EN.doc
Technology module
33
4.3
Producing sample parts
A sample part can be defined by selecting the "Flexible" optimization option. A sample part is then defined as a single part of a part
group.
Note:

with:
Procedure
The part group consists of one single part (the sample part). When
selecting the "sample part", you must ensure that it is the first part
in the sequence of parts.
If other parts are in front of the marked sample part in the
sequence, these will be taken into the part group. This has the
consequence that the parts will be similarly produced up to the
sample part.
>Technology module >Optimization >Automatic
>Calculate >Start.
1. Click on the "Flexible" index card.
2. Continue.
3. Click on OK.
4. "Maintain sequence of parts": No.
5. Click on OK.
6. Click on the first part in the part sequence which is to be
defined as "Sample part".
The part is shown in yellow.
7. Confirm your selection with OK.
The "Simulation of tool changes" message list is opened.
8. Click on OK.
The sample part is defined.
34
Technology module
U354EN.doc
4.4
Creating laser cuttings on the sheet
The manual programming of laser cuttings on the sheet can be

used to e. g. separate a waste grid or a remaining unedited part of
a sheet for easier removal. Another application is the trimming of
the sheet.
You can select from polygonal, horizontal and vertical cuts.
with:
>Technology module >Processing >Punching,

>Manual >Create >Cut.
"Manual cut: Horizontal,

Vertical, Polygon"
"Manual cut: Polygon"
Laser
processing
Points which lie outside the sheet are automatically corrected

on the sheet border.
Cuts which run completely off the sheet are ignored.
If the cuts run partially outside and partially on the sheet, the
polygon is broken up into several separate cuts. Several
processings therefore result.
When approaching the sheet from the outside, a measuring
point is automatically placed for machines with a distance
control system.
A polygonal cut is made up of several contiguous cuts. The entry of

the coordinates of the polygon nodes can be done by clicking on
the sheet or through the command line.
Closed polygonal cut; start and endpoint are the same:
Whether the contour is treated as an internal or external contour is
determined by the sequence in which the polygon nodes are
placed.
Internal contour:
The sequence of the polygon nodes is clockwise.

External contour: The sequence of the polygon nodes is counterclockwise.
U354EN.doc
Return: Deletes the polygon nodes one at a time back to the

first polygon node. If the polygon is closed, Return is no longer
possible.
OK: Creates the processing.
Technology module
35
4.5
Geo Comparer: Transferring

processings from the source part to
the target part
Two options are available for accurately transferring processings of

rotated parts from the source part to the target part.
with:
>Technology module >Sheet layout >Modify >Compare part.
1st Option: Example

Procedure
1. Load .geo file (part A).

2. Put part A on the sheet.
3. Rotate part A 90.
4. Process part A.
5. Load further .geo files (part B).
6. Put part B on the sheet.
7. Rotate part B 90.
8. Click on >Compare part.
9. Click on part A.
The source part has been identified.
10. Click on part B.
The target part has been identified.
The target part is shown in magenta.
The processing is transferred from part A to part B.
2nd Option: Example

Procedure
1. Load .geo file (part A).

2. Rotate part A 90.
3. Put part A on the sheet.
4. Process part A.
5. Load further .geo files (part B).
6. Rotate part B 90.
7. Put part B on the sheet.
8. Click on >Compare part.
9. Click on part A.
The source part has been identified.
10. Click on part B.
The target part has been identified.
The target part is shown in magenta.
The processing is transferred from part A to part B.
36
Technology module
U354EN.doc
4.6
Defining compulsory sequences with

the Box function

with:
>Technology module >Punching / Laser processing >Manual

>Generate >"Compulsory sequence" >Set.
Step 1:
Marking the processings
Compulsory sequences can be defined by clicking on single

processings. Another option enables you to mark several processings simultaneously by drawing a box.
The processings for the compulsory sequences are first marked in
red. Markings can at this point be corrected by clicking again.
ToPs normally performs a time optimization appropriate to the
machine dynamics.
Step 2:
Defining the compulsory
sequences
The marked processings are defined as compulsory sequences

when you click on OK. Compulsory sequences are shown in green.
4.7
Expanded functions in the NC program

main menu
The construction lines, construction circles, and measurements are

available at >NC program >Palletizing.
At >NC program >Generate, the "Screen, Print" and "Screen,
appearance" functions can be found.

with:
U354EN.doc
The settings for these display options are saved for the
duration of the session.
Original displays in other main menus are not affected.
>Technology module >NC program >Screen.
Technology module
37
Screen, appearance
Examples of "Darstellungsoptionen" ("Display options"):
"Tafelinfo" ("Sheet info")

The sheet display shows the filename, name of programmer
and the current date.
"Teilenummerierung" ("Part numbering")

The parts on the sheet are numbered. Identical parts receive
the same number.
The part numbers are assigned in the setup plan.
Display of part numbering
4.8
Fig. 25034
Generating the NC program
"Settings" index card

The functions for generating NC programs have been expanded.
Access to the file manager is provided through the "arrow" symbol
in the dialog window.
with:
38
Technology module
>Technology module >NC program >Start >"Settings".
U354EN.doc
Fig. 25311
"Own path for setup plan"

You can enter your own target directory in which to save the setup
plan. The directory selection can be made through the arrow
symbol in addition to manual entry.
The target directory entered is self-holding.
"Programmer", "Company"
A maximum of 19 characters can be used for "programmer" and
"company". The entries are self-holding for the machine loaded.
"Laser" index card

The parameter for vaporization is no longer self-holding. If
vaporization is to occur, this must be switched on each time prior to
generating the NC text.
with:
U354EN.doc
>Technology module >NC program >Start >"Laser".
Technology module
39
Entering self-holding remarks in the setup

plan
The entries in the "Remark in setup plan" field can be set so that
they are self-holding. This requires that a line in the 'tops300.ini' file
be modified.
Procedure

2.
Find the line ";;ST_NcMakeRemarkPersistent=1".
3. Remove both semicolons.

The entry is activated.
4. Save the file.
The change becomes effective when ToPs 300 is restarted.
4.9
Displaying and printing a new setup

plan
With the creation of the NC program, ToPs generates a new, easyto-use setup plan in 'pdf' and 'html' formats. The former setup plan
in 'ein' format will additionally be saved.
In the new setup plans, the company logo can be integrated
according to the respective configuration.
Requirements
40
Technology module
html format:
To display the setup plan, Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0 or
Netscape Navigator 4.0 must be installed. The display is
optimized for Microsoft Internet Explorer 4.0.
pdf format:
To display and print a setup plan, Acrobat Reader must be
available.
Acrobat Reader is made available automatically with the
installation of ToPs.
U354EN.doc
Example:
Setup plan page 1
U354EN.doc
Fig. 25265
Technology module
41
Setup plan page 2
Fig. 25264
Integrating the company logo in the setup

plan
Requirements
The company logo must be present in 'gif' format.
The file name of the company logo must be SYSTEM_Logo.gif.
The size of the company logo is to be 50x50 pixels. This is the
ideal size.
Procedure
1. Open the '\Trumpf\Models' directory.

2. Replace the SYSTEM_Logo.gif file with the identical company
logo file. Pay attention to the format.
The TRUMPF logo is replaced by the company logo in the new
setup plan.
42
Technology module
U354EN.doc
Adapting the 'tops300.ini' file

The file format ('*.html', *.pdf, '*.ein') in which the setup plan is to
be generated can be specified in the 'tops 300.ini' file.
In the default setting from TRUMPF, '*.html' and '*.ein' formats are
saved.
Procedure
1. Open 'tops300.ini' file.

2. Find "ST_EinrichteplanHtml".
"1" stands for: Generate the setup plan in html format.
"0" stands for: Do not generate the setup plan in html format.
3. Enter 1 or 0.
4. Find "ST_EinrichteplanPdf".
"1" stands for: Generate the setup plan in pdf format.
"0" stands for: Do not generate the setup plan in pdf format.
5. Enter 1 or 0.
6. Save the file.
The changes become effective when ToPs is restarted.
Displaying setup plan in html format

After the NC text has been generated, the setup plan can be
displayed immediately by clicking on Display with the right mouse
button.
By clicking on Display with the left mouse button, the desired file
format can be selected through the "file manager".
Displaying setup plan in pdf format

Requirements
The 'ToPs 300.ini' file is appropriately configured.
displayed immediately by clicking on Display with the right mouse
button.
By clicking on Display with the left mouse button, the desired file
U354EN.doc
Technology module
43
Printing the setup plan

printed directly by clicking on Print with the right mouse button. The
printing operation is prepared in the background. After a short time
a progress message appears.
By clicking on Print with the left mouse button, the desired file
Using Microsoft Word as html editor

The setup plan can be edited in html format with Microsoft Word if
the 'tops300.ini' file is appropriately set. Individual adaptations of
the setup plan are possible.
Requirements
Procedure
Microsoft Windows has been opened.

The 'tops300.ini' file has been edited.
1. In the Desktop of Windows, click on the "My Computer" icon

with the right mouse button.
2. Click on Find.
3. Enter winword.exe at "Name".
4. Click on Start.
The search for the 'winword.exe' file begins. If the search is
successful, the file path appears in the list field.
5. Click with the left mouse button on 'winword.exe' in the list
field. Pull the file onto the desktop with the mouse button
depressed.
A connection to the file is created.
6. Click on the connection icon with the right mouse button.
7. Click on "Properties".
8. Click on "Connection" in the dialog window.
44
Technology module
U354EN.doc
9. At "location", copy the path with the <strg+c> or <ctrl+c> key

combination.
10. Find the entry "TC_HTML_EDITOR_PFAD=" in the
'tops300.ini' file.
11. Insert the previously copied path after the "equals" symbol with
the <strg+v> or <ctrl+v> key combination.
12. Save the file.
Word is available as an html editor.
4.10 Revising NC texts

Using the TRUMPF program for revising
NC texts
Start the program for revising NC texts directly after generating
them.
Example:
The NC text is to be displayed with the NOTEPAD editor.
with:
Procedure
>Technology module >NC program >Start >Parameters.
1. Select "NC revision program".

2. Click on the white input field.
"Program selection" is opened.
3. Select the NC revision program.
Program
selection
Remark
STD_EDITOR
Notepad
The NC text is displayed.
STD_PRINTER
U354EN.doc
Name of executed
program
Notepad with /p switch
The NC text is printed.
Technology module
45
Using an individual program for revising

NC texts
If you wish to revise NC texts using your own program, modifications must be made in the Data module.
The program entered is then made available in the Technology
module. The program is applied to actual files by default.
with:
Procedure
>Data module >User >Editor.
1. Click on one of the programs entered in the list field.

2. Overwrite the entries at "Designation", "Parameter", "Program"
with your own entries.
The exact path of the program to be executed must be entered
at "Program".
3. Set "Modal" and "Window" to Yes.
Note:
"Display log" is not evaluated in this version.
4. Click on Modify
The entry is inserted in the selection list.
Explanation of "Parameters"
How the program is to search for NC files when revising NC texts

is defined through the following parameters.
The parameters correspond to the path specification which is made
at >Module Technology >NC Program >Start >Settings >"Name of
NC program".
Parameters
Example
Explanation
$(P)
C:\Trumpf\teile\user1\test.lst
Complete path specification. A search is made for the

exact NC file 'test.lst'. Default setting.
$(D)
C:\Trumpf\teile\user1
Path specification without file name.
$(N)
test
File without file extension.
$(E)
lst
File extension.
$(D)\$(N)
C:\Trumpf\teile\user1\test
A search is made for the file 'test' without file

extension.
$(D)\$(N).ext .html
ension
46
Technology module
If the program is to be used to for revisions of files

other than the actual files, a file extension must be
entered for "Extension".
U354EN.doc
4.11 Palletizing
The graphic display of automatic palletizing, including all "Stacking
interactions", is retained even if the NC-Program main menu is
exited intermittently. A new palletizing is omitted.
Requirements
The palletizing must be error-free. Stacks displayed in red

underneath the pallets - these are stacks which have not yet
been assigned to a pallet - are not allowed. Collision stacks
displayed in red do not lead to a new palletizing if the main
menu is exited.
ToPs 300 Version 3.0X .tmt files may not contain parts without
reference geometry.
If a .tmt file is loaded, the unit of the current unloading area
must match the unit of the unloading area saved within the .tmt
file.
Example:
Unloading area unit: TRUMASORT L; saved .tmt file.
Unloading area unit: TRUMASORT L; current setting.
If the unloading areas do not match, the palletizing will be
assigned incorrectly. Palletizing must then be redone.

with:
>Technology module >NC program >Palletizing >Start.
Lift removal for parts without reference

geometry
The part size is set at the time of lift removal for parts without
reference geometry. To do this, a box must be drawn around the
part. Suctions cups are made available and can be fitted manually.
with:
U354EN.doc
>Technology module >Processing >Punching,

>Manual >Lift >Set.
Laser
processing
Technology module
47
If a tmt. file contains parts without reference geometry, their

geometry is only scanned when the palletizing is called up.
Afterwards, the palletizing is redone.
Modifying standard specifications for the

stacking mode
The standard specifications for the stacking mode of stacked
goods can be set by modifying the 'tops300.ini' file.
The standard specifications are displayed in the Technology
module at >NC program >Palletizing >Start >"Stack item data".
Procedure

2. Find ";;presettings for the (default) stacking mode of stacked
goods".
The digits 1 to 4 correspond to the stacking mode.
;;1 = depositing mandatory
;;2 = depositing optional
;;3 = soft drop
;;4 = drop
3. Modify the value after the equals symbol for the following
entries:
"PAL_ABSTAPEL_VORGABE_GUTTEIL= 2"
"PAL_ABSTAPEL_VORGABE_ABFALL= 4"
"PAL_ABSTAPEL_VORGABE_RESTGITTER= 4"
4. Save the file.
Modifications become effective with the next starting of
ToPs 300.
48
Technology module
U354EN.doc
4.12 Printing the lift position

After the lift removal has been set, the lift display can be printed.
with:
>Technology module >Processing >Manual >Lift >Set

>"Screen", Print.
4.13 Removal with open flap

The "Removal with open flap" function is to be issued in the NC
text.
with:
Procedure
>Technology module >Processing >Punching, Laser processing

>Manual >Small parts >"Small part" Parameters >Parameters.
1. Select "Removal with open flap".
2. Click on Optimization in the main menu.
3. "Sheet optimization" Automatic >Calculate >Start.
4. Click on "Row by row".
5. Select "Strategy", "Seperating row by row".
4.14 Clampdisplay and selection

Default clamps are displayed with their clamping surfaces. This
applies to all types of the TC 180, TC 235 and TC 240 machines.
Clamps which are used in connection with Multitools do not have
the clamping surface displayed.
Clamp selection is made as follows:
>Data module >Machines >Data >Clamp data >Data 1>"ID number
clamp".
All available clamps are displayed through the "arrow" symbol.
Each machine type allows the choice of standard or Multitool
clamp forms.
Note:
U354EN.doc
The selected clamps must correspond to those of their machines.
Technology module
49
Data module
5.1
Machine-dependent customized
process rules - public
In addition to the internal, password-protected process rules,

(Rules, Machine) public, machine-dependent customized process
rules (Rules, Customer machine) are available which describe the
machine and customized system data.
In the customized process rules, changes can be made without
daily passwords. Variables which are enabled for the customized
process rules are displayed in a list field. The number of displayed
variables depends on the machine selected.
with:
>Data module >Rules >Customer machine.
Update for Version 3.02

When updating to Version 3.02 from older ToPs versions, all
entries in the internal and public process rules are reset to the
TRUMPF defaults.
Settings made in the public customized process rules after this
initial update are retained in all future updates.
Adapting the public
customized process rules
1. Click on a variable in the list field.

The actual value is read into the input box.
Only the actual value is to be modified.
2. Modify the actual value.
3. Click on Modify.
The changes are saved.
50
Data module
U354EN.doc
All variables are listed in the following table.

No. Variable
Comments
MasReg_ZeitausgabeErp
Time output: 0-standard 1-customer's responsibility 2-no TRUMPF times
Steuerungstyp_BoschMicro5_TC_oder_T
Micro5TC = 1; Micro5T = 2
T2MrNcL_TOOL_TECH_WZGTYP
TC_TOOL_TECH - Output corresponding to tool type
T2MrNcL_WZGWECHSEL_PRG_ENDE
These tool types should be automatically changed at the end of the NC program.
T3MrGuiL_LeerwegOptionen
0=no options, 1=speed, 2=acceleration, 4=M58 (head up)
T3MrGuiL_M24Verwenden
0-do not use M24 1-use M24 in the program
T3MrMaL_LiftUndefDelV0
Part,-pushed out, -out of clamps, gripper, scrap, -pushed out, -out of clamps,
skeleton) For deleting unloading types (1-8, from left) when loading AP with lift
version 0
Part,-pushed out, -out of clamps, gripper, scrap, -pushed out, -out of clamps,
skeleton) For deleting unloading types (1-8, from left) when loading AP with lift
version 1
T3MrNcL_Ausgabe_UP_NR_in_ERP
Output of subroutine numbers in the setup plan (0=No; 1=Yes)
10
TC_BEAD_ON_mit_Offsetwinkel
Offset angle for quick forming possible: yes=1, no=0
11
WzgtypUnzulaessigBeimNachsetzen
Tool type not admitted for repositioning with presser foot
12
T3MrNcD_KorrZeitWzgWechselFormblech Time calculation: Additional tool change time for sheet type = formed sheet
13
T3MrNcD_KorrZeitWzgWechselUneben
Time calculation: Additional tool change time for sheet type = uneven sheet
14
T3MrNcD_KorrZeitWzgWechselEben
Time calculation: Additional tool change time for sheet type = flat sheet
15
WARTEZEIT_NACH_ERSTER_M14
Additional dwell time [sec] after first ignition of laser beam in laser mode
16
EIN_PfadModal
Default directory for setup plans
17
EinrichteplanFormular
Name for default setup plan form
18
HOCHDRUCK_AUSGABE_ART
Laser old: High-pressure output mode [0/1/2=e.g. M51S1112/M52S1114/M521]
19
LasMatrizEnts_MaxRadAbfallteil
Max. outer circle radius (scrap) up to which removal through die is recommended
20
LasMatrizEnts_MaxRadGutteil
Max. outer circle radius (part) up to which removal through die is recommended
21
LST_PfadModal
Default directory for NC program
22
Sc_BAHNK_ONOF
Laser cuttingcombi m/s: cutting with active cutter path compensation at

controls (1:YES / 0:NO)
23
Sc_EINS_ONOF
Laser cutting combi m/s: default: 0: Pre-punching, 1: Piercing, 2: Beam on
24
Sc_TAFCUT_ANFA_ART
Cut over sheet (laser): Approach mode (1:full; 2:reduced)
25
Sc_TAFCUT_ANFA_LEN
Cut over sheet (laser): Approach path to sheet edge
26
Sc_TAFCUT_ANFA_RED_LEN
Cut over sheet (laser): Reduced approach path
27
Sc_TAFCUT_GEOKATEGORIE
Cut over sheet (laser): Size (0: open; 1:small; 2:medium; 3:large)
28
Sc_TAFCUT_MESSABST_KANTE
Cut over sheet (laser): Distance between measuring point in sheet and sheet
edge
29
Sc_TAFCUT_SCHN_LEN_OHNE_HR
Cut over sheet (laser): Path for cutting close to edge without active height
regulation
30
Sc_TAFCUT_WEGF_LEN
Cut over sheet (laser): Withdrawal path from sheet edge
31
Sc_VRSTNZ_MAX_DURCHMESSER
Laser cutting: max. outer circle pre-punching tool
32
Sc_VRSTNZ_MIN_DURCHMESSER
Laser cutting: min. outer circle pre-punching tool
33
Sc_VRSTNZ_MIN_LEN_RED_SCHN
Min. path for reduced approaching from pre-punching hole
U354EN.doc
Data module
51
No. Variable
Comments
34
Sc_ZUENDPKT_KANTE
Laser cutting: cutting from pre-punching hole; distance between ignition point
and punch
35
T3MrGuiC_NCNachbearbeitungPrg
Entry for NC re-treatment (in data user editor)
36
T3MrGuiL_AutoTransferAktiv
Trigger for NC file transfer without further notice? [1=Yes; 0=No]
37
T3MrGuiL_EnableNCNachbearbeitung
Start an NC re-treatment? (0=No; 1=Yes)
38
T3MrGuiL_LSTDateiUeberschreiben
Overwrite NC files without further notice? [1=Yes; 0=No]
39
LasAutoProcess_SearchFrameMaxX
Right upper corner X: Window for finding start point for laser cutting (in %)
40
LasAutoProcess_SearchFrameMaxY
Right upper corner Y: Window for finding start point for laser cutting (in %)
41
LasAutoProcess_SearchFrameMinX
Left bottom corner X: Window for finding start point for laser cutting (in %)
42
LasAutoProcess_SearchFrameMinY
Left bottom corner Y: Window for finding start point for laser cutting (in %)
Comments
The comments regarding the selected variables contain information as to how the actual value is formatted.
Actual value
The actual value corresponds to the coding of the variables. After
the installation of ToPs, the default actual values are displayed. To
make your individual settings effective, you must modify the actual
value. How the actual values are created and what effects result
from changes made to them can be found in the following list.
Description of Variables
No. 1
MasReg_ZeitausgabeErp
In the "Machine time" line of the setup plan, the following text is
issued for the respective value entered:
Value = 0:
Value = 1:
Value = 2:
52
Data module
Default TRUMPF times are given.

Times are customer's responsibility The time is given in the setup plan.
No TRUMPF times are available The time is not given in the setup plan.
U354EN.doc
No. 2
Value = 1:
Bosch Micro 5TC

NC output with DFS identification for transferring data
Value = 2:
Bosch Micro 5T
NC output without DFS identification for punched tape operation
Note:
The NC program is created according to the control system

variants. If a value is set erroneously, the NC program cannot be
run on the machine.
No. 3
T2MrNcL_TOOL_TECH_WZGTYP
Specify the output of the PTT (Punch Tool Tech) in the NC text
according to the tool type.
Tool group 3
Tool group 2
Tool group 1
Valence numbers
Tool types
19
20
21
Example "actual" value:

006
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
030
001
002
004
010
020
040
100
200
400
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
112
No tool type within a tool group has the valence number 000.
Example: Actual value 006 030 112

In the actual value, reading from right to left, the tool types are
coded from the tool groups 1, 2, and 3.
Digits 1 to 3
of the actual value
Tool group 1; in the example 112

The tool types 2, 4, 7 should receive a PTT.
Valence number for tool type 2: 002
Sum of the valence numbers: 002 + 010 + 100 = 112
U354EN.doc
Data module
53
Digits 4 to 6
of the actual value

The tool types 13, 14, should receive a PTT.
Sum of the valence numbers: 010 + 020 = 030
Digits 7 to 9
of the actual value

The tool types 20, 21, should receive a PTT.
Sum of the valence numbers: 002 + 004 = 006
Note:
PTT output for: TC 600L type 1 and type 2, TC 2000

If the default entry of the actual value is modified, the following
must be observed so that the correct PTT is issued:
Machine
Tool type must

be contained within
the actual value
Default entry
actual value
TC 600L Type 1
10, 13, 14
000 031 000
TC 600L Type 2
10, 13, 14
000 031 000
Machine
Tool type may not be

contained within the
actual value
Default entry
actual value
TC 2000 R
5, 11, 19, 20
004 775 757

This actual value is taken
from the remaining tool
types.
No. 4
54
Data module
T2MrNcL_WZGWECHSEL_PRG_ENDE
This variable is not currently evaluated.
U354EN.doc
No. 5
T3MrGuiL_LeerwegOptionen
The values 0, 1, 2, 4 can be entered for the empty run options.
A combination of the values is also acceptable - the value to be
entered is taken from the sum of the possible options.
The set options can be found at:
>Technology module >Processing >Manual >Extras >Idle move,
Parameters.
Example TC 600L: 1+2+4 = 7
Value = 0:
Value = 1:
Value = 2:
Value = 4:
Use none of the variables.

Speed.
Acceleration.
M58 (head up); ram and stripper adapter
or the laser cutting head operate in the highest
possible position.
Note:
To receive a correct NC output, you must know which values are

supported by your machine.
No. 6
T3MrGuiL_M24Verwenden
Generate 420 strokes (M24) per minute through nibbling
Value = 0:
Value = 1:
Use M22 (not M24) in the program.

Use M24 in the program.
In the Data module this entry is self-holding for the
duration of the session. In the Technology module
it applies only as long as the machine is active.
Default settings for the TC 180 (with rotation): Value = 1.

Default settings for the TC 180 (without rotation): Value = 0
(only M22 issued; M24 is optional).
Note:
The maximum acceptable number of switchings is 5 per minute from the stroke rate of 280 per minute (M22) to 420 per minute
(M24) and back again.
If the switchings cannot be met or are not possible, the output can
be suppressed by setting the value.
U354EN.doc
Data module
55
No. 7
Delete TRUMALIFT removal with this unloading type when loading
old programs (TMT) from ToPs 200 and ToPs 250 versions.
Lift removals with this unloading type are deleted when it is
uncertain whether they are produced with an active punching or
laser station.
The actual value is made up of 8 digits strung together. A digit can
have the value 0=no (do not delete unloading type) or 1=yes
(delete unloading type). Each of the 8 places in the actual value
represents a coding.
The reading direction of the actual value is from left to right.
Example: Actual value 00110011
no
no
yes
yes
no
no
yes
yes
Part
Part pushed out
Part out of
clamps
Waste grid
with lifting
grip
Scrap
Scrap pushed
out
Scrap out of
clamps
Waste grid
with suction
cup
No. 8
Delete TRUMALIFT removal with this unloading type when loading
old programs (TMT) from ToPs 300 Version 3.00.
See no. 7 for description of coding.
No. 9
T3MrNcL_Ausgabe_UP_NR_in_ERP
Should the subroutine numbers be issued in the setup plan?
Value = 0:
Value = 1:
No. 10
no
yes
(Useful for control systems which have no
subroutine connections.
Example: SINUMERIK 3N, SINUMERIK 8N,
BOSCH Micro 5T).
TC_BEAD_ON_mit_Offsetwinkel
Is the offset angle possible with "Quick forming"?
Value = 0:
Value = 1:
56
Data module
no
yes
U354EN.doc
No. 11
WzgtypUnzulaessigBeimNachsetzen
Which tool types cannot be used for repositioning? Example: no
mechanical presser foot available.
Proceed as described in no. 3.
No. 12
T3MrNcD_KorrZeitWzgWechselFormblech
Additional tool change time for sheet type = "formed sheet".
Description in the chapter: "Improved time calculation in processing
and part removal".
No. 13
T3MrNcD_KorrZeitWzgWechselUneben
Additional tool change time for sheet type = "uneven sheet".
and part removal".
No. 14
T3MrNcD_KorrZeitWzgWechselEben
Additional tool change time for sheet type = "flat sheet".
and part removal".
No. 15
WARTEZEIT_NACH_ERSTER_M14
Applies to: TC 240L, TC 260L and TC L2000.
If the quality of the cut upon approach does not match the quality
of further processing, it can be stabilized by an additional dwell
time in seconds after each ignition of the laser beam in laser mode.
No. 16
EIN_PfadModal
This variable may not be modified or deleted.
U354EN.doc
Data module
57
No. 17
Setup plan form

File name of the standard setup plan form for
Punching machine = 'ReportPunch.html'
Laser machining = 'ReportLaser.html'
Combi machining = 'ReportCombi.html'
The files are stored in the '\Trumpf\Model' directory.
No. 18
HOCHDRUCK_AUSGABE_ART
TC 240L and TC 260L
With this machine there are three ways to program high-pressure
cutting.
Value = 0:
Value = 1:
Value = 2:
No. 19
M52S<stufe> <Gasart> is issued.

M52S<stufe>4 is issued.
M521 is issued.
LasMatrizEnts_MaxRadAbfallteil
Applies to scrap parts with circular contours which, for reasons of
process safety, must be removed through the die.
The radius of the circle can be defined.
No. 20
LasMatrizEnts_MaxRadGutteil
Applies to finished parts with circular contours which, for reasons
of process safety, must be removed through the die.
The radius of the circle can be defined.
No. 21
LST_PfadModal
A default directory can be defined into which the NC programs are
to be saved.
58
Data module
U354EN.doc
No. 22
Sc_BAHNK_ONOF
Laser cutting with combi machines
Default setting for laser tools: "Cutting with cutter path compensation" parameters.
Calculation of the laser tool path at the control system.
Value = 0:
Value = 1:
No. 23
no
yes
Sc_EINS_ONOF
Laser cutting with combi machines
Default setting of the laser tool for start of beam:
Value = 0:
Value = 1:
Value = 2:
No. 24
Pre-punching
Piercing
Beam on
Sc_TAFCUT_ANFA_ART
Not evaluated in this ToPs version.
Sheet-dividing cut with laser cutting: How should approach occur?
Value = 1:
Value = 2:
No. 25
Full approach
Reduced approach
Sc_TAFCUT_ANFA_LEN
Sheet-dividing cut with laser cutting:
Approach path to sheet edge.
No. 26
Sc_TAFCUT_ANFA_RED_LEN
Not evaluated in this ToPs version.
Sheet-dividing cut with laser cutting: Path length of the cut to be
made with the "reduced" type approach.
U354EN.doc
Data module
59
No. 27
Sc_TAFCUT_GEOKATEGORIE
Sheet-dividing cut with laser cutting:
"Large definition": processing sheet-dividing cuts as open contours
or with the process rules for small, medium and large contours.
Value = 0:
Value = 1:
Value = 2:
Value = 3:
No. 28
open contour
small contour
medium contour
large contour
Sc_TAFCUT_MESSABST_KANTE
Sheet-dividing cut with laser cutting: The distance from the sheet
edge to the measuring point within the sheet can be defined.
No. 29
Sc_TAFCUT_SCHN_LEN_OHNE_HR
Sheet-dividing cut with laser cutting: Cutting without active height
regulation DIAS III.
When cutting close to the edge of the sheet, the length of the path
can be defined which is to be cut without active height regulation.
No. 30
Sc_TAFCUT_WEGF_LEN
Sheet-dividing cut with laser cutting: The withdrawal path from the
sheet edge can be defined.
No. 31
Sc_VRSTNZ_MAX_DURCHMESSER
Geometric specifications for the pre-punching tool with laser
cutting:
The maximum acceptable diameter (D max) is defined for an
enclosed circle around the pre-punching tool with the desired tool
contour.
In an automatic search of the pre-punching tool, the search is
performed from the minimum acceptable diameter (D min.,
see no. 32) to the maximum acceptable diameter (D max).
Only round and rectangular tools are considered.
The selected pre-punching tool is checked against this value.
If it fails this test, the tool is declined as a pre-punching tool.
60
Data module
U354EN.doc
Example:
D min = 3.0 mm to D max = 8.0 mm
If a round tool with a diameter of 15.0 mm is selected as a prepunching tool, the following error message appears:
"Pre-punching tool not acceptable! (see range specifications in the
machine process rules!)".
If a standard pre-punching diameter is to be defined, it is useful to
enter this as the minimum acceptable diameter. The searching
time will thereby be shortened.
Applies to TC 600L:
Recommended pre-punching diameter D = 6.0-8.0 mm.
An optimal processing as regards the height regulation cannot be
guaranteed for larger pre-punching diameters.
No. 32
Sc_VRSTNZ_MIN_DURCHMESSER
Geometric specifications for a pre-punching tool with laser cutting:
The minimum acceptable diameter is defined for an enclosed circle
around the pre-punching tool with the desired tool contour.
In an automatic search of the pre-punching tool, the search is
performed from the minimum acceptable diameter (D min) to the
maximum acceptable diameter (D max).
The selected pre-punching tool is checked against this value.
If it fails this test, the tool is declined as a pre-punching tool.
The search range for the pre-punching tool is automatically
adapted to the current sheet thickness.
Example:
D min = 2.0 mm to D max = 8.0 mm
with a current sheet thickness of s = 4.0 mm is corrected to D min
= 4.0 mm and D max = 8.0 mm.
If a standard pre-punching diameter is to be defined, it is useful to
enter this as the minimum acceptable diameter. The searching
time will thereby be shortened.
If a specific pre-punching tool is to be preset, it is useful to enter
the same value for D min and D max. The search will then result in
precisely this tool with this outer circle radius as the pre-punching
tool.
U354EN.doc
Data module
61
No. 33
Sc_VRSTNZ_MIN_LEN_RED_SCHN
Laser cutting:
The minimum path can be defined for "reduced cutting" when
approaching from the pre-punching hole.
No. 34
Sc_ZUENDPKT_KANTE
Start of cutting from the pre-punching hole with laser cutting.
The distance can be defined to the cutting edge of the prepunching hole at which the laser beam is ignited.
Note:
This variable represents effective processing values technologically tested by TRUMPF. Modifications are not recommended.
No. 35
No. 36
T3MrGuiL_AutoTransferAktiv
No. 37
T3MrGuiL_EnableNCNachbearbeitung
No. 38
T3MrGuiL_LSTDateiUeberschreiben
No. 39
LasAutoProcess_SearchFrameMaxX
Variable for defining the processing start point of a contour with
laser cutting.
Variable for internal calculations ("right upper corner X").
The default value is given in %.
No. 40
62
T3MrGuiC_NCNachbearbeitungPrg
LasAutoProcess_SearchFrameMaxY
laser cutting.
Variable for internal calculations ("right upper corner Y").
Data module
U354EN.doc
No. 41
LasAutoProcess_SearchFrameMinX
laser cutting.
Variable for internal calculations ("left bottom corner X").
No. 42
LasAutoProcess_SearchFrameMinY
laser cutting.
Variable for internal calculations ("left bottom corner Y").
5.2
Machine selection
Machine selection is mandatory only when opening the Data

module.
5.3
Modifying the PTT (Punch Tool Tech)

output
If the PTT output for various tool types is to be purposefully

defined, proceed as described in the chapter "Machine-dependent
customized process rules".
with:
U354EN.doc
>Data module >Rules >Customer

TECH_WZG TYP.
machine
>T2MrNcL_TOOL_
Data module
63
5.4
with:
Entering the machine-dependent

transfer path name (NC file transfer)
>Data module >Machines >Data >Basic machine >Data 8.

The "transfer path name" is read into the Technology module as
the "target directory" in the "NC file transfer" dialog box (>File main
menu >Transfer >NC file transfer).
If no "transfer path name" is entered in the Data module, the
program will automatically use the default entry TC_MASCH_
PFAD from the .ini file as the "target directory".
64
Data module
U354EN.doc
Machine information
6.1
Additionally supported machines and

components
Machine
Control system
Automated
TC 100
Sinumerik 3N
TC 180 K/W
Bosch M5T and

Bosch M5TC
TC 180 K/W
Sinumerik 8N
(Minimatic)
TC 180 KD/WD Fanuc 6MB
TC L2000
Sinumerik 8N
TC 260L
Bosch CC 300
6.2
TRUMALIFT SC, SE, SB
TC 2000 R
Quick forming
With the TC 2000 R software version 2.0 (and later), the machine
control system supplies "Quick forming" processing as an option.
This type of processing allows the machining of endless beading.
From a working position called "Quick forming", endless beads are
formed with a beading tool. The stroke rate achieved can reach
2200 strokes per minute.
ToPs 300 supports "Quick forming". The tangential setting of the
beading tool on the desired contour is automatic.
"Quick forming" is done with tool type 19.
with:
>Technology module >Tools >Selection

>Quick forming.
For "Quick forming", the following pair of functions are issued in the
NC text:
TC_BEAD_ON: Quick forming ON
TC_BEAD_OFF: Quick forming OFF
U354EN.doc
Machine information
65
Requirements
The option "engraving" is required for quick forming.
1
1
Endless beading
2
2
Endless beading in punching

range
Fig. 22123
Advantages
"Quick forming" offers the following advantages as compared to

conventional beading from the forming position:
Increase of processing speed:
"Quick forming" is up to 11x faster.
More flexibility:
Endless beading can be machined in linear or circular paths on
partial or full circles. Customer preprocessed sections of a part
(e. g. punchings) are appropriate for "Quick forming".
Improved surface quality.
Use of standard beading tools
The selection of the tool is made according to the desired
beading height. The maximum beading height is 5 mm (with a
5x10 beading tool).
66
Machine information
U354EN.doc
Correct installation position of tools

Note:
Applies to technical information and tool information in which an

installation position especially for the TC 2000 R is described:
In these cases, the installation position of the tool must correspond
to the installation position as described for the TC 600L.
6.3
TC 600L:
Releasing sheet tension after loading
If thin sheets (e. g. 1-1.5 mm) are loaded with the TRUMALIFT
SheetMaster, so-called ripple tension can appear on the sheet.
The ripple tension leads to the sheet lying unevenly on the
machine table after the clamps have been closed. The sheet must
therefore have the tension released.
Remedial measures: With control systems of the type
SINUMERIK 840D - Versions prior to 6.1
Earlier control system versions require the definition of a

repositioning procedure. In this repositioning procedure, the
clamps are to be opened and then closed again.
Requirements

with:
Procedure
A sheet must be loaded in the Technology module.
>Technology module >Processing >Punching

>Manual >Sheet.
1. Click on Start.
Displayed in the message line is: "Pick clamping position".
2. Positioning the displayed punching head: In the X-direction
approx. in the center of the sheet; in the Y-direction approx.
200 mm from the lower sheet edge.
3. Confirm the position by clicking with the mouse.
4. Click on OK.
The punching head is displayed as a dashed yellow circle.
5. Click on the dashed yellow circle.
A moveable drawing appears.
6. Cover the clamps of both drawings.
7. Click on OK.
8. Click on the Drawing symbol.
A blue positioning line appears.
U354EN.doc
Machine information
67
Remedial measures:
With control systems of the type

SINUMERIK 840D - Versions 6.1 and
later
As of this control system version, the sheet tension can be

released with the NC cycle TC_RELEASE_SHEET_TENSION.
Note:
In the NC cycle TC_RELEASE_SHEET_TENSION the sheet's

position is not fixed.
Requirements

with:
Procedure
A sheet must be loaded in the Technology module.
>Technology module >Processing >Punching

>Manual >Extras.
1. Click on Free cycle at "NC functions".

2. Click on the arrow symbol at "Cycle name".
3. Select "Release sheet tension" at "Free cycle".
4. Click on "before" at "Position relative to target operation".
68
Machine information
U354EN.doc
6.4
Time calculation for the TC 600L and

TC 2000 R
The time calculation is dependent upon the type of removal

performed.
The types of removal are:
Manual removal
Removal through flap or chute
Removal with lift
Requirements

with:
The cycle time of the desired NC cycle must be modified in the

Data module.
>Data module >NC output >Times >Cycles.
The following cycles are important for removal:

Manual removal.
KE_Klap_1: Removal through flap/chute.
Lift_e_saug_1: Removal with lift.
PART_UNLOAD: The Part_Unload time is used up to
ToPs 300, Version 3.00.
Procedure
1. Click on cycle in list field.

2. Enter time.
3. Click on Modify.
The modified time is saved.
U354EN.doc
Machine information
69
List field for NC cycles
Input box for time

Fig. 22292
Note:
The named cycles are only important for the time calculation. The
PART_UNLOAD cycle is still the deciding factor for the NC text
output.
Tool changing time for type of sheet: flat sheet
The
applicable
cycles
are
WZG_WECHSEL_1
WZG_WECHSEL_21.
to
Tool changing time for type of sheet: formed sheet

This type of sheet requires longer tool changing times: the
punching head must perform additional travel motions.
70
Machine information
U354EN.doc
Accurate time calculation independent of sheet type

The correction times for a changing of tools can be entered for
each sheet type (see chapter "Machine-dependent customized
process rules").
These correction times are added at the time of the
"WZG_WECHSEL_..." cycle.
The following variables are available in the "Machine-dependent
customized process rules".
T3MrNcD_KorrZeitWzgWechselFormblech:
Additional tool change time for
sheet type = "formed sheet".
T3MrNcD_KorrZeitWzgWechselUneben:
sheet type = "uneven sheet".
T3MrNcD_KorrZeitWzgWechselEben:
sheet type = "flat sheet".
For the TC 600L, the cycle times for a tool change are reduced from
7 s to 5.5 s. The variable T3MrNcD_KorrZeitWzgWechselFormblech
is set to 5.5 s. These times apply to a TC 600L Type 1 with a current
version control system.
Note:
Use the current tool changing times on the machine when you
measure with control system version 6.0 or earlier. Enter the
correction times in the "Machine-dependent customized process
rules" (description in this chapter).
U354EN.doc
Machine information
71
6.5
with:
TC 200R: Positioning speed

TC 200R up to November 1996: Default setting in ToPs
Positioning speed
max.
60 m/min
40 m/min
Maximale Simultangeschwindigkeit
speed): 72 m/min
(Maximum
simultaneous
TC 200R as of November 1996

(Control system software update: 2.1, punching heads with part
numbers: 9095-70 and 9095-71)
Positioning speed
max.
80 m/min
55 m/min
Maximale Simultangeschwindigkeit
speed): 97 m/min
72
Machine information
(Maximum
simultaneous
U354EN.doc
6.6
Configuring the TC 180
Setting the tool changing type

The default setting in ToPs for all TC 180 and TC 180R is:
Magazine (automatic tool change, 16 stations).
Setting the tool change type
to "manual"
Open the dialog window with:

>Data module >Machines >Configuration >Data 1.
1. Click on "tool changer" none.
2. Click on Modify.
The change is saved.
3. Check the default setting: "Y increment tool change at sheet:
30 mm" at
>Data module >Machines >Data >Basic machine
>Data 2.
Setting the tool change type

to "Magazine"
Open the dialog window with:

>Data module >Machines >Configuration >Data 1
1. Click on "tool changer" Magazine.
2. Click on Modify.
Reducing speed
Three speed curves are available in ToPs. The feed rate of the
machine is reduced according to the sheet weight.
Default setting in the "Formula management":
Machine
type
1
2
-
U354EN.doc
Sheet format Speed curve

in list field
1 red. Geschwindigkeit
2000 x 1000
(1 speed reduction)
2500 x 1250
(2 speed reduction)
3000 x 1500
(3 speed reduction)
Reduction of
speed
Formul
a type
"active"
slight
14
YES
medium
14
YES
great
14
Machine information
73
Working with large format sheets (3000 x 1500)

The third speed curve must be selected. In the selection
window: "3 red. Geschwindigkeit" ("3 speed reduction")
"active": YES.
A speed that is too high can result in damage to the machine.

Caution
An increase in speed is not acceptable.
Activate/deactivate the speed curve:

with:
Procedure
>Data module >Machines >Data >Formulas >Data 1.
1. Select the speed curve at "selection".

2. Set the "active" button to YES or NO.
Only one speed curve may have "YES" for "active" status.
3. Click on Modify.
Automatic processing
For the TC 180 (no rotation), "Observe mounting angle" should not
be selected.
If "Observe mounting angle" is selected, only "manual removal" will
be generated with automatic processing.
with:
74
Machine information
>Technology module >Processing >Automatic >Generate

>Parameters.
U354EN.doc
Adapting the customized process rules

The following variables can be adapted in the public customized
process rules:
Note:
Default setting in ToPs = 1; Bosch Micro 5TC.
MasReg_ZeitausgabeErp.
T3MrGuil_LeerwegOptionen
Default setting in ToPs = 5.
Acceleration programming is not possible for the TC 180. The

output of M58/ M59 - "Ram and stripper adapter in the highest
possible position" - is optional (additional module).
A detailed description of the variables can be found in the chapter
"Public customized process rules".
Adapting small part flaps (on left) in the

Data module
For the machine type TC 180K with manual tool changing, the flap
for small part removal is located on the left side (operator's
perspective).
In this case, the data must be adapted.
Requirements

with:
Procedure
The correct drawing must be copied. See the description in the

chapter "Using new TRUMPF drawings".
>Data module >Machines >Data >Small part removal

>Data 2.
1. Click on "KE_Klap_1" in the list field at "NC cycle name".

2. Overwrite the entry at "Drawing name" with R180K105.GEO.
3. Click on Modify.
4. Click on Data 1.
5. Click on "KE_Klap_1" in the list field at "NC cycle name".
6. At "Dimensions", overwrite the values in the input boxes with:
7. min X = 90, min Y = -136, max X = 875, max Y = 45.
8. Click on Modify.
U354EN.doc
Machine information
75
6.7
TC 260L:
Removing small parts with ejector
cylinder
The ejector cylinder is shown in the screen display of the flap

drawing.
Requirements
After the update, the R260L105.GEO, R260LMAT.GEO and

R260NMAT.GEO files for the new drawings must be copied out of
the directory..\Trumpf\TOPS_ZCH\ZCH_NEU into the directory
..\Trumpf\TOPS_ZCH.
76
Machine information
U354EN.doc
6.8
TC L2000
Activating/deactivating flap sensors

To activate or deactivate the flap sensors, the light barrier must be
engaged.
with:
>Technology module >Processing >Small parts

>"Small parts" parameters.
Restrictions
Select "Acknowledgment light barrier".
The S value for laser cutting must be programmed as free text.

The laser output (M46 to M49) must be programmed as free
text.
Marking
Marking is possible with the M15 command in the NC program. For
marking, vaporizing and center punch type processing, M15 (pulse
pause mode) is issued in the NC text instead of M14 (CW mode).
The corresponding S value must be interposed as free text.
U354EN.doc
Machine information
77
6.9
Applies only to the TC 500R with

standard clamps and working range of
X = 2500 mm:
Switching from standard to high stroke
rate
The formulas for this TC 500R are recalculated and entered into
the database.
The optional "High stroke rate" is supported with standard clamps,
working range of X = 2500 mm and the Bosch CC220S control
system in machines delivered as of May 1994.
Setting a high stroke rate

with:
Note:
>Data module >Machines >Data >Formulas >Data 1.
Formulas 1 and 2
As a default, the formulas for machines with a normal stroke rate
are always activated in ToPs. Erroneously set formulas, i.e. an
acceleration that is too high, can result in serious damage to these
machines. The time calculation is likewise incorrect.
Formulas 3, 4, 7
If the wrong formula is activated here, the time calculation will be
inaccurate.
"No. of
formula"
"Remark"
"active" switch setting

for high stroke rate
Has an effect on
X-Beschl. (X-accel.)
No
Machine dynamics
Y-Beschl. (Y-accel.)
No
Machine dynamics
Stanzzeit (Punching time) f(S) M80
No
Time calculation
No
Time calculation
No
Time calculation
X-Beschl. (X-accel.) Hohe Hubzahl (high stroke rate)
Yes
Machine dynamics
Y-Beschl. (Y-accel.) Hohe Hubzahl (high stroke rate)
Yes
Machine dynamics
Stanzzeit f(S) M80 Hohe Hubzahl (Punching time f(S) Yes

M80 high stroke rate)
Time calculation

Time calculation

Time calculation
M80: Standard punch strokes

M27: Punching with active presser foot
M82: Punching with Whispertool
78
Machine information
U354EN.doc
Procedure
1. Click on "X-Beschl." ("X accel.") at "Selection".

2. "Active" No.
3. Modify.
4. Click on "Y-Beschl." ("Y accel.") at "Selection".
5. "Active" No.
6. Modify.
7. Click on "Stanzzeit f(S) M80" ("Punching time f(S) M80") at
"Selection".
8. "Active" No.
9. Modify.
"Selection".
11. "Active" No.
12. Modify.
"Selection".
14. "Active" No.
15. Modify.
16. Click on "X-Beschl. Hohe Hubzahl" ("X accel. high stroke rate")
at "Selection".
17. "Active" Yes.
18. Modify.
19. Click on "Y-Beschl. Hohe Hubzahl" ("Y accel. high stroke rate")
at "Selection".
20. "Active" Yes.
21. Modify.
22. Click on "Stanzzeit f(S) M80 Hohe Hubzahl" ("Punching time
f(S) M80 high stroke rate") at "Selection".
23. "Active" Yes.
24. Modify.
26. "Active" Yes.
27. Modify.
29. "Active" Yes.
30. Modify.
All modifications are saved. The machine operates with a high
stroke rate.
U354EN.doc
Machine information
79
Entering the maximum value for

acceleration in X direction
Requirements
The operator has performed a test. The test ensures that the
machine is equipped with the acceleration package.
Test
The following must be entered in manual mode for the
machine: G06 X18.
If no error message is issued, the machine is equipped with the
acceleration package.
with:
Procedure
1. At "X acceleration, max.", modify the value 12 m/s to 18 m/s .

2. Click on Modify.
The new acceleration value is saved.
80
Machine information
U354EN.doc
Modifications affecting all modules
7.1
Calculator
The calculator can be operated with the mouse as well as with the
2
keyboard in all modules. The function "x " is made available
through "sqr"; the number "" through "Pi".
7.2
Activating online help in ToPs
Online help can be activated through the "question mark" in the

ToPs user interface. Online help is available in English, German,
French, Italian and Spanish.
Activating online help through the question mark
7.3
Fig. 23503
Using new TRUMPF drawings
If you wish to use the new improved drawings after a ToPs update,
you must copy the files from the following directory:
'..\trumpf\tops_zch\zch_neu'
into the directory
'.\trumpf\tops_zch'
U354EN.doc
81
The following drawings are new or have been improved:

Drawing for
File name of
drawing
Position of the flap from

operator's perspective
TC 260L flap
R260L105.GEO
front
TC 260L standard die hole
R260LMAT.GEO
TC 260L optional die hole
R260NMAT.GEO
TC L 2000 flap
R2000105.GEO
front
TC 180N flap
(automatic tool change)
R180_105.GEO
right
TC180N flap
(manual tool change)
R180K105.GEO
left
TC180 flap (rotation)
R180_106.GEO
left
TC 500 chute 1
R500_101.GEO
TC 600L (laser die hole)
R6003MAT.GEO
7.4
Database conversion program:

DB_SORT.BAT in the directory
\Trumpf\Macros
DB_SORT.BAT is a conversion program which adapts the databank data of the unloading area.
If you have performed an update from ToPs 200 or ToPs 250 to
ToPs 300, you will find a detailed description in the directory:
\Trumpf\Macros in the file 'db_sort.doc' or 'db_sort.pdf'.
82
U354EN.doc
7.5
Using long directory and file names
Long file names are displayed in shortened form. The program

uses however the complete path and filenames.
Exception:
If the directory or the file name has been modified manually, the
program uses this entry.
Recommendation:
Use no spaces or special characters in the directory or file names,
such as , ,...
7.6
Printing nesting results with Wordpad
When printing nesting results, ToPs may issue the following

prompt: "File is too large for the notepad. Should Wordpad be used
instead? Y/N".
If the message is answered with Yes, the Wordpad program is
used to print the nesting results.
If all printouts are to be made with Wordpad:
Procedure
In Windows
1. Open Windows Explorer.
2. Use the "Find" function of Explorers to search for the file
'wordpad.exe'.
3. Write down the path for the file 'wordpad.exe'.
In ToPs in the Data module
1. Click on >User > Editor.
The dialog box "User settings" is opened.
2. Click on STD_PRINTER in the list field.
3. Overwrite notepad at "path/program" with the path information
for the file 'wordpad.exe'.
Example:
C:\Trumpf\Macros\Wordpad.exe
4. Click on Modify.
The entry is saved.
U354EN.doc
83
7.7
Displaying and printing laser tables

and process rules
Technology module
with:
Procedure
>Technology module >Tools >Laser tables.
1. Select table.
2. Click on Laser table or Rules at "Show contents".
3. Using the printer symbol in the icon bar at the lower edge of
the dialog window, select laser technology tables or rules.
Data module
Laser tables:
with:
>Data module >Laser >Output >Printer/Display.
Rules:
with:
84
>Data module >Rules >Data >Output >Printer/Display.
U354EN.doc
Index
Approximating ............................................... 14
Geo Comparer............................................... 36
Bending lines ................................................ 15

B-spline ......................................................... 13
High stroke rate ............................................. 78

html format .................................................... 43
Calculator ...................................................... 81
Clamps.......................................................... 49
Company logo............................................... 42
Compulsory sequences ................................ 37
Contour preparation ...................................... 12
Control polygon............................................. 15
Conversion program ..................................... 82
Corner treatments ......................................... 22
Creating bending profiles .............................. 19
Customized process rules............................. 50
igs files .......................................................... 12

Installation ....................................................... 9
Installation position........................................ 67
Internal process rules .................................... 50
Interpolating................................................... 14
J
Job management........................................... 21
D
Darstellungsoptionen (Q1, Display options) . 38
L
Lift position .................................................... 49
Lift removal.................................................... 47
Looping.......................................................... 23
F
File information ............................................. 10
File manager ................................................. 38
Flap sensors ................................................. 77
M
Marking.......................................................... 77
mi files ........................................................... 12
mmt files ........................................................ 28
U354EN.doc
Index
85
Online help.................................................... 81
Sample part ................................................... 34

Schnelles Sicken (Q4, Quick beading).......... 65
Setting the positioning speed ........................ 72
Stacking mode............................................... 48
Storing dongles ............................................... 9
P
Palletizing...................................................... 47
pdf format...................................................... 43
Placeholders ................................................. 31
Polygonal cut ................................................ 35
external contour ............................... 35
internal contour ................................ 35

Processing samples...................................... 26
PTT output .................................................... 63
T
Thread former................................................ 31
with tip .............................................. 31
without tip ......................................... 31

Time calculation ............................................ 69
Tool changing type ........................................ 73
Transfer path name ....................................... 64
TRUMPF drawings ........................................ 81
TRUMPF processing samples ...................... 30
R
Releasing sheet tension................................ 67
Rounding....................................................... 23
U
Unfolding bending profiles............................. 18
Update............................................................. 9
86
Index
U354EN.doc
Update information
ToPs 300
Version 3.20
Update information
ToPs 300
Version 3.20
Edition: 04/2001

TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG
Technische Dokumentation
Johann Maus Strae 2
D-71254 Ditzingen
Tel: +49 (0) 71 56/3 03-0
Fax: +49 (0) 71 563 03-5 40
E-mail: docu.501@de.trumpf.com
This document was created by the Technical Documentation Dept. of

TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG.
All rights to this documentation, especially the rights of reproduction and
distribution as well as that of translation are retained by TRUMPF
Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG. This also applies in cases of
notifications of protected privilege. Without previous written consent of
TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG no part of the documentation,
no matter in which form, reproduced or processed, copied or distributed using
electronic systems. Errors and technical changes excepted.
TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG is not liable for any errors in
this documentation. Liability for direct and indirect damage or injury resulting
from the delivery or use of this documentation is excluded, in so far as this is
legally permissible.
New in Version 3.20

Shortening/extending elements
If two elements share the same intersecting point, they can be
shortened or extended to this intersecting point. An element to be
changed must be a line or an arc. A reference element can be, for
example, a line, an arc or a construction circle.
Entering no. machine cycle during job management

Parts are normally produced in several machine cycles. Example:
1. punching, 2. bending, 3. welding, 4. enameling.
The machine cycle number serves job monitoring. With this
machine cycle number, parts have unequivocal identification.
Setting the special tool on an element

Processing plans with special tools, for example, a radius tool, can
be carried out without any costly auxiliary constructions.
ToPs automatically allocates a suitable cutting edge and applies
the special tool to the element when the cutting edge is marked
with a dashed line.
If no suitable cutting edge is found, the desired cutting edge can be
manually identified. The tool is set on the corresponding side of the
element.
Trimming sheet
The "Trimming" function is available for punching and laser
machining; this allows rem. strips to be removed from a sheet.
Rem. strips can be removed by hand or with a TRUMALIFT.
Create production plans with NcLink

NcLink is a program that is delivered with ToPs and you have the
option of having its user interface installed.
NcLink combines several NC programs from one nesting job into a
production plan. Data that is important for automation (for example,
storage item designation) is added to the individual NC programs.
The production plan is sent to the machine's transfer directory.
U354EN.DOC
New in Version 3.20
Configuring palletizing
Several unloading area configurations can be defined for one
machine type.
Example: Unloading platform with one large or several small
pallets.
If palletizing subsequently continues automatically, the fixed
unloading area configurations can be accessed.
Using setup plan models

TRUMPF makes different setup plan models available.
Examples of the setup plan models are integrated into ToPs online
help and can be called up with the question mark in the ToPs user
interface.
New in Version 3.20
U354EN.DOC
Contents
1.
Installation ....................................................................... 12
2.
2.1
2.2
Drawing module .............................................................. 13

Shortening/extending elements ........................................ 13
Shortening/extending an element ................................ 14
Shortening/extending two elements............................. 15
Loading mi files: Transfer detail drawings......................... 17
3.
3.1
3.2
3.3
Nesting module ............................................................... 18

Changing sheet format afterwards.................................... 18
Job management: entering no. machine cycle ................. 19
Allocate storage item designation ..................................... 20
4.
4.1
Technology module ........................................................ 21

Managing data from thread formers (Q3) ......................... 21
Creating thread former (Q3) ........................................ 21
Copy data record of thread formers (Q3)..................... 22
Creating thread individually............................................... 23
Setting the special tool on an element .............................. 24
Automatically search for pre-punching tool
dependent on the sheet thickness .................................... 25
Allocate TDC/BDC (Q2, UDP/LDP) tool parameters ........ 26
Automatic processing: Punching outer contour with
a special tool ..................................................................... 27
Processing nesting jobs .................................................... 28
Data module................................................................. 28
Technology module...................................................... 28
Trimming sheet ................................................................. 30
Trimming strategies for punch and laser
machining..................................................................... 30
Apply trimming ............................................................. 32
Removing parts by hand or with flap/chute....................... 33
Optimization: Rearrange processing plans
manually............................................................................ 34
Production plan ................................................................. 35
Create production plans with NcLink ........................... 35
Create production plan parameters for individual
NC programs with NcLink ............................................ 35
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
U354EN.DOC
Contents
5.
5.1
5.4
Data module..................................................................... 37
TRUMALIFT ...................................................................... 37
Opening lift data........................................................... 37
Assigning a lift for the first time.................................... 37
Activating new lift for lift selection ................................ 38
Adjust ToPs for TRUMALIFT with Y offset .................. 38
Displaying X and Y axis acceleration values ............... 40
Machine-dependent customized process rules public ................................................................................. 41
New variable ................................................................ 42
Descriptionof variables................................................. 43
Tool alternatingsystem: entering the maximum
number of tools ................................................................. 49
Setting tool lubrication....................................................... 50
6.
6.1
Info module...................................................................... 51
Displaying information....................................................... 51
7.
7.1
7.2
7.3
Improvements affecting all modules............................. 52

Managingandcreatingmaterial and storage items............. 52
Configuring palletizing....................................................... 53
Using setup plan models................................................... 56
Display PTT tables in the setup plan ........................... 57
TC-APT interface .............................................................. 57
Description ................................................................... 57
Supported machines .................................................... 57
U Parameter: Programming TRUMALIFT......................... 58
X offset value punching head - suction framezero point (distance last stroke - lift) ............................ 60
Pallet: Position X and stacked goods on pallet:
Position X ..................................................................... 61
Displaying offset (X Offset stacked goods-lift) ............. 62
Files................................................................................... 63
Accelerated import of dxf and iges files ....................... 63
Pack html files .............................................................. 63
Wheel mouse Support....................................................... 64
Expert mode: Using right mouse button............................ 65
Key functions..................................................................... 68
Set key functions.......................................................... 68
Using copy - paste ....................................................... 69
5.2
5.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
10
Contents
U354EN.DOC
8.
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
Index
U354EN.DOC
Machine specific modifications..................................... 70

Supported machines and components ............................. 70
Supported automation....................................................... 71
Using alphanumeric program names ................................ 72
TC 600 L............................................................................ 73
Using presser foot and repositioning cylinder.............. 73
TC 5000 R ......................................................................... 74
Activating Y path movement for the lift ........................ 74
Activating loading aid ................................................... 75
Using loading table ...................................................... 75
Using presser foot and repositioning cylinder.............. 76
Using TRUMPF Multibend tool .................................... 77
TC 500 R ........................................................................... 78
Activating output as a table.......................................... 78
High lifting no. .............................................................. 78
..................................................................................... 81
Contents
11
1.
Installation
During installation the ToPs database is checked for new mat.

spec. entries from older ToPs versions.
If a material is not in the database with its specific properties, the
installation routine gives out a random number as material
specification for this material.
After first starting up ToPs after the update, you can only work with
ToPs if a different material specification is entered for all new
materials.
12
Installation
U354EN.DOC
2.
Drawing module
2.1
Shortening/extending elements
Prerequisite
An element to be changed must be: line or arc.
U354EN.DOC
Two elements must possess a common intersecting point (real

or virtual).
A reference element can be: line, arc, circle, rounding, bevel,
construction line, construction circle.
Drawing module
13
Shortening/extending an element
Note:
The element to be changed is shortened and extended on the
intersecting point with the reference material.
If there are two intersecting points (arc), the intersecting point
nearest to the first pick point is chosen.
The element to be changed is shortened from the side which the
pick point is not on.
With Undo under "Shorten/extend" the most recent action can be
canceled/restored.
1
3
2
Reference element
Pick point clicked on
Element to be changed
Fig. 26960
1. Select Drawing module >Modify 2 >Shorten/Extend 1st elem.

2. Select element to be changed.
3. Select reference element.
14
Drawing module
U354EN.DOC
Shortening/extending two elements

Note:
Both elements are shortened and extended on the same intersecting point.
If there are two intersecting points (arc), the intersecting point
nearest to the first pick point is chosen.
Both elements to be changed are shortened from the side which
the pick points are not on.
With Undo the most recent action can be canceled/restored.
1
First element to be changed
2.
Pick point
Second element to be changed

Fig. 26961
1. Select Drawing module >Modify 2 >Shorten/extend Both elem.

2. Click on first element to be changed.
3. Click on second element to be changed.
or
U354EN.DOC
Box in an open point (display in ToPs: red) for both the first
and second elements to be changed.
Drawing module
15
4
3
Open contour point (red)
changed
2.
First element to be
Box
Second element to be
changed
Fig. 26962
16
Drawing module
U354EN.DOC
2.2
Loading mi files:
Transfer detail drawings
In the ME 10 program you have the possibility to create detail

drawings of a part. These detail drawings are given part names
that begin with a point.
These parts are not normally loaded by ToPs. In the mi loading
options in ToPs you can select whether these detail drawings
should be accepted.
1. Select Drawing module >File >Load.

2. Select file in '*.mi' format.
The mi loading options are opened.
3. Select "Transfer detail drawings".
4. Select Show selection.
The drawings are displayed in the preview window.
U354EN.DOC
Drawing module
17
3.
Nesting module
3.1
Changing sheet format afterwards
The format of a sheet loaded individually or of a sheet in a sheet

job can be changed afterwards. The bottom left corner of the sheet
(origin) remains unchanged by the change.
Note:
The sheet format is preallocated the minimum sheet dimensions on
which all parts are still to be found. To that is added a margin.
With sheets in sheet jobs, the sheet margin is taken from the job
data.
1. Select Nesting module >File >Load >Sheet.

2. Load file in '*.taf' format.
3. Select Modify 2 and Modify in "Sheet format".
4. Enter dimensions X, Y of the new sheet format.
5. Select OK.
Helpful hint
The original sheet format can be restored by selecting Modify
again.
18
Nesting module
U354EN.DOC
3.2
Job management: entering no.

machine cycle
Parts are normally produced in several machine cycles. Example:

1. punching, 2. bending, 3. welding, 4. enameling.
The machine cycle number can be entered alphanumerically in
ToPs and is part of the customer's responsibility. It serves as job
monitoring. With this machine cycle number, parts have
unequivocal identification.
The program NcLink reads the machine cycle numbers of the parts
and passes them on to the machine. NcLink is used in order to
interlink all NC programs to a nesting job.
Select Nesting module >File >New >Job.

"Job management" is opened.
Enter machine cycle number.
or
Select job and confirm selection with OK.
Select Manage >Modify.

"Job management" is opened.
U354EN.DOC
Select Nesting module >File >Load >Job.
Enter machine cycle number.
Nesting module
19
3.3
Allocate storage item designation
With the storage item designation, storage location, material and

size of sheet are fixed.
The storage item designation can be selected for a job when
creating an individual table and when fixing the sheet data.
With automized systems, the removal of the sheet from the storage
location and the sheet loading process are controlled by it.
Prerequisite
Selecting storage item

designation under sheet data
In the Data module the storage item designation must be

entered into Material >Blank (see section 7.1, p. 52).
1. To open "Schachtelparameter" (Q4, Nesting parameters):
Select Nesting module >File >New >Job >Enlarged

rectangle or >Free geometry >Parameters.
or
Select Nesting module >File >Load >Job >Enlarged

rectangle or >Free geometry >Parameters.
2. Select "Sheet data".

3. Select "Storage item designation".
There must be a cross in the box.
4. Click in white area next to "Storage item designation".
The list of storage items is opened. The data must be entered
in the data module.
5. Select storage item.
Selecting storage item
designation under sheet
selection
1. Select Nesting module >File >New >Sheet.

2. Select "Storage item designation".
There must be a cross in the box.
3. Click in white area under "Storage item designation".
The list of storage items is opened. The data must be entered
in the data module.
20
Nesting module
U354EN.DOC
4.
Technology module
4.1
Managing data from thread formers
After a thread former has been selected, further parameters for the
thread former are automatically allocated depending on the
machine, material, sheet thickness and hole.
Basic factors are the parameters for metrical threads from the
"Thread forms" technical information.
Creating thread former

1. Select Tool >Punching >Create >Thread former >Continue.
2. Click on "With tip".
3. Click in the entry line next to "Magazine station".
4. Select thread former.
The data is entered in the mask.
5. Click on "Autom. proposal" and select Calculate.
The identification number is automatically calculated and a
comment is entered.
6. If necessary, overwrite white entry fields with your own
information.
7. Select Close.
or
Select Next.
8. Select Yes.
The data is transferred to the database.
9. Select tool from the list. Confirm selection with OK.
The parameters for thread formers are displayed.
10. If necessary, overwrite white entry fields with your own
information.
11. Select OK.
U354EN.DOC
Technology module
21
Helpful hint
In the list of available tools, a quick display can be activated if you
right click on a tool (black bar).
The geometry and dimensioning of the tool are displayed.
Copy data record of thread formers

Thread formers data records can be copied from one material to
another. The costly work of creating material dependent data
records for each thread former is considerably reduced due to this
possibility.
Incorrectly allocated thread former data can lead to

destruction of the thread former.
Only thread former data from the "thread former" technical

information from TRUMPF may be used.
Make sure that the correct thread former data is assigned to

the correct material.
Caution:
1. Select Punching >tool.

2. Click on the white selection field next to "Selection".
3. Select Thread forming.
The available thread formers are displayed.
4. Select thread former.
5. Select Modify.
6. Select Edit.
7. Select Copy.
8. Select "Source material spec." and "Target material spec.".
9. Confirm selection with OK.
The data records for the target material are set up.
22
Technology module
U354EN.DOC
4.2
Creating thread individually
There is an easy method of application for special thread whose

parameters are not in the database.
Once the thread has been created and identified, this processing
can be assigned as many times as is desired during the ToPs
session.
A thread with hole should serve downwards as example.
1. Select Technology module >Processing >Punching >Manual

>Generate.
2. Select Tool, Round.
3. Select round tool from the list for pre-punching.
4. Select Single hole (with / without geometry).
5. Click on Position.
6. Select Tool, Umform (Forming).
7. Select Durchzug-Werkzeug (extrusion tool) from the list.
9. Click on central point of pre-punching hole.
10. Select Tool, Thread former.
11. Select thread former from the list.
12. Under "Parameters for tapping tool" deselect the option
"Automatic creation of thread".
13. Mark "Thread with extrusion" with a cross.
14. Confirm modifications with OK.
16. Click on central point of pre-punching hole.
17. Select Activate tool.
18. Click on thread (display in ToPs: two three-quarter circles).
The entire thread can now be used on all further contours that
need to be processed without it having to be constantly recreated.
U354EN.DOC
Technology module
23
Helpful hint
If the pre-punching tool is reactivated before the Activate tool step,
in the display field for the active tool can be observed if you have
clicked on the correct processing. If this is the case, the comments
on the thread former are shown in the display field for the active
tool.
4.3
Setting the special tool on an element
Processing plans with special tools, for example, a radius tool, can
be carried out without any costly auxiliary constructions.
ToPs automatically allocates a suitable cutting edge and applies
the special tool to the element when the cutting edge is marked
with a dashed line.
The identification occurs in the Data module when defining the tool
drawing.
If no suitable cutting edge can be found, the desired cutting edge
can be manually identified. The tool is set on the corresponding
side of the element.
Prerequisite
Automatically
define cutting edge
A geometry and a special tool are loaded.

An element of the geometry and a cutting edge of the special
tool correspond.

>Generate.
2. Select "Geometry" Position.
3. Select the element of the geometry you wish to process.
A suitable cutting edge is automatically set on the element.
Identify and define

cutting edge
24
4. If no suitable cutting edge has been found: Set down tool by

clicking next to the contour to be processed and identify a
suitable cutting edge.
The identified cutting edge is set on the element.
Technology module
U354EN.DOC
4.4
Automatically search for pre-punching

tool dependent on the sheet thickness
During the automatic search for a pre-punching tool, the tool is

additionally checked on its permitted sheet thickness i. e. on its
application range (default setting). The valid sheet thicknesses are
located in the database.
Previously, a pre-punching tool with an outer circle smaller than the
current sheet thickness could not be used. From this version on the
setting is configured with the variable "LasAutoProcess_VorstTafDickeKorr". The variable can be created in the machine
dependent customized process rules (see section 5.2, p. 41).
At the same time, the variables "Sc_VRSTNZ_MAX_DURCHMESSER" and "Sc_VRSTNZ_MIN_DURCHMESSER" have to be
accommodated as desired. Both variables state the outer circle of
the pre-punching tool.
U354EN.DOC
Technology module
25
4.5
Allocate TDC/BDC tool parameters
The position of the upper (TDC) and lower (BDC) dead points can
be allocated to the active materials with the tool parameters of the
tools.
These values are issued in the PTT (Punch Tool Tech) table to the
machine in the '*.tmt' file and saved in the database.
If the tool is used again later with the same materials, the values
are automatically taken over from the database.
The values from the tmt file are compared with the current values
in the database. If the values to not correspond to each other, a
message appears to ask which values should be used.
1. Technology module >Tools >Tools already used.

2. Select tool.
3. Select Parameters.
4. Enter the position of the upper and lower dead points in
"TDC/BDC position".
5. Select OK.
The position of the dead point is saved for this tool and the active
materials.
26
Technology module
U354EN.DOC
4.6
Automatic processing:
Punching outer contour with
a special tool
Automatic punching is carried out with the tools from a selected list
(tool list) and with all tools already used.
If a special tool is only to be used for processing an outer contour,
a certain sequence must be kept to.
Prerequisite
A tool list has been set up that contains the special tool for
processing outer contours.
A single part is processed.
Fig. 27454
1. Apply automatic processing of outer contour with Tool from list.

The outer contour can only be processed with the special tool
from the tool list.
2. Apply automatic processing of inner contour e. g. with All tools.
All available tools are used for processing inner contours.
U354EN.DOC
Technology module
27
4.7
Processing nesting jobs
Data module
In order that production plans can be created, certain prerequisites
must be fulfilled in the Data module.
Prerequisite
"Table output possible" must be set to Yes; this is the case for
a standard ToPs installation for the following machines:
TC 5000 R, TC 2000 R and TC 600 L. For the TC 500 R: (see
section 8.6, p. 78).
The
tables
PARTS_IN_PROGRAM
and
PARTS_IN_PROGRAM_POS must be activated under NC output
>Header data; this is the case for a standard ToPs installation.
NcLink must be installed.
Technology module
Under File >Nesting job jobs can be loaded and production plans
created in the Technology Module.
Loading job...
Next sheet...
Creating a production plan...
The first sheet of the nesting job is loaded.

The next, non-identical sheet of the nesting job is loaded.
All of the NC programs created for the job are joined together with
the production plan with the help of the external program NcLink.
Prerequisites for using the NcLink program
Technology module
Parts must possess an unequivocal parts identification

number. The parts identification number applies to the drawing
number in ToPs.
28
The
machine
must
possess
a
table
output
(PARTS_IN_PROGRAM; PARTS_IN_PROGRAM_POS).
Each single part must be assigned a removal. The single part

may not have any micro-joints or unloading due to sharing a
stroke with another part.
U354EN.DOC
An NC program must exist for each sheet.
Path and file name (up to the file extension) of the NC program
must correspond with the sheet.
U354EN.DOC
All different sheets in the job must be processed.
The main program numbers must be unequivocally in the

production plan.
Technology module
29
4.8
Trimming sheet
The "Trimming" function is available for punching and laser

machining; this allows remainder strips to be removed from a
sheet. The removal of remainder strips is carried out with
TRUMALIFT or by hand.
Trimming strategies for

punch and laser machining
Trimming strategy
Description:
Number of remainder strips: 1
The first and second remainder strips are
punched if the tool is bigger than the
remainder strip. A rectangular remainder
strip is removed.
Only "Punching"
Three rectangular remainder strips are
removed.
Punch and laser machining
An L-shaped remainder strip and a rectangular remainder strip are removed.
An L-shaped remainder strip and a rectangular remainder strip are removed.
A U-shaped remainder strip is removed.
Tab. 1
30
Technology module
U354EN.DOC
Definition: Overlapping of sheet edge (Tolerance measure)

The tolerance measure was introduced for the case where the
sheet is bigger than the prescribed sheet dimensions in ToPs due
to process tolerances. If no tolerance measure is entered, it could
happen that the remainder strip is not completely separated.
Definition: Element depth for trimming with a laser

When trimming, elements of a geometry are processed that are
the prescribed element depth. To start with, the element depth is
calculated by the circumscribing rectangle of the geometry to be
trimmed.
1
Circumscribing rectangle
Remainder strips
Element depth
Fig. 27205
Definition: Part removal

If you click on "Part removal" "Manual removal", the machine stops
after the remainder strip has been separated in order to remove the
remainder strip.
If you do not click on "Manual removal", the machine continues to
run without stopping, if removal with TRUMALIFT was not defined.
U354EN.DOC
Technology module
31
Apply trimming
Prerequisite
An allocated or a nested sheet is loaded.
Note:
Elements can only be taken out with punch machining, i. e. you
have an influence on how much a part is trimmed.
However, with laser machining, elements can be taken out and
added.
1. Select Technology module >Processing >Manual >Sheet.

2. Select "Trimming" Start.
3. Carry out settings and confirm with OK.
4. Identify first part.
5. Identify last part.
6. Select OK.
or
Select element and then OK.
The sheet is trimmed automatically. Trimming can only be reversed

with Undo if you afterwards click directly on the button.
32
Technology module
U354EN.DOC
4.9
Removing parts by hand or with

flap/chute
Parts and small parts can be removed by hand or with the

flap/chute in the machine table.
Positioning the desired removal is self-holding in ToPs until End or
Abort are pressed.
1. Select Technology module >Processing >Laser or punch

machining >Manual >Small parts.
2. Either
Select "Manual removal" Set.
Click on processing plan(s).

The selected parts must be removed by hand.
or
Select "Small parts" Set.
Click on processing.
The selected parts are removed with the flap/chute in the
machine table.
U354EN.DOC
Technology module
33
4.10 Optimization:
Rearrange processing plans manually
Processing plans can be marked and optimized by calling up a
box. The processing plans marked thus are shown in red in ToPs
and the travel motion in yellow.
If the option "Optimization in box activated" is activated, the
processing sequence is automatically optimized. The place that is
first clicked in the box determines the starting point for the
optimization.
Previously assigned processing sequences are not preserved.
1. Select Technology module >Optimization >Manual >Rearrange.

2. Click on "Optimization in box".
3. Select Beginning or End.
4. Pull up box.
Operations within the box are shown in red and are newly
optimized.
34
Technology module
U354EN.DOC
4.11 Production plan

Create production plans with NcLink
NcLink is a program that is delivered with ToPs and you have the
option of having its user interface installed
NcLink combines several NC programs from one nesting job into a
production plan. Data that is important for automation (for example,
storage item designation) is added to the individual NC programs.
The production plan is sent to the machine's transfer directory.
NcLink has its own user interface. Production plans and parameters for individual production jobs can be changed individually.
ToPs is not a precondition for installing NcLink as an independent
program. Select NcLink exclusively with user-defined installation of
ToPs. NcLink has its own Read me file.
Create production plan parameters for

individual NC programs with NcLink
The FERTIGUNG_AUFTRAG_TMP table is required to forward the
storage item designation (storage item identity number), the
number of program runs and/or inventory group types default
values on the machine or the CELL controller. This table is
automatically created by NcLink when a production plan is formed
from one nesting job.
NcLink can be used as post-processing program, if the production
plan parameters are created for one specific NC program. The
FERTIGUNG_AUFTRAG_TMP table is mounted on the NC
program.
U354EN.DOC
Technology module
35
1. Select Technology module >NC program >Generate >Start.

2. Select "Parameters".
3. Mark "NC post-processing program" with a cross.
4. Click in the white selection field.
A list of post-processing programs is displayed.
5. Select NCLINK_LST program.
6. Select OK.
Helpful hint
The format of the FERTIGUNG_AUFTRAG_TMP table can be
extended by several options. The options are set in NcLink under
View >Attributes. Only the number of program runs is issued after
standard installation.
36
Technology module
U354EN.DOC
5.
Data module
5.1
TRUMALIFT
Opening lift data

In the Data module the lift group 1 SheetMaster and the lift
group 2 SB/SE/SC are both under Lift data.
Prerequisite
The machine has been assigned a lift.
Select Data module >Machines >Data >Lift data.
The mask with the lift data of the configured lift is opened.
Assigning a lift for the first time

1. Select Data module >Machines >Configuration >Data 2 >Lift
selection.
2. Click on Lift in display field.
If it is a TRUMALIFT SheetMaster, the lift is displayed under
"Loading selected" and "Unloading selected".
4. Select Change and then possibly adjust stop pin data.
U354EN.DOC
Data module
37
Activating new lift for lift selection

1. Select Data module >Machines >Configuration >Data 2 >Copy.
The lifts available are displayed.
2. Click on lift in display field.
4. Select Lift selection.
The lift copied previously is displayed.
If it is a TRUMALIFT SheetMaster, the lift is displayed simultaneously in "Loading selected" and "Unloading selected".
7. Select Change and then if required adjust stop pin data.
Adjust ToPs for TRUMALIFT with Y offset

If a TRUMALIFT is assembled with an offset in Y direction, this is
then a special assembly. This Y offset value can be entered into
ToPs in the data module.
It is not necessary to change the suction frame zero point or the
suction coordinates.
Entering incorrect values in Data module >Lift data when

installing a TRUMALIFT with offset in Y-direction!
Caution:
The result can be a collision between punching head and the

retracting lift.
38
Data module
It is recommended, measured from the punching head, that

the TRUMALIFT only be displaced in the direction of the
operator.
Consult TRUMPF Software Support in case of doubt.
U354EN.DOC
Note:
Machine/punching head and Y value/Y offset value are used as
identical terms in ToPs and in the following description.
ToPs does not check if the modified values are valid. The changes
are the responsibility of the operator.
1. Select Data module >Lift data >Data 3.

2. Select "Y dim. sheet edge machine".
3. If the loading stack was not displaced by the same value as the
lift: Modify "Y dim. sheet edge machine".
Default value:
Sheet edge Y offset value machine (mm)
Lift Y offset value punching head

(mm)
Loading stack Y offset

value
(mm)
New value:
Sheet edge Y offset value machine (punching head) (mm)
-20
-60
-80
-20
-60
-60
-20 (default value remains)
Examples: TC 600 L with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1306 V 105; Lift with Y-offset value 60 mm
in direction of operator.
Tab. 2
4. Enter new value and select Change.

5. Select Data 6.
6. Select "Y offset dimension punching head suction frame orig.".
7. If the lift has been installed with a Y offset value in the direction
of the operator: Enter "Y offset dimension punching head
suction frame orig." with minus sign in front of it.
TRUMALIFT
SheetMaster
Default value
Y offset dimension punching
head suction frame orig. (mm)

(mm)
New value:
Y offset dimension punching head
suction frame orig. (mm)
1305 and 1605
20
-60
-40
1306 and all

others
-60
-60
Examples: TRUMALIFT SheetMaster with Y-offset value 60 mm in direction of operator.
Tab. 3
8. Select "Min. Y travel position Lift" / "Max. Y travel position Lift".

9. If the lift can move in Y direction (only TRUMALIFT
SheetMaster 1305/1605): Adjust "Min. Y travel position Lift" /
"Max. Y travel position Lift" values.
10. Select Change.
TRUMALIFT
SheetMaster
Default value
Y travel position lift (mm)

(mm)
New value:
Y travel position lift (mm)
1305
Min. -24
-60
Min. 36
Max. 380
Max. 440
Example: TC 5000 R with TRUMALIFT SheetMaster; Y-offset value 60 mm in direction of

operator.
U354EN.DOC
Data module
Tab. 4
39
Displaying X and Y axis acceleration values

The maximum and minimum X and Y axis acceleration valuesof
the machine are managed from this ToPs version on by the
formulas.
Note:
In the "Formula management" mask, the displayed "Limit values"
may not be changed.
1. Select Data module >Machines >Data >Formulas >Data 1.

2. Select acceleration X or acceleration Y in the display field.
The acceleration values for X and Y are displayed in limit values.
40
Data module
U354EN.DOC
5.2
Machine-dependent customized
process rules - public
In addition to the internal, password-protected process rules public,

machine-dependent, customized process rules are available which
describe the machine and customized system data.
In the customized process rules changes can be made without
daily passwords. Enabled variables are displayed in one list field.
The number of displayed variables depends on the machine
selected. Missing variables can be added as described below.
Note:
TRUMPF defaults.
Settings that are carried out in public customized process rules
after this first update are kept in all further updates.
Comment text:
The comment text to the selected variable contains information
about how the actual value is constructed.
Actual value:
The actual value corresponds to the coding of a variable. After the
installation of ToPs, the default actual values are displayed. To
make your individual settings effective, the actual value must be
modified.
Changing actual value for

one variable
1. Select Data module >Process rules >Customer machine.

2. Select variable in display field.
This value is read into the entry field.
3
Only the actual value is to be modified.
4. Select Change.
Creating variable

2. Next to "Variable" click on $.
The list of variables is displayed.
3. Select variable.
4. Enter "actual value".
5. Select Create.
The variable is taken up in the display field.
U354EN.DOC
Data module
41
New variable
No. Variable
Comments
BesaeumDefaultElementTiefe_Laser
Default distance for element search (only laser).
BesaeumDefaultStrategie_Laser
Default trimming strategy (Laser).
BesaeumDefaultStrategie_Stanzen
Default trimming strategy (Punching).
BesaeumDefaultWzg_Stanzen
Identity number of the default trimming tool for punching.
BesaeumRandMin
Minimum remainder strip width (excl. Tool width).
BlechEinlegenVorWzgWechsel
1: Load sheet Tool change

0: Tool change load sheet
DefaultNiederhalteKraft
Strength of presser foot in (kN)

4.35 kN F 20.32 kN
EinrichteplanFormular
The ReportCombiV1.html file is entered as standard.
EinrichteplanMaschName
Machine name for setup plan.
10
EinrichteplanSteuName
Control name for setup plan format.
11
FreifahrwegDrehBiegeWzg
The rotate/bend tool (TRUMPF Multibend) requires a free path to

stroke.
12
HPKennung
HPKennung is set before alphanum. program number.
13
UPKennung
UPKennung is set before alphanum. subroutine number.
14
LasAutoProc_VorstTafDickeKorr
Adjust pre-punching tool area to current single rolled sheet width:

yes (1) / no (0)
15
Lift_LetzterHubNachAnsaugen
Make "Letzter Hub nach Ansaugen" (Q4, Last stroke after

suction) switch self-holding.
16
LST_PfadModal
Standard directory for NC programs.
17
MaschCtrlVersion
Current control system version of machine. See machine control

system. Empty field = independent of version.
18
MaschDiasVersion
Current DIAS version of machine. See machine control system.

Empty field = independent of version.
19
MaschLasVersion
Current laser control system version of machine. See machine

control system. Empty field = independent of version.
20
MaschMmcVersion
Current MMC version of machine. See machine control system.

21
MaschNcVersion
Current NC version of machine. See machine control system.

22
MaschPlcVersion
Current PLC version of machine. See machine control system.

23
MinGewichtFuerBeladehilfe
The loading aid is activated from this weight on.
24
OptAlphaNumPrgNr
1 = activate alphanumerical program numbers;

0 = only program numbers
25
OptAptWzwMagPlatzAusDB
1 = Tool magazine station number is used.

0 = Magazine station is numbered consecutively.
26
OptDynamischeBeschleunigungMoeglich
1 = Machine raises its acceleration during the program run time;

0 = No
27
OptNiederhalteKraftProgrammierbar
AdvancedStripperControl (ASC) option yes (1)/ no(0).
28
RpoXY_MassAnMaschVerrechnen
3: Repositioning value X- and Y-axis are calculated by the control

system.
0: ToPs calculates repositioning value.
29
Sc_LAS_UMLAUF_AK
Laser cutting combi machines: Outer contour processing cycle

(CLW / CCLW).
42
Data module
U354EN.DOC
No. Variable
Comments
30
Sc_LAS_UMLAUF_IK
Laser cutting combi machines: Inner contour processing cycle

(CLW / CCLW).
31
SchmierstaerkeProWerkzeugtyp
Lubrication strength for each tool type: Type 1; type 2; type 3;...
32
SegmentTischUnterstuetzungYMass
480 mm = 3/5 segments with Y 1300/1600;

390 mm = 5/7 segments with Y 1300/1600
33
T3MrGuiC_AptNachbearbeitungPrg
Entry for APT post-processing program.
34
T3MrNcL_NC_AusgabeTyp
Output mode: 1-NC output; 2-TCAPT-output.
35
TCPARTEND_Ausgabe
For PPS connection; output in NC TC_Part_End (current no.).
36
TransferKennung
Transfer recognition.
Tab. 5
Descriptionof variables
No. 1, No. 2, No. 3, No. 4
These variables may not be modified or deleted. The variables are
in the customized process rules in order that they are not
overwritten when ToPs is updated.
No. 5: BesaeumRandMin
Concerns trimming strategies with remainder strips on the first side:
When trimming, the processing plans are pushed so far away from
the table edge that the prescribed minimum remainder strip width
is preserved. Here the tool width is not taken into account.
No. 6: BlechEinlegenVorWzgWechsel
Concerns all machines apart from TC 600 L and TC 2000 R.
The sequence of sheet loading and then changing the tool at the
start of the program can be switched round in the NC program.
Value = 0:
Value = 1:
Toolchange Sheet loading

Sheet loading Toolchange
No. 7: DefaultNiederhalteKraft
Applies to: TC 5000 R.
The presser foot strength is programmed in Newtons.
Default value 20 kN.
U354EN.DOC
Data module
43
No. 8: EinrichteplanFormular
The standard setup plan ReportCombiV1.html is entered as actual
value.
Further examples for setup plan models are to be found in ToPs
online help 300 and can be called up with the question mark in the
ToPs user interface.
No. 9, No. 10:

No. 11: FreifahrwegDrehBiegeWzg

A retracting path must be programmed after the stroke for the
TRUMPF Multibend tool. 30 mm are entered as the default value.
No. 12: HPKennung

The actual value entered here serves as identification system in
the NC text. The identification system is set in front of the
alphanumerical program number. The maximum length of the
actual value is limited to 25 characters for alphanumerical program
number output.
No. 13: UPKennung

The actual value entered here serves as identification system in
the NC text. The identification system is set in front of the
alphanumerical program number. The maximum length of the
actual value is limited to 25 characters for alphanumerical program
number output.
No. 14: LasAutoProc_VorstTafDickeKorr

The system performance is controlled via these parameters. The
search area can be adapted to the current sheet thickness with the
automatic pre-punching tool search. The variable can be created
(see section 5.2, p. 41).
Value = 0
Value = 1
44
Data module
No: do not adapt.

Yes: adapt.
U354EN.DOC
No. 15: Lift_LetzterHubNachAnsaugen

The setting "Letzter Hub nach Ansaugen" (Q4, Last stroke after
suction) is self-holding. If this variable is deleted, the setting is no
longer self-holding.
No. 16: LST_PfadModal

If the actual file (master file of the NC text) should always be saved
in the directory last used in the Technology Module, the variable
LST_PfadModal must be created for each machine.
The entered actual value is arbitrary, but must at consist if at least
three characters.
No. 17, No. 18, No. 19, No. 20, No. 21, No. 22:
No. 23: MinGewichtFuerBeladehilfe

The loading aid is activated from the given weight for the table.
30 kg are entered as the default value.
No. 24: OptAlphaNumPrgNr

Value = 0
Value = 1
Use Program numbers.

Use alphanumerical program numbers.
No. 25: OptAptWzwMagPlatzAusDB

Applies to machines that are programmed with via the TC-APT
interface.
Value = 0
Value = 1
U354EN.DOC
Magazine station is numbered consecutively.

Tool's magazine station number is used.
Data module
45
No. 26: OptDynamischeBeschleunigungMoeglich

Applies to TC 5000 R: Dynamic acceleration adapting.
The weight is registered from the number of tools and clamps, from
the current sheet weight and from the type of cartridges (RTC or
metal).
The weight is taken into account in favor of the greatest possible
machine axle acceleration. The acceleration values increase after
a succession of part removals.
Value = 0
Value = 1
The machine's control system may not increase

the acceleration. The acceleration remains constant
during the machine run time.
The machine's control system calculates and
modifies the acceleration during the machine's run
time. If the weight is reduced, the acceleration
increases.
No. 27: OptNiederhalteKraftProgrammierbar

The machine has the option: Advanced Stripper Control (ASC).
Value = 0
Value = 1
No.
Yes.
No. 28: RpoXY_MassAnMaschVerrechnen

Value = 0
Value = 1
Value = 2
Value = 3
In ToPs, the repositioning value is calculated in X

and the raising value is calculated in Y.
Value is not evaluated.
Value is not evaluated.
On the control system, the repositioning value is
calculated in X and the raising value in Y
(standard).
No. 29: Sc_LAS_UMLAUF_AK

Laser cutting with combi machines:
In which direction should the outer contour be processed?
Value = CCLW Anti-clockwise.
Value = CLW Clockwise.
No. 30: Sc_LAS_UMLAUF_IK

Laser cutting with combi machines:
In which direction should the inner contour be processed?
46
Data module
U354EN.DOC
No. 31: SchmierstaerkeProWerkzeugtyp

The lubrication strength for each tool type can be adjusted where
the first figure of the actual value stands for tool type 1, the second
figure for tool type 2 etc.
Exception:
0 in the actual value stands for tool type 5 (thread former).
The lubrication strength for thread formers is given directly in the
Technology module.
Value = 0
Value = 1, 2,...
No lubrication
Lubrication strength 1, 2, ...
(depends on the machine).
No. 32: SegmentTischUnterstuetzungYMass

Applies to: TC 600 L.
The length of the free path at the end of the NC program with full
segmental table support can be adjusted.
The output in the NC program is carried out by manual skeleton
removal as well as by skeleton removal with TRUMAGRIP.
Default value for machines up to March 2000:
480 mm = 3/5 segments with Y 1300/1600.
Default value for machines from March 2000:
390 mm = 5/7 segments with Y 1300/1600.
No. 33: T3MrGuiC_AptNachbearbeitungPrg

The "actual value" entered corresponds to the APT post-processing program used. The "actual value" is identical to the entry in
Data module >User >Editor in "Designation".
No. 34: T3MrNcL_NC_AusgabeTyp

Output mode: 1-NC output; 2-TCAPT-output
Value = 1
Value = 2
U354EN.DOC
NC output
TCAPT output
(The NC output is carried out via the TRUMPF
postprocessor).
Data module
47
No. 35: TCPARTEND_Ausgabe

The TCPARTEND output is not yet evaluated by the current control
system versions.
No. 36: TransferKennung

TC transfer and PC transfer are programs that transfer the NC text
from ToPs to the machine.
Machines that work with TC transfer or PC transfer need a "P" as
transfer identification.
New control systems that are engaged in the system do not need
transfer identification (TC 600 L, TC 2000 R, TC 5000 R).
48
Data module
U354EN.DOC
5.3
Tool alternatingsystem: entering the

maximum number of tools
Note:
The difference in the maximum number of tool stations in the tool
alternating system (with a transverse rail) minus the number of
clamps determines the maximum number of tools that can be
alternated.
The following applies for all combi machines except TC 600 L: If a
dummy tool is used for laser machining, this must be pulled out by
the amount.
If more tools are required for processing than can be alternated in,
the relevant message appears in the technology module when the
sheet machining is being optimized.
1. Select Data module >Machines >Data >Tooling system data

>Data 1.
2. For the "Magazine type" Changer wheel or Transverse rail,
enter the maximum number of tools that can actually be
alternated by the machine.
3. Select Modify.
U354EN.DOC
Data module
49
5.4
Setting tool lubrication
Note:
The exact details of lubricating tools are described in machine
operator's manual.
1. Select Data module >Machines >Configuration >Data 1.

2. Select Selectable under "Lubrication".
3. Select Modify.
The change is saved. The tool lubrication strength can be
programmed.
4. Select Data module >Machines >Data >Lubricating system
data >Data 1.
5. Set tool lubrication.
6. Select Modify.
The change is saved. The settings struck are issued in the
Technology module at the beginning of the NC program if they do
not correspond to the machine's turn-on condition.
50
Data module
U354EN.DOC
6.
Info module
6.1
Displaying information
The software update as well as the versions for all of the program's
individual components are displayed. In order for your questions to
be properly answered when consulting TRUMPF software support,
it is important to give exact details of the data.
Note:
Loading the data can take a few seconds as the program is
searching through the ToPs directories for the current version.
Select Info module >Version.
or
Select Info module >Files.
Helpful hint
In "Files", a file (e. g. 'tops300.ini') can be edited directly if you right
click on the displayed path.
Incorrect modifications to the edited files can lead to large

program and machine malfunctions!
Caution:
U354EN.DOC
Ensure that your modifications are correct.
Consult TRUMPF Software Support in case of doubt.
Info module
51
7.
Improvements affecting all modules
7.1
Managing and creating material

and storage items
A storage item designation as well as the material and work

material specifications can be assigned to a material.
Physical properties, for example, can be determined with the
material specification.
The size of the sheet is assigned to the material designation.
The storage item designation informationallows the control
system's warehouse management to unequivocally determine the
storage area of a blank and prepare it for processing. The storage
item designation is given in the NC program and in other TRUMPF
file formats (examples: *.taf, *.pdf, *.gmt, *.tmt...).
1. Select Data module >Machines >Material >Mat. spec.

2. Enter "Material specification", "Tensile strength" and "Specific
weight".
3. The remaining entry fields can be filled out.
4. Select Create.
The new entry is taken up in the display field.
5. Select Blank.
6. Enter "Material designation" etc.
7. Select Create.
The new entry is taken up in the display field and is can be
accessed in the Technology module.
8. Exit Data module with Return.
9. Select Technology module >File >New.
"Specify sheet data" is opened.
10. Open "Material designation" with $.
11. Select material.
12. Select Parameters and determine "Loading parameters".
13. Click on "Storage item designation".
If a storage item has been selected, the selection can afterwards be made with $. The sheet dimensions can no longer
be altered.
52
U354EN.DOC
7.2
Configuring palletizing
Several unloading area configurations can be defined for one

machine type.
Example: Unloading platform with one large or several small
pallets.
If palletizing subsequently continues automatically, the fixed
unloading area configurations can be accessed.
For machines with a Siemens control system, the unloading area
application data on the machine must be additionally adapted to
the unloading area configuration in ToPs.
Prerequisite
A lift must be configured for the machine so that the unloading

area can be accessed in the Data module.
Note:
The palletizing graphics are only presented when the unloading
area data in the loaded tmt file corresponds with an unloading area
configuration that has been set up.
As the unloading area data has only been saved in the tmt file
since this version, the palletizing graphics when loading old tmt
files can no longer be displayed.
Example of several unloading area configurations in

the Data module
U354EN.DOC
Fig. 27009
53
Configure unloading area
1. Select Data module >Machines >Data >Unloading area

>Data 1.
2. Select Create or Modify to set up desired configurations.
3. Select Undo.
Select configuration
4. Select Technology module >NC program >Palletizing >Start.

5. Enter stacked goods and select Continue.
6. Select "Unloading area" in the "Automatic configuration" mask.
7. Click in the white entry field on "Configuration selection".
The list of unloading area configurations laid out in the Data
module is opened.
Fig. 27010
8. Select configuration; confirm selection with OK.

The automatic palletizing graphics are presented.
54
U354EN.DOC
Is the following message displayed when there is a change to

the NC program menu?
Palletizing graphics cannot be presented as no suitable
unloading area configurations could be found.
Please palletize again or create NC program on the basis of
the palletizing data in the tmt file.
All important unloading area data, such as unloading unit,
number of pallets, pallet size and position must correspond or:
A tmt file from ToPs versions <3.20 has been loaded.
Helpful hint
Either palletize again or do not change previous unloading area
configuration from ToPs version <3.20 after the update. The tmt
files can then be loaded without problems; NC programs can be
created directly.
U354EN.DOC
55
7.3
Using setup plan models
Various setup plan models are made available by TRUMPF.

Examples of the setup plan models are integrated into ToPs online
help and can be called up with the question mark in the ToPs user
interface.
In order to use a particular model, the following two variations
exist.
Note:
Standard model for combi machines: ReportCombiV1.html.
Standard model for punching machines: ReportPunchV1.html.
Standard model for laser machines: ReportLaserV1.html.
Adjust EinrichteplanFormular
variable

2. Mark EinrichteplanFormular variable (black beam).
The "Actual value" of the variable is entered.
3. Delete displayed "actual value".
4. Select Modify.
5. Exit Data module via Return.
6. Select Technology module >NC program >Generate >Start >OK.
The list of all models is displayed every time an NC program is
created.
7. Select model and confirm with OK.
Helpful hint
If the list of all models is not to be displayed every time an NC
program is created, enter the "Actual value" (standard model)
previously deleted.
Example: Copy model

for combi machines
1. Open 'Trumpf\Models' directory in Windows Explorer.

The model files are displayed. The 'ReportCombiV1.html' file is
used by ToPs as a standard model for combi machines.
2. Rename 'ReportCombiV1.html' file to
'ReportCombiV1_alt.html'.
3. Rename desired file to 'ReportCombiV1.html'.
The new layout is used by ToPs to create the setup plan.
56
U354EN.DOC
Display PTT tables in the setup plan

An extended setup plan is offered by TRUMPF with the
ReportCombi_pttV1.html and ReportPunch_pttV1.html models.
It contains additional information about the programming in ToPs:
Name of PTT.
Tool identity number.
Note on tool.
TDC/BDC position (Q2, UDP/LDP position).
Softpunch.
7.4
TC-APT interface
Description
The TC-APT interface in ToPs 300 creates the TC-APT code in
place of the NC program.
The advantages are that a proven NC output is used for older
TRUMPF machines.
For machines with a TC-APT interface, you receive an extensive
description with the programming system.
Supported machines
Machine
Control system
Comments
TC 180 L
Bosch Micro 5T/TC or

SINUMERIK 8N
With TLF laser, with standard or

retractable clamps, without Multitool,
without automation
TC 180 LKR
SINUMERIK 8N
With TLF laser, with standard or

retractable clamps, without Multitool,
without automation
TC 180 L
FANUC 6MB
With TLF laser, with standard clamps,

without Multitool, without automation
TC 300
Punching

SINUMERIK 8N
W1: Magazine plate wheel with

20 magazine stations
TC 300 L
Laser

SINUMERIK 8N
W2: Magazine chain with

TC 300 P
Plasma

SINUMERIK 8N
W2: Magazine chain with

R = Robot
All machines without lifts B, E, C

Tab. 6
U354EN.DOC
57
7.5
U Parameter:
Programming TRUMALIFT
The following tables serve to explain how the various U parameters

in ToPs 300 are created when programming a TRUMALIFT.
This information is important if data for describing the lifts in
ToPs 300 are changed.
Abbreviations:
Loading control system
SM: TRUMALIFT SheetMaster
Variable
Example
Explanation
U16
A+B+D
800+200+80 U1601080
Pick-up position Lift
U17
2760 U1702760
e.g. SM 1300 and 1600
Waiting position TRUMALIFT

SheetMaster (not available for all
lifts!)
U18
Open
B+D+E
200+80+20 U1800300
Transfer position at the machine
with U
parameters
Unloading
U12
Q+B-C+D
Punching: Composition of
variable
U12
R-M
Laser Composition of variable
U13
[Pallet: position X] + [Stacked goods on

pallet: position X] + [Offset] + B - C + D
[Offset] = X offset stacked goodslift

Tab. 7
Note:
The underlined variables are linearly independent, i.e. they do not
appear in any other equation. They are therefore suited to
purposeful modification of the U parameters.
58
U354EN.DOC
Variable
Entry in: Data modules >Lift data
Explanation
Data 3: "X value sheet edge - machine"
X value loading sheet edge to suction carriage origin
Data 2: "X offset value suction carriage zero

point - tool center"
X offset value between tool center and suction carriage

origin
Data 1: "X value sheet edge lift zero point

(suction frame zero point)"
X value loading sheet edge to suction carriage zero point1
Data 1: "X value sheet edge Liftref.pkt."
X dimension loading sheet edge to suction carriage

reference point (NC datum point)2
Data 2: "Safety offset to X offset value"
Safety offset to the X offset value when loading
Data 8: "X transfer position lift"
X transfer position of the sheet skeleton to TRUMALIFT

SheetMaster
Data 3: "X value waiting position"
X position at which the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster must

wait before loading
Data 6: "Laser software limit switch X axis"
Value < 0, which the TRUMALIFT SheetMaster can move

to with an active laser
Data 6: "safety offset to the X offset value"
Value that is to be calculated as safety offset with

minimum X pick-up position (unloading); N is a part of
[Offset]
Data 6: X offset value punching head suction frame-zero point
Preset standard offset in X
Data 6: Y offset value punching head suction frame-zero point
Preset standard offset in Y
X offset value punching head - suction frame-zero point

(incl. variable N) plus a value that comes from part or lift
movement.
Value that comes from part or lift movement and the

variable N
Tab. 8
U354EN.DOC
This value is only an imaginary calculation value and can be seen only in
the suction cup reference drawing.
This value is only an imaginary calculation value and can be seen only in
the suction cup reference drawing. This point was once identical with
suction cup 25, but in the meantime a screw on the lift frame is used for
this. The NC output refers to this point on the lift frame.
59
X offset value punching head - suction

frame-zero point (distance last stroke - lift)
Note:
TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1305 / 1605.
Default setting for X offset value:
X = 50 mm (Variable O + N).
All other lifts
Default setting for X offset value: X = 0 mm (Variable O + N).
The value can change due to part or lift movement.
1
2
4
1
Part
Lift
Suction frame-zero point
X offset value punching head -
Last stroke
suction frame-zero point

Fig. 27215
60
Select Data module >Machines >Data >Lift data >Data 6.
U354EN.DOC
Pallet: Position X and

stacked goods on pallet: Position X
Note:
Pallet: Position X
Corresponds to the absolute pallet position on which the stacked
goods lie. This value is only used for the palletizing graphics for
machines with open control.
Stacked goods on pallet: Position X

Corresponds to the position of the stacked goods relative to the
position of the pallet.
4
1
3
2
1
Punching head
Stacked goods
Pallet: Position X
Pallet
Stacked goods on pallet:

Position X
Fig. 27216
U354EN.DOC
Select Data module >Machine >Data >Unloading area >Data 1.
61
Displaying offset (X Offset stacked

goods-lift)
When positioning the lift the offset comes from the distance from
the suction frame-zero point to the bottom left corner of the stacked
goods (circumscribing rectangle).
Note:
The offset takes the variable N into account, G with clamp disposal
and M with laser. The value is influenced by part or lift movement.
The offset is displayed in the stacked goods file.
3
4
1
Stacked goods with
Suction frame-zero point
circumscribing rectangle
Offset (X Offset stacked
Lift
goods-lift)
Fig. 27214

2. Mark stacked goods file (black beam).
The offset is displayed underneath the graphics.
62
U354EN.DOC
7.6
Files
Accelerated import of dxf and iges files

ToPs uses a new data structure for managing geometry dots when
importing dxf and iges files. This significantly reduces the import
time without it changing the result or the operation.
Test file
ToPs 300 Vers. 3.20
10000 sorted dots
5 x faster than Vers. 3.11
50000 sorted dots
5 x faster than Vers. 3.11

Tab. 9
Pack html files

The program comprhtm.bat serves to reduce the required memory
on the hard drive.
html files are converted and packed with all corresponding
graphics into pdf files. After that the larger original files are deleted.
Pack directory or files
1. Mark a directory that contains html files.

or
Mark one or several html files in one directory.
2. Press the right mouse button.

The context-sensitive menu opens.
3. Select Send to >HTM-PDF.
'comprhtm.bat' is carried out. All html files are packed.
U354EN.DOC
63
Pack files in subordinate

directories
1. Open the 'trumpf\macros' directory in Windows Explorer.

2. Right click on the 'comprhtm.bat' file.
3. Select Create shortcut.
4. Right click on the shortcut.
5. Select Properties.
6. Select "Shortcut".
'comprhtm.bat' is displayed with the complete path.
7. After 'comprhtm.bat' enter a blank space and then the
complete path including the directory. If the path contains a
blank space: Place path between inverted commas ('...').
8. Enter a blank space and the parameter R.
Example: 'comprhtm.bat' c:\trumpf\teile\user1 R.
9. Select Apply.
'comprhtm.bat' is carried out with the R parameter and packs html
files in all subordinate directories.
7.7
Wheel mouse Support
From this version on ToPs supports the wheel mouse.

Examples for using the wheel mouse: File manager, part management, tool selection, NC cycles, scrolls...
64
U354EN.DOC
7.8
Expert mode: Using right mouse

button
In ToPs, certain functions can be called up with the right mouse

button:
Function
Description:
Activating quick display for a tool.
1. Select Technology module >Tool >Punching.

or
Select Drawing module >Macros >Parameter >Tool.
2. Right click on a tool.
The geometry and dimensioning of the tool are displayed.
Creating tool without demand.
1. Select Technology module >Tool >Punching >Create.

2. Select "Tool type" Continue.
3. Select "Tool type" and enter data.
4. Right click on Close.
Data is transferred without further demand into the database.
Creating next tool.
1. Select Technology module >Tool >Punching >Create.

2. Select "Tool type" Continue.
3. Select "Tool type" and enter data.
4. Right click on Next.
Identical function as the left mouse button but with easier handling.
Saving changes to tool data without

demand.
1. Select Technology module >Tool >Punching.

2. Select tool.
3. Select Modify and modify tool data.
4. Right click on Close.
Data is transferred without further demand into the database.
Activating quick-start automatic

processing.
1. Select Technology module >Processing >Automatic >Generate.

2. Right click on Start.
Automatic processing starts immediately. This action corresponds to the a
left click on Start >OK.
Activating quick-start processing

sample.
1. Select Technology module >Processing >Automatic >Sample.

2. Right click on Start.
This action corresponds to the a left click on Start >OK.
Ending module quickly.
Right click on File in the opened module.

This action corresponds to the a left click on File >Return.
U354EN.DOC
65
Function
Description:
Running window quick-zoom (detail).
Right click on the desired detail in the graphics area.

Pick point in the graphics area becomes new center point. Zoom occurs in
the graphics.
Reducing window quick-zoom (only

possible with middle mouse button).
Click on the desired detail in the graphics area with the middle mouse
button.
Pick point in the graphics area becomes new center point. It now zooms out
of the graphics.
Activating detail.
Right click on Detail.

The program notes the current window.
Activating last zoom.
Right click on Last zoom.

The noted window is displayed.
Activating Total.
Right click on Total.

The sheet and not the working range is "totally" displayed.
Activating quick display for parts of a

nesting job.
1. Select Nesting module >File >Load >Job.

2. Select nesting job.
3. Select Modify.
Job management system is displayed.
4. Right click in the "Job management system" on a part of the nesting job.
Geometry, name and dimensions of the part are displayed.
Activating quick-display sheet layout.
1. Select Nesting module.

2. Load a sheet.
The path and the file name of the loaded sheet are displayed in the
selection field.
3. Click in the selection field.
A list of the available files is displayed.
4. Right click on a file.
Name, sheet layout and dimensions of the sheet are displayed.
Displaying files from NC program with

file manager.
1. Select Technology module >NC program >Generate.

2. Right click on Display in "NC program".
The file manager is opened for selecting a file.
Display setup plan with file manager.

2. Right click on Display in "Setup plan".
Print setup plan with file manager.

2. Right click on Print in "Setup plan".
66
U354EN.DOC
Function
Description:
Transferring the data of the selected

file to the isolated selection fields for
file selection.
1. Select File >Load.

The file manager is opened.
2. Select "Part management".
3. Mark "File name", "Drawing number" etc with a cross.
The selection fields are isolated.
4. Right click on one of the displayed files.
The file data is transferred to the isolated selection fields.
Search laser technology tables exactly 1. Select Technology module >Tool >Laser tables.
for stated laser power in the technology 2. Mark "Max. power" with a cross and enter laser power.
module (data module).
3. Right click on Search.
Only laser technology tables with the stated laser power are searched for.
If you click with the left mouse button then all laser technology tables are
displayed that are smaller or equal to the stated laser power.
Tab. 10
U354EN.DOC
67
7.9
Key functions
Set key functions

The ToPs key functions have been adapted to the Windows key
functions. ToPs can therefore be served quicker with the keyboard.
Note:
The key functions can be configured. The previous settings are
kept when reinstalling and when ToPs is updated.
The key functions can be configured with Data module >User

>Configuration and saved with Modify.
Key
Configuration
Previously: ToPs key functions
New Windows key functions
<>
Jump to next input field.
Confirm mask;
corresponds to: pressing OK
<> ,<>;
<SHIFT>+<Backspace> Delete input fields
Delete input field

Delete input fields
<SHIFT>+
Jump to previous input field.
<Esc>
Delete input fields
Close mask;
corresponds to: Cancel printing
Tab. 11
68
U354EN.DOC
Using copy - paste

The copy and paste functions are available in all ToPs input fields
from this version on. Depending on the position of the cursor in the
input field, the content is copied either completely or only partly into
the intermediate memory.
When pasting, the copied content is inserted at the point where the
cursor is located.
Contents of the intermediate memory can also be taken from other
programs and pasted into the ToPs input field and vice versa.
Copy
Pasting into empty input field
Cursor position
Key combination
Key combination
Result
Example123
<CTRL> + <C>
<CTRL> + <V>
Example123
Example123
or
or
Example123
Example123
<Strg> + <C>
<Strg> + <V>
ple123
Tab. 12
U354EN.DOC
69
8.
Machine specific modifications
8.1
Supported machines and components
Machine
Control system
Automation
Explanations
TC 100
SINUMERIK 3N
(MINIMATIC), without automation
TC 120 R
Bosch CC 220
All automation components
TC 160 R
Bosch CC 220
TC 180 K/W
TC 180.2 K/W
Bosch M5T/ M5TC or

SINUMERIK 8N
Without: Laser, tap, Multitool, Swift
TC 180 K/W Rotation Fanuc 6MB
Only Rotation, without: Laser, tap,

Multitool
TC 180 L K/W
Bosch M5T/ M5TC or

SINUMERIK 8N and
Fanuc 6MB
With TLF laser, standard or

retractable clamps, without
Multitool, without automation
TC 180 LKR
SINUMERIK 8N
With TLF laser, standard or

retractable clamps, without
Multitool, without automation
R = Robot
TC 190 R
Bosch CC 220
TC 200 R
Bosch CC 220
TC 235
Bosch CC 200
TC 240
Bosch CC 200
(T19, T21 )
TC 240 L
Bosch CC 200
TC 240 R
Bosch CC 300
TC 260
Bosch CC 300
TRUMALIFT SheetMaster +
With standard and retractable

clamps. No TRUMALIFT B, E, C
TC 260 A
Bosch CC 300
TC 260 T
Bosch CC 300
TC 260 L
Bosch CC 300
TRUMALIFT SheetMaster +
No TRUMALIFT B, E, C
TC 300
K/W1/W2
Bosch M5T/ M5TC or

SINUMERIK 8N
Alternating system: K=manual,

W1=20 tools,
W2=18 tools
TC 300 L
K/W2
Bosch M5T/ M5TC or

SINUMERIK 8N

W2=18 tools
TC 300 P
K/W1/W2
Bosch M5T/ M5TC or

SINUMERIK 8N

W1=20 tools,
W2=18 tools
TC 500 R
Bosch CC 220
TC 600 L
SINUMERIK 840 D
TC 2000 R
Bosch type 3
TC 5000 R
SINUMERIK 840D
Machines with TRUMALIFT B, E, C are not supported.

Tab. 13
70
U354EN.DOC
8.2
Supported automation
Automation
Designation in ToPs
Lifting grip
Machine
200
yes
TC 200 R
1000
yes
TC 120 R, TC 500 R
1250
yes
TC 240, TC 240 L, TC 240 R

TC 260, TC 260 L, TC 260 R
1300, 1600
no
TC 500 R
1305, 1605
no
TC 5000 R
1306, 1606
no
TC 600 L
TRUMALIFT SB/SE/SC
1300, 1600
no
TC 260, TC 260 L
TRUMAGRIP
260_1250, 260_1500
TC 260, TC 260 L
500_1300, 500_1600
TC 500 R
500_1305, 500_1605
TC 5000 R
500_1306, 500_1606
TC 600 L
TRUMASORT L
TC 260, TC 500 R, TC 600 L, TC 5000 R
TRUMASORT R4
TC 500 R, TC 600 L, TC 5000 R
TRUMASORT S
(single-row)
TC 260
Storage cart
TC 260, TC 500 R, TC 600 L, TC 5000 R
Double cart
TC 500 R, TC 600 L, TC 5000 R
Shifting cart
TC 260
Tab. 14
U354EN.DOC
71
8.3
Using alphanumeric program names
Support of alphanumeric program names has been introduced for

machines TC 5000 R, TC 2000 R, TC 600 L. The option is now set
to YES as default setting.
The default setting can be modified in machine-dependent
customized process rules via the "OptAlphaNumPrgNr" variable
(see section 5.2, p. 41).
"P" transfer recognition is not applicable for machines with
alphanumeric program output. This is also the case when purely
numeric program names are used.
"TransferKennung" variable in machine-dependent customized
process rules (see section 5.2, p. 41).
72
U354EN.DOC
8.4
TC 600 L
Using presser foot and repositioning

cylinder
With the TC 600 L, the presser foot and repositioning cylinder can
be implemented individually or together for the repositioning
process.
Prerequisite
The machine is equipped with repositioning cylinder option.
The machine must be configured in the Data module under

Machines >Configuration >Data 1 in "Repositioning".

2. Select "Repositioning" Start.
The repositioning devices are displayed.
3. Click the clamping position for the repositioning devices.
4. Select OK to confirm clamping position.
5. Click presser foot or repositioning cylinder.
Either the presser foot or both repositioning cylinders are used
for repositioning. Working areas and clamps can be moved in
the display for positioning.
or
Select All.
The presser foot and repositioning cylinders are used for
repositioning. Working areas and clamps can be moved in the
display for positioning.
6. Click new position.

7. Select OK to confirm position.
The repositioning path is shown with a red arrow.
8. Select Info and click red arrow.
Repositioning parameters can be checked in the "Message
list".
U354EN.DOC
73
8.5
TC 5000 R
Activating Y path movement for the lift

Operating the lift in Y direction via the unloading area is an option
and, for this reason, must be activated. This path movement allows
sorted depositing of parts (lift stock).
In the NC program, the path movement can be found under the
entry "suction frame offset Y" in tables PART_UNLOAD and
SHEET_UNLOAD.
Note:
The lift only carries out the Y positioning motion in combination
with a static unloading unit (unloading platform). If there is a
TRUMASORT available, only the TRUMASORT will be moved!
Only when the lift configuration has been carried out in the Data
module is the lift available for palletizing in the Technology module.
Assigning a lift for the

first time
1. Select Data module >Machines >Configuration >Data 2 >Lift

selection.
4. Select Lift selection.
5. Click on Lift in display field.
If it is a TRUMALIFT SheetMaster, the lift is displayed simultaneously in "Loading selected" and "Unloading selected".
7. Select Modify.
8. Message: Confirm "Modify stop pin data?" with Yes /No.
Isolate Y path movement
9. Select Machines >Data >Lift data >Data 6.

10. "Y lift path movement via unloading area": Adjust button to Yes.
The default values "min. Y travel position Lift" "and max. Y
travel position Lift" are displayed.
11. Select Modify.
The Y path movement of the lift is isolated and saved.
74
U354EN.DOC
Activating loading aid

With the TC 5000 R with brush table, a loading aid is offered as an
option.
From a certain adjustable sheet weight (see section 5.2, p. 41;
Variable: "MinGewichtFuerBeladehilfe"), the loading aid is automatically activated with the "Auto" setting.
Ball rollers move over the brush level from the brush table.
1. Select Technology module >File >New >Parameters.

2. Select "Type of loading" "Manual".
3. Select "Parameters" Modify.
4. "Activate loading aid": Select "No", "Yes" or "Automatic".
Using loading table

A loading table is offered as an option with the TC 5000 R with
TRUMALIFT SheetMaster in order to optimize the loading
operation.
1. Select Technology module >File >New >Parameters.

2. Select "Type of loading" "Lift".
3. Select "Parameters" Modify.
4. Select "Use loading table".
U354EN.DOC
75
Using presser foot and repositioning

cylinder
With the TC 5000 L, the presser foot and repositioning cylinder can
be implemented individually or together for the repositioning
process.
Prerequisite
The machine is equipped with repositioning cylinder option.

The machine must be configured in the Data module under
>Machines >Configuration >Data 1 in "Repositioning".

2. Select "Repositioning" Start.
The repositioning devices are displayed.
3. Click the clamping position for the repositioning devices.
4. Select OK to confirm clamping position.
5. Click presser foot or repositioning cylinder.
Either the presser foot or both repositioning cylinders are used
for repositioning. Working areas and clamps can be moved in
the display for positioning.
or
Select All.
The presser foot and repositioning cylinders are used for
repositioning. Working areas and clamps can be moved in the
display for positioning.
6. Click new position.

7. Select OK to confirm position.
The repositioning path is shown with a red arrow.
8. Select Info and click red arrow.
Repositioning parameters can be checked in the "Message
list".
76
U354EN.DOC
Using TRUMPF Multibend tool

With this tool, 90 bends can be produced up to a bending height
of 25 mm. Bends are possible on outer and inner contours.
Note:
Only single strokes may be created with the TRUMPF Multibend
tool. Nibbling is not permitted.
U354EN.DOC
77
8.6
TC 500 R
Activating output as a table

For using the NcLink program (see section 4.11, p. 35) with
programs for the TC 500 R, output as a table is required in NC
text. The created tables are removed by the CELL Controller on
the way to the machine.
1. Select Data module >Machine >Data >Basic machine >Data 5.

2. "Output as a table possible" select Yes.
3. Select Modify.
High lifting no.

Note:
With an initial installation and after a ToPs update, the "High stroke
rate" option" for the TC 500 R (Type 2, standard clamp, working
range X = 2500 mm, Y = 1250 mm) is activated.
If the machine does not possess an acceleration package

(machines delivered before May 1994), the control system stops at
the program start with the following error message: "788 Prohibited
A value".
In this case the machine must be set to the normal stroke rate in
the Data module.
Setting normal stroke rate
1. Select Data module >Machines >Data >Formulas >Data 1.

2. X acceleration. Select high stroke rate from CC220S.
3. Select "Active" No.
4. Select Modify.
5. Y acceleration Select high stroke rate from CC220S.
7. Select Modify.
8. Select Punching time f(S) M80 high stroke rate.
10. Select Change.
78
U354EN.DOC
13. Select Modify.

16. Select Modify.
17. Select X acceleration.
18. Select "Active" Yes.
19. Select Modify.
20. Select Y acceleration.
22. Select Modify.
23. Select Punching time f(S) M80.
25. Select Modify.
28. Select Modify.
31. Select Modify.
All modifications are saved. The machine works with normal stroke
rate.
U354EN.DOC
79
Index
A
Acceleration values
X axis ............................................... 39
Y axis ............................................... 39
Actual value................................................... 40
Job management........................................... 18
K
C
Comment text................................................ 40
Copy.............................................................. 68
Customized process rules ............................. 40
Cutting edge.................................................. 23
Key functions
ToPs ................................................. 67
Windows........................................... 67
L
Lift data
lift group 1......................................... 36
lift group 2......................................... 36
Lift selection .................................................. 37
Loading aid.................................................... 74
Loading table................................................. 74
D
Dead point..................................................... 25
E
Element depth ............................................... 30
M
Machine cycle number .............................. 6, 18
Material
blank................................................. 51
MI loading options
detail drawings ................................. 16

Multibend tool ................................................ 76
H
High stroke rate............................................. 77
NcLink ................................................. 6, 18, 34

Nesting job .................................................... 27
Import
dxf-files............................................. 62
iges files ........................................... 62
Inner contour ................................................. 26
Installation
Material specification ....................... 11

Internal process rules .................................... 40
80
Index
U354EN.DOC
storage item identity number............ 34
Outer circle.................................................... 24
outer contour ................................................. 26
T
P
Part removal.................................................. 30
Paste ............................................................. 68
presser foot ............................................. 72, 75
Processing
rearranging....................................... 33
Processing sequence.................................... 33
Production plan ....................................... 27, 34
Table output .................................................. 77

TC-APT ......................................................... 56
Thread ........................................................... 22
Thread former................................................ 20
Tolerance measure ....................................... 30
Tool stations .................................................. 48
Trimming ................................................... 6, 29
U
Q
U parameter .................................................. 57
Unloading area configuration ........................ 52
Quick display................................................. 21
V
R
Reference element.............................. 6, 12, 13
Remainder strips........................................... 29
Repositioning cylinder............................. 72, 75
Variable ......................................................... 41
Description ....................................... 42
X
X offset value................................................. 59
S
Search for pre-punching tool......................... 24
Setup plan models
Standard model................................ 55
Sheet format ................................................. 17
Shorten/extend.......................................... 6, 12
Small parts .................................................... 32
Software update............................................ 50
Special tool................................................ 6, 23
Storage item designation .............................. 19
U354EN.DOC
Y
Y offset .......................................................... 37
Y path movement .......................................... 73
Index
81
82
Index
U354EN.DOC
Update information
ToPs 300
Version 3.30
Update information
ToPs 300
Version 3.30
Edition: 05/2002

Technische Dokumentation
Johann-Maus-Strae 2
D-71254 Ditzingen, Germany
Tel.: +49 (0) 71 56/3 03-0
Fax: +49 (0) 71 56/3 03-5 40
E-mail: docu.tw@de.trumpf.com
This document has been produced by the Technical Documentation

Department at TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG.
All rights to this documentation, especially the rights of reproduction and
distribution as well as that of translation are retained by TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG. This also applies in cases of notifications of
protected privilege. No part of the documentation, no matter in which form,
may be reproduced or processed, copied or distributed using electronic
systems without previous written consent of TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen
GmbH + Co. KG. Subject to technical alterations. Errors excepted.
TRUMPF Werkzeugmaschinen GmbH + Co. KG is not liable for any errors in
this documentation. No liability is accepted for direct or indirect damage or
injury resulting from the delivery or use of this documentation, in so far as this
is legally permissible.
New in Version 3.30

The update information describes modifications to the previous
ToPs versions. It serves as a supplement to the existing ToPs
manual.
Configuring machines
The machine configuration was completely revised and considerably simplified.
Starting from the entry mask "What do you want to adjust?", the
sequence masks will guide you through the machine adjustments.
All default values for machines and components have already been
set. You will only have to adjust individual values in exceptional
cases.
Automatic repositioning
Repositioning is necessary with sheets that are larger than the
machine's working range or with processing plans that are in the
clamp dead range.
When repositioning, processing plans of different clamping operations to the sheet are assigned. ToPs automatically calculates a
suggestion for the repositioning procedure.
If the automatically generated suggestion does not correspond to
the requests, the procedure can be canceled. You then have the
possibility to engage interactively.
Palletizing for all sheets

Palletizing for all sheets means that several sheets can be
successively palletized. Nesting jobs but also sheets can be
palletized in any order.
New properties: Characteristics

A characteristic is a property that has one or more elements or one
or more contours.
Characteristics are created in the Drawing module, saved in the
geo-file and recognized and evaluated in the Technology module
during automatic machining.
U354EN.DOC
New in Version 3.30
Display nibbling track

Up to now the nibbling track on nibbled rows of holes or circles of
holes simply consisted of line or bends that connected the
beginning stoke with the end stroke.
Now an outline around the actual single stroke is formed. In this
way, e.g. uncontrolled scrap can be recognized. The default setting
ToPs is to use can be configured in the Data module.
Undo/Redo
Using Undo, you can undo (almost) all actions in the Drawing and
Nesting modules without restrictions.
Using Redo, you can restore all actions which you have undone as
long as you have not performed any new action.
View panning
By right mouse-clicking on the Pan symbol, navigation arrows are
added to the symbol button. In addition to using the navigation
arrows, the view can also be panned using the keyboard's arrow
keys.
Catch mode
If Catch mode is active, ToPs corrects the point to a point available
nearby by clicking on it with the mouse.
Observe sheet dimension

If "Observe sheet dimension" is active, the defined sheet dimension is automatically considered when panning or positioning parts.
This prevents a part from being too close to the sheet edge or
extending beyond it.
New in Version 3.30
U354EN.DOC
Adjusting the window size

The size of the window can be adjusted to any size by pulling the
window frame with the mouse. This is advantageous e. g. when
you would like to work together with the online documentation or
when your task bar lies over the ToPs command bar.
Saving the ToPs database

ToPs offers the possibility to save the database files either directly
onto the hard drive or onto a corresponding number of floppy disks.
When saving, the data are compressed and a file name is automatically generated.
U354EN.DOC
New in Version 3.30
New in Version 3.30
U354EN.DOC
Contents
1.
Installation ........................................................................13
Supported operating systems.......................................13
Installation guide in pdf format .....................................13
2.
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
Drawing module...............................................................14
Undoing or restoring any/all actions ..................................14
Creating and deleting bevels .............................................14
New properties: Characteristics.........................................15
Inserting or modifying text in a drawing .............................16
Defining text properties.................................................16
Modifying text parameters ............................................17
Creating the font yourself .............................................18
3.
3.1
The Nesting module ........................................................21

Importing and exporting nesting jobs.................................21
Exporting nesting jobs as job files ................................22
Importing job file for a nesting job.................................23
Format description and structure of job
file ('*.dat') in detail........................................................25
Blanks in dat files..........................................................27
Compiling new nesting job.................................................28
Entering parts in a nesting job ......................................29
Activating quick display of parts in nesting jobs ...........34
Defining sheet data for a nesting job ............................35
Modifying sheet format ......................................................37
New symbols in the Nesting module .................................37
Activating "Catch mode" ...............................................37
Activate "Regard sheet edge".......................................38
Using the wheel-mouse .....................................................38
Undoing or restoring any/all actions ..................................38
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
U354EN.DOC
Contents
4.
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.12
4.13
10
Contents
Technology module.........................................................39
Storing and loadingfiles in *.gmt format.............................39
Sheet properties ................................................................40
Preselecting sheet thickness ........................................40
Modifying Sheet properties...........................................40
Nibbling ..............................................................................41
Modifying overlapping nibbling paths ...........................41
Displaying the nibbling track.........................................41
Configuring the nibbling tracks .....................................43
Displaying row of holes.................................................43
Sheet optimization: Inverting the nibbling paths...........44
Positioning a special tool at an element ............................45
Laser machining.................................................................46
Select laser mode.........................................................46
Specifying the cut start .................................................46
Modifying start of cut ....................................................47
Entering length for microjoints using
the keyboard .................................................................47
Manually splitting and merging processing plans ..............48
Removing small parts ........................................................50
Opening/closing/setting flap .........................................50
Removing with opened flap ..........................................52
Use SheetMaster with part sensors...................................53
Changing suction cup selection .........................................54
Generating repositions.......................................................55
Automatic repositioning ................................................56
Repositioning with interactive confirmation ..................56
Stop simulation after tool change ......................................57
Palletizing for all sheets .....................................................58
Types of palletizing .......................................................58
Configuring the type of palletizing ................................59
Stack interactions .........................................................59
Configuring strategies for stack growth ........................60
Graphic display of the formed stack .............................60
Palletizing several identical sheets...............................61
Palletizing a sheet differently many times ....................61
Palletizing nesting jobs .................................................62
Palletizing any sheet sequences ..................................64
Saving total palletizing..................................................66
Displaying the palletizing graphic in setup plan............67
Setting options for the setup plan ......................................67
U354EN.DOC
5.
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.5
5.6
Data module .....................................................................69

Configuring machines ........................................................69
Importing special lifts .........................................................70
Adjusting clamp data .........................................................71
Rules without password protection ....................................72
Machine rules ...............................................................74
Rules system ................................................................77
User settings ......................................................................82
Focusing the mouse pointer in masks
automatically on OK .....................................................82
Setting key functions ....................................................82
Using Microsoft Word as an html editor .......................83
6.
6.1
6.2
6.3
Info module.......................................................................84
Importing file into the ToPs database ................................84
Saving the ToPs database.................................................85
Changing language............................................................86
7.
7.1
Improvementsaffecting all modules ..............................87

New properties: Characteristics.........................................87
Characteristics in the Drawing module .........................88
Characteristics in the Technology module ...................91
Production plan ..................................................................93
Determining Production plan types...............................93
Creating a production plan ...........................................94
Timeliness of files ..............................................................96
Having files monitored by ToPs during loading
and saving ....................................................................96
Searching outdated files ...............................................99
Using the right mouse button...........................................100
View panning ..............................................................100
Adjusting the window size................................................100
Go into the Internet with ToPs .........................................100
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
8.
8.1
8.2
8.3
Machine specific modifications....................................101

Additionally supported machines and components .........101
Supported automation .....................................................101
TC-APT interface .............................................................102
Additionally supported machines................................102
Index .........................................................................................103
U354EN.DOC
Contents
11
12
Contents
U354EN.DOC
1.
Installation
Supported operating systems

The following operating systems are supported ToPs 300:
WINDOWS ME (Installation is not recommended, because the

operating system is being phased out).
WINDOWS 2000 (Installation is recommended).
WINDOWS NT (Installation is not recommended, because the

operating system is being phased out).
WINDOWS XP.
Installation guide in pdf format

The scope of the documentation in pdf format, that you have
received with your ToPs CD was supplemented by the installation
guide.
The document does not exist in any directory, but rather directly on
the CD.
U354EN.DOC
Installation
13
2.
Drawing module
2.1
Undoing or restoring any/all actions
Using Undo you can undo (almost) all actions in the Drawing
module without restrictions.
Exceptions:
Edited drawing of a single part
Modified drawing data
Smashed part structures from a drawing
Using Redo, you can restore all actions which you have undone as
long as you have not performed any new action.
Undo and Redo function back to the last "Load file" or "New file."
2.2
Creating
Creating and deleting bevels
1. Select Drawing module >Create 2.

2. In "Bevel", select Vertex.
3. Enter the distance from the vertex to the bevel.
The vertex is the intersecting point of two lines.
4. Either
Click on the first line onto which the bevel is to be drawn.
Click on the second line onto which the bevel is to be drawn.
or
14
Drawing module
Click on the vertex onto which the bevel is to be drawn.
U354EN.DOC
Deleting
1. Select Element in "Delete".

2. Click on the bevel.
The bevel is deleted. At the same time the contour is closed,
i.e. the neighboring elements are connected again.
2.3
(see Section 7.1, p. 87)
U354EN.DOC
Drawing module
15
2.4
Inserting or modifying text in a drawing
Defining text properties

1. Select Drawing module >Text >Create.
ToPs displays the mask "Enter text".
Standard text parameters
Enter text
Fig. 30209
2. Enter text within the box.

Example:
One-line text.
Enter several lines of text
3. When entering several lines of text: Mark the end of a line with \n.
Example:
Multiple lines of text\nMultiple lines of text\n
"Angle of inclination"
"Angle of rotation"
4. Set text parameters:

To indicate a 0 angle of inclination corresponds to vertical
characters. Positive values incline the text to the right.
To indicate a 0 angle of rotation corresponds to horizontal lines.
Positive values rotate the text counterclockwise.
Using two points: Before the text can be written, the angle must be
determined using a starting and end point
"Write direction"
"Reference point position"
16
Drawing module
"Right": ToPs positions the characters one next to the other.

"Down": ToPs positions the characters vertically from top to bottom.
The position of the reference point indicates the position of the
cursor on the text.
U354EN.DOC
5. Click on Select font.

ToPs displays the mask "Select file" with the following fonts:
_ 'Bold.fnt'
_ 'Iso.fnt'
_ 'Isoprop.fnt'
Note
Only fonts with their font file ('*.fnt') in the directory ''trumpf/daten'
can be selected. (To create the font yourself, see p. 18ff.)
6. Mark the desired font.
ToPs displays the "Enter text" mask again.
7. Either
When all text parameters are set: Select OK.

ToPs displays the text and the reference point when
a value was entered that is under the angle of rotation.
or
When all text parameters are defined and under "Angle of

rotation "Entry via two points" was selected: Select OK.
Click on the start and end point.

The angle is then defined. ToPs displays the text and the
reference point.
8. Position the text and click.

The text will be inserted at the position you click on.
Modifying text parameters

Prerequisite
The drawing includes text.
1. Select Text, Modify.

2. Click on the text for which you want to change the parameters.
ToPs displays the mask "Enter text."
3. Modify the text parameters and click OK.
U354EN.DOC
Drawing module
17
Creating the font yourself

The fonts bold.fnt, iso.fnt and isoprop.fnt are part of the ToPs standard
range.
To create self-defined fonts, a reference file and a font file must be
created.
The names of all self-defined fonts are entered into the reference file.
The font file itself contains the coordinates for all characters.
Example:
Character
Name of reference file

(prescribed)
Name of font file

(as desired)
txt editor program

(as desired)
font.ref
selfdef_font.fnt
Notepad
Tab. 1
(10,60) (15,60)
(15,15) (30,15)
(10,10)
(30,10)
(0,0)
C
Cell height
Cell width
Descender
Character height
Draft: dimensions and coordinates of a character
18
Drawing module
Fig. 29052
U354EN.DOC
Prerequisite
Creating a reference file
A program for editing .txt files such as e. g. Notepad, Wordpad

or Editor must be available.
1. Open Notepad.
An empty page is displayed.
2. Enter 1005 in the first line.
The numbers from 1001 to 1004 are reserved for the standard
fonts of ToPs.
3. Enter selfdef_font.fnt in the second line.
4. Select File >Save as.
5. In "Save in", change to the directory 'trumpf\daten'.
6. As "File type", select *.txt.
7. Under "File name" enter font.ref.
This file name is prescribed.
All other self-defined fonts will be entered into this file. Every
font is given a consecutive number 1006, 1007 ... In each line,
a file name must come after each number.
8. Select Save.
The reference file is created in the directory 'trumpf\daten'.
Creating font file
9. In Notepad, select File >New.

10. Enter data line by line as in the following example.
Example: Entries in Notepad

(line by line)
Explanation
File format description
#~HEADER
Beginning of first block
Start of file header
selfdef_font.fnt
Name of font file
40
Cell width
80
Cell height
70
Distance from zero point to the end

of the character height
10
Start line of the character without

descender
Number of subsequent characters
0.5
Ratio of cell width to height
##~~
End of the block
End of file header
#~2
Start of description of a character
Beginning of character
Character to be displayed
Number of groups
#~2.1
Beginning of the group
U354EN.DOC
Drawing module
19
Example: Entries in Notepad

(line by line)
Explanation
Number of subsequent points
M 10 10
Move to coordinate 10,10
D 10 60
Draw a line from the coordinate 10,10

to the coordinate 10,60
D 15 60
etc.
D 15 15
etc.
D 30 15
etc.
D 30 10
etc.
D 10 10
etc.
Close the polygonal contour
|~
End of group description
##~~
End of description of a character
###~~~EOF
File format description
End of character
End of file
The font file is made up of one character:
Tab. 2
11. Select File >Save as ...

12. Under "Save in", change to the directory 'trumpf\daten'.
13. Under "File type", select *.txt.
14. Under "File name", enter selfdef_font.fnt.
15. Select Save.
The font file with the letter L has been created and can be used
after restarting ToPs.
Helpful hint
Creating a complete character set is time-consuming. Therefore,
simply copy and rename a ToPs font file. Then write over the
entries in the file with your own coordinates and data.
20
Drawing module
U354EN.DOC
3.
The Nesting module
3.1
Importing and exporting nesting jobs
Each nesting job you create in the Nesting module is automatically

saved in the ToPs database. Managing (e. g. deleting) nesting jobs
is therefore not possible using Explorer in Windows.
Exporting nesting jobs
To store job data in another directory or to save it on a storage

medium, you must export the nesting job. In the process, ToPs
creates a "job file" with the format '*.dat'.
Example: the nesting job "Gearwheel" becomes 'Gearwheel.dat'.
You can manage this job file in Explorer.
The job file contains only the basic job data. It contains neither the
processed nor unprocessed geometries nor mini nests ('*.geo',
'*.gmt', '*.mtl') nor the sheets ('*.taf').
Exporting the job data is particularly useful for job data which you
do not need on a daily basis and wish to archive.
Exported nesting jobs are retained in the ToPs database. If you
don't want to do that, you have to explicitly delete them.
Importing nesting job
U354EN.DOC
You can import foreign jobs (e. g. from superordinate systems) and
then, for example, modify them in ToPs
The Nesting module
21
Exporting nesting jobs as job files

Note
All nesting jobs are deleted in the database when ToPs is
reinstalled. If you wish to reinstall ToPs: first export nesting jobs.
When ToPs is updated, the nesting jobs remain in the database.
1
If the mask "Job management" is displayed: select Export.

ToPs displays the "Select file" mask. It displays all exported
nesting jobs ('*.dat') located in the current directory as a
standard.
or
Select File >Job export ...
ToPs displays the mask "Selection of jobs".
If necessary search for the nesting job that you want to

export.
Mark nesting job.
Select OK.
ToPs displays the "Select file" mask. It displays as standard all
exported nesting jobs ('*.dat') located in the current directory.
2. If necessary, change directories.
Note
Do not modify "File name"!
3. Select OK.
ToPs exports the nesting job.
22
The Nesting module
U354EN.DOC
Importing job file for a nesting job

If you want to import a "foreign" nesting job e. g. a nesting job
which you have not exported on your computer), you need, in
addition to the exported '*.dat' file, all geometries or mini nests
('*.geo', '*.gmt', '*.mtl') and (if relevant) all sheets ('*.taf') belonging
to the nesting job as well.
Helpful hint
With foreign nesting jobs, be sure you have not only the exported
dat file, but also all files (*.dat, '*.geo', '*.gmt', '*.mtl' und '*.taf') that
were created using a backup copy.
1
If the mask "Selection of jobs" is displayed: Select Import.

or
Select File >Job import ...
ToPs displays the "Select file" mask. It displays as standard all
exported nesting jobs ('*.dat') located in the current directory.
2. If necessary, change into the directory where you manage

exported nesting jobs.
3. Mark job file (= exported nesting job).
4. Select OK.
If the nesting job is already contained in the database, ToPs
displays the "Import job into data base" mask:
Fig. 29781
5. To overwrite the currently available nesting job: select

"Overwrite".
6. To add the numbers of parts from the imported nesting job to
the numbers of parts in the nesting job in the database: select
"Add".
U354EN.DOC
The Nesting module
23
7. Select OK.
ToPs checks the name of the computer to which the nesting
job was exported and the directory.
If the dat file was exported e. g. to a different computer or the
directory root (= lowest common directory) does not match up,
ToPs displays the "Replace directory root found" mask:
Fig. 29780
8. Open "New directory root ..." using >.

ToPs displays the "Select directory" mask.
Change directory
forwards?
Change directory
backwards?
9. Click on
until file manager shows the desired file.
10. Mark the directory which is one level deeper.

11. Repeat until the file manager displays the correct directory.
Helpful hint
ToPs displays the current path under "Search in". If you open
"Search in" using >, ToPs shows you the "Previous
directories", that you had selected.
12. Double click on OK.
If, in addition to '*.geo', '*.gmt', and '*.mtl' files, '*.taf' files are
also located in the current directory, you can import these as
well. ToPs displays a query to this effect.
13. Confirm the query as to whether the sheet files should be
transferred with Yes.
ToPs writes the nesting job to the database and shows the
different sheets in the sheet overview. ToPs represents the
geometries with their circumscribing rectangles (each part type in a
different color).
24
The Nesting module
U354EN.DOC
Format description and structure of job

file ('*.dat') in detail
File format
The job file which ToPs is to read in must be constructed in

accordance with a defined scheme.
Job files created with previous versions can still be read in.
The job file is divided into the following blocks.
Block
Designation
Description
Block 1
#~11
General information
Block 2
#~25
Job data and sheet data
Block 3
#~40
Remainder sheet data
Block 4
#~35
Part identification
Tab. 3
End of block: #~END.
End of file. #~EOF.
The job file must always begin with #~11 (Block 1).
If no value is given, because e. g. it is not required, it may be

left empty. The line must remain empty! If no entry is made in
the line, no blank may be present as a wildcard.
Example
Start of block: #~n (n = block designation).
No additional empty lines may be added in the blocks.
#~11
PCNN
C:\TRUMPF
Start of block 1
Computer name
Root directory
2.0
Version no. of the DAT file,

(ToPs300 V3.20 and after)
11-2000-3
TC5000R
1
Sin 840D
1
#~END
#~25
part1
part1
St37-20
2000.000000
1000.000000
10.000000
10.000000
20.000000
20.000000
20.000000
20.000000
1
1
1
5.000000
5.000000
U354EN.DOC
Stock ID (ToPs300 V3.20 and after)

Machine name (Version no. 2.1 and after)
Machine type (Version no. 2.1 and after)
Control system (Version no. 2.1 and after)
Control system type (Version no. 2.1
and after)
End of block 1
Start of block 2
Job name
Sheet name
Material ID number
Sheet length
Sheet width
Web in X
Web in Y
Top margin
Bottom margin
Left margin
Right margin
Internal surfaces (1/0=Y/N)
External surfaces (0=no, 1=part, 2=sheet)

CSC distance X
CSC distance Y
The Nesting module
25
1
1
1
0
2
1
1
1
2.000000
3
1
1
0
1
2
52
65.000000
5.000000
70.000000
0.000000
0.000000
PCNN
#~END
#~40
St37-20
2
500
500
taf1.geo
C:\TRUMPF...USER_JO2
2
2
3
1
5
rest1
0
1
Part 1
20.000000
20.000000
20.000000
20.000000
PCNN
|~
:
:
|~
#~END
#~35
C:\TRUMP...USER_JO2\GEO_
MTL\SZ600PLA.GEO
30
100
26
The Nesting module
CSC number, parts in block in X

CSC number, parts in block in Y
Lay out remainder sheets (1/0=Y/N)
CSC layout (1/0=Y/N)
Resolution (1=small, 2=medium 3=large)
Sorting criterion (1=surface area

2=perimeter)
Fill last sheet (1/0=Y/N)
Start part (1=surface area, 2=X, 3=Y,
4=X/Y)
Sheet thickness
Sheet geometry name
Sheet path name
Direction of grain (1=X, 2=Y,
3=unknown)
MasterPlate (1/0=Y/N)
Exact distance (1/0=Y/N)
Number of MasterPlate (1=one,
2=several)
Clean last sheet (52/2=Y/N)
Min. % laying out, MasterPlate
Min. % improvement mini-nests
Max. % limit recalculation last sheet
Min. element length for common cuts
Min. distances for securing corners
with CSC
End of block 2
Start of block 3
Remainder sheets material
Sheet thickness (Z)
Sheet length (X)
Sheet width (Y)
Sheet name
Sheet path
Number of remainder sheets
Remaining number of remainder
sheets
3=unknown)
Priority of sheet
Name of remainder sheet
Start corner (1=LB, 2=LT, 3=RB,
4=RT)
Job name of remainder sheet
Top margin
Bottom margin
Left margin
Right margin
Sections can be repeated
End of block 3
Start of block 4
Minimum quantity
Maximum quantity
U354EN.DOC
1
4
0
C:\TRUMPF\TEILE\USER_JO2\
GEO_MTL\SZ600PLA.GEO
5
90.000000
3
2
0
MiniNest
0
1
1
PCNN
none
Rotate(1/0=Y/N)
Mini nest (0=No, 1= Horizontal,
2=Vertical,
3=Auto, 4=MTL)
CSC suitable (1/0=Y/N)
Sheet path name
Priority
Angle of rotation increment
3=unknown)
Positioning method (1=FirstFit,
2=center of gravity)
Part in mini nest (1/0=Y/N)
Name of mini nest
Lay part in coil (1/0 = J/N)
Number of rows in coil
Number of columns in coil
Computer name for parts
Customer of the part (not an empty
line!!)
AGA no.
|~
#~END
#~EOF
Machining cycle designation

(ToPs300 V3.20 and after)
End of block 4
End of file
Tab. 4
Blanks in dat files

There may be no blank at the end of path entries in a dat file.
These are included in the search paths for the files. This has the
consequence that the files will not be found.
It is also recommended not to append any additional blanks or
other special characters to entries in the dat file, since they could
lead to interpretation errors.
U354EN.DOC
The Nesting module
27
3.2
Compiling new nesting job
1. Select Nesting module >File >New >Job.

ToPs displays the mask "Job management":
Fig. 19802
ToPs shows the parts of the previous nesting job in the list field.
Helpful hint
When ToPs opens the "Job management" mask, the cursor is
automatically placed in the "Job" input box. You can change
from one input box to the next using <TAB>.
Naming the nesting job
2. Under "Job", enter name of the new nesting job (overwrite or

change old name).
Notes
The file name can be up to 35 characters long. It can contain
digits, letters or a combination of the two. Full stops, spaces,
blanks and special characters such as ^ are not permitted.
In the "Part name" list field, the parts from the previous nesting
job remain displayed until you have either entered a new part
in the nesting job or have clicked once in the "Job" input field.
28
The Nesting module
U354EN.DOC
Entering parts in a nesting job

You can do the following:
Transfer a part from the previous nesting job to the new

nesting job.
Enter new parts in the nesting job.
Search for several parts by means of their drawing data and

transfer them to the job.
Prerequisite
The mask "Job management" is displayed (see Fig. 19802,

p. 28.
Notes
An assigned sheet only contains references to the single parts, that
are nested on it. If you modify a single part after you have laid out
a sheet with it, the single part changes automatically on the sheet.
Mini nests cannot be entered in a nesting job.
Select part
1. To transfer a part from the previous nesting job to the new job:
mark the desired part in the list field.
ToPs enters the name of the part into "Part name".
or
To enter a new part in the nesting job: open "Part name"

with >.
ToPs displays the "Select file" mask. It displays all unprocessed parts ('*.geo') located in the current directory as a
standard.
If necessary, select processed parts ('*.gmt').
If necessary, change directories.
Mark the part you wish to transfer into the nesting job.
Select OK.
ToPs updates "Job management" "Part name" and "Part
path" in the mask.
or
U354EN.DOC
Enter the file name (including suffix) under "Part name".

ToPs loads the part and displays the part path.
The Nesting module
29
or
Define number of parts
Use Select to enter several parts from the same directory

into the nesting job at the same time.
2. Either
Enter the desired number of parts under "Min".
or
Allocate customer and

number of machining cycle
Allocate place value
(priority)?
Check "Max".
Enter minimum and maximum quantities.
3. If required, enter customer name and number of machining cycle.
When nesting using the free geometry nesting processor, a place

value can be allocated to each individual part. (When nesting using
the rectangle nesting processor, the place value is set for the
whole job in the "Options".)
The lower the number, the higher the priority and with it the
probability that ToPs nests that part first.
Examples:
ToPs will give a part with a priority of 2 precedence over a part

with a priority of 3 when laying out a sheet.
Parts with the same priority are sorted according to their area.
(ToPs begins with the part which has the greatest surface
area.)
4. Enter priority.
Read in information from
the geo file?
5. To read in information from the 'geo file': mark "Entry from geo
file".
ToPs reads into the nesting job the following drawing data from
the '*.geo' or '*.gmt' file.
"Mini nest": If there is a mini nest for the part, ToPs nests
the mini nest. If there is no mini nest, ToPs nests the single
part.
Note
With '*.gmt' files, no mini nests can be entered in the job.
30
The Nesting module
"Rotate": When active, ToPs rotates the single part.

"At will": When nesting using the free geometry nesting
processor, ToPs rotates the part around the angle
increment selected under "Angle". In the Rechteck nesting
processor, ToPs rotates the part 90. The sheet's direction
of grain should not be taken into account.
"Grain": ToPs lays the part on the sheet corresponding to
the selected direction of grain.
U354EN.DOC
Note
If "Grain" is activated for a part, ToPs will only lay the part
on a remainder sheet, if it also has a grain direction
or
if only the standard sheets were defined with grain
direction.
or
Deactivate "Entry from geo file".
ToPs ignores the entries in the 'geo file'. "Mini nest", "Rotate"
("Grain", "At will") can be activated.
Is the part suitable for
common cuts (CSC)?
When nesting with the rectangular nesting processor, ToPs can lay
a CSC suitable part either in groups (see Fig. 15454) or in specific
numbers in the X and Y directions (see Fig. 15455).
Sheet layout with several groups of each CSC part
Sheet layout with one group per CSC part
U354EN.DOC
Fig. 15454
Fig. 15455
The Nesting module
31
6. To place the part on the sheet in groups: check "Suitable for

CSC".
7. Enter the number of parts of a group in X- and Y-direction
under "Group/number pts".
Define angle for possible
rotation
When nesting using the free geometry nesting processor, an

incremental angle can be allocated to parts able to be rotated at
will, which ToPs may then use to rotate the sheets when nesting.
(Incremental angle: angle is added to the absolute angle).
Prerequisite
The part must have been defined as able to be rotated via

"Rotate", "At will".
Sheet layout with angle increment of 30 for all parts
Sheet layout with angle increment 90 for all parts
32
The Nesting module
Fig. 15456
Fig. 15457
U354EN.DOC
8. Enter angle.
When all data for the part
have been entered
9. Select Enter.
or
Modify the data of

an entered part?
Press <STRG>+<E>.
10. Mark part in the list field.

11. Modify data (example: different number of parts, different
priority).
12. Either
Mark "and overwrite".
ToPs overwrites the old data. (In the example: the old number
of parts is replaced by the new. The parts have the new
priority).
or
Deactivate "and overwrite".
ToPs "adds on" the new data. (In the example: the old and new
numbers of parts are added together. The parts all have the
new priority).
13. Select Enter.
or
Save new nesting job

and close
U354EN.DOC
press <STRG>+<E>.
14. Select OK or press <RETURN>.

ToPs saves the nesting job in the database and displays the
"Job Automatic" mask.
The Nesting module
33
Activating quick display of parts

in nesting jobs
The quick display corresponds to the preview of a file in the "File
manager" (this will open e. g., if you want to load a part or a sheet).
The quick display can be activated in the following masks:
"Job management"
"Part selection"
The quick display is limited to unprocessed and produced parts

('*.geo', '*.gmt') and (in the mask "Part selection" additionally) to
mini nests (*.mtl').
Example: quick display
in "Job management"
Fig. 29868
1. Right click on the file.

ToPs activates the "Quick display".
2. Close the quick display with OK.
34
The Nesting module
U354EN.DOC
Defining sheet data for a nesting job

The tab "Sheet data" was extended by the material and storage
item identification.
1. Select Nesting module >File >New >Job >Parameter.

ToPs displays the "Nesting parameters" mask.
Fig. 19804
Helpful hint
When ToPs opens the "Nesting parameters" mask, the cursor
automatically appears in the "Sheet name" input box. You can
change from one input box to the next using <TAB>.
Select material and
dimensions of the sheet via
"Storage item"
U354EN.DOC
2. To select material and dimensions of the sheet via "Storage

item": check "Storage item designation".
The Nesting module
35
Notes
If you are nesting processed single parts ('*.gmt') in the job, the
first processed single part determines the material of the sheet
and the machine with which the sheet is machined.
When selecting using "Storage item identification" material,
dimensions and storage location of the sheet are fixed.
In order to be able to select a storage item, you must have
entered storage item designations in the Data module under
Material >Blanks.
ToPs displays the mask "Select storage item".
Mark the desired storage item.
To change the storage item again: open list field under

"Storage item designation" using >.
ToPs displays the mask "Select storage item" again.
Mark another storage item.
or
Enter sheet material and
dimensions manually
ToPs displays the mask "Select material".
36
The Nesting module
Open material designation using >.
Select the desired material.
U354EN.DOC
3.3
Modifying sheet format
The sheet format can only be changed when its dimensions were
manually entered during creation.
If you created the sheet using a storage item, the sheet format
cannot be changed (the sheet dimensions are found in the storage
item).
Prerequisite
You have loaded or created a new sheet.
1. Select Sheet >Sheet format >Modify.

ToPs displays the mask "Redefine sheet format".
The sheet dimensions suggested in the mask represent the
maximum expansion of the parts on the sheet (surrounding
rectangle, zero point at 0.0 ...), including sheet margins and a
"safety allowance."
These are the smallest dimensions you can select for the new
sheet format.
2. Enter new sheet dimensions.
3. Select OK.
3.4
New symbols in the Nesting module
Activating "Catch mode"

If the Catch mode is active, ToPs corrects the point clicked with the
mouse to a point available nearby (if one is available).
Prerequisite
U354EN.DOC
With a nesting job loaded: The single sheet view is displayed.
Select Catch mode.
The Nesting module
37
Activate "Regard sheet edge"

If "Observe sheet dimension" is active, the defined sheet dimension is automatically considered when panning or positioning parts.
This prevents a part from being too close to the sheet edge or
extending beyond it.
Select Regard sheet edge.
3.5
Using the wheel-mouse
With the help of the wheel, wheel-mouse users can rotate parts
that have not been stepped on the working range yet. The drawing
is rotated around a preset angle.
3.6
Undoing or restoring any/all actions
38
The Nesting module
U354EN.DOC
4.
4.1
Loading files
Technology module
Storing and loadingfiles in *.gmt format
Machine and material are stored in a gmt file.

In case no sheet or a blank sheet is loaded, the machine and/or
the material can be activated corresponding to the entries in the
gmt file.
Storing files
Files in the *.gmt format can be stored in the Single part menu.
Changing from the single part mode into the sheet mode is no
longer necessary.
Select Technology module >Single part >File >Store part.
The data is stored in gmt format.
U354EN.DOC
Technology module
39
4.2
Sheet properties
Preselecting sheet thickness
Select Technology module >Punching >Manual >Extras

>Sheet thickness.
Modifying Sheet properties

Prerequisite
A sheet must be loaded.
Material specification must be the same.
Sheet thickness must be the same.
Note
The sheet can be assigned another material name and another
storage item identification. The sheet dimension can be modified if
no storage item identification has been assigned.
Select Technology module >File >Configure sheet.
or
40
Technology module
Select Technology module >Sheet layout >Modify sheet

>Properties.
U354EN.DOC
4.3
Nibbling
Modifying overlapping nibbling paths

On nibbling paths the overlap can be modified on the side on which
no unloading is defined:
If the unloading is on the end of the nibbling path, the

beginning can be modified.
If the unloading is in the middle of the nibbling path, both ends

can be modified.
Select Technology module >Punching >Manual >Modify

>Modify overlapping.
Displaying the nibbling track

Up to now the nibbling track on nibbled rows of holes or circles of
holes simply consisted of line or bends that connected the
beginning stoke with the end stroke.
Now an outline around the actual single stroke is formed. In this
way, e.g. uncontrolled scrap can be recognized. The default setting
to be used by ToPs can be configure in the Data module using the
"Nibbeln_GrafikErzeugung" variable in the "System" process ruler
(see Section 5.5, p. 72).
The nibbling track display can be modified for individual processing
plans.
Display of the nibbling track in the setting "Line" and "Contour"
U354EN.DOC
Fig. 31209, Fig. 31210
Technology module
41
1. Select Technology module >Punching >Manual >Modify.

2. Under "Nibbling path", select Extended.
3. Click on a processing operation.
ToPs open the "Technology parameters" mask:
Fig. 31211
4. Under "Display" select "Umriss" ("Contour").

The machining is displayed as a contour around the single stoke.
42
Technology module
U354EN.DOC
Configuring the nibbling tracks

Whether the nibbling track is to be displayed as a "Line" or "Contour"
can be configured using the variable "Nibbeln_GrafikErzeugung" in
the process rule "System." The simplified display is preset.
Displaying row of holes

Previously, the first, second and last stokes were displayed in the
simplified display of a row of holes. Starting from this ToPs version,
the second to last stoke is also displayed.
U354EN.DOC
Technology module
43
Sheet optimization: Inverting

the nibbling paths
Forming and special tools
Nibbling paths that are created with a forming or special tool can
be inverted with the automatic optimization.
Display before the optimization
Fig. 30210
Display after the optimization
Fig. 31309
44
Technology module
U354EN.DOC
4.4
Positioning a special tool

at an element
The function "Position" was expanded by the options "At element"

and "At element partially."
Note
Start and end points of the machining are determined in such a
way that the tool is positioned flush at the element (setting
"At element") or from the first to the second pick point (setting
"At element partially").
1. Select Technology module >Punching >Manual >Generate

>Position.
2. Under "Selection", select Single hole or At element or At
element partially.
3. If the message "No suitable cutting edge has been found.
Please set down the tool and identify a cutting edge" appears,
click on the ToPs user interface.
The tool is displayed.
4. Identify the cutting edge.
5. Follow the instructions in the command line for further
machining.
U354EN.DOC
Technology module
45
4.5
Laser machining
Select laser mode

In the Technology module, the laser modes "Marking" and "Point
marking" can be selected for automatic laser machining.
ToPs interprets the following colors if the variable "Sc_Krit_Geo" is
activated in the process rule "System" (see Section 5.5, p. 80):
Cyan-colored points are point marked.
Yellow lines are marked.
Specifying the cut start

In contrast to the previous versions of ToPs, the cut start can be
now be set with the automatic and the manual laser machining.
Select Technology module >Laser machining >Automatic

>Start of cut.
or
46
Technology module
Select Technology module >Laser machining >Manual >Start

of cut.
U354EN.DOC
Modifying start of cut

The start of the cut and the way the laser is to pierce can be
subsequently modified for previously machined parts.
1. Select Technology module >Processing >Laser processing

>Manual >Position.
2. Under "Start of cut", select Modify.
3. Determine settings for the new start of cut.
4. Click on the desired laser processing.
The start of cut is modified.
Entering length for microjoints using

the keyboard
In the process rules for laser processing, the length of a microjoint
is determined along with other settings.
The length entered in the Data module is used in the Technology
module. Independent of these fixed values, it is possible to enter
another length for each individual microjoint.
Prerequisite
The contour msut be machined with the laser.
1. Select Technology module >Laser processing >Manual >Small

parts.
2. Under "Microjoint", select Set.
3. Click the position for the microjoint.
The microjoint is created with the length from the process rule.
or
Enter the length of the microjoint in the input line.
Click the position for the microjoint.

The microjoint is created with the individual length.
U354EN.DOC
Technology module
47
4.6
Manually splitting and merging

processing plans
Instead of using the automatic splitting procedure when repositioning, it is possible to manually split processing plans if e. g. they
must be repositioned for excessively long parts.
Splitting punchings

2. Under "Nibbling path", select Split.
3. Click on the position to be split.
The processing will be split.
Note
Punchings for which an unloading is defined cannot be merged.
Merging punchings

2. Under "Nibbling path", select Merge.
3. Either
Select "Linear".
Click on the first and second machining.

The processing plans are merged.
or
If two arcs with the same radius and center are to be

merged: select "Circular".

The processing plans are merged to a nibbling arc.
Splitting laser machinings
1. Select Technology module

>Modify.
>Laser
processing >Manual
2. Under "Laser path", select Split.

3. Click on the position to be split.
4
48
Technology module
The processing will be split.
U354EN.DOC
Merging laser machinings
1. Select Technology module

>Modify.
>Laser
processing >Manual
2. Under "Laser path", select Merge.

3. Either
Select "Linear".

The processing plans are linearly merged.
or
If two processing plans are to be merged with a curve:

select "Circular".
Click on the first and second laser machining.

The processing plans are merged with a curve. The vertex of
the curve is the intersecting point of both laser machinings.
Note
If an unloading is defined for the first laser machining, it will be
deleted.
U354EN.DOC
Technology module
49
4.7
Removing small parts
Opening/closing/setting flap
Starting from this ToPs version, the "Flap" function is available for
machines with the open control system SINUMERIK 840D and
Bosch Type 3.
"Opening/closing" the flap to remove small parts can be manually
assigned to a reference processing plan.
This function is designed for row-by-row part removal according to
user specifications, e. g. for parts in an excessively long multi-copy
processing section. The flap is opened by section and closed
again.
Advantages of the function "Flap" in connection with open control
systems:
Sensor monitoring is possible with removing the parts.
Removed parts are recognized. In this way it is possible to

book parts.
Note
Immediately before the NC program is created, the "Flap" function
must be set as the last action.
Subsequently performed actions e. g. "Delete", "Modify", "Optimize"
influence the order in which finished parts are removed. For this
reason, it is necessary to check the set "Flap" function in these
cases.
50
Technology module
U354EN.DOC
Prerequisite
Small part removal "Flap" must be set.

>Extras >Flap.
2. Either
Select "Flap" "Open".
Select "Ausfhren" (Run) "Before" or "After".
Select OK.
Open the flap
Click on the reference processing plan.
Click on the position on which the text "Flap open" is to be.

The flap opens before or after the reference processing plan.
The text "Flap_open" is shown in yellow.
or
Select "Flap" "Close".
Select "Ausfhren" (Run) "Before" or "After".
Select OK.
Closing the flap
Click on the reference processing plan.
Click on the position on which the text "Flap close" is to be.

The flap closes before or after the reference processing plan.
The text "Flap_close" is shown in yellow.
Note
The symbols for the unloading do no change when using the
"Flap" function. The status of the flap can not be queried using
the "Info" function.
U354EN.DOC
Technology module
51
Removing with opened flap

Prerequisite
Under >Processing >Manual >Small parts >Small part

parameters, the "Removal with open flap"option was selected.
Unloading has outer contour reference.
Part lies in a multi-copy processing.
1. Select Optimization >Automatic >Calculate >Start.

The "Optimization of execution" mask is opened.
2. Select "Row by row" or "Flexible".
3. Check "Removal with open flap".
52
Technology module
U354EN.DOC
4.8
Use SheetMaster with part sensors
Part sensors are special suction cups with vacuum monitoring in

the suction plate of the SheetMaster.
Eight suction cup groups each contain one of these part sensors.
ToPs displays part sensors in magenta after setting the SheetMaster.
If the suction cup groups are used for unloading, at least one part
sensor must be on the part. If this is not the case, the machine will
remain idle.
Prerequisite
SheetMaster 1305 from 02/99.
SheetMaster 1605 from 02/99.
1. Select Technology module >Processing >Manual >Lift >Set.

The SheetMaster drawing appears. Part sensors are drawn
shaded.
2. Click on processing.
The SheetMaster is set. Part sensors are displayed in magenta.
3. If the suction cup group with part sensors are not on the part:
Deactivate suction cup group or reposition the SheetMaster.
U354EN.DOC
Technology module
53
4.9
Changing suction cup selection
Active suction cups for the removal of parts with TRUMALIFT can
be subsequently changed.
1. Select Technology module >Processing >Manual >Lift.

2. Under "Suction cup selection", select Modify.
3. Click on lift removal.
The TRUMALIFT drawing appears. Active suction cups are
marked with red.
4. Click on the desired suction cup to change the selection.
or
Enter the suction cup number.
Select OK.
The modified suction cup selection is saved.
or
Select Cancel.
All modifications will be discarded.
54
Technology module
U354EN.DOC
4.10 Generating repositions

Repositioning is necessary with sheets that are larger than the
machine's working range or with processing plans that are in the
clamp dead range.
When repositioning, processing plans of different clamping
operations to the sheet are assigned. The clamping operation that
a processing plan is in depends on the parameters that were
selected for the repositioning procedure.
Fig. 31311
U354EN.DOC
Technology module
55
Automatic repositioning
1. Select Technology module >Processing >Sheet.
2. Under "Reposition", select Parameters.
3. Select "Rearrange processings" "Automatically".
4. If options are marked in "Confirm interactively": unmark the
options.
5. Select Start.
The repositioning is automatically performed.
6. If the automatic repositioning is finished: Under "Clamping",
switch between the generated clamping operations with
Previous and Next.
Note
If the automatically generated suggestion does not correspond
to the requests, the procedure can be canceled and interactively repositioned.
Repositioning with interactive confirmation

1. Select Technology module >Processing >Sheet.
2. Under "Reposition", select Parameters.
3. Select the desired options in the mask.
4. Under "Confirm interactively", mark options.
5. Select Start.
6. Confirm suggested repositioning path with OK.
or
Click new reposition and confirm with OK.
or
56
Technology module
Enter new reposition and confirm with OK.
U354EN.DOC
7. Confirm suggested clamping position for the repositioning

device with OK.
or
Click new clamping position for the repositioning device

and confirm with OK.
or
Enter new clamping position for the repositioning device

and confirm with OK.
8. Click on repositioning device.

or
Select All for three point clamping.
4.11 Stop simulation after tool change

The simulation of the processing can be set in such a way that it is
automatically stopped during a tool change.
1. Select Technology
>Simulation.
module
>Optimization
>Automatic
2. Check "Halt nach Wzg.Wechsel" ("Stop after tool change").

The simulation of the processing stops after the tool change.
3. Select Continue.
The simulation continues to run until the next tool change.
U354EN.DOC
Technology module
57
4.12 Palletizing for all sheets

Palletizing for all sheets means that several sheets can be
successively palletized. Nesting jobs but also sheets can be
palletized in any order.
What is important is that the order in which the sheets were
palletized is strictly adhered to during the execution on the
machine.
Another order can cause a collision of the lift with previous stacks.
So that the order of the NC programs is adhered to on the
machine, a production plan can be generated after creating the last
NC program.
Note
A production plan can only be created for machines with output as
table. Control versions: SINUMERIK 840D and Bosch Type 3.
For all other machines, a log containing the information about the
program order can be created and printed in the production plan
menu.
Individual NC programs within a palletizing for all sheets may not
be subsequently modified.
Types of palletizing
Discard everything
Stacks of the loaded sheet are exclusively formed on empty
pallets. Existing stacks of previous sheets are deleted in this way.
Adding to pallet
Stacks of loaded sheets are added to the stacks of previously
palletized sheets.
The unloading area configuration cannot be modified when using
this type of palletizing.
58
Technology module
U354EN.DOC
Discard current sheet

The original stacks of the loaded sheet are reestablished, when the
stacks e. g. were displaced or connected after the first palletizing.
Configuring the type of palletizing

Prerequisite
An unloading area and a lift were configured in the Data

module.
1. Select Technology module >NC program >Palletizing.

2. Under "Creation of stacks" Hinzupalettieren (Add to pallet) or
Alles verwerfen (Discard everything) or Akt. Tafel verwerfen
(Discard current sheet).
Stack interactions
The stack interactions Move, Merge, Stack, Eliminate have the
following effects:
Stacks of the currently loaded sheet can be moved and

merged as usual.
Stacks of previous sheets (shown in blue) can not be moved.
With mixed stacks, only the parts of the currently loaded sheet
can be moved or merged.
Moving a mixed stack leads to the separation of the stack.

The parts of the stack of the previous sheet stay in the
original position.
The parts of the stack of the currently loaded sheet can be

placed again with a mouse click.
The same behavior results when merging mixed stacks.
U354EN.DOC
Technology module
59
Configuring strategies for stack growth

There are two strategies for stack growth with automatic
palletizing:
Filling one after the other means that a stack must be completely
full before the next stack is started.
Filling evenly means that every part is palletized on another stack
until all stacks are evenly filled.
1. Select Technology module >Palletizing >Start >Continue

>Strategy.
2. Under "Stack growth", select "Successive filling" or "Uniform
filling".
3. Select OK.
The palletizing graphic will be displayed.
Graphic display of the formed stack

Color
Stack properties
Contour
yellow
Stacks of the loaded sheet.
Stack text
yellow
Example:
Previous sheet specifications
Status: can be filled.

green
green
Stacks of the loaded sheet.

Status: full.
blue
blue
Stack of a previous sheet.

Status: full or can be filled.
blue
yellow
Mixed stack of parts of the previous sheet

and parts that have been added to the
pallet of the loaded sheet.
Status: can be filled.
blue
green
Curr. number: 20\10 means:
Part count in the stack: 20.

Of which parts of the previous sheets:
10.
Mixed stack of parts of the previous sheet

and parts that have been added to the
pallet of the loaded sheet.
Status: full.
Tab. 5
60
Technology module
U354EN.DOC
Palletizing several identical sheets

For several identical sheets, ToPs calculates a palletizing layout
that leads to a uniform NC program for all sheets.
This means that the generated NC program can be executed on
the machine one after another x-times, corresponding to the
desired repetition for the sheets.
Note
The maximum number of parts in a stack may not be smaller than
the number of sheets. If the maximum number of part is smaller,
ToPs automatically increases the maximum number of parts in the
stack.

2. Enter the stacked goods data and select Continue.
3. Select "Strategy".
4. Enter "Number of identical sheets".
5. Select OK.
Palletizing a sheet differently many times

A sheet is to be processed many times and each sheet is to be
palletized differently.
1. Select Technology module >NC program >Palletizing.

2. Under "Creation of stack", select Hinzupalettieren (Add to pallet).
3. Select Start.
4. Enter the stacked goods data and select Continue.
5. Select "Strategy".
U354EN.DOC
Technology module
61
6. For "Number of identical", enter 1.

7. Select OK.
8. To add the same sheet again to the pallet: Select Start.
Different palletizings and NC programs are created for individual
sheets. This means that after every palletizing procedure the NC
program must be created for this sheet and, if desired, the tmt file
must be saved.
Palletizing nesting jobs

1. Select Technology module >File >Nesting job >Load job.
2. Process the first sheet of the nesting job.
3. Select NC program >Palletizing.
Alles verwerfen (Discard everything).
5. Select Start.
The first sheet of the job will be palletized. The number of repetitions of the sheet is automatically set by ToPs corresponding
to the nesting job.
6. Select NC program >Generate >Start.
The NC program is generated for the first or the same sheets.
7. Select File >Nesting job >Load next sheet.
8. Process sheet of the nesting job.
11. Select Start.
12. Load, process and palletize other sheets of the nesting job.
62
Technology module
U354EN.DOC
13. When the last sheet has been palletized: Create a production
plan for machines with control versions SINUMERIK 840D and
Bosch Type 3.
Select NC program >Production plan >Start.

All NC programs of the nesting job are interlinked to a
program.
or
When the last sheet has been palletized: Create a production plan for all other machines.
Select NC program >Production plan >Start.
Select Preview.
A log that contains information about the program
sequence is created and displayed.
Note
If the palletizing is to be continued on empty pallets while
palletizing several sheets, because e. g. the pallets have
become full when palletizing previous pallets, then, as a next
step, continue to palletize using the palletizing mode "Discard
everything".
If the production plan is created after the sheet and then the
production plan is processed on the machine, the unloading
pallet must be emptied, in the case that the active single NC
program was palletized in the "Discard everything" mode.
The machine operator can find this information in the setup
plan of the NC program.
U354EN.DOC
Technology module
63
Palletizing any sheet sequences

Sheets can be palletized in any sequence. So that the order of the
NC programs is adhered to, a production plan can be generated
after creating the last NC program.
1. Select Technology module, load and process sheet.

4. Select Start.
5. Select NC program >Generate >Start.
"Generate NC program" will be opened.
6. If an NC program is to be included in the program list of the
production plan: Select "Settings" and check "Production plan".
7. Select File >Save all.
The file manager is opened.
8. The file is save in *.tmt format.
9. Select OK.
The tmt file will be saved.
10. Load next sheet and repeat steps 2-9.
64
Technology module
U354EN.DOC
11. When the last sheet has been palletized: Create a production
plan for machines with control versions SINUMERIK 840D and
Bosch Type 3.
Select NC program >Production plan >Start >Aus

Programmliste (From program list).
All NC programs from the program list are interlinked to a
program.
or
When the last sheet has been palletized: Create a

production plan for all other machines.
Select NC program >Production plan >Start >Aus

Programmliste (From program list).
Select Preview.
A log that contains information about the program
sequence is created and displayed.
Note
If the palletizing is to be continued on empty pallets while
palletizing several sheets, because e. g. the pallets have
become full when palletizing previous pallets, then, as a next
step, continue to palletize using the palletizing mode "Discard
everything".
If the production plan is created after the sheet and then the
production plan is processed on the machine, the unloading
pallet must be emptied, in the case that the active single NC
program was palletized in the "Discard everything" mode.
The machine operator can find this information in the setup
plan of the NC program.
U354EN.DOC
Technology module
65
Saving total palletizing

When saving the sheet:
the stacks of the currently loaded sheet and the stack of the
previous sheets (blue stack) are saved in the tmt file.
the list of NC programs of the previous sheets is saved from

the NC generation mask.
1. Load the tmt file.

The displayed palletizing graphic contains all stacks (total
palletizing).
Saving total palletizing
3. Under "Gesamtpalettierung" ("Total palletizing"), select Accept.

All previously existing stacks of previous sheets are deleted.
Instead, all stacks of the currently loaded sheet are saved. The
list of NC programs of the previous sheet is saved from the tmt
file in the NC generation mask. By doing this, earlier palletizing
conditions can be reestablished.
or
Select the palletizing type

"Alles verwerfen"
("Discard everything")
Under "Creation of stacks", select Alles verwerfen (Discard

everything).
The parts of the currently loaded sheet are palletized again. All
existing previous stacks (blue) are deleted. The list of the NC
programs is not modified.
or
Select the palletizing type

"Hinzupalettieren"
("Add to pallet")
66
Technology module
Under "Creation of stacks", select Hinzupalettieren (Add to

pallet).
Parts of the currently loaded sheet are added to the pallet of
the previously existing stack. Previous stacks are deleted from
the tmt file. The list of the NC programs is not modified.
U354EN.DOC
Displaying the palletizing graphic

in setup plan
"Generate NC program" will be displayed.
2. Select "Setup plan".
3. Check "Palettierungsgrafik" ("Palletizing graphic").
The palletizing graphic is displayed in the setup plan
(html and pdf format).
4.13 Setting options for the setup plan

The path, file format and with which contents of the setup plan is to
be issued can be individually fixed in the Technology module.
Options for outputting the setup plan
U354EN.DOC
Fig. 30410
Technology module
67
Setting up the Path for setup

plan

2. Select "Settings".
3. Check "Path for setup plan".
The path under which the setup plan is saved can be modified.
Setting format and options
4. Select "Setup plan".

5. Check file format or file formats in which the setup plan is to be
output.
6. Under "Output of setup plan by means of", check desired
options.
Note
In the text-based setup plan (file format: *.ein), not all options
are available.
68
Technology module
U354EN.DOC
5.
Data module
5.1
Configuring machines
The machine configuration

considerably simplified.
was
completely
revised
and
Based on the entry mask "What do you want to adjust?",

the sequence masks guide you through the machine adjustments.
All default values for machines and components have already been
set. You will only have to adjust individual values in exceptional
cases.
Fig. 31212
Modifications to the masks are automatically saved as soon as you

exit with "Continue" or "Exit".
U354EN.DOC
Data module
69
5.2
Importing special lifts
Lifts that deviate from the standard configuration for suction cup
layout are special lifts. In this case, you will receive a diskette with
the lift data.
For the lift to be available in ToPs, the data must be read in from
the diskette.
Note
The lift data on the diskette must match the ToPs version being
used. Diskettes of earlier ToPs versions will be refused.
1. Select Data module.

2. Under "What do you want to adjust?"
check "Automation components".
3. Select Continue.
4. Under "Add lifts",
select Selection.
5. Select Import.
6. Select drive A:\ in the file manager.
7. Change to A:\ in the directory where the files are.
8. Select OK.
The lift is included in the list "Selection of Lift" You can
recognize it by the version designation (e.g. SMXXXX VXXX90
or VXXX99).
A file in the format *.log will be displayed.
9. Close the file and in the "Selection of Lift" mask, select Cancel
in ToPs.
10. Under "Configure lifts", select "Loading unit" "Lift".
11. Select Import Lift from the list.
12. Select OK.
The lift is entered under "Configure lifts".
70
Data module
U354EN.DOC
5.3
Adjusting clamp data
1. Select Data module.

2. Under "What do you want to adjust?", check "Adjust clamping
data".
3. Select Continue.
4. Adjust the clamp data according to the individual machine
configuration.
5. If the slot numbers (positions) of the clamps have been
changed: select Aktualisieren (Update).
The clamp display will be updated.
6. Select Return or Terminate.
The modified data are saved.
U354EN.DOC
Data module
71
5.5
Rules without password protection
In addition to the TRUMPF-internal, password protected rules,

there are public rules "Machine" and "System".
Variables are displayed in a list field in Rules.
The number of displayed variables depends on the machine
selected.
Note
TRUMPF defaults.
Settings that are carried out in freely accessible rules after this first
update are kept in all further updates.
Comment text:
The comment text contains information on how the value of a
variable is structured.
The value corresponds to the coding of a variable. After ToPs is
installed, the default values are displayed. To make your individual
settings effective, the value must be modified.
Changing a value
for one variable
1. Select Data module >Rules >Machine.

or
Select Data module >Rules >System.

This value is read into the entry field.
3
Only the value is to be modified.
4. Select Modify.
72
Data module
U354EN.DOC
Creating variable

or
2. Select Create.
The list of variables is displayed.
3. Select variable.
4. Enter "value".
5. Select Create.
The variable is taken up in the display field.
Delete variable

or

5. Select Delete.
The variable is deleted from the display field.
U354EN.DOC
Data module
73
Machine rules
Renamed variables (from ToPs 300 V3.21 to ToPs 300 V3.30)
No. Variable
Comment text
AlphaNumPrgNo
Name in V 3.21 Opt AlphaNumPrgNo
1 = activate alphanumerical program numbers; 0 = only program

numbers
AptWzwMagPlatzAusDB
Name in V 3.21 OptAptWzwMagPlatzAusDB
1 = issue magazine positions of the tools; 0 = consecutive

magazine positions
New variables
No. Variable
Comment text
DefaultSheetType
Type of tool change (0 = normal; 2 = uneven; 1 = formed sheet

(max.))
EpZeitAusgabeFormat
Issuing format of the machine time in the setup plan and the
production plan overview. 1 = decimal, 2 = h:m:s, 3 = both
FreifahrwegDrehBiegeWzg
The rotate/bend tool requires a free path to stroke
NC_Titel
Storage for the NC title
PRP_PfadModal
Standard directory for production plans
PunchDefaultOverlapping
Overlapping per tool type ... (separated by ;)
SHEET_TECH_Satzweise
Output of the SHEET_TECH with each tool change
SpaceToGrippos
X-distance to the grip before the initial speed of the SheetUnload-Position

Tab. 6
Descriptionof new variables

No. 1: DefaultSheetType
The tool change is performed differently according to the desired
setting.
Value = 0:
Value = 1:
Data module
Formed sheet: Safest variation
Value = 2:
74
Normal
Uneven
U354EN.DOC
No. 2: EpZeitAusgabeFormat
Using this variable you can determine the format used to display
the machine time in the setup plan/production plan overview.
1=decimal, 2=h:m:s, 3=both
Value = 1:
Decimal
Value = 2:
h:m:s
Value = 3:
Decimal and in h:m:s
No. 3: FreifahrwegDrehBiegeWzg
The idle path is specified in mm, how far the tool must be
advanced from the press brake bending, before the punching head
reaches its overshoot height.
No. 4: NC_Titel
When this variable is created, the NC title entered when creating
the NC text remains until a new one is entered.
No. 5: PRP_PfadModal
If ToPs is always to save the production plan file (master file of the
NC text) in a certain (different from the transfer path) directory in
the Technology module, this directory must be saved in the
variable RPR_PfadModal.
The entered value is then the presetting that can be overwritten by
specifying in the production plan dialog. If the value of the variable
is empty, then the transfer directory of the machine is used.
U354EN.DOC
Data module
75
No. 6: PunchDefaultOverlapping
With this variable, every semicolon stands for a Tool type in an
ascending numerical sequence.
If e. g. the overlap of the stroke is to be modified during the feed for
the Tool type 3, a value e. g. 1.5 must be entered before the third
semicolon.
The value changes the default setting of the overlap value for the
feed in the "Default" menu. For tool types, that have not entered a
value in this variable, the value is used from Data module
>Machine >Data >Basic machine >Data 5.
During the automatic processing, the nibbling paths are created
with the overlap value defined here. If none is entered, the value is
used from the "Default" menu.
No. 7: SHEET_TECH_Default
With the machines TC 2000 R and TC 600 L, the NC text is not
interpreted when reentering on the machine. This has the consequence that an erroneous working position could occur when
reentering. For this reason, a Sheettech-table can be issued before
each tool change, which would make sure that the correct working
position is set.
Output of the SHEET_TECH before each tool change?
Value 0 = No
Value 1 = Yes
No. 8: SpaceToGrippos
Note
This variable may not be modified.
76
Data module
U354EN.DOC
Rules system
The variables in rules system affects all machines and the
complete ToPs.
The variables for tapping tools are also saved along with the
others. The advantage is that the individually modified tool
ID numbers remain after the installation of a new ToPs version.
New variables
No. Variable
Comment text
Gewindeformer...
ID number of each tapping tool
GewindeDurchzug...
ID number of the extrusion tool for each thread
GewindeformdatenCheck
Check mode for the thread form data (1 = everything with

messages 2 = everything without messages)
MFN_PickEinzigenMfn
Pick also with single versatility (0/1 - no/yes)
MultiShearTrennUeberlappung
Overlapping when separating nibbling paths
NcLinkLogType
Issuing format production plan overview (0 = standard, 1 = TXT,

2 = HTML, 3 = XML)
Nibbeln_GrafikErzeugung
1 : Display of the enveloping (new) - 0 : simplified (old) graphic

display of the enveloping
pa_nc_zeit_pkt_abda
Service life punctiform Vaporization
Palettierung_KonfigTextAusgabe
Output of the configuration text in the palletizing graphic 0 = no

1 = yes
10
Sc_KennzNotBearbGeo
Evaluation of the laser rules info for geometries that cannot be

processed
11
Sc_Krit_Geo
Evaluation of the geometry color and type
12
SingleHole_OutContour
Function "Single hole with geometry" on exterior contour possible

(0/1 - no/yes)
13
TcSheetBitmapHeight
Size (pixel) of SheetBitmap in Y (for HTML setup sheet)
14
TcSheetBitmapMonochrome
SheetBitmap (for HTML setup sheet) is monochrome [0 / 1]
15
TcSheetBitmapWidth
Size (Pixel) of SheetBitmap in X (for HTML setup sheet)
16
TVActiveModus
0 = part management deactivated;1 = TV without cache; 2 = TV

with cache (use only with single position)
17
TVWarningMode
0 = no warnings; 1 = load; 2 = save (3 = both)
U354EN.DOC
Data module
77
Description of new variables

No. 1: Gewindeformer...
If the value (ID number) of the tool is deleted, the warning is no
longer issued in the Technology module. The tool is no longer
checked.
No. 2: GewindeDurchzug...
If the value (ID number) of the tool is deleted, the warning is no
longer issued in the Technology module. The tool is no longer
checked.
No. 3: GewindeformdatenCheck
When selecting a machine (the option "Gewindeformer" must be
set), it will be checked if the tools with the ID number of the
variables "Gewindeformer..." and "GewindeDurchzug..." are
available in the database.
At the same it is checked if all pre-punching tools for the thread
former are available in the database.
Value = 1:
If the tool is not available, an error message is

issued.
Value = 2:
If the tool is not available, no error message is

issued. However, the error is not remedied by this.
No. 4: MFN_PickEinzigenMfn
How is ToPs to behave with actions that refer to a single existing
versatility?
Value = 0:
Default setting. The versatility does not have to be

clicked for the action (previous behavior).
Value = 1:
The versatility must be clicked for the action.
No. 5: MultiShearTrennUeberlappung
For the Multishear tool, the overlapping value of the last stroke can
be entered in millimeters or inches for separating tools.
78
Data module
U354EN.DOC
No. 6: NcLinkLogType
The file format of the production plan is determined about the
values of the variable "NcLinkLogType".
Value = 0:
If the Internet Explorer version 5.0 is installed,

the production plan is issued in the file format
*.xml, otherwise in the file format *.txt.
Value = 1:
The production plan is issued in the file format *.txt.
Value = 2:
The production plan is issued in the file format

*.html. For this, MSXML must be installed.
The value corresponds to the default setting.
Value = 3:
The production plan is issued in the file format

*.xml. The browser being used must support XML
(e. g. Internet-Explorer > = 5.0).
No. 7: Nibbeln_GrafikErzeugung
Graphic creation can be configured using this variable.
Value = 0:
Default setting. Simple calculation of the nibbling

track. Display as lines or arcs.
Value = 1:
Exact calculation of the nibbling track. Display of

the contour around the actual single stoke
(enveloping).
No. 8: pa_nc_zeit_pkt_abda
Operating time of the laser in seconds for dot-shaped vaporizing.
No. 9: Palettierung_KonfigTextAusgabe
In the setup plan, the name of the unloading area configuration is
displayed in the palletizing graphic.
Value = 0:
Value = 1
U354EN.DOC
No
Yes
Data module
79
No. 10: Sc_KennzNotBearbGeo

The evaluation of the setting of the contours that cannot be
processed, that stand for laser rules under "General 2" in the Data
module, is controlled using this variable.
Value = 0:
No. The settings are not evaluated.
Value = 1
Yes. Default setting. The settings are evaluated.
No. 11: Sc_Krit_Geo

ToPs interprets the following colors and automatically sets the
processing:
Cyan-colored points are point marked.
Yellow lines are marked.

Is the color information to be evaluated with the laser machining?
Value = 0:
No.
Value = 1
Yes. Default setting.
No. 12: SingleHole_OutContour

In the default setting of ToPs, the function "Generate machining
with geometry model" is not possible on exterior contours. If this is
nevertheless desired, the function can be activated using the
variable.
Value = 0
No: Default setting.
Value = 1
Yes.
No. 13: TcSheetBitmapHeight

Height of the sheet layout graphic in pixels in the html setup plan.
80
Data module
U354EN.DOC
No. 14: TcSheetBitmapMonochrome

Are the sheet layout graphics to be issued in black/white or in color
in the html setup plan.
Value = 0:
color.
Value = 1:
black/white.
No. 15: TcSheetBitmapWidth

Width of the sheet layout graphic in pixels in the html setup plan.
No. 16: TVActiveModus
In the setting "0", this variable completely switches off the part
management.
This means that neither warnings are shown nor are any files
recorded in the part management. The tab "Part management" in
the ToPs file manager is deactivated.
Value = 0:
Part management is not active.
Value = 1:
When using a network database.
Value = 2:
Only for single workplace computers.
No. 17: TVWarningMode

This variable changes the behavior of how warning messages are
issued. The part management remains active, independent how
the variable is set.
Value = 0:
Value = 1:
When loading files, warning are issued, if necessary.
Value = 2:
When saving files, warning are issued, if necessary.
Value = 3:
U354EN.DOC
Default setting: Warnings are not issued.
When loading and saving files, warning are issued,

if necessary.
Data module
81
5.6
User settings
Focusing the mouse pointer in masks

automatically on OK
1. Select Data module >User >Configuration.
2. Select "Focus pointer on OK button".
ToPs automatically focuses the pointer in all masks on the OK
button.
Setting key functions

The Windows key behavior is set at the initial installation and when
ToPs is updated.
Key
Configuration
Previously: ToPs key function
New: Windows key function
<>
Confirm mask;
corresponds to: Press OK.
<>, <>;
Delete input field
<SHIFT>+<Backspace> Delete input field
Delete input field
Jump to next input box.
<SHIFT>+
Jump to previous input box
<Esc>
Delete input field
Close mask;
corresponds to: Cancel printing
Tab. 7
1. Select Data module >User >Configuration.

2. Select "Set Windows key functions" or "Set ToPs key functions".
3. Select Modify.
The set key function is saved.
82
Data module
U354EN.DOC
Using Microsoft Word as an html editor

1. Select Data module >User >Program.
2. Click on HTML_EDITOR in the menu.
Under "Program", the line
$(HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\HTMLFILE\SHELL\OPEN\COMM
AND\) is displayed.
3. If Microsoft Word 97 or Microsoft Word 2000 is being used:
Change line to
$(HKEY_CLASSES_ROOT\Word.Document.8\Shell\Open\Co
mmand\).
4. Select Modify.
The change is saved. Microsoft Word is now available as the html
Editor.
U354EN.DOC
Data module
83
6.
Info module
6.1
Importing file into the ToPs database
Files can be directly imported into the ToPs database, without

having to give a command in the DOS command line.
Prerequisite
The suffix must correspond to the current database version.

Example: *.V41.
The suffix must begin with an "i" in an inch database.

Example: *.i41
The ToPs product number must be in the directory path.

Example: A:\tops300\lifte\sauger.V41.
1. Select Info module >Management >Import.

2. Select Database file.
3. Select OK.
The database file is imported.
84
Info module
U354EN.DOC
6.2
Saving the ToPs database
ToPs offers the possibility to save the database files either directly
onto the hard drive or on a corresponding number of floppy disks.
When saving, the data are compressed and a file name is
automatically generated.
Example for the structure of the file name:
200201211601330B381T300_V41.j
Points
In the example
Explanation
1-4
2002
Four-digit year
5-6
01
Two-digit year
7-8
21
Two-digit day
9-12
1601
Time in hh:mm
13-15
330
Product version
16
17-19
381
Build number of the product
20
21-23
300
Product number
24
25
26-27
41
Database version
28
29
j
Tab. 8
Saving and compressing

the database
1. Select Info module >Management >Save.

2. Select the directory in which the database is to be saved.
3. Select OK.
The database files are compressed and saved in the desired
directory. Saving takes a few minutes. The file name is automatically generated and displayed with the backup directory.
4. Note the path of the backup directory and the file name.
U354EN.DOC
Info module
85
Decompressing the database
1. Open DOS prompt (DOS box).

2. Go to the backup directory.
3. Enter the command jar32.exe e before the file name.
For the above example:
jar32.exe e 200201211601330B381T300_V41.j
4. Press <Enter>.
The database will be decompressed.
6.3
Changing language
1. Select "Language".
ToPs shows the Language index card:
Languages available in ToPs 100
Fig. 19562
2. Click on the desired language.

For kanji
3. To be able to start ToPs in kanji on computers which do not

have an operating system configured for kanji, check
"Ansi/OEM character conversion" (active is the default setting).
4. Select OK.
ToPs changes the language.
86
Info module
U354EN.DOC
7.
Improvementsaffecting all modules
7.1
A characteristic is a property that has one or more elements or one

or more contours.
Characteristics are created in the Drawing module, saved in the
geo file and recognized and evaluated in the Technology module
during automatic machining.
Advantages:
Highlight characteristics
U354EN.DOC
The row of holes and hole grid machining can be used easily:
Row of holes, that are created in the Drawing module using
"Macro", "Row of holes", can be evaluated as such in the
Technology module. The conversion to row of holes is not
necessary. In this way, it is also possible to create non-axially
parallel row of holes.
The NC program is shorter.
In the Drawing module, geometries that have the feature
Properties are interpreted as one unit. All actions are used on
the entire unit, which considerably reduced the amount of
drawing.
Features can be highlighted in orange using the "Highlight

characteristics " symbol.
87
Characteristics in the Drawing module

The following functions generate characteristics in the Drawing
module:
Create 2
Notches
Macros
Single hole
Row of holes
Circle of holes
Parameter: Circle/Ellipse, Rectangle, Oblong hole, Model,

Tool.
Modify 2
Marking: Set, Remove
Feature properties
Characteristics in the Drawing module
88
Fig. 30415
U354EN.DOC
Characteristic fixed
Certain elements are joined up to form a group with the

Characteristics property. In the setting "Characteristic fixed" a
certain action is either used for the complete group, i. e. for all
elements or the action is refused.
For example an individual element of the "Single hole square"
group can not be deleted. The complete single hole will be deleted
if it is changed.
Illegal actions
All illegal actions cause the contour or the element to be displayed
in pink. The colored highlighting remains until the next new
drawing.
Examples:
A single stroke cannot be stretched. The single stroke will be
displayed in pink.
Shortening elements is not possible with single stokes. The elements
will be displayed in pink.
Selecting and boxing in
Selecting an element causes the complete group (all elements) to
be selected.
When boxing in an element, an action will only be carried out if the
complete group was boxed in.
Characteristic free
U354EN.DOC
Elements of contours with the Characteristic property can be

modified in any way. For example, an individual element of the
single hole squared can be deleted. The Characteristic property
disappears during modification. The display color changes from
orange to white.
89
Example for the "Delete" action

Example
Characteristic
Delete
fixed
Element
free
Single hole squared X
Contour
The single hole is deleted.

X
X
Row of holes
squared
Effect
An element of the single hole is deleted.

The display color changes from orange to white.
The characteristic is canceled.
X

The entire row of holes is deleted.
The selected contour of the row of holes is displayed

in pink. If you click on the Drawing symbol, the original
state is reconstituted. The row of holes remains
unmodified.
The selected element of the contour is deleted.
The display color changes from orange to white.
The Row of holes feature is deleted. The remaining
contours keep the Single hole feature.
The selected contour is deleted.

For the rest of the contours of the row of holes,
the Characteristic property remains.
The Row of holes characteristic is deleted.
The remaining contours keep the Single hole feature.
Tab. 9
Extended properties of notches

Besides the possibilities that the "Characteristic" property entail
with notches, there are further functions:
Curves, bevels, undercuts or Concave notches can be

removed from a notch. ToPs automatically connects adjacent
notch elements.
If a notch is completely deleted, adjacent elements are

connected to each other again.
Notches can be copied, repositioned, rotated, mirrored and

stretched.
90
Notches can be extended to curves, bevels or Concave

notches.
The length of notch end elements can be modified.
U354EN.DOC
Characteristics in the Technology module

The characteristics must be activated for automatic punching and
laser machining.
Evaluation of characteristics
in punching and laser machining
Fig. 30416, Fig. 30417
Punching Engraving
If the "Active tool" option is selected, the processing "Engraving" is
ignored when the active tool is not an engraving tool.
If the processing "Engraving" is not selected, the geometries to be
engraved will also not be processed by the conventional automatic
machining.
Note
For "Engraving" to possible at all, the machine in the Data module
has to be configured for it.
U354EN.DOC
91
Punching: Single hole, hole macro

"Hole macro" contains the characteristics that were selected in the
Drawing module under Macro.
"Hole macro" can only be activated when the "Single hole" option
is checked.
If, in the Drawing module, the characteristic Macro was selected in
reference to the tool, the tool being used must also be available in
the tool list in the Technology module and must be able to be
activated.
If the tool does not appear in the list or cannot be activated in the
Technology module, the geometries will not be processed. In the
summary, ToPs issues the ID numbers of the characteristic tools
that cannot be activated.
If the "Hole macro" is not activated, the conventional automatic
processing starts.
Example:
An embossing punch from a 12-station Multitool is to be used.
Automatic machining does not generate processing when the
"Hole macro" is selected if the machine does not support a 12station Multitool.
Laser processing: Marking and point marking

The characteristic "Marking" can be assigned to a geometry in the
Drawing module (Modify 2 >Marking >Set).
ToPs automatically selected colors for characteristics, i. e. lines are
displayed in yellow, points in cyan. ToPs evaluates the various
color information during the automatic processing in the Technology module.
Yellow lines are marked, cyan-colored points are punched.
Characteristics have the special property that they can also be
properly processed independent of the color.
This means: The colors yellow or cyan can also be modified to
other colors without losing the "Characteristic" property.
92
U354EN.DOC
7.2
Production plan
Several successively generated NC programs can be summarized

in a production plan in the order of their creation.
If the NC programs are to be interlinked to a production plan in any
order, use the program NcLink after installing ToPs.
Independent of the machine and the automation, a corresponding
Production plan type is applied. Each type takes another individual
machine constellation into account.
So that ToPs can work with the correct type, this must first be
determined at the machine.
Determining Production plan types

In ToPs, the correct Production plan type must be selected in the
Data module.
After ToPs has been installed, there is a program with which the
correct Production plan type can be easily determined at the
machine.
Prerequisite
Determining the Production

plan type at the machine
ToPs was successfully installed.

The installation CD is in the CD drive.
1. Open the folder

'LW:\support_tools_intern\production_plan_type\V1.00'.
LW means: Letter of the CD drive.
2. Press <Strg> + <A>.
All files in this folder are marked.
3. Press <Strg> + <C>.
All files in this folder are copied.
U354EN.DOC
93
4. Go to the diskette directory.

5. Press <Strg> + <V>.
The copied files are added to the diskette directory.
6. Insert the diskette with the added file into the drive on the
machine's control panel.
7. On the user interface, select Activity
Maintenance/Start-up >Load software >Software update ToPs
(1, 5, 3, F8, F2).
8. The Production plan type will be displayed.
9. Note the Production plan type.
10. Remove the diskette.
Selecting the Production plan
type in ToPs
11. Select Data module in ToPs.

12. Under "What do you want to adjust?", check "Production plan
output".
13. Select Continue.
14. Under "Production plan type", select the determined type.
15. If the single parts of a production plan which was created using
a nesting job are to be booked in TC CELL/Cell-Controller with
job number (corresponding to "Customer" in the Nesting
module): Click on Issue "Job information output".
16. Select Terminate.
Creating a production plan

Prerequisite
The production plan type was determined and selected in the

Data module (see Section 7, p. 93).
NC programs that are to be interlinked to the production plan

must have different file names and main program names.
1. Select Technology module >NC program >Generate >Start

>Settings.
2. If the generated NC program is to be used to generate a
production plan: Check Production plan.
3. Select Technology module >NC program >Prod.plan >Start.
94
U354EN.DOC
4. Select "Aus Programmliste" ("From progam list").

The NC programs are displayed.
or
Select "Aus Schachtelauftrag" ("From nesting job").
The NC programs of the selected nesting job are displayed.
5. Enter the Production plan's file name.
6. Enter the Production plan's path.
7. Select Preview.
In the preview, no Production plan is created, rather only the
overview is shown. Since the output directory for the production plan is normally the transfer directory, the production plan
can be created without creating an lst-Datei or even being sent
to the machine.
Note
For machines without Sinumerik or Bosch control systems,
there is only "Preview", since the machines do not recognize
production plans.
8. Select OK.
The production plan will be generated.
U354EN.DOC
95
7.3
Timeliness of files
Having files monitored by ToPs during

loading and saving
ToPs checks the timeliness of files in the database using the date
and time.
New test functions enable the warning message to be issued for
the following actions:
Saving files that are based on other files: e.g. modifications of

a geo file with effects on tmt-, lst-files.
Loading older files: e.g. tmt-file with an old geo file.
No warning messages are issued in the ToPs default setting. The

warning message can be activated using the "TVWarningMode"
variable in the process rule "System" (see Section 5.5, p. 81).
ToPs Installation variation 1:

Prerequisite
96
Standard ToPs installation on a single workplace.

If the timeliness of files is to be monitored: Set the
"TVWarningMode" variableto 3 in the process rule "System"
U354EN.DOC

In this installation variation, the database information is not
mutually available. This means that ToPs does not register the
modification of other ToPs users.
Example:
User A generates a file sample.tmt using the holder.geo file. User
B modifies the holder.geo file.
Since no mutual database is being used, the ToPs installed at User
A does not register the modification in the holder.geo file.
If User A wants to be informed about old files, User A has to
compare the database contents beforehand.
Prerequisite
Standard ToPs installation on a several workplaces.
Every workplace has a local ToPs database.
All workplaces use a common network drive.
Activating monitoring
1. If the timeliness of files is to be monitored:
Set the "TVWarningMode" variableto 3 in the process rule

"System" (see Section 5.5, p. 81).
Delete the variable "MBO_TV_MultiUserWarnung" in the

process rule "System" (see Section 5.5, p. 72).
Synchronizing the database

contents
2. Select Technology module >File >Load >Part management

>Import.
3. Mark all boxes.
4. Under "Directory", enter the commonly used network drive
directory.
5. Select OK.
The contents of the network drive directory will be imported
into the part management of the ToPs workstation. Checking
file that are mutually used functions correctly.
6. Repeat the procedure for each ToPs workstation.
U354EN.DOC
97
Note
When importing, only newly arrived files are updated. This enables
a quicker synchronization.
The following message in ToPs refers to this connection:
Fig. 31415
Updating modified files
1. If modified files are to be updated: Select Technology module

>File >Load >Part management.
2. E. g. select file type *.geo.
3. Select Management.
4. Mark "Update file information".
5. Mark "Update reference list".
6. Select OK.
7. Repeat procedure for the next file type.
Dependencies to files are recognized, if the underlying files are
already located in the part management.
Example:
If all tmt files are first imported into an empty part management
and then all geo files, then no dependence will be found even
when using the "Update reference list" option.
The best procedure is to import all files at the same time. ToPs
will take care of the correct order.
98
U354EN.DOC

Prerequisite
ToPs installation on several workplaces.
The workplaces share a common database on a network drive

(client/server installation).
If the timeliness of files is to be monitored: Set the

"TVWarningMode" variable to 3 in the process rule "System"
Searching outdated files

1. Select File >Load >Part management >Management.
2. Mark "List outdated files".
3. Select OK.
File A which is built on File B will be searched, if File A is more
current than File B.
U354EN.DOC
99
7.4
Using the right mouse button
View panning
By right mouse-clicking on the Pan symbol, navigation arrows are
added to the symbol button. In addition to using the navigation
arrows, the view can also be panned using the keyboard's arrow
keys.
Fig. 30418
7.5
Adjusting the window size
The size of the window can be adjusted to any size by pulling the
window frame with the mouse. This is advantageous e. g. when
you would like to work together with the online documentation or
when your task bar lies over the ToPs command bar.
7.6
Go into the Internet with ToPs
ToPs offers the possibility to directly access the Internet using the
"Question mark" and in this way you will come to the TRUMPF
homepage. On the homepage, you will find tips and tricks for
programming and useful information about the product.
100
U354EN.DOC
8.
8.1
Additionally supported machines

and components
Machine
Control
Automation
Comments
TC 2020 R
FMC compact
BOSCH TYPE 3
Loading/Unloading unit
Valve can be set manually.
TC 5000 R
SINUMERIK 840 D
TRUMAGRIP 5000_1605_4000
TRUMAGRIP for waste grid 4 m
TC 6000 L
SINUMERIK 840 D
All components
Tab. 10
8.2
Supported automation
Automation
Designation in ToPs
Lifting grip
Machine designation in ToPs
SM1000
none
TC120, TC500 Type1
SM1250
available
TC240 / L / N, TC260 / L, TC500
SM1300 / SM1600
none
TC500
SM1306 / SM1606
none
TC600L / TC6000L
SM1305 / SM1605
none
TC500 / TC5000R
TRUMALIFT SB/SE/SC
SB, SE, SC
none
TC260 / L
TRUMAGRIP
Grip260_1250 / _1500
TC260 / L
Grip500_1300 / _1600
TC240, TC260 / L, TC500
Grip500_1306 / _1606
TC600L / TC6000L
Grip500_1305 / _1605
TC5000R
Grip5000_1605
TC5000R Type2 for 4 mtr. Waste grid
TRUMASORT R4
TRUMASORT R4
TC500, TC600L / TC6000L
TRUMASORT RB4
TRUMASORT RB4
TC5000R
TRUMASORT S
TRUMASORT S
TC240 / N / L, TC260 / L, TC500
Storage cart
Deflector
Machines with connection to storage

Deflector 2 containers
TC240L, TC260 / L, TC300 /L / P, TC500
Deflector 4 containers
TC300L, TC300P
Tab. 11
U354EN.DOC
101
8.3
TC-APT interface
The TC-APT interface in ToPs 300 creates the TC-APT code in

place of the NC program.
The advantage is that a proven NC output is used for older
TRUMPF machines.
A complete description can be found in the directory:
'\TRUMPF\ToPs300W\DOKU\APT-Schnittstelle_XXX.pdf'
(XXX = Sprachversion DEU, ENG, FRA).
Additionally supported machines

Machine designation
in ToPs
Control
Comments
TC 180 N
FANUC 6MB
Without rotation,
with standard clamps
TC 260
SINUMERIK 880
Without lifts,
without Multitool
All machines without lifts

Tab. 12
102
U354EN.DOC
Index
A
Actions
Files
Restore any/all (Drawing module)14,

38
Undo any/all (Drawing module) ..14, 38

Adjusting the window size .......................7, 100
Angle of inclination
Text...................................................16
Angle of rotation
Text...................................................16
Monitoring ........................................ 96
Searching outdated.......................... 99
Flap ......................................................... 50, 52
Focusing the mouse pointer in masks on OK82
G
gmt file........................................................... 39
Grain direction
Part................................................... 30
B
Bevel
Create ...............................................14
Delete ...............................................14
H
html editor ..................................................... 83
C
Catch mode ...................................................37
Changing the ToPs language ........................86
Characteristics ...........................................5, 87
Clamp data ....................................................71
Comment text ................................................72
Configuring machines ................................5, 69
Contour ..........................................................41
Creating the font yourself ..............................18
Cut start
Specify ..............................................46
I
Installation guide ........................................... 13
Internet ........................................................ 100
K
Key functions ................................................ 82
D
dat files
Blanks ...............................................27
L
Laser mode
Marking ............................................ 46
Point marking ................................... 46
U354EN.DOC
Index
103
M
Microjoints......................................................47
Modifying sheet format ..................................37
Mouse pointer ................................................82
Reference point position
Text .................................................. 16
Repositioning
Automatic ......................................... 56
Interactively...................................... 56
Row of holes ................................................. 43
Rules
Machine............................................ 74
System ............................................. 77
N
Nesting jobs
Compiling..........................................28
Defining sheet data...........................35
Entering parts ...................................29
Exporting (as *.dat) ...........................21
Format and structure of a job file

(*.dat) ................................................25
Importing...........................................21
Job files (*.dat), importing.................21
Quick display, activating ...................34

Nibbling track .......................................6, 41, 43
O
Overlapping ...................................................41
P
Palletizing
Any sheet sequences .......................64
For all sheets ................................5, 58
Nesting job........................................62
Palletizing graphic .........................................67
Panning the view .....................................6, 100
Positioning
At element.........................................45
At element partially ...........................45

Processing plans
Merging.............................................48
Modifying overlap..............................41
Splitting .............................................48
Production plan..............................................93
R
Redo ..............................................................14
104
Index
S
Setup plan
Options............................................. 67
Palletizing graphic............................ 67
Sheet properties............................................ 40
Sheet thickness............................................. 40
SheetMaster
Part sensors ..................................... 53

Simulation ..................................................... 57
Small parts .................................................... 50
Special lifts.................................................... 70
Stack
Graphic display ................................ 60

Stack growth
Strategy............................................ 60
Stack interactions.......................................... 59
Storage item identification............................. 36
Suction cup selection .................................... 54
Symbol
Catch mode...................................... 37
Observe sheet dimension ................ 38
T
TC-APT ....................................................... 102
Text
Angle of inclination........................... 16
Angle of rotation............................... 16
Creating fonts yourself ..................... 18
Insert in a drawing............................ 16
Modification in drawings................... 17
Modifying parameters ...................... 17
Reference point position .................. 16

Text parameters
Modifying.......................................... 17
ToPs database
Saving .......................................... 7, 85
Total palletizing ............................................. 66
Types of palletizing ....................................... 58
U354EN.DOC
Undo ..............................................................14
Wheel-mouse................................................ 38
V
Variable....................................................74, 77
Description..................................74, 78
U354EN.DOC
Index
105
106
U354EN.DOC

T300 Eng

Загружено:

Сведения о документе

Исходное описание:

Оригинальное название

Авторское право

Доступные форматы

Поделиться этим документом

Поделиться или встроить документ

Параметры публикации

Этот документ был вам полезен?

Это неприемлемый материал?

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

T300 Eng

Загружено:

Авторское право:

Доступные форматы

Online help

Instructions for Acrobat Reader

The "Find" function" corresponds to the binocular in der icon

"Find next" can be activated with the F3 key.

Please state the title of the document, the language required

TRUMPF GmbH + Co.

Before reading any further ...

ToPs 300 is a programming system which has been conceived for

Chapters 1 and 2: Overview of the whole system and its operation.

Further information can be found in the documentation which you

Before reading any further...

Button symbols are represented as capitals and are always in

Functions from the screen menus are highlighted by capitalisation.

Main menu bar

Function buttons are highlighted by capitalisation.

System requirements and entries which the system expects are

Files and directories are written in single quotes.

Variable descriptions and values are shown in brackets.

Reference to input fields and mask titles are indicated by double

ToPs 300 a Technology orientated Programming System, for

Closed process chain, sheet

ToPs is the connecting element between the construction and

Programming is technology orientated and via a unified data

Construction takes manufacturing interests into account.

The entire machine technology is used in manufacturing.

Introduction to ToPs 300

ToPs 300 can run on a PC with a Windows 95 or Windows NT

Introduction to ToPs 300

Machines and components supported

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1000 all automation components

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 200

all automation components

only Bosch M5TC, without: laser, thread,

only Bosch M5TC, without: laser, thread,

only rotation, without: Laser, thread,

only non-rotation, working

Bosch CC 200 (T19)

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 all automation components

Bosch CC 200 (>= T21)

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 all automation components

Bosch CC 200 (< T23)

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 all automation components

Bosch CC 200 (>= T23)

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 all automation components

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 all automation components

Bosch CC 300 (< T23)

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 no lifts B, E, C

Bosch CC 300 (>= T23)

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 no lifts B, E, C

Bosch CC 300 (< T23)

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 no lifts B, E, C

Bosch CC 300 (>= T23)

TRUMALIFT SheetMaster 1250 no lifts B, E, C

all automation components

all automation components

Machines with plasma devices are not supported by ToPs 300.

Introduction to ToPs 300

Brief description of the modules

ToPs has a modular design: The various functional groups of ToPs

Introduction to ToPs 300

Introduction to ToPs 300

interrogate the software and